FM3-09.21 TABLE OF CONTENTS

RDL

Homepage

Document

Information

Download

Instructions

*FM 3-09.21 (FM 6-20-1)

Field Manual

No. 3-09.21

Headquarters

Department of the Army

Washington, DC, 22 March 2001

FM 3-09.21

TACTICS, TECHNIQUES, 

AND PROCEDURES FOR 

THE FIELD ARTILLERY 

BATTALION

Table of Contents

PREFACE

Chapter 1 TASKS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Section I —Tasks and FA Organization for Combat

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/toc.htm (1 of 12) [1/7/2002 1:37:59 PM]
FM3-09.21 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Tasks

FA Organization for Combat

Section II — Responsibilities of Key Personnel

Command Section

Battalion Operations Section

Battalion Intelligence Section

Battalion Fire Direction Center

Battalion Ammunition Officer

Fire Support Elements

Liaison Officer

Radar Section Leader

Chapter 2 COMMAND POST OPERATIONS

Section I — The FA Battalion Command Post

CP Composition

Section II — TOC Organization

TOC Organization

TOC Battle Staff Organization

Section III — TOC Configurations

Towed Cannon Battalion TOC Layout (Example)

SP Cannon Battalion TOC Layout (Example)

MLRS Battalion TOC Layout (Example)

TOC Equipment

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/toc.htm (2 of 12) [1/7/2002 1:37:59 PM]
FM3-09.21 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section IV — TOC Information Management

Management of Tactical Information

Information Management Tools

Section V — CP Positioning and Movement

CP Positioning Considerations

Jump TOC Considerations

CP Movement Techniques

Section VI — Liaison Operations

Liaison Organization

Responsibilities

Example LNO Checklist

Example Outline of a LNO's Handbook/TSOP

Chapter 3 COMMAND and CONTROL

Section I — General Communications Information

Communications Responsibilities

Battalion S6 Section Responsibilities

Planning Considerations

Section II — Command and Control Systems

Army Battle Command Systems

FA Tactical Data Systems

Automation Considerations

Section III — Radio Communications Systems

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/toc.htm (3 of 12) [1/7/2002 1:37:59 PM]
FM3-09.21 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Combat Net Radios

FA Battalion Radio Nets

Direct Support Mission

Reinforcing Mission

General Support Reinforcing Mission

General Support Mission

Chapter 4 THE FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION PLANNING PROCESS

Section I — The Military Decision-Making Process

Receive The Mission / Mission Analysis

COA Development

Courses of Action Analysis (Wargame)

COA Comparison

COA Approval

FSP / FASP Production

Summary

Section II — FA Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield

Steps In FA IPB Process

Section III — FA Battalion Rehearsals

Rehearsal Principles

Rehearsal Types

Rehearsal Techniques

Scripting the Rehearsal

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/toc.htm (4 of 12) [1/7/2002 1:37:59 PM]
FM3-09.21 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Conducting A Rehearsal

Scheduling Rehearsals

FA Battalion Rehearsals

Chapter 5 DELIVER FIRES

Section I — Fire Mission Processing

Fire Mission Requests

Tactical Fire Direction

Technical Fire Direction

Massed Fires

Continuity of Operations

Section II — FA Fire Missions

Improved Conventional Munitions (ICM)

Illumination

Smoke/White Phosphorous (WP)

SCATMINE

Copperhead

Danger Close

Section III — Counterfire

Responsibilities

Counterfire Considerations

Radar Management

Wargaming

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/toc.htm (5 of 12) [1/7/2002 1:37:59 PM]
FM3-09.21 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Rehearsing Counterfire

Counterfire Drill

Theater Missile Defense

Section IV — Suppression of Enemy Air Defenses

Considerations

Section V — Meteorology

Joint/Combined Met Considerations

Basic Met Guidance

Chapter 6 MOVEMENT AND POSITIONING CONSIDERATIONS

Section I — Terrain Management

Position Coordination

Movement Coordination

Section II — Positioning

Position Area Selection Considerations

Types of Position Areas

Occupation of Built-Up Areas

Reconnaissance

Section III — Movement

Movement Techniques

Movement Considerations

Displacement Techniques

Movement Control Measures

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/toc.htm (6 of 12) [1/7/2002 1:37:59 PM]
FM3-09.21 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Movement Planning

Section IV — Survey

Survey Planning Factors

Section V — Deployment

Deployment Readiness

Deployment

Chapter 7 COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT

Section I — Organization and Functions

Section Responsibilities

FA Battalion CSS

FA Battalion Trains

Section II — Planning

CSS Planning Process

Planning for Changing Missions

Special CSS Planning Considerations

Section III — Logistical Support

Supply

Maintenance

Field Services

Section IV — Personnel and Health Services Support

Personnel and Administrative Services

Chaplain Activities

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/toc.htm (7 of 12) [1/7/2002 1:37:59 PM]
FM3-09.21 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Health Services Support

Prisoners of War

Section V — Reconstitution

Reorganization

Regeneration

Weapon System Replacement Operations

Chapter 8 FA OPERATIONS

Section I — Common FA Considerations

Deploy/Conduct Maneuver

Develop Intelligence

Employ Fires

Perform Logistics and CSS

Exercise C2

Protect the Force

Section II — FA Support of Offensive Operations

Basic FA Tasks in the Offense

Forms of Maneuver

Movement to Contact/Search and Attack

Attacks

Exploitation

Pursuit

Reserves

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/toc.htm (8 of 12) [1/7/2002 1:37:59 PM]
FM3-09.21 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section III — FA Support of Defensive Operations

Organization of the Defensive Battlefield

Basic FA Tasks in the Defense

Mobile Defense

Area Defense

Retrograde Operations

Additional FA Considerations for Defensive Operations

Section IV — FA Support of Other Tactical Operations

Amphibious Operations 

Air Assault Operations

Airborne Operations

Military Operations in Urban Terrain

Encircled Forces

Passage of Lines

Relief in Place

River Crossing Operations

Security Operations

Rear Area Operations

Linkup Operations

Breaching Operations

Artillery Raid Operations

Section V — FA Support of Stability Operations and Support Operations

Stability Operations

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/toc.htm (9 of 12) [1/7/2002 1:37:59 PM]
FM3-09.21 TABLE OF CONTENTS

FA Support of Stability Operations

Support Operations

FA Support of Support Operations

Section VI — Climate and Terrain Considerations

Night Operations

Cold Weather Operations

Desert Operations

Jungle Operations

Mountain Operations

Appendix A FIELD ARTILLERY SUPPORT PLAN

Section I — Field Artillery Support Plan Format

FASP Outline

Survey Tab to the FASP

Automation Tab to the FASP

Target Acquisition Tab to the FASP

Artillery Intelligence Tab to the FASP

Administrative-Logistics Tab to the FASP

FA Support Matrix Tab to the FASP

Section II — Example Field Artillery Support Plan

FASP — Body (Example)

Example Field Artillery Support Matrix (Tab)

Example Positioning Overlay (Tab)

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/toc.htm (10 of 12) [1/7/2002 1:37:59 PM]
FM3-09.21 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Example Target Acquisition Tab

Example Radar Deployment Order (Enclosure to Tab)

Example Capabilities Overlay (Enclosure to Tab)

Example Survey Plan

Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

Section I — Manual Target Data Processing

Recording Target Information

Recording Targeting Information (Graphics)

Battle Damage Assessment

Purging Targets

Section II — Manual Scheduling of Fires

Planning Fires

MLRS Fire Planning

Appendix C ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS

Section I — Army Environmental Awareness

General Policy Statements

Section II — FA Battalion Environmental Considerations

Field Activities

Munitions

Hazardous Material and Hazardous Waste

Maintenance

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/toc.htm (11 of 12) [1/7/2002 1:37:59 PM]
FM3-09.21 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Supply

Spill Response

Section III — Regulatory Requirements

Laws and Regulations

Regulatory Training Requirements

Environmental Compliance Officer Responsibilities

Section IV — Environmental Risk Management

Environmental Risk Management

The Five-Step Process

GLOSSARY

BIBLIOGRAPHY

AUTHENTICATION

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release: distribution is unlimited.

*This publication supersedes FM 6-20-1, 25 November 1990.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/toc.htm (12 of 12) [1/7/2002 1:37:59 PM]
FM3-09.21 Preface

RDL

Homepage

Table of

Contents

Document

Information

Download

Instructions

Preface

This field manual (FM) provides tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) for the 

commander and staff in field artillery (FA) battalions. It is intended as a general "how to" 

manual to assist in force standardization with sufficient flexibility to adapt to local 

conditions as reflected in unit tactical standing operating procedures (TSOP).

The publication sets forth doctrine pertaining to organization, command and control (C2), 

operations, and TTP for the FA battalions. It establishes responsibilities and general duties 

of key personnel by focusing on how an FA battalion supports the full spectrum of military 

operations.

It keys the battalion commander and staff to areas that must receive training emphasis in 

order to provide effective FA support. The specifics of how to train are outlined in soldiers' 

manuals and Army training and evaluation program (ARTEP) mission training plans 

(MTPs).

This manual applies to United States (US) Army and US Marine Corps (USMC) FA 

battalions assigned to the active, reserve, and National Guard (NG) forces. Unit 

organizations described in this publication reflect, in general overview, the L/A/F-series 

Department of the Army (DA) tables of organization and equipment (TOEs). Full 

consideration is given to recent and planned force structure changes and emerging 

technological opportunities — as of the date of publication.

The publication broadly describes how the FA battalion operates to support the combined 

arms team using available Field Artillery Tactical Data Systems (FATDS), and other 

automated C2 systems.

This FM addresses combat operations in support of both heavy and light maneuver forces, 

as well as stability operations and support operations and FA (support) operations in 

special environments. It is not a stand-alone document; but should be used in conjunction 

with maneuver and other FA doctrinal manuals.

The manual focuses on FA battalions performing the missions of direct support (DS) or 

general support (GS) to maneuver forces, as well as FA units providing reinforcing (R) or 

general support reinforcing (GSR) fires to other FA units in support of force operations.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/pref.htm (1 of 2) [1/7/2002 1:38:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Preface

This publication implements all applicable North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) 

standardization agreements (STANAGs) (see the bibliography for a complete listing). 

The proponent for this manual is the Commandant, US Army Field Artillery School. 

Submit changes for improving this publication on DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes 

to Publications and Blank Forms). Please key your comments and recommendations to the 

page, paragraph, and line numbers to which they apply. If DA Form 2028 is not available, 

a letter is acceptable. Provide reasons for your comments to ensure complete 

understanding and proper evaluation.

Unless this publication states otherwise, masculine nouns or pronouns do not exclusively 

pertain to men.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/pref.htm (2 of 2) [1/7/2002 1:38:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

RDL

Homepage

Table of

Contents

Document

Information

Download

Instructions

Chapter 1

Tasks and Responsibilities

This chapter provides an overview of the tasks and responsibilities for a FA battalion. 

Section I discusses the basic tasks for a FA battalion and FA organization for combat. 

Section II outlines the responsibilities of key battalion personnel. This manual focuses on 

those TTP that are common to most FA battalions. For information unique to a specific type 

of FA battalion or battery, the reader should also refer to FM 6-50, Tactics, Techniques, and 

Procedures for the Field Artillery Cannon Battery; FM 6-60, Tactics, Techniques, and 

Procedures for Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) Operations; and FM 3-09.6, 

Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for M109A6 Howitzer (Paladin) Operations.

SECTION I — TASKS AND FA ORGANIZATION FOR COMBAT

TASKS

1-01. In combat, the FA battalion provides indirect fire support (FS) to maneuver forces on 

the battlefield. To do this, it must perform six basic tasks:

● Deploy/Conduct Maneuver

● Develop Intelligence

● Employ Fires

● Perform Combat Service Support (CSS) and Sustainment

● Exercise C2

● Protect the Force

1-02. These six tasks form a starting point in identifying all of the responsibilities that a FA 

battalion has as part of a combined arms force. Units receive additional responsibilities 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (1 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

during the organization for combat process.

FA ORGANIZATION FOR COMBAT

1-03. A FA battalion’s basic C2 guidelines and responsibilities are established by its 

organization for combat. FA organization for combat is a two-step process involving the 

establishment of a command relationship and the assignment of a FA tactical mission. While 

FA organization for combat is usually a division or corps level process, FA battalion 

commanders and staffs should have a thorough knowledge of the principles of the process, 

and most especially, the implications for the battalion of the various command relationships 

and FA tactical missions.

1-04. This section provides an overview on FA organization for combat from a FA 

battalion perspective. Detailed information on organizing FA for combat is contained in FM 

6-20-2, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Corps Artillery, Division Artillery, and 

Field Artillery Brigade Operations.

COMMAND RELATIONSHIPS

1-05. The first step in organizing FA for combat is the establishment of a command 

relationship with a senior headquarters (HQ). This relationship is normally established with 

a FA HQ, such as a division artillery (DIVARTY), corps artillery (Corps Arty), or FA 

brigade. However, it can be established with a maneuver HQ. C2 ensures that FA 

contributes total, responsive FS that adequately supports the mission. The most common C2 

relationships between a FA battalion and another unit are: organic, assigned, attached, or 

operational control (OPCON).

Organic

1-06. This relationship is the most permanent type of C2 relationship between an element 

and a military organization. Normally, this is done at the Department of Defense (DOD) or 

DA level and is shown in the unit TOE or modified TOE (MTOE). An example is a 

Firefinder radar (AN/TPQ-36) section organic to a 105 millimeter (mm) cannon battalion in 

an infantry division.

Assigned

1-07. This relationship places units or personnel in an organization on a relatively 

permanent basis. The gaining organization controls, administers, and provides logistical 

support to the assigned unit or personnel. Assignment is normally a DOD or DA level action 

done as part of the strategic tailoring process. An example is an FA battalion assigned to a 

division.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (2 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

Attached

1-08. Attachment temporarily places units or personnel under the C2 of another 

organization. Subject to limitations imposed by the attachment order, the commander of the 

gaining unit receiving the attachment exercises the same degree of C2 over the attached unit 

as he does over organic units. The parent unit, however, retains the responsibility for 

transfer and promotion of personnel. The attachment order should clearly state the 

administrative and support responsibilities of the gaining unit to the attached unit. 

Attachment is frequently used as part of the tactical tailoring process at corps and below. An 

example is a corps FA battalion attached to a division (normally with subsequent 

attachment, by the division commander, to the DIVARTY).

Operational Control

1-09. OPCON is the authority delegated to a commander to direct forces assigned so that 

he may:

● Accomplish specific missions or tasks usually limited by function, time, or location.

● Deploy units concerned.

● Retain or assign tactical control of those units.

1-10. OPCON does not, of itself, include administrative or logistical control or 

responsibility. Normally, OPCON is not a command relationship given to FA units. FA 

tactical missions perform the same function yet more precisely define the relationship with 

the supported command.

Joint and NATO Considerations

1-11. If the FA battalion is operating as part of a joint (multi-service) or combined (multinational) operation, battalion commanders may encounter several other command 

relationship terms: combatant command (COCOM), operational command (OPCOM), 

tactical control (TACON), and support. Detailed information on these command relationship 

terms can be found in FM 101-5-1, Operational Terms and Graphics; Joint Publication (JP) 

1-02, DOD Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms; JP 3-0, Doctrine for Joint 

Operations; and JP 0-2, Unified Action Armed Forces (UNAAF).

1-12. Commanders also need to understand that some of the command relationship terms 

used have slightly different definitions within NATO than within DOD. As an example, in 

NATO, OPCON does not include authority to assign separate employment of components of 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (3 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

the units concerned. (The NATO definition of OPCON more closely represents the DOD 

definition of TACON.) During joint and combined operations, FA battalion commanders 

should verify the definitions of operational terms through review of applicable publications 

or with inquiries to higher HQ.

FA TACTICAL MISSIONS

1-13. Once command relationships are established, the force commander assigns the FA 

tactical missions. He bases his assignments on the advice of the force artillery commander, 

who is the FS coordinator (FSCOORD) for the force. (For details on the duties and 

responsibilities of the FSCOORD, refer to FM 6-20, Doctrine for Fire Support; FM 6-20-

30, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Division Operations; FM 6-20-

40, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Brigade Operations; and FM 6-71, Tactics, 

Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for the Combined Arms Commander.)

1-14. An assigned FA tactical mission may be one of four standard FA tactical missions or 

a nonstandard FA tactical mission. The four standard FA tactical missions are DS, R, GSR, 

and GS. Nonstandard FA tactical missions are developed when none of these standard 

missions sufficiently addresses FA tactical requirements and/or responsibilities.

1-15. A FA tactical mission describes in detail the support responsibilities of a FA unit. 

The mission also clearly defines the relationship of the FA unit with a maneuver unit or 

another FA unit. It does not affect the organizational structure or the command relationships 

that result from that structure. Each standard FA tactical mission contains several inherent 

responsibilities (see Table 1-1). Nonstandard FA tactical missions usually address changes 

that are needed in these responsibilities or additional responsibilities not addressed by the 

standard missions.

Table 1-1. Inherent Responsibilities of Standard FA Tactical Missions

INHERENT RESPONSIBILITIES OF STANDARD FIELD ARTILLERY TACTICAL 

MISSIONS

AN FA UNIT 

WITH A 

MISSION OF

DIRECT 

SUPPORT

REINFORCING GENERAL 

SUPPORT 

REINFORCING

GENERAL 

SUPPORT

Answers calls for 

fire in priority 

from -

1. Supported Unit

2. Own observers1

3. Force FA HQ

1. Reinforced FA

2. Own observers1

3. Force FA HQ

1. Force FA HQ

2. Reinforced unit1

3. Own observers1

1. Force FA HQ

2. Own observers1

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (4 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

Has as its zone of 

fire -

Zone of action of 

Supported Unit

Zone of fire of 

reinforced FA unit

Zone of action of 

Supported Unit to 

include zone of 

fire of reinforced 

FA unit

Zone of action of 

Supported Unit

Furnishes FS 

personnel2 -

Provides 

temporary 

replacements for 

casualty losses as 

required

No requirement No requirement No requirement

Furnishes liaison 

to -

No requirement Reinforced FA 

unit HQ

Reinforced FA 

unit HQ

No requirement

Establishes 

communication

With -

Company FS 

officers and 

supported 

maneuver unit HQ

Reinforced FA 

unit HQ

Reinforced FA 

unit HQ

No requirement

Is positioned by- DS FA unit 

commander or as 

ordered by force 

FA HQ

Reinforced FA 

unit or as ordered 

by force FA HQ

Force FA HQ or 

reinforced FA unit 

if approved by 

force FA HQ

Force FA HQ

Has its fires 

planned by -

Develops own fire 

plan

Reinforced FA 

unit HQ

Force FA HQ Force FA HQ

1Includes all target acquisition (TA) means not deployed with Supported Unit (radar, aerial observers, 

survey parties, and so on).

2A FS element (FSE) for each maneuver brigade, battalion, or cavalry (cav) squadron and one FS team 

(FIST) with each maneuver company or ground cavalry troop are trained and deployed by the FA unit 

authorized these assets. USMC artillery battalions, upon deployment, provide forward observer (FO) 

teams to each company-sized maneuver unit. After deployment, FISTs, and FSEs remain with the 

supported maneuver unit throughout the conflict.

Direct Support

1-16. The DS mission is used to provide responsive FA fires to a particular maneuver unit. 

A FA battalion operating in DS of a maneuver unit is primarily concerned with the FA 

support needs of only that maneuver unit. The DS battalion commander is the FSCOORD 

for the supported maneuver force. Fires are planned and coordinated with the maneuver unit 

and the DS battalion commander positions his units where they can best support the scheme 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (5 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

of maneuver. Because of this, a DS FA battalion’s planning process and operations are 

significantly integrated with their counterparts in the supported maneuver unit. To best 

achieve the required coordination and training, the same FA battalion should habitually 

support the same maneuver force. DS is the most decentralized standard FA tactical mission.

Reinforcing

1-17. Commanders use the reinforcing mission to add weight (fires) to a specific area or 

maneuver unit by designating one or more FA units to augment the fires of another FA unit. 

A FA battalion will generally reinforce a FA battalion (or possibly a FA brigade) that has a 

DS mission. A reinforcing FA battalion can reinforce only one FA unit, but a reinforced 

battalion can be reinforced by more than one FA unit.

General Support

1-18. A FA battalion assigned the mission of GS supports the maneuver force as a whole 

and remains under the immediate control of the force artillery HQ. This mission ensures 

artillery is immediately responsive to the needs of the maneuver force commander. Like the 

DS mission, the GS mission establishes a relationship between a FA unit and a maneuver 

unit. It is the most centralized of the standard FA tactical missions.

General Support Reinforcing

1-19. The GSR mission requires the FA battalion to furnish FA fires for the maneuver 

force as a whole and to reinforce the fires of another FA battalion as a second priority. A 

GSR battalion remains under the control of the force FA HQ. The GSR mission gives the 

maneuver force commander the flexibility to respond to a variety of tactical situations.

Nonstandard FA Tactical Missions

1-20. If an unusual tactical situation exists, or none of the standard FA tactical missions 

accurately convey the maneuver commander’s guidance for fires, he assigns a nonstandard 

FA tactical mission to the FA unit. A nonstandard FA tactical mission may amplify, limit, or 

change one or more of the seven inherent responsibilities, or it may spell out contingencies 

not covered by those responsibilities. If the revision is so complex that the standard FA 

mission is no longer recognizable, a nonstandard mission statement will address each of the 

seven inherent responsibilities.

1-21. Units sometimes use a nonstandard mission when there are not sufficient FA assets to 

cover all the contingencies or if a FA battalion is assigned more than one functional mission. 

It is also a means by which the commander can tailor his FA assets in anticipation of future 

operations. A nonstandard mission may involve limitations or guidance concerning 

ammunition, positioning, or other critical factors.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (6 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

EXAMPLES OF NONSTANDARD FA TACTICAL MISSIONS

1-50 FA (155SP, M109A6): GSR 1-20 FA; do not exceed 50 percent of CSR in support of 1-20 FA.

1-89 FA (MLRS, M270A1): GS; provide liaison officer to DIVARTY TOC.

SP = self-propelled, CSR = controlled supply rate, TOC = tactical operations center

On-Order (o/o) FA Tactical Missions

1-22. During the course of a major operation, a FA battalion may change tactical missions. 

The assignment of an o/o FA tactical mission, in addition to its initial mission, gives the 

battalion advance notice of the future mission. This facilitates planning for and transition to 

the follow-on mission. Positioning, ammunition requirements, and timing of the mission 

change are several of the key considerations for battalions that have an o/o mission. An o/o 

mission is usually stated in the maneuver operations order/FS plan (FSP) and/or the FA 

support plan (FASP).

EXAMPLES OF O/O FA TACTICAL MISSIONS

1-50 FA (155SP, M109A5): R 1-20 FA (do not exceed 25% CSR is support of 1-20 FA); o/o DS 3 Bde.

1-89 FA (155SP, M109A6): DS 1-23 Cav (division security force); after completing rearward passage, 

o/o GS 52 Infantry Div (Mechanized).

Div = division

Dedicated Battery

1-23. In special circumstances where immediately responsive fires are required, and/or the 

supported maneuver unit is operating independently or at an excessive distance from its 

parent unit, a dedicated battery can be established. "Dedicated battery" describes both a 

nonstandard tactical mission and informal support relationship whereby a battery-sized FA 

unit assumes responsibility for fulfilling a modified prioritized list of inherent 

responsibilities towards a battalion-sized maneuver unit. Establishing a dedicated battery is 

recommended by the FSCOORD and approved by the maneuver (normally brigade) 

commander.

1-24. A dedicated battery establishes communications with and responds to calls for fire 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (7 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

from a specified maneuver force (usually a battalion task force) as its first priority (see 

Table 1-2). The battery will plot fires on the targets planned by the TF FSO. The artillery 

battalion will also plot these fires in case additional support is required. Close coordination 

between the supported maneuver unit and the dedicated battery is required. The battery 

commander must fully understand the maneuver battalion commander’s intent and scheme 

of maneuver and should attend all maneuver rehearsals. Likely enemy locations and 

composition must be identified. Munitions for engaging the probable enemy targets must be 

identified. When not firing missions, the guns of the dedicated battery will be laid on the 

firing data for the next planned target identified by the maneuver unit. Subordinate unit 

leaders (company, platoon, and even squad) must understand the fire plan and be able to 

request and adjust fires. Intervention rules for FATDS systems will allow maximum 

responsiveness while providing safety from fratricide.

Table 1-2. Inherent Responsibilities of a Dedicated Battery

1-25. The circumstances and situations that call for the proper use of a dedicated battery are 

highly specific. A dedicated battery may be used to provide support to the lead battalion task 

force in a brigade or larger movement to contact when responsive vice massed fires is 

critical. The location of enemy forces is either unknown or suspect. The chance of 

unanticipated enemy fires (e.g. ambush) must be high. ROE must be very permissible. A 

dedicated battery is not the normal condition while providing fires to maneuver forces. The 

extensive use of dedicated batteries reduces the ability of the FA battalion to mass its fires 

on the targets that meet the brigade commander’s intent and must be weighed against the 

capability to execute the other EFATs assigned. In order to permit continuous coverage for a 

moving battalion task force, the FA battalion may be forced to use several batteries. In this 

case, the remaining battalions of the brigade will have to rely on their organic mortars as 

their first choice for indirect fires against targets of opportunity.

FA Tactical Missions in Combined Operations

1-26. As stated, each of the standard FA tactical missions has specific inherent 

responsibilities. However, these tactical missions and responsibilities are not viewed the 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (8 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

same by the armies of nations with which the US may operate. These differences must be 

identified and understood whenever FA battalions are involved in combined operations. A 

FA battalion commander may be required to operate in an environment covered by bilateral 

agreements. In this environment, the operation order (OPORD) will be his guide for bilateral 

operations. The US and its NATO allies have agreed to the terms of STANAG 2934, 

Artillery Procedures, with changes. When they are supporting allied troops or working with 

allied artillery, FA battalion commanders must know the responsibilities included in these 

agreements as viewed by other nations (see Table 1-3 for responsibilities in a NATO or 

Australia, Britain, Canada, America (ABCA) environment).

Table 1-3. Inherent Responsibilities of FA Tactical Missions - (NATO and ABCA)

INHERENT RESPONSIBILITIES OF FIELD ARTILLERY TACTICAL MISSIONS (NATO 

and ABCA)

AN FA UNIT 

WITH A 

MISSION OF

DIRECT 

SUPPORT

REINFORCING GENERAL 

SUPPORT 

REINFORCING

GENERAL 

SUPPORT

Answers calls for 

fire in priority 

from -

1. Directly 

supported 

formation/unit

2. Own observers

3. Force FA HQ1

1. Reinforced 

artillery unit

2. Own observers

3. Force FA HQ1

1. Force FA HQ1

2. Reinforced 

artillery unit

3. Own observers3

1. Force FA 

HQ1

2. Own 

observers

Has as its zone of 

fire -

Zone of action of 

the directly 

supported 

formation/unit4

Zone of fire of 

reinforced FA unit 

or zone prescribed

Zone of action of the 

supported 

formation/unit to 

include zone of fire 

of the reinforced FA 

unit

Zone of action 

of the supported 

formation/unit 

or zone 

prescribed

Furnishes FS 

personnel -

Each maneuver 

company of the 

directly supported 

formation/unit

Upon a request of 

reinforced FA unit2

Reinforced FA unit 

if approved by force 

FA HQ1, 2, 3

No inherent 

requirement

Establishes 

liaison with -

Directly 

supported 

formation or unit 

(battalion, 

regiment and 

brigade)

Reinforced FA unit Reinforced FA unit No inherent 

requirement

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (9 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

Establishes 

communication 

withThe directly 

supported 

maneuver 

formation/unit

Reinforced FA unit Reinforced FA unit No inherent 

requirement

Weapons moved 

and deployed by -

DS FA unit 

commander or as 

ordered by force 

FA HQ1

Reinforced FA unit 

or ordered by force 

FA HQ1

Force FA HQ1 or 

reinforced FA unit if 

approved by force 

FA HQ1

Force FA HQ1

Has its fires 

planned by -

Develops own 

fire plans in 

coordination with 

directly supported 

formation/unit

Reinforced FA unit Force FA HQ1or as 

otherwise specified3

Force FA HQ1

1 Force artillery HQ or higher authority HQ.

2 Applies also to the provision of liaison officers (LNOs).

3 Italy, in GSR, does not answer calls for fire from own observers, does not furnish FO, and has its fire 

planned by the HQ of the artillery-unit which receives the GSR.

4 Netherlands FA in DS will not furnish FOs and/or FS officers (FSOs) since these elements are part of 

the maneuver units. United Kingdom (UK) artillery is not established (organized) to provide all 

maneuver companies of the directly Supported Unit/formation with a FO.

SECTION II — RESPONSIBILITIES OF KEY PERSONNEL

1-27. The activities of the FA battalion are supervised by a number of key personnel in 

addition to the battalion commander, the command sergeant major (CSM), and the executive 

officer (XO). These include primary staff officers such as the S1 (personnel officer), S2 

(intelligence officer), S3 (operations officer), S4 (logistics officer), and S6 (communications 

and electronics staff officer [CESO]). The chaplain is a member of the personal staff.

1-28. Special staff officers include the fire direction officer (FDO), targeting officer, 

chemical officer, physician’s assistant, battalion maintenance officer (BMO), battalion 

ammunition officer (BAO) (or support platoon leader [SPL]), and, in some battalions, the 

brigade and battalion FSOs and LNO.

1-29. The duties of each of these personnel are briefly discussed below. Additional 

information on battalion staff organization and the duties of staff personnel can be found in 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (10 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

FM 101-5, Staff Organization and Operations.

COMMAND SECTION

BATTALION COMMANDER

1-30. The battalion commander, aided by the battalion staff and the battery commanders, 

controls all the tactical, logistical, administrative, and training activities of the battalion. He 

directs employment of the battalion in accordance with assigned missions, guidance from 

the force FA HQ, and in the DS role, the supported maneuver force. He works closely with 

the commanders of supported and supporting units to ensure that the battalion can 

accomplish its mission. Specific responsibilities include:

● Oversee the training of the entire battalion, with particular emphasis on those 

elements directly concerned with delivery of fires and FS.

● Continually assess the needs of the battalion in terms of its ability to sustain its 

internal operations and to support assigned missions.

● Establish clear and consistent standards and guidance for current and future 

operations. Ensure the battalion staff and battery commanders understand the 

battalion commander’s intent.

● Establish policies to promote discipline and morale within the battalion.

● Provide for the administrative and logistical support of the battalion.

● In a DS mission, perform FSCOORD duties

■ Advise the supported maneuver commander on all FS matters.

■ Direct and supervise the planning and coordination of all FS assets supporting 

the maneuver unit, to include FSEs and FISTs.

■ Coordinate/control the operations and/or fires of R/GSR FA units.

■ Direct and supervise preparation of the FSP and the FASP as documents in 

support of the maneuver plan. 

■ See FM 6-20-40 for additional discussion on the FSCOORD responsibilities 

of the DS FA battalion commander.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (11 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

COMMAND SERGEANT MAJOR

1-31. The battalion CSM is the senior enlisted advisor to the commander. He is both a 

specialist and a generalist, as he must have technical competence as a field artilleryman 

while being broadly knowledgeable in all functional areas such as operations, 

administration, and logistics. The CSM best serves as an extension of the commander’s eyes 

and as his primary troubleshooter. He works closely with each of the battalion staff sections 

and the firing battery leaders, frequently changing his area of focus based on the needs of 

the unit and the direction of the commander.

1-32. The CSM usually operates independently of but complementary to the commander, 

frequently at a critical location where the commander needs additional supervision, 

oversight, or observation. Because of this, the CSM requires his own vehicle, radio, and 

driver. The CSM’s duties include:

● Assist the commander in maintaining effective communication with senior and 

subordinate leaders and staffs.

● Validate that the commander’s directions and intent are being properly 

communicated through the leadership chain to the front line soldiers and that their 

feedback and concerns are reaching the commander.

● Advise the commander and staff on all matters pertaining to enlisted soldiers.

● Assist the S3 in planning, coordinating, and supervising collective and individual 

training to include certification requirements.

● Mentor unit first sergeants (1SGs) and noncommissioned officers (NCOs), supervise 

and direct NCO professional development, identify and develop future leaders from 

within the enlisted ranks.

EXECUTIVE OFFICER

1-33. As second in command and chief of staff, the XO must keep fully abreast of current 

and anticipated operations. He must be prepared to assume the duties of the commander 

when the need arises. He must position himself forward, traveling between the battalion 

command post (CP), the batteries, and the battalion trains area to perform his duties. Key 

duties in addition to those in FM 101-5, include:

● Direct, supervise, and coordinate all staff actions and operations, to include the 

battalion’s military decision-making process (MDMP), especially production of the 

FASP, and, when applicable, battalion staff involvement in the FSP.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (12 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

● Supervise and direct all CSS efforts within the battalion, to include development of 

the battalion’s trains concept and CSS plan. 

● Direct and supervise operations of the administration and logistics operations center 

(ALOC) and battalion support operations center (BSOC).

● Perform face-to-face contact with his counterparts on the maneuver, DIVARTY, 

Corps Arty, or FA brigade staff as required.

● Direct and supervise development of continuity of operations (CONOPS) plans for 

the CP, the various operations centers, and each staff section.

● Direct and supervise development of mutual support unit (MSU) operations, as 

necessary or as directed, with another FA unit.

● In the battalion commander’s absence, enforce the commander’s standards 

throughout the unit.

1-34. The battalion commander decides which function the XO will give his primary focus 

at any given time. This decision is based on the immediate requirements of the battalion and 

the overall tactical situation. Changing situations will require periodic changes in the XO’s 

focus. The XO must recognize his primary function is to understand the battalion 

commander’s intent and that he is normally the senior officer at the battalion responsible for 

executing that intent. When he is functioning primarily as second in command, one or more 

of the primary staff officers (often the S4) assumes a major portion of the functions of senior 

logistics coordinator. When the XO concerns himself primarily with the logistics support of 

the battalion, the S3 assumes a greater portion of the commander’s duties in the battalion 

area.

S1 (PERSONNEL OFFICER)

1-35. The S1 plans, directs, and supervises the personnel, administrative, and health 

services for the battalion. He supervises the battalion personnel administration center (PAC) 

and serves as a shift leader in the ALOC or the BSOC. In addition to those listed in FM 101-

5, the S1’s duties include the following:

● Advise the commander and staff on all S1 areas, to include:

■ Strength accounting and replacement operations.

■ Casualty reporting.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (13 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

■ Coordination of legal services.

■ Finance and postal services.

■ Administrative procedures and services.

■ Enemy prisoners of war (EPW) planning and coordination.

■ Health services.

■ Awards and evaluations.

■ Morale support activities.

● Recommend personnel priorities and employment of S1 assets that support the 

commander’s intent and mission accomplishment.

● Prepare personnel/medical estimates and plans. In conjunction with the S4, prepare 

paragraph 4 of the FASP and the CSS plan/tab.

● In conjunction with the S4, establish and maintain the ALOC and BSOC. Supervise 

operations of the BSOC (if one is established — see Chapters 2 and 7 for additional 

ALOC/BSOC information).

● Ensure the S1 section and, when applicable, the BSOC establish and maintain 

situational awareness — of the general situation, FA battalion operations, and CSS, 

especially personnel/medical.

● Review the battalion’s essential FA tasks (EFATs) for critical personnel, medical, 

and EPW requirements (e.g, personnel cross-leveling to achieve necessary strength, 

experience levels, or a particular skill in a battery or section).

S2 (INTELLIGENCE OFFICER)

1-36. The S2 performs a wide variety of tasks concerning intelligence, targeting, and force 

protection. In addition, he helps the S3 supervise the TOC operation. In addition to those 

listed in FM 101-5, the S2’s duties include the following:

● Supervise the intelligence section.

● Develop artillery intelligence preparation of the battlefield (IPB) in conjunction with 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (14 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

other staff elements and the senior FA HQ, with the supported maneuver S2 (DS 

units), and the S2 for any supporting/supported FA units.

● Develop enemy artillery order of battle and monitor tactics and techniques of enemy 

artillery, mortars, and TA assets.

● Predict artillery target locations and pass predicted locations to a fire control facility 

(FSE or fire direction center [FDC]), targeting cell, or weapon platform as 

appropriate.

● Provide survivability and mobility information to the battalion S3.

● In conjunction with the S6, assess the enemy’s capability to interfere with signal 

communications and supervise the counterintelligence aspects of signal operations 

within the battalion.

● Recommend commander’s critical information requirements (CCIR), especially 

priority intelligence requirements (PIR), related to the primary mission, tasks, and 

role of the battalion.

● Prepare intelligence estimates and portions of the FASP (the enemy situation portion 

(paragraph la) and the TA tab), with the assistance of the targeting officer and the 

radar section leader. This includes the radar deployment order (RDO) when 

applicable.

● In coordination with maneuver and FA S2s, as appropriate, organize and supervise an 

aggressive collection effort designed to answer PIR.

● Advise and assist the S3 in positioning, tasking, and supervising organic/attached TA 

assets, and coordinating survey for TA assets.

● Assist the S3 in managing the counterfire fight.

■ Develop and collect the intelligence and TA data necessary to support 

counterfire operations.

■ Recommend radar employment, positions, decision points for cueing and 

moving the radar, cueing schedules, and radar zones.

■ Template potential enemy locations, determine enemy-to-friendly FA force 

ratios, evaluate enemy FA/TA capabilities and tactics, and advise the FA 

battalion and maneuver commanders on the enemy indirect fire and 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (15 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

counterfire threats.

■ Ensure IPB analysis includes evaluation of the role and capabilities of ground, 

air, and naval forces, and possibly even satellite/space-based assets in the 

enemy’s counterfire program. 

● Ensure all subordinate and supporting units are kept informed of the enemy situation.

● Coordinate the battalion ground and air defense plans.

● Advise the commander and staff on control of classified materials.

● Request and distribute maps (paper/digital), as required.

S3 (OPERATIONS OFFICER)

1-37. The S3 is responsible for training, planning, and execution of battalion operations. In 

addition to those listed in FM 101-5, S3 duties include:

● Advise the FA battalion commander in these specific areas:

■ FA organization for combat and FA attack guidance.

■ Identification and development of essential FS tasks (EFSTs) and EFATs.

■ Positioning and movement of firing/TA assets, CP, ALOC, BSOC.

■ The FA operations estimate, MDMP, and the FASP.

■ Employment of organic, attached, and reinforcing firing units.

■ Employment of organic or attached radars and other TA assets.

■ Employment of organic or attached survey assets.

■ CSS priorities, in coordination with the XO, S4, and S1.

■ Rehearsal supervision.

● Supervise and direct the operations and positioning of the TOC.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (16 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

● Plan, coordinate, and control tactical movement, to include selection of positions, 

preparation of the tactical movement plan, and terrain management, for all elements 

under the battalion’s control or direction.

● Supervise and direct preparation and dissemination of the FASP, orders, and 

directives.

● Plan, supervise, and direct battalion survey operations.

● Coordinate plans with higher, subordinate and adjacent FA units.

● Ensure databases and commander’s guidances in automated C2 equipment are 

correct and properly coordinated within the battalion.

● In coordination with the S4 and BAO, plan and manage ammunition consumption, 

distribution, and resupply. Calculate ammunition requirements, basic loads, and 

required supply rates (RSRs)/CSRs.

● Integrate operations security (OPSEC) into the overall operations of the unit.

● Establish, in coordination with the S6, communications priorities.

● Direct and supervise the planning and execution of the FA battalion’s participation in 

the counterfire fight.

■ Ensure counterfire plans meet the intent and guidance of the supported 

maneuver commander and of the FA battalion and force /higher FA 

commanders, as appropriate.

■ Ensure that priorities, mission routing, clearance of fires, and attack guidances 

for counterfire within the battalion’s zone of fire are coordinated and 

understood by all members of the TOC and by the firing battery leaders.

■ In a DS role, maintain close coordination with the brigade FSE and force FA 

HQ to ensure that all of the battalion’s counterfire responsibilities are 

coordinated and that higher and Supported Unit requirements do not conflict 

or overtax the FA battalion.

■ Supervise radar management to ensure radar zone management, sector 

assignments, cueing, and positioning are properly incorporated into the 

decision support template (DST)/synchronization matrix and the TA tab to the 

FASP.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (17 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

■ Identify detailed counterfire responsibilities, to include specified and implied 

counterfire tasks, and assign counterfire responsibilities during the planning 

process.

■ Ensure counterfire ammunition requirements are addressed in overall 

ammunition requirements. Evaluate assigned CSRs to determine the impact 

on counterfire responsibilities.

■ With the S2 and FDO, evaluate force protection issues inherent in counterfire 

tasks and tactics.

● Coordinate meteorology (met) support for the battalion.

S4 (LOGISTICS OFFICER)

1-38. The S4 coordinates and manages logistical supply for the battalion. He supervises the 

battalion supply and ammunition sections, and serves as a shift leader in the ALOC. The 

S4’s duties include the following:

● Advise the commander and staff on all S4 areas, to include:

■ CSS C2 — centralized versus decentralized CSS operations.

■ Battalion trains concept and positioning (see Chapter 7).

■ Ammunition estimates, distribution, and resupply operations.

■ Refueling operations.

■ Transportation requirements and main supply route (MSR) selection and 

operation.

■ Unit movements.

● Prepare logistics estimates and plans using logistics preparation of the battlefield 

(LPB) methodology (see Chapter 7). With the S1, prepare paragraph 4 of the FASP 

and the CSS plan/tab.

● Supervise, manage, and coordinate battalion supply and sustainment operations, to 

include ammunition and refueling.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (18 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

● Distribution operations for all classes of supply except Class VIII (medical) within 

the battalion.

● Recommend logistics priorities and employment of S4 assets that support the 

commander’s intent and mission accomplishment.

● With the S1, establish and maintain the ALOC and BSOC. Supervise operations of 

the ALOC.

● Ensure the S4 section and the ALOC establish and maintain situational awareness — 

of the general situation, FA operations, and CSS.

● Plan and coordinate administrative movements.

● Review the battalion’s EFATs for critical logistical requirements (e.g, combat 

configured loads (CCLs) of ammunition, hot refuel).

S6 (COMMUNICATIONS AND ELECTRONICS STAFF OFFICER)

1-39. The S6 is responsible for communications and automation operations, management, 

and security. The S6 is a coordinating staff officer and is directly accountable to the XO. In 

addition to those listed in FM 101-5, S6 duties include the following:

● Advise the commander and staff on:

■ Selection of unit position areas (PAs), from a communications standpoint.

■ Communications and automation planning, operations, priorities, security, 

training, and rehearsals.

■ Electronic counter-counter measures (ECCM).

■ Communications and automation requirements associated with EFSTs and 

EFATs, e.g, unique communications and/or automation equipment, nets, 

database exchange, or procedures for sensor-to-shooter links or other critical 

communications.

● Plan, manage, and direct communications operations to include establishment of 

communications networks and systems and installation and maintenance of 

equipment.

■ Coordinate integration of battalion communications systems into those of a 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (19 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

supported maneuver/FA unit and a FA HQ.

■ Coordinate with signal units for communications support.

■ Supervise operator and organizational maintenance of communication 

equipment.

■ Manage all frequency allocations and assignments.

● Manage and direct communications security (COMSEC). Direct and supervise the 

battalion COMSEC custodian who issues and accounts for COMSEC equipment, key 

lists, codes, ciphers, signal operating instructions (SOI), and authentication systems.

● Plan, manage, and direct automation systems administration, maintenance, and 

security.

■ Establish automation systems administration and security procedures for 

automation hardware and software.

■ Supervise and direct battalion local area networks (LANs) configuration and 

usage of battalion network capabilities.

● Prepare communications estimates and write the signal paragraph (paragraph 4a) of 

the FASP.

● Perform communications reconnaissance and survey to assist the S3 in positioning 

key elements of the battalion, to include retransmission (retrans) stations.

BATTALION CHAPLAIN

1-40. The chaplain serves the commander as the special/personal staff officer to plan, 

synchronize, coordinate, and provide personally delivered religious support within the 

commander’s area of responsibility. He advises the commander on moral and ethical issues. 

He develops a religious support plan, conducts field services, and manages soldier welfare 

ministries. He provides counseling, as required, for all soldiers and helps maintain the 

morale and spiritual well being of all personnel. The chaplain is supported by a chaplain 

assistant who performs religious support duties and coordination for religious programs, 

worship, and crisis intervention.

BATTALION MAINTENANCE OFFICER 

1-41. The BMO advises the commanders and the XO on maintenance procedures. He 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (20 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

recommends maintenance procedures, priorities, and policies. He coordinates DS 

maintenance and manages and directs maintenance support teams. The BMO monitors and 

assists with battery level resupply of Class IX repair parts. He consolidates and forwards 

maintenance specific reports. The BMO operates from the ALOC.

BATTALION OPERATIONS SECTION

ASSISTANT S3

1-42. The assistant S3 supervises the activities of the operations section and manages the 

TOC operations in the absence of the S3. The assistant S3 constructs the FA support matrix 

(FASM) and the FA positioning overlay for the FASP. During execution, the assistant S3 

may position himself near the operations situation map and status boards. He is responsible 

for maintaining current information on the status boards; supervising the upkeep of the 

operations map and overlay; verifying target plotting on the target overlay and advising the 

S3 of any targets that violate graphical FS coordinating measures (FSCMs) or maneuver 

control measures. His focus is on positioning and ranging targets established in the FSP, 

maintaining tube strength, and coordinating ammunition resupply. He positions and moves 

organic or attached radars in conjunction with the S2 and the targeting officer.

OPERATIONS NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER

1-43. The operations NCO supervises the activities of all NCOs/enlisted soldiers in the 

TOC and assists the assistant S3 with operations functions. He performs and supervises net 

control duties for the battalion command net, maintains the staff journal and message log, 

and ensures the situation map/charts are current at all times. He also ensures the TOC 

complex is properly supplied and maintained.

BATTALION MASTER GUNNER

1-44. The battalion master gunner is the weapon system expert in the battalion. He should 

be the battalion’s most knowledgeable soldier on the unit’s primary weapon system 

(howitzer or MLRS launcher). He must be well versed on all aspects of the weapon 

(operation, maintenance, training, and record keeping) and where applicable, its supporting 

ammunition vehicle. The battalion master gunner’s duties and responsibilities are as 

follows:

● Assist the S3 and CSM in managing the battalion’s individual and crew training and 

certification program for 13B or 13M soldiers. This includes training and 

certification of officers and senior NCOs. Place special attention on the training and 

evaluation of howitzer/launcher section chiefs. Plan and conduct battalion 

certification events.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (21 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

● Assist the S3 in management of the individual and crew training and certification 

program for all military occupational specialties (MOS).

● Assist the S3 in management of the battalion artillery safety program and coordinate 

these efforts with the battalion safety officer/NCO as part of the battalion’s overall 

safety program.

● Assist the S3 and XO with maintaining maximum readiness and operational status in 

primary weapon systems. This includes crew training and maintenance issues for 

howitzers, launchers, and ammunition vehicles. Maintain close coordination with 

battalion and battery maintenance supervisors and with unit artillery mechanics.

● Assist the batteries with the management of their 13B or 13M training programs and 

with battery safety programs.

● Troubleshoot problems on the battalion’s primary weapon system and ammunition 

vehicles. This is mainly in a support role to the gunnery sergeants in the firing 

batteries.

● Assist the S3 and S1 in maintaining the most current information and training 

packages on primary weapon systems and their supporting ammunition vehicles, to 

include FMs, technical manuals (TMs), bulletins, training circulars, training support 

packages, and all other possible pertinent information. The master gunner must 

frequently check official internet sites, professional publications, and other sources of 

information for current and emerging tactics, techniques, procedures, training, and 

safety information.

● Maintain a dialogue with master gunners in other battalions to ensure rapid 

identification of new issues noted by other units.

● Assist the S3 in rapid dissemination of all critical information concerning the 

battalion’s primary weapon platform.

CHEMICAL OFFICER/NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER

1-45. The chemical officer advises the commanders and staff on nuclear, biological, and 

chemical (NBC) defensive operations, contamination, and predicted enemy strikes. He also 

writes the NBC portion of the FASP; maintains current status of decontamination sites in the 

area of operations (AO) and mission-oriented protective posture (MOPP) requirements; and 

he processes all NBC reports.

BATTALION INTELLIGENCE SECTION

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (22 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

TARGETING OFFICER

1-46. In divisional DS cannon battalions, the targeting officer is in the maneuver brigade 

FSE and assists both the brigade FSO and the maneuver S2 with targeting. He also assists 

the DS FA battalion S2 as possible. The duties for a targeting officer in a DS unit are 

outlined in FM 6-20-40.

1-47. In divisional GS FA battalions and corps level FA battalions the targeting officer is in 

the intelligence section. In addition to his targeting duties, he functions as an assistant S2. 

His duties include the following:

● Assist the S2 and S3 in target production, processing, and administration and with 

external targeting coordination.

● Assist the S2 with order of battle development and IPB.

● Help the battalion S2 write the intelligence, TA, and surveillance portions of the 

FASP, to include the RDO when applicable.

● Help plan for and manage attached, organic, and OPCON TA assets.

● Assist the battalion S2 and S3 with development and execution of the FA TA and 

counterfire plans.

● Assist the S2 in identifying CCIR.

● Supervise the intelligence section in the absence of the S2.

● Perform officer in charge (OIC) shift duties for the S2 section.

● Conducts predictive battle damage assessments (BDA) and request BDA from 

external sources/higher HQ.

INTELLIGENCE SERGEANT

1-48. The intelligence sergeant assists the S2 in the planning, supervision, and execution of 

intelligence and targeting operations. The intelligence sergeant may be a shift leader for the 

section, especially if there is no targeting officer. In DS cannon battalions, the intelligence 

sergeant may perform many of the section’s targeting functions. In Advanced Field Artillery 

Tactical Data Systems (AFATDS) units, the intelligence sergeant may also be a primary 

AFATDS operator.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (23 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

BATTALION FIRE DIRECTION CENTER

FIRE DIRECTION OFFICER

1-49. The FDO supervises tactical and technical fire direction (FD) within the battalion. On 

the basis of guidance from the battalion commander and S3, the FSCOORD and/or FSO (DS 

units), reinforced FA unit FDO (R & GSR units), and force FA HQ, the FDO decides where 

and how the battalion and any reinforcing units will fire. Specific FDO duties include:

● Supervise the FD section.

● Assist the FSCOORD in developing the commander’s criteria based on the supported 

maneuver commander’s concept for FS. (FDOs in R/GSR/GS units provide input 

through the reinforced FA unit and/or force FA HQ.)

● Develop and supervise input of appropriate parameters into the AFATDS, Initial Fire 

Support Automation System (IFSAS), Fire Direction System (FDS), or Lightweight 

Tactical Fire Direction System (LTACFIRE). Coordination of these parameters with 

FSEs, reinforcing/reinforced FA units, and force FA HQ is critical. Coordination of 

digital communications and database elements may also be required with users of 

non-FA digital C2 systems.

● Analyze requested targets for attack by FA. Consider desired effects, method of fire, 

and types of ammunition needed.

● Ensure dissemination of fire plans and schedules of fires to subordinate and 

supporting unit FDCs and to FSEs occurs as appropriate.

● Coordinate with FSEs to process requests for other types of FS.

● Maintain the current target overlay.

● Keep FA elements informed of targets.

● Establish procedures and train personnel to accomplish tactical and technical FD in a 

degraded (manual/voice) mode.

● Establish procedures for interface between AFATDS, IFSAS, FDS, or LTACFIRE 

units, as well as any other digital system with which the FDC may be required to 

interface.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (24 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

CHIEF FIRE CONTROL SERGEANT

1-50. He is the automated technical and tactical fire control expert in the battalion FDC. He 

is responsible for: establishing the tactical database in the battalion automated fire control 

system; monitoring the technical input and executions of fire plans and missions; advising 

the FDO on changes or updates to battlefield geometry and firing unit status; and crosschecking status boards with system data.

BATTALION AMMUNITION OFFICER

1-51. The BAO or SPL manages resupply of ammunition in the FA battalion. His primary 

duties include the following:

● Manage the use of the battalion’s ammunition-carrying assets.

● Manage ammunition movement from the ammunition transfer point (ATP) to the 

combat trains area and then forward to the batteries.

● Maintain accountability of ammunition.

● Ensure ammunition basic loads delivered to the batteries contain the proper mix and 

quantities of ammunition.

● Perform mission analysis to verify ammunition handling capabilities can support 

current operations. Report shortcomings to the S3.

● Manage turn-in of residue and unexpended ammunition.

FIRE SUPPORT ELEMENTS

BRIGADE FIRE SUPPORT OFFICER

1-52. The FSCOORD cannot be at the brigade HQ constantly. Therefore, he has an 

assistant, the brigade FSO, to serve as a full-time liaison between the DS FA battalion and 

the maneuver brigade. The brigade FSO’s duties and responsibilities are outlined in FM 6-

20-40.

BATTALION FIRE SUPPORT OFFICER 

1-53. The battalion FSO is the FSCOORD and principal FS advisor to the maneuver 

battalion commander. He is in charge of the battalion FSE and serves as the DS FA battalion 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (25 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

commander’s representative to the maneuver battalion commander. The battalion FSO’s 

duties and responsibilities are outlined in FM 6-20-40.

LIAISON OFFICER

1-54. A LNO assists his FA battalion in accomplishing liaison with another FA unit or, 

when necessary, any other HQ with which the battalion requires liaison. Liaison is usually 

required as an inherent responsibility of a R or GSR mission, but may also be used in any 

situation that requires extremely close coordination with another unit. A LNO is usually part 

of an organic liaison section, found in corps FA battalions and some divisional/GS 

battalions. However, when necessary, battalions without an organic liaison section 

sometimes create temporary liaison elements out of existing assets. A more detailed 

discussion of the liaison function is in Chapter 2.

1-55. Because the LNO represents his commander, he must have the commander’s full 

confidence. He should be able to: 

● Understand how his commander thinks and represent his position.

● Interpret his commander's messages.

● Convey his commander's vision, mission, and concept of operations and guidance.

1-56. The LNO’s professional capabilities and personal characteristics must encourage 

confidence and cooperation with the commander and staff of the receiving unit. He must 

possess tact and:

● Be thoroughly knowledgeable of his unit's mission and its TTP; organization; 

capabilities; and communications equipment.

● Quickly become familiar with the receiving unit's organization, capabilities, mission, 

tactics, TSOP, and staff procedures. In the case of multinational forces, the LNO 

must also understand the receiving unit’s doctrine and customs.

● Be familiar with the requirements for and the purpose of liaison; the liaison system, 

and its corresponding reports, reporting documents, and records; and the training of 

the liaison team.

● Observe the established channels of command and staff functions.

1-57. In addition to those listed in FM 101-5, the LNO’s duties may include:

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (26 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

● Facilitate the exchange of situational awareness data between the two units — 

especially friendly and enemy FA information, fire plans, target lists, CSS 

information.

● Represent the reinforcing unit during the Supported Unit’s MDMP and development 

of the FASP.

● Assist the S3 and S2 with the counterfire fight, and other missions that significantly 

involve the reinforcing unit.

● Assist the S2 with targeting and the rapid dissemination of targeting information to 

the reinforcing unit.

● Assist the S3s of both battalions in identifying EFATs and determining EFAT 

responsibilities for the reinforcing unit.

● Advise the S2 and S3 of CCIR and force protection support required by the 

reinforcing unit.

● Assist both units in development of MSU plans and CONOPS plans. Ensure MSU 

and CONOPS plans address the liaison function.

● Assist the staffs of both units in establishing and maintaining effective 

communication with their counterparts.

RADAR SECTION LEADER

1-58. In battalions that have an organic or attached radar section, the radar section leader is 

a key participant in the battalion’s planning and operations. The radar section leader, 

assisted by the radar section chief, performs the day-to-day supervision of the radar section. 

He monitors and directs the training and performance of radar personnel and supervises 

operation, maintenance, and trouble shooting of radar equipment. He also:

● Advises the FA battalion commander and his staff on radar operations.

● Participates in developing radar employment plans and orders.

● Ensures the capabilities and limitations of the radar are considered.

● Selects radar positions that support the search sector requirements of planned zones, 

optimize TA, and facilitate movement.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (27 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 1 Tasks and Responsibilities

● Identifies zone restrictions violated during planning and rehearsals.

● Coordinates, through the S3, positioning and security for the section.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch1.htm (28 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:38:08 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

RDL

Homepage

Table of

Contents

Document

Information

Download

Instructions

Chapter 2

Command Post Operations

This chapter provides the FA battalion commander and his staff guidance for effective CP 

operations. It focuses on the main CP and the TOC, and discusses liaison operations. The 

chapter is organized into six sections. Section I provides an overview of the FA battalion 

CP. Section II discusses TOC organization and responsibilities. Section III provides 

examples and suggestions for TOC configurations. Section IV provides an overview of TOC 

information management. Section V covers CP positioning and movement. Section VI

discusses liaison operations.

SECTION I — THE FA BATTALION COMMAND POST

2-01. C2 of a FA battalion is exercised through the establishment of a battalion CP and two 

to four operations centers. The TOC and the ALOC may both be part of the CP when all or 

most HQ and CSS elements are consolidated in one location. If the battalion establishes the 

trains separately, the ALOC will locate with the trains. If the battalion establishes dual 

trains, it may also establish a BSOC to control the field trains while the ALOC controls the 

combat trains. The ALOC and BSOC are discussed further in Chapter 7. The battalion may 

also form a tactical action center (TAC) to place C2 forward during high intensity, fast 

moving operations. The TAC would concentrate on the current battle, performing critical 

operations, FD, and intelligence tasks, while the TOC performed non-critical current tasks 

and planning and coordination functions. The TAC requires a vehicle that can keep up with 

the supported maneuver unit, two robust FATDS C2 systems (AFATDS or IFSAS) for 

operations and FD, and communications equipment noted in Chapter 3.

2-02. The primary C2 facility is the battalion CP. It is normally located where the battalion 

can best command and control all assets and influence FA and other FS systems in support 

of force operations. With the fielding of increasingly capable digital C2 systems, the 

battalion can establish limited CP operations at various locations, e.g, on the move operating 

out of one or two vehicles, at the unit trains, or at a FSE. Limited CP operations may consist 

of a temporary jump TOC (JTOC) used to facilitate movement of the TOC to a new 

location. Use of the JTOC is discussed further in Section V.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (1 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:16 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

2-03. The battalion will also designate an alternate CP, which will assume control of 

battalion operations in the event the main CP becomes inoperable or loses communications. 

The alternate CP may be another FA battalion CP (especially likely with 

reinforced/reinforcing units), a firing battery, the brigade FSE, or the ALOC.

CP COMPOSITION

2-04. The make-up of the battalion CP will vary with the situation and the commander’s 

concept of operations. Most of the elements that comprise the CP are in the headquarters, 

headquarters and service battery (HHSB) or in headquarters, headquarters battery (HHB) 

and service battery (SB). The CP may include elements from each primary staff section. 

However, it frequently is a small, operations oriented facility containing the following 

elements:

● Battalion command element.

● TOC.

● Communications support.

● Survey elements.

BATTALION COMMAND ELEMENT

2-05. The battalion command element consists of the battalion commander, assisted by the 

CSM, the XO, and their drivers. When they are in the CP, they frequently work out of the 

TOC where they can best monitor and control the battalion’s operations. They may also 

have their own tent for personal use and as a place to work or conduct meetings away from 

the TOC.

2-06. The members of the command element are often away from the CP observing, 

directing, or otherwise influencing the action at critical places on the battlefield. The FA 

battalion commander positions himself where he can best fulfill all of his command 

responsibilities. This may be in the FA battalion CP, a trains location, a firing battery, or a 

key traffic or observation point. A DS battalion commander, as the FSCOORD, may at 

times be in the supported maneuver unit’s HQ, a FSE, or with the supported maneuver 

commander at a critical location on the battlefield. A R FA battalion commander may 

position himself in the DS battalion CP, the maneuver brigade CP, or the R FA battalion CP. 

Commanders of GS/GSR battalions will locate based on guidance from the higher or force 

FA commander.

2-07. The battalion XO, CSM, S3 and, in divisional units, the brigade FSO provide critical 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (2 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:16 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

C2 support which allows the battalion commander the flexibility to position himself 

wherever the situation dictates. In units equipped with the AFATDS, the FA battalion 

commander may have an automated C2 system in his vehicle that allows him to monitor 

digital traffic and aid in C2 of the battalion while he operates away from the CP.

2-08. The battalion XO may operate out of the ALOC instead of the CP, especially when 

focusing his efforts on the battalion’s CSS operations. During periods of major planning 

actions, or when the commander and/or S3 may be out of the CP for extended periods, the 

XO will probably be in the TOC.

TACTICAL OPERATIONS CENTER

2-09. The TOC serves as the FA battalion’s primary C2 hub (information management 

center), assisting the battalion commander in synchronizing FA fires in support of force 

operations. It is the location in the battalion where the majority of planning, staff 

coordination, plan execution, receiving/disseminating information, and monitoring of key 

events occurs. In order for the FA battalion to accomplish its assigned mission, the TOC (as 

a minimum) should be able to perform the following critical functions:

● Advise the battalion commander, and as appropriate, key FS personnel, on the FA 

organization for combat, FA positioning, allocation of ammunition, and FA attack 

guidance.

● Perform tactical FD — select FA units and ammunition to support fire mission 

requests in response to the maneuver commander's attack guidance and to ensure the 

desired effects are achieved.

● Plan FA operations — generate a FASP that outlines the concept of operations and 

responsibilities for the battalion and describes the FA battalion commander’s plan for 

accomplishing assigned missions and responsibilities. In a DS battalion, the FASP 

must address the concept of employment and responsibilities of all FA supporting the 

maneuver force, and is prepared in coordination with the brigade FSE as part of the 

maneuver OPORD. The operations section, in coordination with the FSCOORD and 

the FSEs, ensures that the FA plan is synchronized with the maneuver force plan.

● Direct and execute current operations - control FA and TA assets that are organic, 

attached, or reinforcing the battalion. Move and position firing elements and 

orchestrate the delivery of effective fires in support of force operations.

● Monitor technical FD — provide technical assistance to battery FDCs/platoon 

operation centers (POCs).

● Maintain situational awareness of the overall combined arms operation to ensure the 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (3 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:16 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

battalion provides timely, responsive support and rapidly adjusts to the changes 

encountered.

● Conduct information management operations, receiving, processing, and 

disseminating critical battlefield information in all formats.

● Plan and direct counterfire operations as directed by force FA HQ as part of force FA 

counterfire operations, in support of a maneuver force (DS mission), and as 

necessary for force protection.

● Conduct essential intelligence operations and tasks.

● Perform FA targeting — generally focused on counterfire or targets related to 

specific battalion missions (such as suppression of enemy air defenses [SEAD]). FA 

battalions with a DS mission will also be integrally involved in the total targeting 

process of the supported maneuver force.

● Plan and direct Class V operations in coordination with the S4 and BAO.

● Plan/direct survey operations to support the battalion’s FA operations and any 

assigned external survey support taskings for radars, target area survey requirements, 

mortars, or TA/intelligence assets.

● Plan, direct, and conduct all communications operations, to include radio, wire, 

automation management, and signal security.

● Plan and direct NBC defensive operations within the battalion.

● Provide general direction and overwatch of administrative and logistics operations in 

coordination with the ALOC and the batteries.

● Perform MSU operations.

HHSB/HHB COMMANDER & FIRST SERGEANT

2-10. The HHSB/HHB commander and 1SG are responsible for the security and logistical 

support for all of the elements in the battery. Because elements of the HHSB/HHB are 

usually dispersed among both the battalion CP and the trains, the HHSB/HHB commander 

and 1SG must work closely with all staff officers and section leaders to ensure adequate 

support. Where applicable, the HHSB/HHB leadership team also monitors the status and 

administrative and logistical requirements of FS or liaison teams.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (4 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:16 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

2-11. In a HHB/SB based battalion, the HHB leadership team can usually devote more 

attention to the security, support, and movement of the battalion CP as the SB leadership 

team supervises much of the battalion trains (e.g, the field trains). (Both leadership teams 

must coordinate their efforts as elements from both batteries may be dispersed between the 

CP and the trains.) The HHB leadership team may, at times, operate out of the CP with 

some supply, food service, and battery maintenance assets temporarily moved forward to 

service the CP. While positioning and movement of the CP are primarily an S3 

responsibility, the HHB leadership team can provide assistance in reconnaissance, 

movement, and occupation.

2-12. Because the HHSB leadership team has a greater sphere of responsibilities, which 

includes support for the trains, the staff sections must take increased responsibility for the 

security and support of the CP (S3) and the trains (S1/S4). Also, the HHSB CSS assets 

normally operate out of the trains. Most support for the CP may be provided on a periodic or 

as needed basis; however, a maintenance contact team may support the CP on an extended 

basis if needed. The HHSB leadership team usually operates from the trains area, moving 

their operations to the CP only when necessary to better coordinate support.

2-13. The increased responsibilities of the HHSB commander and 1SG may increase the 

need for them to operate independently. At these times, the 1SG may need to use a vehicle 

from one of the HHSB sections.

CP COMMUNICATIONS SUPPORT

2-14. The S6, the S3, and the HHSB/HHB commander work together to ensure the CP has 

adequate communications support. This primarily includes assistance in the set up and 

maintenance of radio, wire, and digital communications/automation equipment and retrans 

capability. Since the S6 must also support the battalion’s other operations centers and 

batteries, the communications element in the CP may consist of a contact team that travels 

with and gives priority to CP support. At times, the majority of the S6 section may operate 

within the CP. If the battalion is supplemented with additional communication assets to 

support special missions or circumstances, such as theater missile defense (TMD) or SEAD, 

these may also become part of the CP.

SURVEY ELEMENTS

2-15. The battalion survey sections may base their operations out of the CP in order to 

allow better C2 by the S3.

SECTION II — TOC ORGANIZATION

TOC ORGANIZATION

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (5 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:16 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

2-16. The FA battalion TOC consists of two major functional elements — the operations 

and intelligence (O&I) element (composed of the operations section and the intelligence 

section) and the battalion FDC. The O&I element manages both current and future 

operations and coordinates all aspects of FA support. It also performs the planning and 

operational functions, such as developing FA plans/orders, conducting "artillerized" IPB, 

developing artillery targets, tracking the status of subordinate units, and controlling unit 

movements.

2-17. The FDC performs tactical FD by processing calls for fire, determining the type and 

amount of ammunition required to achieve the desired effects, and transmitting fire orders to 

the firing battery FDCs or POCs. The battalion FDC also monitors technical FD within the 

battalion.

OPERATIONS SECTION

2-18. The responsibilities of the operations section are to:

● Plan/coordinate the positioning of key C2 and CSS elements and firing 

batteries/platoons supporting current and future operations.

● Plan/coordinate all battalion movements and assist the battery commanders with 

coordination of movements. This includes assignment of routes and PAs and their 

clearance through the supported unit.

● Maintain current operational status of all organic, attached, and 

reinforcing/reinforced units.

● Prepare and disseminate all operational reports.

● Maintain the friendly situational awareness and common operational picture.

● Maintain the operations maps — manual and automated.

● Maintain manual status charts, logs, reports, and equivalent automated databases and 

reports.

● Provide the FDC with the most updated operational data on battery and platoon 

positions, both current and planned. When applicable, ensure FSEs and/or 

reinforced/reinforcing FA units are receiving all necessary current and planned 

operational data.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (6 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:16 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

● Coordinate survey requirements for the zone of responsibility with the force FA 

survey planning and control element (SPCE).

● Advise the FDC, FSE (if applicable), reinforcing/reinforced FA (as appropriate), and 

force FA HQ on scheduling of all preplanned fires.

● Prepare and disseminate the FASP. As appropriate, assist FSEs with development of 

the FSP (DS mission) and coordinate preparation of the FASP as part of the FSP.

● Monitor ammunition consumption and direct resupply for the battalion.

● Coordinate liaison with a reinforced FA unit and direct the efforts of liaison 

personnel provided to the reinforced unit.

● Inform other staff sections (S1, S4, combat trains and field trains) of the current 

status of the supported forces and any changes that will require changes in FA 

support.

● Supervise battalion NBC defensive operations.

● Plan, coordinate, and supervise OPSEC within the battalion. Coordinate OPSEC with 

the S2 and S6.

● Assume control of reinforcing/reinforced artillery battalions during MSU operations, 

if necessary.

● Coordinate communications requirements for the battalion.

INTELLIGENCE SECTION

2-19. The intelligence section is an integral part of the O&I section. The intelligence 

section provides the commander and S3 with intelligence information essential to the 

operation and survival of the battalion. Specific responsibilities of the intelligence section 

are:

● Prepare in-depth "artillerized" IPB products of the supported unit sector in 

coordination with the supported maneuver and/or higher FA HQ S2. The FA 

battalion IPB is not an independent product. It is an extension of the supported 

maneuver unit and/or higher FA HQ IPB, focused on specific artillery-related 

intelligence requirements. IPB production is a continuous process.

● Assist the S3 in PA selection to ensure that positions are in consonance with IPB 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (7 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:16 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

insights and survivability requirements.

● Develop the TA tab to the FASP and the RDO for organic and attached radars. The 

RDO designates positions and establishes cueing procedures. Coordinate the use of 

all TA radars, organic, or attached, with the battalion S3. (For more detailed 

information see FM 6-121, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery 

Target Acquisition.)

● Develop targeting data based on the supported maneuver commander's high-payoff 

target list (HPTL), attack guidance matrix (AGM) and force FA HQ direction. 

Provide recommendations and input to the targeting team that develops the HPTL 

and AGM for the maneuver commander and/or the force FA HQ. (For detailed 

information on the targeting process, see FM 6-20-10, Tactics, Techniques, and 

Procedures for The Targeting Process.)

● Monitor enemy artillery tactics and techniques within the supported unit sector and 

report to higher HQ.

● Exchange combat information and intelligence with the supported maneuver unit, 

subordinate units, reinforcing/reinforced units, higher HQ, and adjacent units as 

appropriate.

● Coordinate with battery 1SGs to develop a ground and air defense plan for the 

battalion.

● Assist the S3 with planning, coordination, and conduct of OPSEC.

● Coordinate external battalion security requirements.

FIRE DIRECTION CENTER

2-20. The battalion FDC provides tactical fire planning and fire control through automated 

command and control systems with manual backup and communications equipment. 

Specific responsibilities are as follows:

● Monitor and operate in the battalion FD and FS coordination nets (voice and data).

● Schedule fire units for preplanned fires in coordination with the S3, brigade FSO (if 

applicable), reinforcing/reinforced FA (as appropriate), and force FA HQ.

● Review the maneuver commander’s attack guidance and/or force FA HQ directives 

and ensure they are applied to all fire mission requests. Ensure all battalion elements 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (8 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:16 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

have the proper guidances and attack criteria entered into digital systems for both 

current and planned operations. Where applicable, this includes all FSEs and requires 

close coordination with the brigade/regimental FSE.

● Execute preplanned fires as requested by force FA HQ, FSEs, observers, and 

reinforced units.

● Coordinate fire mission processing procedures (data and voice) with FSEs, force FA 

HQ, reinforced/reinforcing units, and targeting/ intelligence assets as appropriate. 

This includes digital fire mission routing and AFATDS intervention rules.

● Respond to immediate fire requests in the priority established by the supported 

maneuver commander's attack criteria.

● Ensure the battalion meets the five requirements for accurate predicted fires:

● Accurate target location and size.

● Accurate firing unit locations.

● Updated weapon and ammunition information.

● Valid met information.

● Accurate computational procedures.

● Determine registration requirements in coordination with the S3.

● Provide technical FD assistance to battery/platoon FDCs as required. Coordinate for 

technical FD in case of catastrophic loss of the technical FD capability of 

battery/platoon FDCs.

● Ensure that all fire missions comply with current FSCMs.

● Assist the S3 in monitoring ammunition expenditures. In cannon units this includes 

ammunition lot management. Recommend changes to attack criteria or other tactical 

FD guidances as necessary.

● Conduct MSU operations as required.

● Establish and practice standard procedures for FDC operations in a degraded mode.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (9 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:16 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

TOC BATTLE STAFF ORGANIZATION

2-21. The activities of the TOC are supervised by the S3. For the S3 to manage the FA 

battle, the entire TOC must work as an orchestrated team under his direction. Usually, the 

S3 is not given a specific shift of duty because he is expected to be directing operations 

during critical times. Table 2-1 depicts a sample 24-hour TOC schedule of key personnel.

Table 2-1. Sample 24-Hour TOC Operations

DUTY POSITION FIRST SHIFT SECOND SHIFT

Operations/Duty Officer S3 Assistant S3

Chemical Officer NBC NCO Chemical Officer

Operations NCO Master Gunner Operations SGT

Operations AFATDS Operator Ops FATDS Specialist Ops FATDS Specialist

Intelligence AFATDS Operator Intelligence Analyst Intel FATDS Specialist

Intelligence/Targeting Officer S2 Intelligence Sergeant or 

Targeting Officer 1

FDO FDO Ch Fire Control SGT

FDC AFATDS Operator Fire Control SGT FDC FATDS Specialist

CESO S6 Signal Spt Sys Ch

1 — In FA battalions with a DS mission the targeting officer will usually operate in the supported 

maneuver brigade or regiment FSE.

Ops = operations, Intel = intelligence, Ch = chief, Spt = support, Sys = system

2-22. The S3 positions himself in the TOC where he can see and hear critical information 

that will allow him to make sound tactical decisions based on the FA commander’s 

guidance. In the event the S3 is not in the TOC, the assistant S3 or shift officer assumes the 

S3’s responsibility of managing TOC operations.

2-23. Each section should maintain a shift log, documenting the major events, actions, and 

message traffic applicable to the section, as well as accomplishment of major shift 

responsibilities. The log serves as a record of the major events and as a tool to prepare for 

shift briefings.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (10 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:16 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

2-24. Shifts should overlap by about an hour to allow proper handover of the battle. Also, 

shift changeover for each section may be staggered to improve continuity (e.g, operations at 

1200, intelligence at 1400, and FDC at 1600). There should be, by TSOP, an established 

procedure where, approximately an hour before shift change, all maps, status boards, shift 

logs, and such are updated with the most current information, all filing and document 

destruction is accomplished, and general TOC housekeeping completed. Both manual and 

automated systems must be addressed. The oncoming shift should be given time to review 

maps, status boards, shift logs, and other applicable tools. The outgoing shift should provide 

a shift briefing that addresses, as a minimum, current operational status (FA and maneuver), 

TOC status (vehicles and equipment), and battalion, TOC, and section tasks. The S3, or 

section leaders, may establish a standard TSOP format for the shift change briefing.

SECTION III — TOC CONFIGURATIONS

2-25. The following figures provide examples of TOC configurations (external array and 

common area). They are provided only as examples and for use as guides to stimulate ideas 

for development of a functional TOC tailored to meet the needs of the unit.

2-26. The examples provided are for towed (T) cannon (Figure 2-1), SP cannon (Figure 2-

2) and MLRS (Figure 2-3) battalion TOCs. However, any battalion can use any of the basic 

layouts (back-to-back, side-by-side) as a general guide in organizing a TOC. Figure 2-3

provides a more detailed example of the internal layout within a TOC to include the 

placement of C2 systems. The digital equipment shown in the figure can also be removed 

from the vehicles and set up in the track extensions when mobility and rapid displacement 

are not required. (Note — C2V is used generically for C2 vehicle)

TOWED CANNON BATTALION TOC LAYOUT (EXAMPLE)

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (11 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:16 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

Figure 2-1. 105mm/155mm (T) Cannon Battalion TOC Array

SP CANNON BATTALION TOC LAYOUT (EXAMPLE)

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (12 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:16 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

Figure 2-2. 155mm (SP) Cannon Battalion TOC Array

MLRS BATTALION TOC LAYOUT (EXAMPLE)

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (13 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:16 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

Figure 2-3. MLRS Battalion TOC — Side-by-Side Configuration

TOC EQUIPMENT

2-27. The following items are recommended (but not limited to) for use in the TOC 

common areas (extensions) to enhance mission execution:

● Tables/desks/chairs/clock/heaters (as required).

● TA-1035 telephones/remoted mobile subscriber radio telephone (MSRT).

● TA-312 telephones. Remotes for combat net radios (CNRs).

● Reproduction equipment and facsimile (fax) machine.

● Weapon and load bearing equipment (LBE) racks.

● Plans, intelligence, and operations map boards.

● Storage bins for overlays and maps.

● Status boards for tracking combat information.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (14 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:16 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

2-28. The common area is the primary workspace for the key TOC members. During 

frequent or anticipated movement, much equipment will remain up-loaded, with much work 

occurring inside the vehicles. If the TOC will remain in place for an extended time, most of 

the equipment can be moved or remoted to the common area. Space is a limitation and 

tentage may be needed to provide additional workspace. TOC leaders must consider 

weather, as some of the equipment may be sensitive to extreme temperature, humidity, dirt 

and dust, or other factors. As the common area is also more vulnerable to shrapnel and smallarms fire, the S3 should consider force protection measures in determining TOC setup.

SECTION IV — TOC INFORMATION MANAGEMENT

2-29. The process of C2 in the FA battalion is unique. Unlike the C2 structures of 

maneuver forces where the commander directs the forces commander-to-commander, the 

FA battalion S3 controls unit movements and executes artillery fires based on the FA 

battalion commander’s guidance. The battalion commander still commands the battalion, 

but the S3 is the manager of FA assets and translates the vision of the commander into FA 

fires.

MANAGEMENT OF TACTICAL INFORMATION

2-30. The battalion S3 and the rest of the TOC staff control the day-to-day operations of 

the FA battalion. It is at the TOC where battlefield information is received and processed 

into FA tactical movement, delivery of FA fires, and sustainment operations. For the 

battalion staff to effectively track the tactical situation and satisfy the maneuver 

commander’s concept of FA fires, situational awareness and battle tracking must be as 

accurate as possible. The physical layout of the TOC should support the flow of information 

and allow the S3 to direct the efforts of the staff in an efficient manner.

2-31. The S3 should position himself in the TOC where he can effectively manage his 

battle staff. He should be at a vantage point where he has access to radios and telephones 

and can observe the monitors of the C2 computers, the operations/intelligence maps, and 

other status charts. He can take in tactical information, give guidance, and avoid the 

common pitfall of becoming preoccupied with tasks better handled by subordinates.

2-32. The primary information pipelines in the TOC are its internal and external voice and 

digital nets. (See Chapter 3, for TOC net structures.) Normally, in a DS battalion, the two 

nets that give the S3 the clearest picture of current events on the battlefield are the maneuver 

brigade FS coordination and the maneuver command nets (voice). It is important to 

understand that the FA staff monitors these nets and does not normally transmit on them. To 

reduce confusion in the TOC, it is recommended these two nets be the only ones audible on 

remote devices in the operations (extension) area. The other voice nets should be monitored 

by headset or monitored from inside the appropriate staff vehicles. The S3 is kept informed 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (15 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:16 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

of the majority of the traffic on the other nets (voice and data) by status charts updates, 

reviewing message forms, and computer printouts. Anything of significance that requires the 

S3’s attention should be brought to him immediately. In a battalion providing reinforcing or 

GS fires, the communications requirements will differ, but the S3 will still focus on the nets 

that will provide him the tactical information to make sound, logical decisions.

2-33. The battalion FD nets, operations/fire net, and maneuver FS coordination net are the 

S3’s principal conduits to understand where fires are planned and executed. These nets 

allow the TOC to execute its responsibility to review every mission and provide a secondary 

independent check to verify that no FSCMs are being violated and to reduce the chances of 

fratricide. Data and voice missions should be checked. The S3 observes where targets are in 

relation to the tactical situation to better understand the flow of the battle.

2-34. The O&I section must closely monitor the information received from all tactical 

information sources (voice, digital, fax) to verify critical data, identify potentially inaccurate 

information, and to resolve discrepancies between conflicting reports or data.

2-35. By monitoring the supported maneuver command net, the S3 can determine the 

tempo of the operation, anticipate where the focus of fires will be directed by the 

FSCOORD, and maintain the situation map(s). This allows the S3 to be proactive in 

positioning units and managing ammunition for effective tactical control of fires. If used, the 

net should be remoted to the S3’s battle station.

2-36. The TOC passes tactical orders and information to the batteries and any supporting 

artillery over the battalion command net. This net can be remoted to the operations 

sergeant’s post and monitored by a radio telephone operator with headset. The S3 receives 

the information passed on this net by monitoring the computer screens and status boards and 

by reviewing messages and reports used to update situation maps. Situation reports and 

updates of information with battalion combat and field trains should not be passed on this 

net. Routine administrative and logistical traffic should be sent on the battalion 

administrative/logistics net or mobile subscriber equipment (MSE) network.

2-37. The S2 monitors the supported maneuver O&I net. The focus of the traffic on this net 

is maneuver specific but the S2 can garner much information relevant to FA support 

requirements and operational/security considerations. The S2 section should monitor this 

with either a remote (with headset) or from inside the S2 vehicle. Routine traffic can be 

passed to the S3 on message forms. Critical traffic requiring the S3’s attention may be 

monitored, from his battle station, on the S2’s remote. FA battalions with a GSR/GS mission 

probably will not monitor this net, but the force FA HQ O&I net instead.

2-38. The DIVARTY/FA brigade command/fire network is the most immediate voice link 

the FA battalion has to access the force artillery counterfire system, request for additional 

fires, FS coordination, and C2 of subordinate units (particularly when out of the range of 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (16 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

CNRs).

2-39. The MSE system gives the TOC a tremendous capability to coordinate actions and to 

verify or exchange critical information. It is ideal for routine traffic between the TOC, 

ALOC, FSEs, BSOC, force FA HQ, and supported force HQ. It is a superb tool for rapid 

land coordination with force FA HQ, supported brigade or battalion task forces for areas to 

move and position supporting FA units and assets.

2-40. On today’s battlefield, an increasing amount of tactical information flows over the 

FA battalion’s automated C2 equipment. The TOC constantly interfaces digitally with other 

units’ primary C2 systems and with other digital devices/systems that generate, receive, or 

forward information. Automated battle management is a developing skill as system 

capabilities and unit tactics and techniques are rapidly evolving.

INFORMATION MANAGEMENT TOOLS

2-41. The capability of a TOC to function effectively is based on the staff’s ability to 

manage information. This is not a simple task when considering the volume of traffic that is 

passed and captured in the TOC’s battle command system (AFATDS, IFSAS, FDS, or 

LTACFIRE) and associated/stand-alone communications systems. It is very easy for units to 

experience information overload unless they have simple and effective methods in place to 

process information.

2-42. In the TOC, the staff may use graphical displays (e.g, map boards with overlays, 

status boards, and/or digital screens) to give the FA commander a complete situation report 

of the status of his unit, the supported maneuver unit, and/or the reinforcing/reinforced FA 

units. The displays should be informative enough to assist him in making tactical and 

administrative decisions, as well as aid in managing his FA assets. This will only happen if 

the staff has an effective system in place to visually display critical data.

AUTOMATED C2 EQUIPMENT

2-43. The S3 and all TOC officers and NCOs should understand the capabilities and 

limitations of their automated C2 equipment. They should understand what screen views are 

available and how those views can be changed to display desired data and to filter out 

undesired information that can clutter the screens. TOC leaders must quickly recognize bad 

or suspect data on the screens or automated reports as this data can be rapidly disseminated 

to numerous external and internal users.

2-44. Operators should be thoroughly trained in all aspects of the C2 systems they use. 

They should know how to enter, extract, and manipulate data, change screen views, and 

prepare/pull reports. They should also understand the significance of the data they are 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (17 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

handling. This includes identifying critical graphics (such as a contaminated area), reports, 

and messages that must be brought to a leader’s attention immediately. They should 

understand when to alert leaders to changes in key data such as ammunition levels. Leaders 

should ensure that C2 equipment operators are not merely keyboard operators but critical 

members of the warfighting team.

2-45. The TOC should have established procedures to maintain a manual backup 

capability. The TOC will quickly need accurate maps, overlays, charts, printed computer 

reports, and other manual records if automated systems fail. During peak periods, TOC 

leaders should monitor how well both automated and manual information tools are being 

maintained. They must ensure TOC personnel back up, print out, and post or record digital 

data so the TOC can immediately execute manual operations if necessary. TOC training 

should include drills in switching to degraded operations (in which one or more automated 

systems malfunction) and to a totally manual information management system in case of 

major automation failure.

MAP BOARDS

2-46. Standardized map boards should be established in accordance with force FA HQ 

and/or supported unit TSOP. This will facilitate standard map mounting procedures 

throughout the organization and allow overlays to be exchanged with minimum loss of 

accuracy.

OVERLAYS

2-47. Acetate overlays are constructed to conform to standardized map boards. All 

overlays should be the same size and edged with tape. The goal is to display graphics on an 

overlay, mount the overlay on various map boards, and maintain an acceptable degree of 

accuracy.

2-48. Units should establish a standard (TSOP) mounting and posting system for overlays. 

When an overlay is placed on a map board, the following information should be visible:

● Overlay description.

● OPORD, FASP, fragmentary order (FRAGO), number if applicable.

● Unit originating the overlay.

● Date-time group.

● Security classification (top and bottom).

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (18 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

● Grid-line tick marks for orientation (minimum of two).

STATUS BOARDS

2-49. The staff should track the current status of elements and other combat information on 

status boards (containing appropriate charts) that are neat and organized. Much of this 

information may exist in various automated formats in AFATDS or other C2 software. This 

information is automatically updated as the new information is input by TOC personnel or is 

digitally received from other elements. Manual status boards and information folders should 

be compared to the automated information formats/sources to facilitate maintenance and 

emergency transition to manual operations. However, the manual status boards should be 

designed to best organize/display required data in a TOC setting.

2-50. The TOC may position and maintain status boards along functional lines. For 

example, the S2’s status board may contain a RDO, air defense status, survey section 

equipment status, MOPP level, or battalion defense diagram. The operations section status 

board(s) may contain all the call signs and frequencies, track combat strength and 

ammunition, FSCMs, observer locations, the FASM, or FS execution matrix (FSEM).

2-51. Within the TOC, the minimum information to be tracked includes:

● CCIR.

● Commander’s intent (Immediate and two above).

● Missions two levels up and the battalion mission statement.

● The maneuver commander’s concept of FS.

● EFSTs and EFATs.

● FASM/FSEM.

● Batteries’/platoons’ primary, alternate, and supplementary locations.

● Howitzer/launcher status (crew and weapon system) and posture.

● Ammunition carrier strength.

● FS team-vehicle (FIST-V) status.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (19 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

● FDC/POC status — to include personnel strength and status of automated FD 

systems.

● Ammunition count by type and platoon.

● Radar positions, zones (active and planned), and cueing schedule.

● Order planning timeline.

● NBC status.

● Priority of fires and current FSCMs.

● Call signs and frequencies.

● Air defense artillery (ADA) status.

● Personnel status.

● Task organization/FA organization for combat.

● Radiation exposure status.

● AGM and HPTL.

● Risk assessment.

● Friendly mortar locations.

● Main supply routes.

● Immediate-actions status.

SITUATION MAPS

2-52. There are normally three situation maps mounted on map boards in the TOC. They 

are plans, intelligence, and operations maps. Each has functions that may overlap. The plans 

map is used during the planning process and for future operations. The intelligence map is 

primarily used for IPB process, FA targeting, and current enemy situation. The operations 

map is the most widely used in the TOC to maintain the current friendly situation. The 

intelligence and operations maps should always complement each other.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (20 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

2-53. The operations map should contain overlays depicting the current location of friendly 

maneuver forces, FISTs, FA units (and range fans), radars under battalion control, proposed 

PAs, FSCMs, and current fire plan(s).

2-54. Situation maps should be kept simple and manageable. Tactical information should be 

displayed on one of the following type overlays:

● Maneuver graphics overlay.

● FA position/movement overlay.

● The target overlay.

Maneuver Graphics Overlay

2-55. The supported maneuver TOC produces this overlay, which depicts the supported 

maneuver AO, objectives, battle positions, locations of boundaries, phase lines, other 

maneuver control measures, and airspace coordination graphics. Normally, the brigade FSO 

coordinates for a copy for the DS battalion TOC. The S3 uses this overlay in planning 

movements and clearing fires. As a minimum, the TOC disseminates copies to the firing 

batteries, survey section, organic/attached radars, combat and field trains, and R/GSR 

artillery TOC. The force FA HQ should provide graphics to GS battalions. Additionally, the 

brigade FSO will input the geometry into the automated tactical fire control system (for GS 

battalion, the DIVARTY, Corps Arty, or the FA brigade fire control element [FCE] provides 

the geometry ).

2-56. Because it constitutes the frame of reference, the maneuver graphics overlay is the 

first overlay placed on the situation map boards during execution. On the operations map, 

the S3 uses it as a check to preclude fratricide and to gage the tempo of the battle in regard 

to the maneuver plan.

FA Position Area Overlay

2-57. The FA PA overlay is used for planning PAs for firing batteries, trains, the TOC, 

radar, reinforcing artillery units, and other force FA assets. It depicts all FA unit positions 

and range fans. Planning PAs is a continuous process that involves the close coordination 

between the DS TOC and the brigade TOC (for GSR/GS units, coordination is made with 

the DIVARTY or FA brigade TOC). The assistant S3, with help from the S2, normally 

prepares the overlay. PAs should be clearly identifiable on the overlay. Coordination is 

made with the brigade TOC, through the brigade FSO, for land clearance (also, force FA 

HQ is queried for position requirements for any GSR/GS assets). Copies of the overlay are 

distributed to the brigade FSO, firing batteries, organic/attached radar, combat and field 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (21 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

trains, reinforcing artillery, and to the force FA HQ.

Target Overlay

2-58. As a planning tool, it supplements the target list worksheet or computer printout by 

graphically depicting all targets and the total fire plan for an operation. It is used in 

developing the PA overlay for ensuring batteries can be positioned to range targets. This is 

the top overlay on the situation map. Since the overlay supplements the printed target list 

and is subject to constant changes, it is not normally reproduced as part of any plan. The 

degree of precision needed for delivery of fires discourages its use for anything other than a 

tool for planning and graphic aid in execution.

2-59. As targets are fired, they should be colored red in accordance with FM 6-40. This 

graphically shows the S3 where fires are focused and assists him in anticipating future 

requirements.

Additional Overlays

2-60. There are other overlays that can be used to assist the S3 and TOC personnel in 

planning and executing the FASP. Most are only needed in special situations. The S3 

decides the order in which they appear on the situation map. Some of these overlays may 

include:

● Obstacle overlay -- In addition to showing the location of planned and fired 

scatterable mines (SCATMINE) minefields, this overlay shows the location of 

existing and planned engineer obstacles. The S3 may use this overlay in planning 

PAs for firing preplanned SCATMINE, unit movements to avoid obstacles/choke 

points and establishing radar sensor zones to help protect forces. The S2 maintains 

this overlay.

● Event template with critical event matrix -- This overlay is developed by the S2 in 

the IPB process. It illustrates a timed-phased analysis of the enemy’s course of action 

(COA). The event template is an overlay that may contain named areas of interest 

(NAIs), targeted areas of interest (TAIs), enemy timeline and order of battle, and 

DST or enemy critical events matrix. The overlay aids the FA staff in planning unit 

movements while providing continuous fires, ensuring the FASP will support 

maneuver operations and when used in conjunction with the FSEM, it assists in finetuning FA assets synchronization.

● NBC -- This overlay has two functions. The first is to show areas of NBC 

contamination in the AO. The second is to show the location of decontamination sites 

and routes to each. The overlay is generated and maintained by the battalion 

chemical officer/NCO.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (22 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

● Communications capability -- If the terrain presents any unique communications 

profile limitations, the S6 would construct a site profile of the terrain in the AO. This 

assists the S3 in planning employment of retrans stations, displacement of units, and 

TOC site selection.

● Radar capability -- Radar capability overlays depict the locations/coverage of 

organic, attached or GS Firefinder radars. It is used to display all confirmed targets 

located by the radar(s) and control measures in the current zone of operations. This 

overlay is maintained by the S2.

● Logistics -- This overlay is generated by the S4 under the supervision of the battalion 

XO. It depicts all pertinent logistics facilities such as main supply routes, alternate 

supply routes, maintenance collection points, mortuary affairs collection points, and 

ATPs. The S1 and S4 representatives at both the combat and field trains maintain the 

logistics overlay. A copy is furnished to the TOC.

DIGITAL MAPS

2-61. Digital maps are increasingly valuable tools as C2 software versions are upgraded. 

AFATDS map controls allow the user considerable leeway in modifying the view and the 

data displayed. The S3, S2, and FDO should understand the map display capabilities of their 

AFATDS software and determine how to best set up and coordinate digital map displays 

within the TOC to maximize efficient use of the systems available. Different views may be 

needed for different situations. All AFATDS operators should be able to quickly display a 

digital map in the format needed. AFATDS training drills should include rehearsals in 

generating the map displays required by TOC leaders.

SECTION V — CP POSITIONING AND MOVEMENT

2-62. Movement and positioning of the battalion CP are controlled by the S3 based on the 

guidance and direction of the commander. The S3 is assisted by the S2, who provides 

mobility information concerning terrain, trafficability of roads, obstacles, minefields, and 

contaminated areas, and survivability information regarding ground, air, and NBC threat 

from enemy forces and information about the civilian populace in the area. The S6 provides 

guidance on communications factors. The HHSB/HHB leadership team and other members 

of the TOC may also assist with reconnaissance, security, and advance party operations. 

Clearance for the positions and movement routes must be coordinated with the maneuver 

force, a function that the FSEs assist with, especially in battalions with a DS/R mission.

CP POSITIONING CONSIDERATIONS

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (23 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

2-63. The S3 uses the IPB products in determining positions. The S3 usually plans primary, 

alternate, and possibly supplementary CP positions (see Chapter 6 for further discussion of 

these terms). The primary consideration for positioning the CP is its ability to accomplish its 

mission. He must also consider whether or not the CP will be collocated with other 

elements, such as the battalion trains or a supported maneuver unit CP. Several other factors 

must also be considered:

● The general movement of the forward line of own troops (FLOT), which may be 

forward, rearward, static, or erratic. In a sustained, rapidly advancing offensive 

operation, the CP may need to be positioned as far forward as feasible. During a 

rapidly withdrawing retrograde, the CP may be placed farther to the rear than normal. 

On a non-linear battlefield, the general ebb and flow of the fight and the disposition 

of forces is still a consideration, however, security considerations are increased as the 

situation maybe be less predictable than on a linear battlefield.

● Nature of the threat.

■ Counterfire threat. In response to a high counterfire threat the CP may be 

placed farther to the rear; outside the range of mortars and as many of the 

enemy’s artillery systems as feasibly possible. Defilade/reverse slope 

positioning may provide increased protection, however, retrans of 

communications may be necessary.

■ Air/space threat. High air threat may place increased need for positioning the 

CP in heavily wooded or urban terrain that allows better camouflage. The CP 

may also be placed close to ADA that can provide coverage and away from 

anticipated or identified enemy air corridors. The use of wooded/urban 

terrain, coupled with camouflage and light discipline, are also critical to 

reducing vulnerability to air and satellite imagery.

■ Ground threat. Consider positioning the CP with or near other friendly 

elements when there is a high risk from enemy penetrating forces or small 

force operations. When there is a threat of rapid penetration from an enemy 

attack or counterattack, position the CP off of the expected axis of advance, 

especially any high-speed avenues of approach, if possible. Increase the size 

of the CP by adding CSS elements or arranging infantry or military police 

(MP) support.

■ Electronic warfare (EW) threat. To overcome jamming, position the CP closer 

to firing batteries or the retrans site. To reduce electronic locating 

vulnerability, position the CP in defilade/masked locations and use retrans. 

Also position the CP away from the maneuver CP and the FA trains to reduce 

the threat to them and to reduce the electronic signature. The CP should be 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (24 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

kept small to present the smallest electronic signature.

● Communications factors such as digital and radio communication ranges and retrans 

capability must be considered. Communications is a function of the distances 

between units, the capabilities of the equipment, atmospheric conditions, and terrain.

● Terrain.

■ If canalizing terrain to the rear limits movement options, and the CP could be 

quickly cut off, consider positioning close to high-speed avenues needed for 

movement while considering potential exposure to threat penetrations.

■ Terrain that is extremely wet, rocky, or steep, and urban terrain may interfere 

with weapon platforms, grounding of equipment, tiedowns for extensions and 

shelters, and preparation of defensive positions.

■ Hilly or mountainous terrain provides survivability advantages, but may also 

interfere with communications for the CP.

● Friendly forces and missions.

■ When extensive coordination with the maneuver HQ is critical a DS battalion 

may position its CP close to the maneuver CP.

■ In a DS/R relationship, the CPs of the two FA battalions may be positioned 

laterally or in depth, depending on the deployment of the batteries and the 

concept for FS (in addition to the normal positioning considerations. C2 and 

survivability are critical considerations for DS and R units due to their 

generally closer proximity to the FLOT.

■ The CP of a GS/GSR unit is positioned to allow communication with the 

force FA HQ, its own elements, and when applicable, the reinforced unit. 

Communications, especially for corps FA units, is a critical consideration as 

GS/GSR units frequently communicate at more extended ranges than DS and 

R battalions.

JUMP TOC CONSIDERATIONS

2-64. To facilitate CONOPS during movement of the CP to a new location, the battalion 

may use a JTOC. This is a variation of movement by echelon in which a small portion of the 

TOC, and minimal security and support elements, will move to the new CP location in 

advance of the remainder of the CP. During the JTOC’s movement, tactical fire control is 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (25 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

maintained at the CP/TOC (-), which also begins preparation for movement. Once the JTOC 

is in place it conducts a CONOPS exchange with the TOC (-) and establishes 

communications with subordinate, higher, and supported units before it assumes control of 

the battalion. The remainder of the CP then march orders and moves to the new CP location. 

Normal operations resume once the CP has been fully established.

2-65. Composition of the JTOC is limited to key equipment/personnel. As an example, a 

JTOC may consist of (but is not limited to) the following: high-mobility multipurpose 

wheeled vehicle (HMMWV), operations vehicle with extension, current status boards and 

situation maps, S2 or S3, assistant S3, TOC NCO, FDO/FDC NCO, S2 NCO, selected O&I 

and FDC personnel and other HHB or HHSB elements to provide support and security. 

However, the JTOC also could consist of about half of the CP. The size and composition of 

the JTOC will depend on the tactical situation and the S3’s major concerns. A smaller JTOC 

may be preferred during periods of rapid advancement and frequent moves, while a larger 

JTOC would be desired if security is a major issue, and speed of movement is not critical. 

During a rapidly advancing offensive operation, the JTOC may be moving again shortly 

after the rest of the CP has closed and assumed control of the battalion.

2-66. The unit can use a version of the JTOC technique, basically a reversed sequence, 

during defensive operations when the battalion must move to the rear or laterally away from 

a penetration. The bulk of the CP would move first, while the JTOC remains in place 

controlling the battalion until a new CP is established. This allows C2 to remain close to the 

fight, while retaining the mobility to quickly move out at the last possible moment.

2-67. The battalion can also form a TAC to put the battalion commander and/or S3 closer 

to the action, near the maneuver commander, his CP, or a FSE. It is especially used during 

operations requiring frequent, fast moves where the main TOC would have trouble keeping 

pace with the supported maneuver unit. It would be the focal point for battalion C2 of the 

current fight, emphasizing operations, FD, and limited TA/intelligence functions. The main 

TOC would follow as possible and monitor the situation, prepared to assume control if 

necessary. It continues to conduct planning and other TOC functions in order to allow the 

TAC to concentrate on the current fight during a critical stage in the battle. The TAC will 

consist of only one or two vehicles that have the speed and maneuverability to keep up with 

the maneuver forces. It should have a more robust communications and FATDS capability 

than a JTOC as it may operate separate from the TOC for a longer period and must be fully 

capable of controlling the battalion’s fires and directing all subordinate elements. The TAC 

technique is also useful when the commander wants to send a TOC element forward with a 

battery artillery raid.

CP MOVEMENT TECHNIQUES

2-68. CP movement is influenced by several factors: security, organization for combat, 

personnel strength, equipment status, availability of mutually supporting battalions, and 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (26 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

tactical situation. The TOC may move as a single unit, in two or more echelons, or in 

several small elements. A major consideration in determining the TOC movement technique 

is the availability of a reinforcing, reinforced, or other mutually supporting battalion. If 

another battalion can temporarily assume the CP’s functions, the commander and S3 have 

more options for moving the CP. Chapter 6 provides further discussion of movement 

techniques.

NO MUTUALLY SUPPORTING BATTALION

2-69. The CP may move by echelon and may utilize the JTOC concept more frequently 

when another FA unit is not available to temporarily assume control of the TOC’s 

operations. If the battalion CP must move as a unit, the ALOC, a firing battery, or the 

brigade FSE (DS units) can assume portions of the C2 functions until the CP is 

reestablished. Rehearsal and clear TSOPs are needed to prevent confusion.

NO MUTUALLY SUPPORTING BATTALION - CATASTROPHIC LOSS

2-70. If the battalion TOC is not, or will not be operational and a JTOC cannot be 

established, the battalion commander may shift control to the brigade FSE, a designated 

battery/platoon operations center, or even force FA HQ. Another option is for the ALOC to 

assume all C2 functions except tactical and technical fire control, which would be 

performed by the brigade FSE, a firing battery, or force FA HQ. If this occurs, TOC staff 

still capable of performing their duties should collocate with and assist the temporary 

element in controlling the battalion until the TOC is capable of resuming control. Generally, 

the surviving elements of the CP will move rapidly as a unit to the new location (possibly 

the ALOC) and begin recovery, reorganization, and reconstitution as appropriate. As soon as 

possible, the TOC would assume control and normal CP operations would be restored.

MUTUALLY SUPPORTING BATTALION

2-71. When a reinforced, reinforcing, or other mutually supporting battalion is available 

and CP movements are required, MSU operations may be conducted to transfer tactical 

control to the other FA battalion TOC. The supported unit should ensure the supporting unit 

TOC has an updated status on all elements and digital/voice communications are 

established. Before reassuming control, the supported unit TOC should re-establish 

CONOPS with the supporting TOC and with all applicable elements.

SECTION VI — LIAISON OPERATIONS

2-72. One of the seven inherent responsibilities of a FA battalion assigned a R or a GSR 

tactical mission is to provide liaison to the unit being reinforced. However, the battalion 

commander may also direct liaison be established with another FA unit, a maneuver unit, or 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (27 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

any other element when he identifies a need for close, effective coordination with that other 

unit or element. Liaison may even be necessary with non-military elements.

2-73. Liaison is the contact or intercommunication maintained between elements to ensure 

mutual understanding and unity of purpose and action. Liaison activities augment the 

commander's ability to synchronize and focus combat power. Liaison includes establishing 

and maintaining physical contact and communications. Liaison activities ensure the 

following:

● Mutual cooperation and understanding between commanders and staffs.

● Coordination on tactical matters to achieve mutual purpose, support, and action.

● Exact and precise understanding of implied or inferred coordination measures to 

achieve synchronized results.

2-74. Overall, liaison becomes another tool to help commanders overcome friction, gain 

assurance that supporting and supported commanders understand implicit coordination, and 

achieve synchronized results. Effective liaison enhances the commander's confidence in 

planning and in mission execution.

2-75. If the reinforced and reinforcing units are digitized, and both units maintain 

communications and situational understanding, the actual physical presence of a liaison 

team at the reinforced unit may not be required. If the two units choose to co-locate CPs or 

FDCs, the liaison requirement is met and no liaison is required.

2-76. When a corps FA battalion is assigned a tactical mission of GS, it will normally be 

positioned in the area of operation of a maneuver brigade. The FA battalion commander 

may consider sending one of his liaison teams to the maneuver brigade FSE. This team can 

help the battalion commander in tracking the maneuver situation and in keeping the 

maneuver commander informed of the location and status of a sizable friendly force that is 

in his area but not under his control.

2-77. When an Army FA battalion supports a US marine air-ground task force (MAGTF), 

it should establish liaison with the marine force. The marine controlling FA HQ will 

normally provide reciprocal liaison to the Army FA battalion.

LIAISON ORGANIZATION

2-78. Corps FA battalions have one or more organic liaison sections. Each liaison section 

consists of an officer, a sergeant, and one enlisted soldier. Equipment usually consists of a 

wheeled vehicle and a radio (AN/VRC-90F), a precision lightweight global positioning 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (28 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

system (GPS) receiver (PLGR), and an AFATDS or IFSAS.

2-79. Divisional FA battalions do not have organic liaison teams since their requirement 

for liaison with the supported units is usually satisfied by the FSEs collocated with the 

maneuver force CPs. However, when divisional battalions are assigned a R or a GSR 

mission, they must provide for liaison if communications linkup is inadequate. If no means 

are available to establish full-time liaison, then periodic coordination between units may 

have to suffice. Additional information on liaison operations is in FM 101-5.

RESPONSIBILITIES

2-80. Both the supporting and the supported unit have responsibilities important to 

successful liaison. The supporting unit, which dispatches a liaison team, is frequently 

referred to as the sending unit. The supported unit, which receives the team, is called the 

receiving unit. The responsibilities of the sending and receiving units, the liaison section, 

and the LNO and sergeant are discussed below.

THE SENDING (REINFORCING) UNIT

2-81. Sending units are responsible for ensuring that liaison personnel are competent and 

thoroughly trained. The liaison personnel must:

● Remain up to date on current and future operations, be thoroughly briefed, and 

understand what information to pass to the receiving unit.

● Remain current with sending unit operations.

● Have the appropriate credentials for authenticating the liaison team to the receiving 

unit commander. This is especially critical if the team is being provided to an allied 

force.

● Have appropriate security clearances and courier orders.

● Have reliable transportation, communications, automation, and COMSEC equipment 

with appropriate codes. The sending unit must plan to replace equipment and 

COMSEC material, if necessary.

● Provide TSOPs to receiving units that outline liaison team missions, functions, 

procedures, and duties.

● Inform the receiving unit of the contents of any reports sent to the sending unit.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (29 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

● Have weapons and ammunition for personal protection.

● Arrive at the receiving unit at the appointed place and time.

THE RECEIVING (REINFORCED) UNIT

2-82. The receiving unit is responsible for the following:

● Notifying the sending unit of the time, place, and point of contact for the liaison 

team.

● Briefing the arriving liaison team on the status of current operations and about the 

receiving unit.

● Providing the sending unit operational details, to include movement and logistic 

information, which impact on sending unit operations.

● Ensuring that liaison teams have access to the commander and key staff officers to 

communicate information critical to the sending unit.

● Providing communications and COMSEC equipment, if the liaison team operates in 

the receiving unit's radio nets and telephone system.

● Providing the following administrative support:

■ A copy of the receiving unit's TSOP.

■ Workspace, electrical power for automation equipment, and maintenance 

support, to include fuels and lubricants.

■ Life support facilities, rations, maps, small-arms ammunition, and Class II 

and Class IV supplies.

■ Medical support and physical security.

THE LIAISON SECTION

2-83. Specific liaison responsibilities for the section include the following:

● Exchange information on the tactical situation between the reinforcing/reinforced 

battalion CPs.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (30 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

● Establish digital and voice communications as required for:

■ Exchanging orders, situation reports, and intelligence reports.

■ Passing fire missions.

■ Using quickfire nets, as required.

■ Passing unit locations, ammunition status, weapon strength, target lists, and 

fire plans between the two units.

■ Facilitating the rapid clearance of fires.

● Exchanging critical TSOP information.

● Coordinating the exchange of all digital information (communications settings and 

addresses, unit data, targeting information, technical and tactical fire control, and 

commander guidances.)

2-84. During the liaison tour, the LNO or team should also:

● Promote cooperation between the sending HQ and the receiving HQ.

● Proactively obtain information.

● Facilitate comprehension of the sending unit commander's intent.

● Help the sending unit's commander assess current and future operations.

● Remain informed of the sending unit's current situation and make that information 

available to the receiving unit's commander and staff.

● Expeditiously inform the sending unit of upcoming missions, tasks, and orders of the 

receiving unit.

● Inform the receiving unit's commander of the content of the reports it transmits to the 

sending unit.

● Keep a record of reports, listing everyone met (including the person's name, rank, 

duty position, and phone number) as well as primary operators and their phone 

numbers.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (31 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

2-85. A checklist is provided on the following pages that may assist the LNO section in its 

preparations and operations. An example of an outline of an LNO’s handbook or TSOP is 

also provided.

EXAMPLE LNO CHECKLIST

PREPARATION FOR OPERATIONS

EQUIPMENT

Personal field gear and equipment

Night vision goggles

GPS receiver

Camouflage screening system

Hex tent/stove/cots/water cans

Fire control system (AFATDS or IFSAS)

Communications Systems: 

- Radios/COMSEC devices

- OE254 Antenna

- AN/GRA-39 Remote

- TA-312 Telephone

- DR-8 (w/WD-1A/TT)

TA-1035/U with MX-10891/G field wire

Maps and overlay material

Field table with chairs

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (32 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

Office supplies and materials to include: 

- Pens/pencils/markers

- Notepads and tablets

- Rubbing alcohol/paper towels

- DA Form 1594/fire mission logs

INFORMATION

TSOP/SOI/operations plan (OPLAN)/OPORD of parent unit

TSOP/SOI/OPLAN/OPORD of supported unit

Location and route to supported CP

Intelligence update

Current plans, orders, maps, overlays, and targeting information to include concept of operations, 

concept of fires, and commander's intent

Unit locations/readiness and strength

Land management coordinating agency (force HQ FSE)

Logistical considerations and supporting agencies

Current status of supported unit's mission

References; field and technical manuals

BEFORE DEPARTING THE SENDING UNIT

Ensure you understand what the commander wants the receiving commander to know

Arrange for a briefing from all staff elements concerning current and future operations

Verify the receipt of and do you understand the tasks your staff has given you

Obtain the correct maps, traces, overlays (including maneuver, engineer, and FS)

Arrange for communications and cryptographic equipment, codes, and signal instructions; for their 

protection and security, and for their update or replacement, as necessary

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (33 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

Arrange for the departure of the liaison party

Complete route-reconnaissance and time-management plans so that you will arrive at the 

designated location on time

Ensure you and your party know how you are to destroy the information you are carrying in an 

emergency, in transit, and at the receiving unit

Ensure you have SOI, and that you and your party know the challenge and password

Inform your HQ of when you will leave, the route you will take, when you will arrive, POC for 

linkup with receiving unit, when known, the estimated time and route of your return

Pick up all correspondence designated for the receiving HQ

Conduct a radio check (Ensure you have appropriate COMSEC equipment)

Know the impending moves of your HQ and of the receiving HQ

Bring the appropriate automation equipment or computers to support your operation

Pack adequate supplies of Class I and III for use in transit

DURING THE LIAISON TOUR

Establish and maintain communication(s) with parent unit

Notify your own HQ of your arrival

Deliver all correspondence designated for the receiving HQ

Visit staff elements, brief them on the situation of your unit, and collect information (maps, traces, 

overlays, etc.) from them

Annotate on all overlays the security classification, title, map scale, grid intersection points, datetime group (DTG) information, DTG received, and from whom received

Participate in supported unit's orders process, briefings, rehearsals and development of: 

- FSP/FSEM

- FASP/FASM

Advise on parent unit capabilities, requirements, limitations, and employment

Visit and coordinate routinely with all supported unit staff elements

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (34 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

Send parent unit updates on mission, locations, future operations, and commander's intent

Organize sleep plan for 24-hour operations

Ensure supported unit S3 is aware of your location at all times

Accomplish mission without interfering with the supported unit's operations

Facilitate information exchange

Pick up all correspondence for your HQ when you left the receiving unit

Inform the receiving HQ of when you would depart, what route you would take, and when you 

expect to arrive at the sending unit

AFTER RETURNING TO THE SENDING UNIT

Deliver all correspondence

Brief the appropriate staff elements

Prepare the necessary reports

Figure 2-4. Example LNO Checklist

EXAMPLE OUTLINE OF A LNO'S HANDBOOK / TSOP

1. Table of contents, with the sending unit's proponency statement

2. Purpose statement

3. Introduction statement

4. Definitions

5. Scope statement

6. Responsibilities and guidelines for conduct

7. Actions before departing from the sending unit

8. Actions on arriving at the receiving unit

9. Actions during liaison operations at the receiving unit

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (35 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 2 Command Post Operations

10. Actions before departing from the receiving unit

11. Actions on arrival at the sending unit

12. Sample questions

13. Information requirements

14. Required reports (from higher and sending units' TSOP)

15. Packing list (administrative supplies and unit TSOP, field uniform, equipment)

a. Credentials

b. Forms 

(1) DA Forms 1594 (Daily Staff Journal or Duty Officer's Log)

(2) Other blank form

c. References

d. Computers for information and data exchange

e. Signal operating instructions extract

f. Security code encryption device

g. Communications equipment, including remote equipment

h. Phone book

i. List of commanders and staff officers

j. Telephone calling (credit) card

k. Movement table

l. Administrative equipment (pens, paper, scissors, tape, hole punch, and so on)

m. Map and chart equipment (pens, pins, protractor, straight edge, scale, distance counter, 

acetate, unit markers, and so on)

16. Sending unit's command MTOE, unit status report (if appropriate because of the classification of 

the report)

Figure 2-5. Example Outline of a LNO’s Handbook/TSOP

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch2.htm (36 of 36) [1/7/2002 1:38:17 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

RDL

Homepage

Table of

Contents

Document

Information

Download

Instructions

Chapter 3

Command and Control

The ability of the FA battalion to execute C2 communications with its higher HQ, 

subordinate elements, sustainment forces, and supported forces is perhaps the greatest factor 

in determining whether or not the unit will accomplish its mission. C2 must be considered as 

a critical factor in the planning and execution of any tactical operation. This chapter has 

three sections. Section I addresses general communications information. Section II discusses 

C2 systems. Section III covers radio communications.

SECTION I — GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS INFORMATION

3-01. Communication is a command responsibility, essential to efficient C2 of a FA 

battalion and to its ability to provide effective FS. The commander's communications plans 

should address all elements of his command, to include supported, reinforced, and adjacent 

units. To establish a responsive and dependable communications system, the FA battalion 

must overcome several limitations:

● The battalion relies heavily on radio communications, as the speed of battle may 

prohibit the efficient use of wire.

● The battalion is authorized a limited number of CNRs, area common-user systems 

(ACUS), and Army data distribution systems (ADDS) to support multiple 

requirements.

● The battalion monitors multiple radio networks while maintaining CONOPS during 

displacement.

● The battalion communicates over long distances to many diverse elements, such as 

FISTs, FSEs, reinforcing units, higher HQ, and supported maneuver force.

● The battalion relies increasingly on data communications, which have shorter range 

capabilities than voice communications on CNR.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (1 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

3-02. Communications systems differ according to the various means of communication, the 

unit’s mission and its MTOEs. The various communication systems have different 

capabilities and limitations, and thus should be employed so that they complement each 

other to provide flexibility and redundancy. Communications reliability can be greatly 

increased by planning for and using all means available. The primary communications 

systems used in a FA battalion are CNR, ACUS, ADDS, wire, messenger, and, to a lesser 

extent, visual and sound systems.

RADIO SYSTEMS

3-03. Radio communication plays a major role in the C2 of FA battalion operations. Radios 

transmit a variety of media (voice, data, fax), and FA battalions increasingly use radios for 

communication between computer systems. Section III addresses combat net radios in more 

detail.

AREA COMMON USER SYSTEM

3-04. The ACUS is a digital battlefield telecommunication system. The corps and below 

ACUS is the MSE.

3-05. MSE provides secure, automatic digitized voice, data, and fax communications to the 

user, whether static or mobile. It replaces the existing area common-user multichannel 

communications system and radio teletype in signal and FA units. It is an area 

communications system extended by mobile telephone. MSE can be used for digital data 

transmission; however, its primary purposes in FA battalions are for voice and fax 

communications. An MSE net functions similarly to a civilian telephone system. 

Subscribers are assigned individual telephone numbers that can be dialed directly. Text and 

graphics can be transmitted in hard copy via the fax capability of the system.

3-06. Division and corps signal units establish the MSE system by positioning signal nodes 

throughout the division and corps AO. They place extension nodes near maneuver brigade 

and DIVARTY CPs and throughout rear areas.

3-07. FA battalions access the MSE system either by wiring into the extension nodes at 

brigade or higher level or by using mobile radiotelephones through the signal nodes. The FA 

battle command systems at FA battalions and firing batteries are not normally connected to 

the MSE network for digital data traffic because of the limited number of available MSE 

circuits, equipment, and extreme distances to extension nodes.

3-08. The FA battalion can use three types of MSE equipment (Figure 3-1).

● The MSRT terminal, AN/VRC 97, is a mobile MSE telephone that links into the 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (2 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

MSE network through one of the radio access units (RAUs) positioned throughout 

the AO by a signal unit. The RAU picks up the signal from the MSRT and switches it 

into the nearest signal node. The FA battalion has several MSRTs that are usually 

mounted in the vehicles of key personnel, and a few stand-alone installation kits that 

allow vehicular MSRTs to be dismounted for use in the TOC and trains. This is the 

most common method used in the battalion.

● The digital nonsecure voice telephone (DNVT), TA-1048/U, is the conventional 

telephone of the MSE system. It converts voice signals into digital signals and 

transmits the converted data. The DNVT must be wired into a junction box (J-1077), 

which is located near the unit and connected by cable to the small extension node 

(SEN). The user is responsible for laying the wire to the junction box. However, 

since the distances are usually too extreme to accomplish this, the use of DNVT is 

usually limited to situations where the FA battalion’s elements are in close proximity 

to an extension node. Such as when the BSOC is collocated in the brigade support 

area (BSA).

● The lightweight digital facsimile (LDF), AN/UXC-10, when connected to the MSE 

network through a DNVT, digital secure voice terminal (DSVT) or MSRT, will 

allow the battalion to send and receive text and graphics in hard copy.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (3 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

Figure 3-1. FA Battalion MSE NET

ARMY DATA DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

3-09. ADDS is a C2 network that provides medium- and high-volume, real-time data 

communications to support the Army Battle Command System (ABCS). ADDS consists of 

Enhanced Position Location Reporting System (EPLRS) and the Joint Tactical Information 

Distribution System (JTIDS). It is deployed to provide data communications for those users 

that do not normally operate in or near CPs. CP-to-CP data traffic typically is exchanged 

over the ACUS. However, at the FA battalion, internal data distribution is primarily over 

secure frequency modulation (FM) radio, with EPLRS used mainly for its situational 

awareness information.

3-10. EPLRS passes targeting data, orders, situation reports, intelligence data, and messages 

between friendly units at the tactical level. It enhances situational awareness and aids in 

fratricide prevention by automatically tracking and identifying friendly units to other 

EPLRS equipped units. EPLRS interoperates with AFATDS. It provides secure, jamresistant, near-real-time data communications, position location reporting, navigation, and 

identification services. EPLRS radios have do not voice capability.

3-11. JTIDS links Army ADA sensors and C2 elements and other services’ air defense 

elements. This is a joint asset and not organic to FA battalions.

MESSENGER SYSTEMS

3-12. Although messenger systems are not used extensively, they are used in several 

situations:

● For delivery of overlays, packages, equipment, or other items or correspondence not 

suitable to radio or wire delivery.

● During periods of radio silence or degraded communications.

● For delivery of classified correspondence that must be discreetly or personally 

delivered to a commander, or that may require an immediate discussion and reply.

3-13. Messenger communications can be slow and unreliable during poor weather and 

terrain conditions. Security may be an issue due to enemy forces operating behind friendly 

lines, hostile citizens or bandits, or close proximity to front lines, especially during rapidly 

fluctuating battles. Most FA battalions do not have dedicated messenger vehicles, and may 

have difficulty allocating one for extended messenger usage.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (4 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

3-14. Use of a short checklist in the unit TSOP can facilitate the rapid, efficient use of 

messenger services when necessary. Security, training, and navigational skills of the driver, 

route planning, leader briefings, and such should all be addressed.

VISUAL AND SOUND SYSTEMS

3-15. Sound and visual systems of communication are generally used at battery and lower 

echelons. Use of visual and sound communications techniques must be well planned and 

coordinated to prevent confusion, miscommunication, and deception from the enemy. 

Lights, mirror flashes, or sounds from adjacent or passing units can be mistaken as the 

designated cue or signal. Repeated use of a signal may result in duplication and deception 

by an observing enemy force. Fires can result from improper use of pyrotechnics.

3-16. The use of visual and sound communications methods should be addressed in unit 

TSOPs. Rehearsals should be conducted under realistic conditions to ensure that battlefield 

smoke, noise, distances, or intervening terrain do not interfere with the signals.

COMMUNICATIONS RESPONSIBILITIES

3-17. The commander is responsible for the adequacy and proper use of the communications 

systems within his command and for their efficient operation in the systems of the next 

higher command. The commander can delegate the authority to establish, maintain, control, 

and coordinate the battalion’s various communications means to a subordinate The 

following paragraphs discuss general communications responsibilities.

ECHELONS OF COMMAND

3-18. The senior unit is responsible for establishing communications with its subordinate 

units, whether organic or attached. This responsibility is primarily one of planning and 

directing the establishment of the linking communications systems since assets belonging to 

either the senior HQ or the subordinate unit may be used.

TACTICAL MISSIONS

3-19. Each of the four standard tactical missions has an inherent communications 

responsibility.

Direct Support

3-20. An artillery unit with the mission of direct support must establish communications 

with the supported maneuver unit HQ (supporting-to-supported relationship).

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (5 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

Reinforcing

3-21. An artillery unit with the mission of reinforcing must establish communications with 

the reinforced artillery unit HQ (reinforcing-to-reinforced relationship).

General Support Reinforcing

3-22. An artillery unit with the mission of GSR must establish communications with the 

reinforced artillery unit HQ (reinforcing-to-reinforced relationship). The senior artillery HQ 

must establish communications with the GSR unit (senior-to-subordinate relationship).

General Support

3-23. An artillery unit with the mission of GS does not have an inherent responsibility for 

establishing external communications with any other unit. However, the senior artillery unit 

must establish communications with its subordinate GS artillery units (senior-to-subordinate 

relationship).

BATTLE AREA

3-24. Adjacent commands must maintain communications with each other to ensure 

coordination of the combat effort. When facing the FLOT (left-to-right relationship), the 

command on the left establishes communications with the command on its right.

JOINT MAINTENANCE

3-25. Regardless of which unit is responsible for establishing communications, all units 

served by the system must help restore any communications system outage.

BATTALION S6 SECTION RESPONSIBILITIES

3-26. The S6 section maintains the communications and automation systems, operates 

retrans stations, and installs wire systems for the FA battalion. The S6 section is organized 

with a section HQ, an automation management section, and a radio section. In some 

battalions, the S6 section also has a wire section. The exact composition of the S6 section 

varies with each type of battalion.

3-27. All elements of the battalion evacuate communications equipment for repair through 

the S6 section. The maintenance communications mechanics in the section perform 

organizational maintenance on battalion HQ communications equipment. Mechanics also 

provide on-site organizational maintenance and assistance for the subordinate units of the 

battalion.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (6 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

3-28. The automation management section provides assistance with the establishment, 

operation, and maintenance of the battalion’s automation systems. This includes hardware, 

software, networks, and automation security. Their networking functions include 

management and maintenance of internal LANs and connection to external wide area 

networks (WANs).

3-29. The radio section establishes and maintains the FM retrans station as required. Dual 

retrans capability is essential to maintaining FM voice and data communications over 

extended distances.

PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS

PLANS

3-30. The communications plan is designed to fulfill the requirements of a tactical mission. 

Planners use communications responsibilities, communications requirements, and the unit 

MTOE (which provides the communications means) to produce a standardized system. To 

meet specific requirements, commanders may modify their systems based on mission, 

enemy, terrain and weather, troops, time available, and civil considerations (METT-TC). 

The S6 assists the S3 in developing the communications plan during the MDMP process.

Voice and Data Nets

3-31. FA battalions use a combination of voice and data radio nets, with the mix determined 

by the MTOE, operational status of assigned equipment, METT-TC, and the unit’s digital 

training level. If digital data capability is lost by the battalion or by one or more of the 

batteries, the voice nets can quickly become overburdened. A FA battalion communications 

plan must include plans for converting some data nets to voice while continuing to support 

the remaining digital data stations and for reconverting to data nets as that capability is 

restored. It is extremely important to keep voice traffic off digital data nets and vice versa. A 

voice backup plan should be developed for various contingencies, and rehearsed frequently. 

Many of the details can be included in the unit TSOP. 

Planning Ranges

3-32. Range capabilities vary with the method of communications, the type and model of 

equipment used, terrain, weather, and atmospheric conditions. Jamming also degrades 

communications range. Ranges of combat net radios are discussed in Section III. Since 

rehearsal on the actual terrain and under the exact conditions is often impossible, experience 

and thorough map reconnaissance are essential to proper estimation of communications 

ranges.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (7 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

System Mixes

3-33. The factors of METT-TC have different effects on the communications means. The 

preferred communications setup is any system or mixture of systems that will communicate 

the information with the least exposure to enemy EW and not place total reliance on radio. 

A good communications plan maximizes the use of all available systems and backup plans 

to prevent over reliance on any one system. Much of a unit’s basic communications 

planning can be addressed in the unit’s TSOP.

Electronic Counter-Countermeasures 

3-34. ECCM should be part of each battalion TSOP. They can improve OPSEC and 

preserve communications. ECCM techniques that have been found to be effective include 

the following:

● Require authentication on nonsecure nets if operating in the single channel mode of 

operation. Proper authentication procedures can eliminate intrusion and imitative 

deception.

● Do not mix plain and encrypted traffic on the same net. Doing so compromises the 

nature of the net, which makes interception and analysis easier for the enemy.

● Use secure equipment whenever possible. If the battalion is supporting a unit without 

secure capability, specify nets that will be unsecured and enforce secure discipline on 

all remaining nets.

● Limit transmissions to 5 seconds or less if operating in the single channel mode of 

operation. This makes interception and direction finding more difficult.

● Work through jamming if at all possible. Jumping nets should be a last resort. 

Remember that if jamming is bad enough to keep a unit from operating on a net, it 

may also keep many of the stations from receiving the signal to change frequencies. 

Anti-jam frequencies must be disseminated well in advance, so that subscriber 

stations can move to the alternate frequencies in sequence. Susceptibility to jamming 

is greatly reduced with frequency hopping CNRs.

● Use only authorized call signs from the automated net control device (ANCD) or SOI 

and change them on schedule.

OPERATIONS

3-35. Communications operations must take advantage of all techniques to facilitate mission 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (8 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

accomplishment. Consider remoting transmitters, and using antenna multiplexers, 

directional antennas, and retrans.

Remoted Transmitters

3-36. Remoting transmitters allows for the separation of the RF emitter from the CP or other 

critical facilities. Also, remoting radios allows the transmitter to be sited for optimized 

communications while allowing the user to position in locations better suited to 

survivability. Remoting also minimizes on-site or mutual interference while dissipating and 

reducing electronic signature. For additional information concerning remoting, see FM 24-

18, Tactical Single-Channel Radio Communications Techniques.

Retransmission

3-37. Battalions use retrans operations to extend the area of coverage of a specific radio net 

or to reduce the electronic signature of a position. By use of a retrans site, RF power output 

can be reduced at the CP or other location. Overall net ranges can be doubled by the 

effective use of retrans.

3-38. FM, very high frequency (VHF) transmission distances are restricted by terrain and 

obstacles. The siting of radio equipment is often critical. The following are helpful hints for 

using FM retrans:

● As a minimum, make a map reconnaissance of the AO. S6, S2, and S3 should discuss 

retrans operations during the planning phase.

● Analyze the terrain for optimum communications.

● Select primary and alternate locations for retrans. Consider accessibility, defense, 

and logistical support.

● Arrange the timetable for site occupation and net operation. Don't wait until the 

retrans vehicle is needed before sending it out.

● Ensure operators are well trained. They must be able to provide manual relay if they 

have equipment failures.

● Ensure users are aware of the tactical situation and how retrans works.

● If retransmitting digital data traffic, program additional key and/or delay time to 

allow radios to key up.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (9 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

3-39. If using a forward entry device (FED), plan to use a nearby battery FDC, FIST, or 

FSO to relay messages. This capability is useful when direct communication with an 

element is not possible. Relay addressing should be established per TSOP or as identified in 

the appropriate SOI.

Antenna Multiplexers

3-40. Using antenna multiplexers reduces the number of ground plane antennas required to 

operate multiple radios. The time required to align and tune these devices is considerably 

less than the time required installing multiple antennas. However, multiplexers also have 

several disadvantages, to include reduced communications range and significantly increased 

bit error rate (BER) for data traffic (the BER will vary for different frequencies).

Directional Antennas

3-41. Directional antennas reduce electronic signature in two directions while extending the 

range of the radio along the long axis of the antenna. Directional antennas should only be 

used in single-channel mode not frequency-hopping mode.

SECTION II — COMMAND AND CONTROL SYSTEMS

ARMY BATTLE COMMAND SYSTEMS

3-42. ABCS is designed to provide the battle commander and his staff with a common 

operational picture, as well as all the information necessary to effectively plan, coordinate, 

control, and direct the battle. This includes the integration of battlefield functional area C2 

systems (BFACS) that extend from corps to brigade, with some components at the battalion 

level, that interface with both higher and lower ABCS systems. The primary components of 

ABCS include:

● AFATDS.

● Maneuver control system (MCS).

● All source analysis system (ASAS).

● Air-missile defense planning and control system (AMDPCS).

● Combat service support control system (CSSCS).

● The Tactical Airspace Information System (TAIS).

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (10 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

● The Global Command and Control System-Army (GCCS-A).

● Force XXI Battle Command - Brigade and Below (FBCB2) system.

3-43. ABCS is interoperable with joint and multinational C2 systems at upper echelons, and 

it is vertically and horizontally integrated at the tactical and operational levels. For a more 

detailed discussion of ABCS refer to FM 100-34, Command and Control.

FA TACTICAL DATA SYSTEMS

3-44. The FATDS family of automation continues to grow with the fielding of newer, 

automation equipped weapon systems, new or upgraded handheld terminal units (HTUs), 

and improved hardware and software versions for all existing systems. While this section 

addresses only the primary FA C2 systems, the FATDS family currently consists of the 

following systems.

● Primary tactical C2 systems - AFATDS, IFSAS, LTACFIRE, FDS.

● Observer, and other systems — forward observer software, FEDs, HTUs.

● Weapon platform automation systems.

● Radars - AN/TPQ-36, 37, 46, and 47.

● Met systems

■ AN/TMQ-31 — meteorological data system (MDS).

■ AN/TMQ-38 — meteorological measuring set (MMS).

AFATDS

3-45. AFATDS is an integrated FS asset manager that operates as part of a networked 

tactical data processing system. It provides decision aids and an information system for the 

control, coordination, and synchronization of all types of FS means. It uses common 

hardware/software from the ATCCS program. AFATDS interfaces with the other four 

BFACS, via the common operating environment (COE), using a combination of either a 

limited set of messages or an ability to print data for distribution. The ST 6-3 series will 

provide detailed information concerning the interfaces and message exchange between 

AFATDS and the other systems.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (11 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

3-46. AFATDS is also designed to interface across the battlespace with all existing and 

future FS systems, other ABCS BFACS, other services, allied forces (German Adler, United 

Kingdom Bates, French Atlas, & Italian SIR) and joint C2 systems.

3-47. AFATDS is composed of a common suite of hardware and software in varying 

configurations at different operational facilities (OPFACs) interconnected by tactical 

communications. Upgrades to both hardware and software occur periodically, and provide 

increased capability and performance. Because of this, the S3 and S6 must periodically 

verify the compatibility of their systems with those of the units with which they may 

operate.

3-48. AFATDS automates screening and filtering of potential targets and mission requests, 

to include target clearance and coordination in accordance with the maneuver commander’s 

targeting guidance and attack criteria. Decision aids permit fully automated fire mission 

processing. For example, in contrast to IFSAS/FDS/LTACFIRE, AFATDS will prioritize 

fire missions based on target value analysis (TVA) and ensure that fire missions comply 

with FSCMs and unit zones of responsibility. It is also capable of deciding which type of FS 

asset should engage a particular target (for example, FA, mortars, attack helicopters, naval 

gunfire, or air) and recommending the best attack method for a given system (e.g, volleys, 

ammunition type, and firing unit). Although commanders can specify which missions to 

stop for review/coordination and can resort to voice execution, human intervention is not 

usually recommended. AFATDS was designed to plan and execute automatically for 

optimum efficiency.

INITIAL FIRE SUPPORT AUTOMATION SYSTEM 

3-49. IFSAS is an interim tactical FD system that provides automated C2 capability to FA 

units until AFATDS is fully fielded. IFSAS consists of tactical FD software ported to 

lightweight computer units (LCUs). IFSAS can send and receive digital communication via 

radio and wire communications.

LTACFIRE

3-50. LTACFIRE is a compact and transportable C2 system for FA units in light divisions. 

It is similar to IFSAS.

FIRE DIRECTION SYSTEM (FDS)

3-51. The FDS performs tactical FD processing in MLRS units. The FDS receives 

processes, and transmits data on fire units, ammunition and targets. In addition, the FDS 

maintains data bases on fire units, munitions, and tactical fire plans/situations. FDS software 

runs on a LCU.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (12 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

AUTOMATION CONSIDERATIONS

3-52. With the periodic upgrades in hardware and software, one of a battalion’s greatest 

challenges is maintaining a high level of digital expertise. FA battalions must regularly 

allocate time for digital data training, with some of that time focused on leader and 

collective training. Additional automation considerations include:

● Provide OPFAC focused operator training to leaders that are tactically 

knowledgeable, but weak on their automation systems. Leaders must be able to 

expertly operate the system if necessary, especially in smaller sections where 

personnel shortages have greater impact.

● Identify exceptional operators, and provide them training on the tactical and 

situational awareness functions of the section. Skilled operators should understand 

how to "fight" the system, not just enter and extract data.

● Identify the most skilled leaders (officer and NCO) and assign training and first line 

troubleshooting responsibilities. Clearly identify relationships and responsibilities of 

these "field" experts and the automation technicians in the S6 automation section.

● Establish guidelines in unit TSOPs that describe who is authorized to change 

databases and troubleshoot systems.

● Assign battalion level database management duties to someone, usually in the S3 

section. This person assists the S3 and S6 in:

■ Developing the standard battalion database (startup and communications data 

and architecture, guidances, filters, etc.), and any variants necessary for 

particular wartime missions.

■ Establishing a database naming/numbering/dating system that helps ensure all 

battalion elements can clearly identify which database is in use, and when 

changes have been made.

■ Coordinating and disseminating battalion database requirements and changes 

with the senior FA HQ, subordinate elements, and when applicable, the 

supported maneuver force and any units with which the battalion may have a 

wartime or training relationship.

■ Coordinating the exchange and integration of databases with all other units 

during wartime operations and peacetime training.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (13 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

● Maintain regular communication with other units in wartime missions and training. 

Identify hardware and software version and interface issues (use the ST 6-3 series). 

Seek out training opportunities with units that have different equipment (e.g, 

AFATDS-IFSAS).

● Develop a plan for short notice software-only and hardware/software upgrades. 

Identify key leaders that would help a new equipment training team or retrofit team 

in quickly upgrading the battalion to the newest equipment (which may occur prior to 

deployment or upon arrival in theater).

● Develop basic LAN management skills in key OPFACs (e.g, TOC, brigade FSE) to 

reduce the burden on the automation section. See FM 24-7, Tactical Local Area 

Network (LAN) Management, for detailed LAN information.

● Train on switching from data to voice operations and the reverse. Also practice 

digital CONOPS and MSU.

● Understand and monitor range limitations of digital data traffic. Establish plans for 

retrans or rerouting of digital data communications.

SECTION III — RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

COMBAT NET RADIOS

3-53. The CNR is the primary means for FA C2, FD, and FS coordination, especially within 

a FA battalion and a maneuver brigade. The battalion uses CNRs for voice and data 

communications.

3-54. The single-channel ground and airborne radio system (SINCGARS) is the FA 

battalion’s primary radio system. SINCGARS replaces the older series of radios as depicted 

in Table 3-1. Its main features are resistance to jamming through frequency hopping and 

increased capacity of 2,320 channels. SINCGARS is interoperable with AN/VRC 12 series 

radios only in the fixed frequency mode.

Table 3-1. Radio Set Comparison

NOMENCLATURE REPLACES

COMPONENTS (BASIC ISSUE 

ITEMS)

POWER 

OUTPUT

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (14 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

RT VEH 

ADAPT

DISMOUNT

KIT1

PA

Manpack AN/PRC-119 AN/PRC-25/77 1 1 LO, M, HI

Vehicular short-range 

AN/VRC-87

AN/VRC-53/64 1 1 LO, M, HI

Vehicular short-range 

dismount AN/VRC-88

AN/GRC125/1601 1 1 LO, M, HI

Vehicular long-range or 

vehicular short-range 

AN/VRC-89

AN/VRC-12/47 2 1 1 LO, M, HI, PA

Vehicular long-range 

AN/VRC-90

AN/VRC-43/46 1 1 1 LO, M, HI, PA

Vehicular long-range or 

vehicular short-range 

dismount AN/VRC-91

AN/GRC-160 

plus AN/VRC46

2 1 1 1 LO, M, HI, PA

Dual vehicular longrange AN/VRC-92AN/VRC-45/49 2 1 22 LO, M, HI, PA

1. Dismount kit includes manpack antenna, battery case/interconnecting box and handset.

2. Requires a power amplifier mount for second power amplifier.

LEGEND:

ADAPT = Adapter

HI = High

RT = Receiver-Transmitter

M = Medium VEH = Vehicle

LO = Low

PA = Power Amplifier

3-55. The S6, in conjunction with the S3, must perform frequency management and 

coordination to prevent frequency interference and to maximize communications 

capabilities.

PLANNING RANGES

3-56. The FM radio planning ranges differ for voice and data communications. Although 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (15 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

limited in range, SINCGARS range can be significantly extended with directional antennas, 

retrans stations, or relays. Planning ranges for SINCGARS and other radios are shown in 

Table 3-2. Planning ranges for data transmission are usually less than for voice transmission 

(1/2 to 2/3 the planning of voice). In the frequency-hopping mode, data transmission may be 

reduced as much as 50 percent, depending on the data rate set on the radio. The rule is the 

higher the data rate, the lower the planning range.

Table 3-2. Planning Range with WHIP Antenna

RADIO PLANNING RANGES

RADIO PWR (L) PWR (M) PWR (H) PWR AMP

160 Series 0-8 km

12 Series 0-8 km 0-40 km

SINCGARS 0-400 meters 0-5 km 0-10 km 0-40 km

NOTE: The maximum range when transmitting digital data using a manpack radio on H power setting is 

4 km.

ANTENNAS

3-57. Long distances between transmitter and receiver, unfavorable terrain, and other 

conditions can cause poor communications or lack of communications. Units can often 

overcome this problem by the use of the right antenna. When the tactical situation allows, 

the battalion FDC, the BOCs, and POCs should use an extended-range antenna, the OE254/GRC, or the OE-303/GRC to obtain the maximum planning range of their radios.

3-58. To obtain the maximum efficiency of an antenna, consider the following:

● An antenna site should not be located in or near obstacles such as tunnels, 

overpasses, or steel bridges because they can block or reflect signals.

● Trees with heavy foliage and dense underbrush can absorb signals and should be 

avoided if possible.

● Do not set up antennas near wire line poles and high-tension power lines. They can 

introduce interference and absorb part of the radio signals. This also constitutes a 

safety hazard.

SIGNAL OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (16 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

3-59. In addition to the radios and antennas, radio communications relies increasingly on the 

battlefield electronic SOI system. The SOI system is a decentralized system for frequency 

management and the publication of unit level SOI. The electronic SOI is designed to provide 

more responsiveness to rapidly changing and highly mobile battlefield conditions. The 

system, which replaces the paper SOI, consists of a basic generation unit and an ANCD. 

Distribution channels are the same as those now used for the paper SOI.

FA BATTALION RADIO NETS

3-60. Radio communications systems are divided into separate groupings called nets. This 

division is based on the purposes for which the nets are used. A radio net is a channel, 

frequency, or sub-frequency with more than one subscriber for the purpose of transmitting 

information related to the mission requirements. Each net has a controlling station called the 

net control station (NCS). The net may be a "free" net, in which all stations are free to 

contact one another at any time, or a "directed" net, in which all stations must contact the 

NCS for permission to contact other subscribers.

Standard Radio Nets

3-61. The FA uses a set of standard radio nets for all of the standard tactical missions. This 

net standardization enables units to quickly and accurately interface with each other. 

Standard net structures and purposes should not be arbitrarily changed except to tailor them 

to a modified mission. Such modifications should be kept to a minimum. Standard net 

structures consist of the net titles, purposes, users, and equipment. Net structure information 

should be amplified in unit TSOPs.

NET TITLES / DESCRIPTIONS

3-62. Radio nets are usually titled and described in several ways:

● Controlling HQ (DIVARTY, battalion, battery, etc.).

● Purpose - command (Cmd), FD, intelligence.

● Communication system - MSE, frequency spectrum (high frequency [HF], VHF, 

ultrahigh frequency [UHF]), and/or modulation (FM, amplitude modulated [AM] or 

single sideband [SSB] a form of AM).

● Method of communication (voice [V], facsimile [fax], or data [D]).

● Internal/external.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (17 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

3-63. For example, the battalion operations/fire (VHF-FM) (data) net is abbreviated as Bn 

Ops/F (VHF-FM) (D) net.

3-64. TSOPs should designate priorities for all battalion radio nets. This facilitates repairs, 

troubleshooting, retrans assignments, and anti-jamming efforts. Normal net priorities are 

FD, FS, C2, administration, and logistics nets. TSOP priorities for radio nets may need to be 

modified based on the communications situation and/or operational requirements.

FA BATTALION RADIO NET DESCRIPTIONS

3-65. FA battalions control and operate on many types of radio nets. Most FA battalions 

operate on approximately 12-17 primary internal and external nets, and may possibly 

monitor or operate on several additional external nets on an as required basis. Most FA 

battalions use two internal voice nets — (Bn Cmd and Bn Admin/Log). Usually, there are 

four or five internal digital data nets (Bn Ops/F, FD 1,2,3, and Bn TA/Intel). FA battalions 

that provide FS teams to maneuver units will also manage the FS nets. The brigade FSE 

operates on the maneuver brigade FS net. The battalion FSEs operate on the brigade FS net 

and on their own internal maneuver battalion FS net (the maneuver battalion mortar net may 

be used for this purpose in some units). The FA battalion FDC monitors the brigade FS net.

3-66. Most FA battalions will also operate on several external voice and data nets to their 

Force FA HQ. A unit’s FA tactical mission may also require it to operate on maneuver unit 

nets and/or a reinforced FA battalion’s nets.

3-67. All AFATDS-equipped units operate on both data and voice nets. To reduce the 

number of transmissions, voice nets should handle only traffic that cannot be transmitted 

digitally. Since voice traffic will overlay data transmissions, voice traffic on digital data nets 

should be limited to emergency situations.

3-68. A FA battalion CNR matrix is shown in Table 3-3. This matrix depicts what net(s) the 

unit should enter and at what level of communications based on the battalion's tactical 

mission (DS, R, GSR, or GS). Actual equipment, nets, and net titles may vary based on 

MTOEs, unit organizations, TSOPs, and other situational or unit factors.

Table 3-3. FA Battalion Combat Net Radio Matrix

NETS MISSION

DS R GSR GS

Internal

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (18 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

Bn Cmd (VHF-FM) (V) X X X X

Bn Ops/F (VHF-FM) (D) X X X X

Bn FD 1 (VHF-FM) (D) X X X X

Bn FD 2 (VHF-FM) (D) X X X X

Bn FD 3 (VHF-FM) (D) X X X X

Bn TA/Intel (D) X A A A

Bn Admin/Log (VHF-FM) (V) X X X X

External

Force FA Cmd (VHF-FM) (V) X X X X

Force FA Ops/F 1, 2, 3, (VHF-FM) (D or V) X1 X1 X1 X1

Force FA Command Fire (CF) (MSE V-FAX) X X X X

Force FA TA/Intel (VHF-FM) (V or D) X X X X

Force FA Survey (VHF-FM) (V) A A A A

Force FA Admin/Log (VHF-FM) (V) A A A A

Supported Unit Admin/Log (VHF-FM) (V) A A A

Mvr Unit Ops/Intel (VHF-FM) (V) X X X X

Mvr Bde/Reg/Div/ or Corps FS (VHF-FM) (V) X X X X

Mvr Bn/Sqn FS (VHF-FM) (V) (3-4 nets) X

Mvr Bn Mortar FD (D) X

Reinforced Bn Cmd (V) X X

Reinforced Bn Ops/F (VHF-FM) (D or V) X X

Naval Gunfire (HF-AM) (V) X

Div FS (UHF-TACSAT) (D) X X X A

X = Full-time net subscriber, A = As required, D = Data, V = Voice, 1 =Ops/F 1, 2, or 3 as assigned

Mvr = maneuver, Reg = regiment, Sqn = squadron, TACSAT = tactical satellite

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (19 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

3-69. Tables 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, and 3-7 show subscribers and the internal and external radio nets 

for each tactical mission. The radio nets of the FA battalion must meet the requirements of 

the tactical mission assigned - DS, R, GSR, or GS. The organization of the FA battalions 

may differ.

3-70. Some battalions are organized with organic sections that provide FISTs, maneuver 

battalion FSEs, and maneuver brigade FSEs. Other battalions do not have these elements.

3-71. Apart from these differences in organization, the FD, operations, and intelligence 

sections are identical. This similarity forms the basis of the radio networks outlined in the 

preceding paragraphs and in the following tables.

Table 3-4. Direct Support Mission Radio Net Matrix

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (20 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

Table 3-5. Reinforcing Mission Radio Net Matrix

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (21 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

Table 3-6. General Support Reinforcing Mission Radio Net Matrix

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (22 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

Table 3-7. General Support Mission Radio Net Matrix

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (23 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

DIRECT SUPPORT MISSION

3-72. Any FA battalion may be called upon to perform the DS mission, and several FA 

battalion TOEs are specifically designed to support heavy or light, maneuver brigades or 

regiments. While the types and quantities of communications equipment in a DS battalion 

will vary widely with the battalion structure, the radio nets (see Table 3-4) will generally 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (24 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

follow the pattern outlined below.

INTERNAL NETS

3-73. The DS battalion normally operates on about six to seven internal nets. The DS Bn 

Cmd (VHF-FM) (voice) net is used for C2 and collection and dissemination of tactical 

information and intelligence. The DS battalion operations section is the NCS.

3-74. The Bn FD 1, 2, and 3 (VHF-FM) (data) nets are identical. They are used for tactical 

and technical FD from FOs through the DS battalion FDC to the controlling FDC. The FD 

nets (FD 1, FD 2, and FD 3) should be assigned according to the mission and the battalion’s 

communications status, not necessarily one per battery. However, one technique frequently 

used under ideal communications, is to assign one firing battery per net, with the FOs, 

Strikers, FISTs, and Bn FSEs spread evenly across the three nets. This allows for quickfire 

linkages and for the direct exchange of message-to-observer traffic. The NCS for all three 

FD nets is the battalion FDC. One or more of the nets can be established as a voice nets if 

necessary.

3-75. The Bn Ops/F (VHF-FM) (data) net is used for FS planning and coordination between 

FA elements, for MSU operations and for tactical and technical FD to reinforcing artillery 

units. The NCS is the battalion FDC section. The Ops/F net may be established as a voice 

net during degraded operations.

3-76. The Bn TA/Intel (VHF-FM) (data) net is used for exchanging targeting, counterfire, 

survey, meteorological, and intelligence information within the battalion. These elements 

can include Firefinder radars, survey teams, and met teams. The NCS is either the Bn S2 

section, or the Bn O&I section in light combined command posts.

3-77. The Bn Admin/Log (VHF-FM) (voice) net is used for coordinating all battalion 

administrative and logistical matters. The battalion ALOC is the NCS.

EXTERNAL NETS

3-78. The DS battalion may operate on several external nets (the actual number in part 

depends on availability of communications assets and unit SOP). Additional information on 

these external nets is in FM 6-20-2, FM 6-20-40, and FM 6-40, Tactics, Techniques, and 

Procedures for Field Artillery Manual Gunnery.

3-79. The Force FA Cmd (VHF-FM) (voice) net is used for C2, tactical operations, 

intelligence, and voice coordination with all artillery elements and units (organic, attached, 

and reinforcing). The force FA operations section is the NCS.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (25 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

3-80. The Force FA Ops/F 1, 2, and 3 (VHF-FM) (data) nets are identical. They are used for 

tactical FD, FS planning and coordination, MSU operations, and met data. Normally, each 

of the DS battalions will be in one of the nets. Other artillery elements, such as the AN/TPQ36 and AN/TPQ-37 radars, may be in one of these nets depending on the task organization. 

The FSEs at the division tactical CP and the division main CP, if not collocated with force 

FA CP, will also be in one of these nets. The force FA FCE is the NCS.

3-81. The Force FA CF (MSE) (V-FAX) network is a multipurpose area network. The 

battalion has voice, fax, and data (if necessary) access to the force FA HQ and other 

subscribers. It is used for C2 and FD coordination with units at greater-than-VHF ranges 

from the force FA HQ and in situations where hard copy message traffic is required.

3-82. The battalion S2 will operate on the Force FA TA/Intel (VHF-FM) (data) net, 

exchanging TA, counterfire, and intelligence information with the force FA S2. If the 

battalion controls a radar section, the section may also operate on the Force FA TA/Intel net.

3-83. If the DS battalion receives a reinforcing battalion, the reinforcing unit will normally 

be a subscriber on the DS unit’s Ops/F net. However, the DS unit may sometimes enter the 

reinforcing Bn Ops/F (VHF-FM) (data) net if necessary. (This net is not displayed in the 

Table 3-4 matrix and must be resourced by LNO's from the reinforcing unit, or shifting 

radio assets within the reinforced unit.)

3-84. As required, the Bn operations and survey sections will operate on the Force FA 

Survey (VHF-FM) (voice) net (in units where it is still being used). This net, which is being 

phased out due to the reduction in PADS survey elements, provides for exchange of survey 

information with the force FA HQ. In most cases, the Force TA/Intel (D) Net has 

superceded this net.

3-85. As required, the Bn CSS staff, ASOC, and BSOC, operate on the Force FA 

Admin/Log (VHF-FM) (voice) net. This net is used to coordinate CSS operations and to 

exchange CSS information with the force FA HQ.

3-86. The supported Maneuver Unit Ops/Intel (VHF-FM) (voice) net is a maneuver net used 

for operational and intelligence traffic. The DS battalion S2 operates in this net to transmit 

and receive operational and intelligence information. This net is also used for crosscoordination between scouts and Strikers working forward in the brigade area, and their S2 

sections. Non-FA observers, forward scouts for instance, may call for fire on this net. The 

maneuver unit S2 section is the NCS.

3-87. The supported Maneuver Unit FS (VHF-FM) (voice) nets are used for voice FS 

coordination and planning. They are also used to request and coordinate close air support 

(CAS) and naval surface fire support (NSFS) operations. Non-FA observers may call for fire 

in this net. The maneuver brigade/regiment FSE is the NCS for the Brigade/Regiment FS 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (26 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

net. The DS battalion TOC operates in this net to provide immediate reaction to the 

maneuver commander's FS requirements. Each battalion/squadron FSE will also operate a 

battalion/squadron FS net, with the battalions/squadron FSE as the NCS. While the battalion 

TOC normally doesn’t monitor these nets, the firing batteries or platoons may do so when 

close coordination and quickfire procedures are required.

3-88. The FS personnel supporting the maneuver battalion/squadron will also operate on the 

Maneuver Battalion/Squadron Mortar FD (VHF-FM) (data) net. This is used for data fire 

missions. The maneuver unit’s mortar platoon is the NCS.

3-89. The supported unit Admin/Log (VHF-FM) (voice) net is used, as required, for 

coordination of administrative and logistical matters. The supported unit ALOC is the NCS.

3-90. The DS battalion TOC, brigade FSE, and COLT/Striker platoon HQ may also operate 

on the Division FS (TACSAT) (data) net. This net is used to coordinate fires and exchange 

FS data across extended ranges within the division area.

3-91. The battalion TOC, brigade FSE, and battalion FSE may also operate on a Naval 

Gunfire (HF) (voice) net. The unit uses this net to communicate with the ship(s) providing 

naval gunfire support.

REINFORCING MISSION

INTERNAL NETS

3-92. For a FA battalion assigned the R mission (see Table 3-5), the internal nets are the 

same as those required for the DS mission.

EXTERNAL NETS

3-93. External nets change to reflect the responsibility of reinforcing to reinforced. The 

battalion enters the Reinforced Bn Cmd (VHF-FM) (voice) net. The purpose is to be 

immediately responsive to the needs of the reinforced artillery unit. The battalion enters the 

Reinforced Bn Ops/F (VHF-FM) (data) net. The purpose is to receive tactical FD from the 

reinforced artillery unit.

3-94. The battalion CSS staff, BSOC, and ASOC may also, as required, enter the Reinforced 

FA unit’s Admin/Log (VHF-FM) (voice) net, and/or the supported maneuver unit’s 

Admin/Log net to coordinate CSS operations and exchange CSS information.

3-95. The battalion continues as a subscriber to the Force FA HQ CF (MSE) (V-FAX) 

network and, as required, the Force FA Ops/F 1, 2, or 3 net, Force FA TA/Intel net or Force 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (27 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

FA Survey net, and Force FA Admin/Log net.

3-96. The battalion monitors the maneuver FS and Ops/Intel (VHF-FM) voice nets, as 

required.

MUTUAL SUPPORT UNIT

3-97. Mutual support between two battalions, normally a direct support and reinforcing 

battalion, means that the computer(s) of one provides tactical FD for the other when that 

unit must displace or has catastrophic equipment failure. The requirement for mutual 

support operations in situations of equipment failure has been minimized due to the 

increasing numbers and capabilities of automated C2 equipment in FA battalions. Internal 

continuity of operations procedures normally allow a battalion to retain tactical and 

technical control of its assets. However catastrophic equipment failure or hasty, survival 

TOC displacement may require reliance on MSU techniques.

3-98. When the reinforcing battalion must take control of the DS battalion firing batteries 

for tactical FD, it will operate on the DS battalion's three FD nets. When the DS battalion 

must provide tactical FD to the reinforcing battalion's firing batteries, it will do so on the 

reinforcing battalion's Ops/F net.

3-99. To establish the required digital link, the two battalions will use either the higher HQ 

Ops/F (1, 2 or 3) net or one of the two battalion’s Ops/F nets to provide the computer-tocomputer link necessary to properly exchange data.

3-100. These techniques could also be used between two GS/GSR battalions. In most cases 

the supporting battalion would assume control of the supported battalion on the supported 

battalion’s Ops/F net. However, the criticality of an ongoing or planned mission involving 

the supported unit may require the supporting unit to assume control using one or more of 

the supported battalion’s FD nets.

3-101. A well thought out alternate data communications plan and a solid FA technical 

rehearsal are crucial to successful mutual support unit operations.

GENERAL SUPPORT REINFORCING MISSION

INTERNAL NETS

3-102. A FA battalion may be assigned a GSR tactical mission (Table 3-6). The internal nets 

are the same as for the DS mission.

EXTERNAL NETS

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (28 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

3-103. External nets change to reflect the responsibility of reinforcing to reinforced. The 

battalion enters the Force FA Cmd (VHF-FM) (voice) net to continue to be responsive to 

Force FA HQ (GS).

3-104. The battalion enters the Force FA Ops/F 1, 2 or 3 (VHF-FM) (data) net to continue to 

be responsive to force FA HQ (GS). Through the force FA CF (MSE) (V-FAX) network, the 

battalion has access to the force FA HQ and other subscribers.

3-105. The battalion enters the Reinforced Bn Cmd (VHF-FM) (voice) net to be 

immediately responsive to the needs of the reinforced artillery unit. The battalion enters the 

Reinforced Bn Ops/F (VHF-FM) (data) net to receive tactical FD from the reinforced 

artillery unit.

3-106. The battalion monitors the Maneuver FS (VHF-FM) and supported unit or force FA 

Admin/Log nets as required.

3-107. If the battalion is part of an FA brigade, it may also operate on some of the FA 

brigade nets as required. The exact communications net requirements will depend on METTTC and unit SOPs.

GENERAL SUPPORT MISSION

INTERNAL NETS

3-108. The FA battalion, with a GS mission, operates on three internal nets (and three asrequired nets) (Table 3-7).

3-109. The Bn Cmd (VHF-FM) (voice) net serves the same purpose as that net for a 

battalion with a DS mission. It has similar subscribers. The Bn Admin/Log (VHF-FM) 

(voice) net serves the same purpose as the DS Bn Admin/Log (VHF-FM)(V) net and has 

similar subscribers. The battalion may also use a Bn TA/Intel (VHF-FM)(D) net similar to 

other battalions.

3-110. The Bn FD 1, 2, and 3 (VHF-FM) (data) nets are not normally all used 

simultaneously due to less traffic flow in the GS role. Initially one net may be used until the 

need arises to activate the other(s). Units must open and allocate additional FD nets (FD 2 

and FD 3) as required.

EXTERNAL NETS

3-111. When GS to a maneuver force as a part of a FA brigade or DIVARTY, the battalion 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (29 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 3 Command and Control

operates on four external nets and two as required nets.

3-112. The Force FA Cmd (VHF-FM) (voice) net is used for C2, tactical operations, 

intelligence, and voice coordination by all force FA elements. The force FA operations 

section is the NCS. Through the Force FA CF MSE (V-FAX) network, the battalion has 

access to the force FA HQ and other subscribers.

3-113. The Force FA Ops/F 1, 2, and 3 (VHF-FM) (data) nets are identical. They are used 

for tactical FD, FS coordination, TA, and met data. The force FA FCE is the NCS.

3-114. As required, the Force FA Admin/Log (VHF-FM) (voice) net is used for 

coordination of all administrative and logistical matters. The force FA ALOC is the NCS.

3-115. The battalion may monitor the Maneuver FS (VHF-FM) voice net.

3-116. If the battalion is part of a FA brigade, it may also, as required, operate on some of 

the FA brigade nets. The exact communications net requirements will depend on the METTTC and unit SOPs.

GENERAL SUPPORT TO THE LIGHT INFANTRY DIVISION

3-117. When supporting a light infantry division, the FA battalion operates on three external 

nets and three as required nets:

● DIVARTY Cmd (VHF-FM) (voice) net.

● DIVARTY Ops/F 1, 2, 3 (VHF-FM) (data) net.

● DIVARTY CF (MSE) (V-FAX) network.

● As required, the Maneuver FS (VHF-FM) (voice) net.

● As required, the DIVARTY TA/Intel (VHF-FM) (voice or data) net.

● As required, the DIVARTY Admin/Log (VHF-FM) (voice) net.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch3.htm (30 of 30) [1/7/2002 1:38:26 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

RDL

Homepage

Table of

Contents

Document

Information

Download

Instructions

Chapter 4

The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

This chapter provides an overview of the FA battalion planning process. Technological 

advancements in weapon lethality, TA, information management, and sensor-to-shooter 

links have required corresponding improvements in the speed and efficiency of the MDMP. 

This applies particularly to FA operations where reaction times are brief and crucial to 

overall mission success. FA battalion planning involves both the MDMP, which includes 

IPB, and the products of the planning process. These products include the FSP, the FASP, 

and the various orders used to disseminate instructions and information. This chapter is 

organized into three major sections: Section I covers the MDMP; Section II is an overview 

of FA IPB; and Section III addresses FA battalion rehearsals.

SECTION I — THE MILITARY DECISION-MAKING PROCESS

4-01. This section provides a general overview of the MDMP process in a situation with 

adequate planning time. The MDMP actions discussed throughout this section do not 

represent a "lock-step" process, but often overlap, occur simultaneously, or in a slightly 

different sequence. During time-constrained planning, planners may abbreviate and combine 

steps, but generally should not omit a step entirely. Also, the battalion commander will 

participate more directly in the process, receiving in-progress updates and providing 

immediate guidance and decisions (vice formal briefings).

4-02. The FA battalion commander and staff should use the MDMP methodology as a guide 

for the battalion’s planning process. They must tailor the MDMP to fit the tactical situation 

and the battalion’s FA tactical mission. In a battalion with a DS mission, they must integrate 

the battalion’s planning process with the supported maneuver unit’s planning process. This 

includes development of a FSP and its accompanying FASP as part of the maneuver unit’s 

OPORD. Figure 4-1 is an example of parallel planning for a DS battalion. (See FM 101-5

for more information on the MDMP and FM 6-20-40 on integration of the DS FA 

battalion’s MDMP with the maneuver MDMP.)

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (1 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (2 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

Figure 4-1. The Fires Planning Process

4-03. R, GSR, or GS FA battalions must also integrate and synchronize their planning 

processes with higher and/or supported maneuver and FA HQ planning. The extent of this 

integration varies with the situation. But often their MDMP may focus more on their 

battalion’s execution of assigned tasks, and they usually do not prepare their FASP as an 

integral document to a maneuver OPORD/FSP.

RECEIVE THE MISSION / MISSION ANALYSIS

4-04. MDMP and product development begin upon mission receipt or the identification of a 

pending mission or situation change. A FA battalion usually receives a mission alert via a 

series of verbal or written warning orders (WARNO) issued by a maneuver HQ, the 

FSCOORD, brigade FSO, force FA HQ, FA brigade HQ, or reinforced FA unit. As soon as 

the WARNO is received, the battalion S3 alerts the battle staff of the pending planning 

process. The XO, as chief of staff, has primary responsibility for supervision of the FA 

battalion’s MDMP process, while the S3 has responsibility for preparation of the FASP, and 

the brigade FSO has responsibility for preparation of the FSP.

4-05. The commander and staff immediately initiate mission analysis with a quick review of 

the WARNO and begin preparing staff estimates by gathering information such as: status of 

all assigned, attached, and supporting units (to include FS sections, met, radar, and 

communication assets), CSS by class of supplies, and major equipment. This initial 

assessment should include rough estimates of survey and PA requirements, ammunition, 

fuel, and other critical items, especially requirements for external support (such as radar). 

Staff officers must "cross-talk" with respective counterparts in supported maneuver/FA units 

and higher FA HQ. The XO and key CSS planners (the S4 and/or S1) may move to the TOC 

to directly participate in the planning.

4-06. The commander, XO, and S3 conduct an initial assessment to optimize the available 

planning and rehearsal time while preserving time for batteries and supporting units to plan, 

rehearse, and prepare. Reverse planning is one method of timeline development. The 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (3 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

battalion must synchronize its MDMP timeline with the maneuver and/or higher FA HQ 

timelines as closely as is possible at this stage.

4-07. The FA battalion commander may go to the maneuver or higher FA HQ to participate 

in their MDMP or receive a mission brief. Before departing, the commander should receive 

initial staff estimates and updates. He must thoroughly understand the battalion’s current 

status, especially constraints and limitations, in order to accurately represent the battalion 

during maneuver/higher FA HQ planning. He should also issue his initial planning guidance 

to the staff. This guidance should focus the staff on mission specifics during mission 

analysis (e.g, CCIR, type of order to produce, critical tasks, rehearsal guidance, R&S, 

ammunition requirements, early movement/ positioning). (If the commander does not go to 

the supported/higher HQ, all this information must be passed into the supported/higher HQ 

MDMP by other means.) The battalion S3 then issues a WARNO to the batteries and 

supporting units to allow parallel planning to begin. This WARNO should include estimated 

times for issuance of the FASP and battalion and battery rehearsal schedules.

4-08. Upon returning, the commander or the S3 will conduct a quick mission brief to the 

staff while the operations NCO passes out copies of applicable documents. The commander 

issues new guidance as necessary and the staff provides the commander brief updates on 

their staff estimates. Timelines are revised, with emphasis on the FASP/FSP production and 

rehearsals. In DS units, FSP issues and brigade FSE-battalion TOC coordination may be 

discussed. Mission analysis and staff estimates continue in preparation for the key product 

— the mission analysis briefing. The following paragraphs discuss the various actions that 

occur during mission analysis.

ANALYZE THE HIGHER HQ ORDER

4-09. The FA battalion commander and his staff continue their analysis of higher HQ orders, 

ensuring they understand the maneuver or higher FA HQs mission and tasks, and the overall 

plan that they support. They identify the battalion’s mission and tasks. The staff must also 

understand the missions assigned to other FA units, because this may impact how they are 

utilized during the battle. The FA commander usually obtains this understanding through 

direct discussion with the maneuver unit or higher FA HQ commander, and through active 

participation in the maneuver/higher FA planning process. The review of the order focuses 

on the commander’s intent, concept of operations, areas of operation and interest, tasks, and 

potential issues involving constraints, restraints, limitations, and anticipated enemy actions 

that may necessitate special attention.

PLAN USE OF AVAILABLE TIME

4-10. Maximizing the time available is critical to the planning process. Some actions, such 

as FIST/COLT deployments or critical fire missions, may occur hours before the main Hhour for the operation. The commander and staff must continuously balance detailed 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (4 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

planning against time available. The battalion S3 can maximize available planning time for 

the batteries and supporting units by sending additional WARNOs as planning develops to 

allow parallel planning, nested rehearsals and training, and completion of precombat checks 

(PCCs). In particular, WARNOs specify key details (time, place, types) for orders 

production, briefings, rehearsals, preparations, and actual operations. As more details 

become available, the S3 should refine the timeline, usually applying the one-third/two-third 

planning rule.

DETERMINE SPECIFIED, IMPLIED, AND ESSENTIAL TASKS

4-11. The FA battalion staff must identify all tasks the unit must accomplish to support the 

supported unit’s mission. The staff extracts from all applicable orders and plans those tasks 

clearly identified (specified) as battalion responsibilities. The staff also reviews all orders 

and plans to identify those tasks that are not specified but are important to mission 

accomplishment (implied tasks). The staff then reviews SOPs and other applicable 

documents, and conducts a macro analysis of the battalion’s role in the operation to identify 

any implied tasks that may be required. See FM 101-5 for additional information on tasks.

Specified Tasks

4-12. Specified tasks are those tasks clearly stated as requirements that the battalion must 

accomplish. Higher HQ orders, plans, or messages usually clearly state the specified tasks in 

the main order, annexes, and/or overlays. These may or may not be essential tasks critical to 

overall mission accomplishment. Some examples of specified tasks:

● Firing SCATMINE beyond the objective to slow retreat of enemy forces.

● Positioning COLTs to observe specified TAIs.

● CCIR that the supported maneuver or higher FA HQ tasked the battalion to answer.

Implied Tasks

4-13. Implied tasks are tasks are those that must be performed to accomplish a specified 

task, but which are not stated in the higher headquarters’ order. Implied tasks are derived 

from a detailed analysis of the order, the enemy situation and courses of action, and the 

terrain. They do not include normal SOP-type activities. Examples of implied tasks are:

● Conducting an airmobile operation or artillery raid to position FA to range a 

particular target or target set.

● Providing a liaison team or FS team to support a nonstandard mission, organization, 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (5 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

or situation.

Essential Tasks

4-14. Once the staff identifies all specified and implied tasks, they determine, in concert 

with the FSEs in DS units, which tasks are essential (EFSTs/EFATs) and identify relative 

task priorities based on maneuver/FA commander guidances. EFSTs are those FS tasks 

essential to the success of the maneuver operation. (e.g, Phase II fires disrupt and delay 

enemy second echelon maneuver brigades from H+1 to H+3 in order to deny access to our 

AO, vicinity Smithsville, until the brigade completes defensive preparations.) EFSTs are 

primarily applicable to DS units and are normally developed by the FSEs as part of the 

maneuver MDMP.

4-15. The FA battalion staff generally concentrates on EFATs - those FA specific tasks 

essential to support certain EFSTs and the maneuver operation. A primary source of EFATS 

is the "method" of an EFST that specifies the target is to be attacked by artillery. A fully 

developed EFAT addresses task, purpose, method, and effects. Tasks specify whether the 

target must be suppressed, neutralized, destroyed, screened, or obscured. The Purpose

describes how the successful engagement of the target contributes to the maneuver 

commander’s plan (taken from the EFST’s purpose). The Method discusses how the FA 

battalion will achieve the task. The staff determines the method for each EFAT during COA 

development. Effects describe what the battalion must accomplish to successfully achieve 

the task.

4-16. An example of an EFAT supporting the previously described EFST might be "Provide 

interdiction fires (DPICM and SCATMINE) at chokepoints in engagement area (EA) Blue, 

between H+1 and H+2 to disrupt the enemy first brigade, cause 10% loss of vehicles, and 

delay it for 30-60 minutes". EFATs may also include:

● Firing smoke in support of a breaching operation.

● Destroying reconnaissance elements in a designated battle sector.

● Providing SEAD for an attack helicopter mission.

● Destroying dismounted infantry when they are most vulnerable (during dismount) or 

at a critical event (breach of a friendly obstacle).

● Conducting counterfire at a critical point in the battle to suppress enemy artillery.

Completed in detail, an EFAT may look like the following examples:

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (6 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

● EFAT 1 - Delay reinforcement by the 2nd echelon tank battalion (146th mechanized 

infantry brigade (MIBR)) for two to four hours.

■ Task: Emplace 400 X 400 and/or 200 X 800 medium density, short duration, 

remote antiarmor minefield.

■ Purpose: Delay or shape 2nd echelon tank battalion arrival into EAs Green or 

Hornet so that enemy echelons can be defeated sequentially.

■ Method: One battery per minefield; one survivability move after 

emplacement.

■ Effects: Enemy 2nd echelon tank battalion delayed and unable to assist lead 

mechanized and tank battalions before we complete their defeat in the EAs.

● EFAT 2 — Prevent or disrupt enemy attempts to breach friendly obstacles in EAs 

Green and Hornet during 146 MIBR attack.

■ Task: Attack enemy targets approaching or attempting to breach the friendly 

obstacles in EAs Green and Hornet.

■ Purpose: Prevent or disrupt enemy breaching attempts so that the 146 MIBR 

cannot penetrate friendly defenses before it is defeated.

■ Method: Battalion four rounds DPICM on company-sized (or larger) targets 

with repeat as necessary. Battery three rounds on smaller targets.

■ Effects: Friendly obstacles are not breached and 146 MIBR attack is defeated.

DEVELOP AN "ARTILLERIZED" IPB

4-17. A cornerstone to the MDMP is the IPB. If parallel planning is to occur, the maneuver 

unit/higher FA HQ S2 must provide the FA battalion with an accurate estimate of how the 

enemy plans to fight (i.e, an IPB). The FA battalion S2 must be proactive in obtaining as 

much information as possible, from the time the unit receives the first WARNO. (This is 

important as the S2 begins providing IPB information during the initial staff estimates 

discussed earlier.) A prioritized requirements list can facilitate this coordination and assist 

the maneuver/higher FA S2 in understanding the battalion’s requirements. FSEs can also 

assist the battalion S2 in obtaining information.

4-18. The FA battalion S2 and staff must "artillerize" the IPB before other staff members 

can finalize their portion of the staff estimates. The artillery IPB process includes refinement 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (7 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

of all provided IPB information and products (e.g, modified combined obstacle overlay 

(MCOO) and situation templates (SITEMPs)) to focus on enemy fires assets, enemy systems 

that pose a threat to the battalion (e.g, air, ground), and survivability/mobility issues. For 

example, the S2 must determine how the effects of climate and weather may impact 

achieved FA ranges and rates of fire (friendly and enemy) as well as the relative impact (Do 

the conditions favor either side?). The analysis must focus on the effects of the factors rather 

than just identification of raw data, as the staff uses the refined IPB in developing their staff 

estimates and FSP/FASP inputs. The S2 also further develops the FA battalion’s PIR, and 

begins incorporating into R&S plans, the PIR that the maneuver/ higher FA HQ tasked the 

battalion to answer. Section II provides a step-by-step discussion of the FA IPB process.

4-19. The IPB products also support the FA battalion’s participation in force targeting 

efforts. While targeting is a combined arms decide, detect, deliver and assess (D3A) effort, 

FA and FS personnel and agencies play integral roles in the process.

4-20. In developing the artillerized IPB, the FA battalion S2 must coordinate his work with 

the targeting personnel/cells in the appropriate maneuver and FA HQ. In a DS FA battalion 

the S2 works closely with the targeting officer in the brigade FSE, while in other FA 

battalions the targeting officer is part of the S2 section, directly assisting the S2 with IPB.

REVIEW AVAILABLE ASSETS

4-21. The staff translates raw facts and data into meaningful capabilities that allow the FA 

commander to clearly picture the battalion’s ability to support the supported commander’s 

intent. For example, 300 M825 smoke rounds may translate to five immediate smoke 

missions, three quick smoke missions and two average large smoke missions (by SOP 

standard planning factors). Time analysis is also critical, as the unit may have enough 

ammunition to fire the two large smoke missions, but not at the same time, or not in 

conjunction with other large fire missions.

4-22. This review includes assessment of the available assets, to include attachments, 

detachments, and supporting FA units as well as command relationships, and their 

implications for C2 and coordination. The staff should identify requirements for additional 

forces, external support, or changes in command relationships as early as possible.

4-23. The staff uses LPB methodology in preparing the CSS/logistic estimate. LPB is a 

continuous analysis of logistic factors affecting mission accomplishment. Emphasis is on 

how the status of CSS will impact on proposed COAs. Logistic planners use these estimates 

to recommend the best COA (that can be supported) and to develop plans to support the 

operations. Key concerns of battalion logistic planners are the status of Class III, IV, and V; 

and the operational status of FA weapons and FD equipment.

DETERMINE CONSTRAINTS

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (8 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

4-24. The staff determines any limitations that might influence task or mission 

accomplishment. These may be passed down from the supported maneuver or higher FA 

HQ, directed by the FA battalion commander, or identified by the battalion staff. In most 

battalions these will be listed in the FASP or its appendices. These limitations may consist 

of both restrictions and constraints as described below. While these are initially used for 

planning purposes and may change, the final restrictions and constraints will be published 

and disseminated in the FSP, FASP, or WARNOs as appropriate. The commander and staff 

may need to address some of the restrictions and constraints during risk assessment and 

COA development.

Restrictions

4-25. Restrictions are directive type limitations that prevent the unit from doing something 

that it may be capable of accomplishing. Examples of restrictions are:

● Restrictions on firing across or near international borders.

● Implementation of any type of restrictive fire measure.

● Restrictive minimum safe distance (MSD) guidance.

● Ammunition restrictions — e.g, prohibition against firing more than 40 percent of 

basic load during a reinforcing mission.

Constraints

4-26. Constraints are frequently resource, terrain, or weather limitations that prevent or 

hinder a unit’s ability to accomplish tasks or missions. Examples of constraints include:

● A critical resource shortage — such as fuel or ammunition (the latter may due to a 

relatively low CSR).

● The number of operational howitzers or launchers in a unit.

● Weapon, communication, or automation equipment problems or personnel shortages 

that result in degraded operations.

● Terrain that limits positioning and movement of firing units.

● Fog or other conditions limiting use of laser-designators.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (9 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

● The hours of daylight available to accomplish a task or operation that relies on 

daylight (or the reverse — darkness for night operations).

IDENTIFY CRITICAL FACTS AND ASSUMPTIONS

4-27. The staff determines critical facts and assumptions that can and will directly affect 

successful accomplishment of the mission. Some facts and assumptions will be contained in 

the maneuver or higher FA HQ orders, plans, or supporting documents. The staff verifies 

these and identifies others during mission analysis. The staff then lists all critical facts and 

assumptions for use during course of action development.

4-28. Facts are statements of known data concerning both the enemy and friendly situations. 

They include staff projections and assessments of tangible and intangible factors, such as, 

projection of Class V stockages and projections of forecasted replacement flow.

4-29. Assumptions are estimates that are developed when facts are not available. 

Assumptions must meet the tests of validity and necessity. An example of a valid 

assumption is "The enemy will use chemical weapons." If the enemy does use chemical 

weapons then the unit is prepared and can still accomplish the mission. Necessity defines 

whether or not the assumption is used in development of the plan. If the assumption is not 

necessary or appropriate, then it should not be considered. Assumptions are replaced with 

facts as soon as possible.

CONDUCT RISK ASSESSMENT

4-30. The commander and staff identify risk hazards and make an initial assessment of the 

risk level for each hazard (e.g, radiation exposure guidance, immediate action guidance 

[receiving counterfire], MOPP-level operations, radar cueing scheduling). The battalion S2 

can provide input on enemy artillery vulnerabilities to optimize desired effects on the 

enemy, which could reduce friendly risk if engaged. The commander, with staff input, 

determines whether or not the level of risk is acceptable and provides guidance as necessary 

on actions to reduce the level of risk or advising higher HQ of the situation. Higher HQ may 

dictate degree of risk. (See FM 101-5 for additional guidance).

DETERMINE INITIAL COMMANDER’S CRITICAL INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS

4-31. CCIR identify information the commander needs to visualize the battlefield, make key 

decisions, and determine or validate COAs. CCIR are normally expressed as PIR 

(information about the enemy), essential elements of friendly information (EEFI) - 

information needed to protect friendly forces from the enemy’s information gathering 

systems, and friendly forces information requirements (FFIR) - information about the 

capabilities of his or adjacent units. CCIR are often contained in the higher HQ orders or 

plans, and may be specified tasks requiring battalion action.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (10 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

4-32. The battalion commander may expand the CCIR listed in higher HQ or supported 

unit’s plan in order to accomplish his mission. The commander and staff begin identifying 

all information requirements (IR) and CCIR upon receipt of the WARNO so that the staff 

can quickly initiate actions and coordination as necessary. (The commander, based on staff 

recommendations, determines which IR are CCIR.)

4-33. Further identification and refinement occurs during mission analysis, especially the 

"artillerized" IPB and wargaming processes. The FA commander and staff should chose 

CCIR that parallel the supported commander’s (and/or higher FA HQ) and drives decisions 

at decision points. CCIR should be limited to a reasonable number to avoid loss of focus and 

overburdening staffs and collection assets. See FM 34-8-2, Intelligence Officer’s Handbook, 

for additional information on CCIR.

DETERMINE THE INITIAL RECONNAISSANCE PLAN

4-34. The S3 and S2 review the battalion’s specified and implied R&S tasks that support 

higher HQ R&S plans. This includes any PIR or IR tasked to the battalion. Based on the 

refined IPB, PIR, and IR, the S3, S2, and the commander may identify gaps in the 

intelligence collection plan of the supported unit (and/or higher FA HQ). The S3 provides 

this information to the appropriate maneuver/FA HQ S3 (or FSE) for inclusion in the higher 

HQ’s R&S plan. The S3 and S2 also identify R&S requirements necessary to support the FA 

battalion’s force protection plans. The S3 and S2 develop a battalion R&S plan utilizing 

available collection assets (e.g, survey, ammunition sections, radars, firing units, FOs, 

FISTs, COLTs/Strikers, and FSOs). Battalion R&S requirements that are beyond the 

battalion’s resources are passed to the appropriate maneuver/FA HQ for coordination and 

inclusion into higher R&S plans.

WRITE THE RESTATED MISSION

4-35. The battalion S3 and staff prepare a proposed restated mission for the commander’s 

approval or modification. It should provide precise terms defining who, what, when, where, 

and why. Of the five, the commander and staff must especially understand the what and 

why, as these aid them in anticipating and addressing the many changes that occur in fluid 

combat situations and in understanding the timing and effects issues.

4-36. The restated mission should be more than a general statement of the battalion’s FA 

tactical mission "provide DS FA fires". It should highlight one or more critical aspects of 

that support or the commander’s priorities. An example is "On D-day, H-hour, 1/12 FA 

provides DS fires to first brigade, to weaken enemy forward defenses (10 minute 

preparation); to support the main attack battalion (close support fires); and to suppress or 

destroy enemy FA HPTs during final assault (counterfire program/critical friendly zone 

(CFZ) Wings), in support of the attack to seize and hold Objective Tiger. O/O 1/12 FA 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (11 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

provides GS fires (primarily reactive counterfire against enemy mortars and FA in call-forfire zone (CFFZ) Halo) to 1st Division, for approximately two hours, to support exploitation 

beyond phase line Maple by 2nd brigade".

4-37. The restated mission should not become a long list of all EFATs (they belong in 

paragraph 3a, Concept of Operations). Anticipate identification of additional EFATs during 

COA development, wargaming, and rehearsal.

CONDUCT A MISSION ANALYSIS BRIEFING

4-38. The mission analysis briefing should not be a unit readiness briefing to the 

commander. The staff must know the status of the battalion and supporting units and brief 

relevant information as it applies to the situation. The staff should develop standardized 

charts to monitor and consolidate this type of data to assist the commander in obtaining a 

quick snapshot of his unit. Time permitting, the staff should brief the commander on its 

mission analysis using the following format:

● XO — Introduction, Purpose, and Agenda.

● S2 — Abbreviated IBP.

■ Weather and its impact on FA operations.

■ Terrain - MCOO, mobility corridors, avenues of approach (AOA).

■ Evaluation of threat capabilities to impact on the FA battalion’s operations.

■ SITEMPs (most probable and most dangerous).

■ Enemy assets and vulnerabilities.

■ Recommended CCIR — PIR, EEFI, FFIR.

● S3 — Results of mission analysis.

■ Current combat power and situation of units.

■ Current and projected task organization.

■ Mission and commander’s intent - two levels up.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (12 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

■ Specified, implied, and essential tasks (EFATs and EFSTs).

■ Limitations (constraints and restrictions).

■ Recommended mission statement.

■ Additional assets required.

■ Requests for information (RFI).

■ Results of risk analysis.

● S4 — Logistic status.

■ Current status of Class I (water [W]), III, and V.

■ Current and projected maintenance status.

■ Critical shortages or concerns.

● S1 — Personnel status.

■ Current and projected personnel status.

■ Medical status (assets available and major health issues).

■ Critical shortages.

● S6 — Communications status.

■ Current and projected maintenance status.

■ Status of communications and automation systems (FM, MSE, WAN/LAN).

■ Critical shortages.

● XO — Timeline review, to include rehearsal schedule and time hack.

● Commander — FA commander’s initial guidance.

APPROVE THE RESTATED MISSION

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (13 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

4-39. Immediately after the mission analysis briefing, the commander should approve a 

restated mission. This can be the staff’s recommended restated mission, a modified version, 

or one that the commander has developed himself. Once approved, the restated mission 

becomes the battalion’s mission.

DEVELOP THE INITIAL FA COMMANDER’S INTENT

4-40. After reviewing the mission analysis briefing and approving the restated mission, the 

commander finalizes his intent statement. The FA commander’s intent is his personal 

expression (in broad terms) of:

● The critical tasks to be executed (e.g, counterfire, destroy dismounts, cover obstacles, 

attrit/disrupt first echelon).

● The purpose of the FA fires in support of the supported force (e.g, delay second 

echelon to allow attrition of first echelon, protect the force with counterfire to allow 

freedom of maneuver).

● The methods used by the FA battalion to assist the supported force in achieving the 

effects (e.g, initially position observers and firing units forward to delay lead 

elements with dual purpose, improved conventional munitions (DPICM) fires, 

destroy C2 elements with Copperhead fires, fire SCATMINE and smoke to delay and 

disrupt the second echelon).

● The effects or criteria for success (e.g, enemy unable to mass his direct and indirect 

fires against the brigade and we are in position to support the follow-on mission).

4-41. The FA commander’s intent links his vision of the end state and the FA concept of 

operations (details of the "how to" written by the staff). It also provides linkage with the 

maneuver and higher FA HQ commanders’ intent for fires.

ISSUE THE COMMANDER’S GUIDANCE

4-42. After the commander approves or issues the restated mission and states his intent, he 

must provide additional planning guidance to the staff. The intent of the commander's 

guidance is to establish guidelines and implant his vision of the operation into the minds of 

his staff to enable them to plan the FA operations consistent with his and the supported 

commander’s (and/or higher FA HQ) intentions. When time is not significantly limited, this 

guidance can be general in nature, therefore, providing the staff maximum latitude. As time 

becomes more constrained, this guidance must be more specific and directive. Commander's 

guidance should address (but not be limited to) the following:

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (14 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

● Priority of EFATs, guidance on methods to accomplish each, and clarification on 

effects for each.

● COA development guidance — to include number of friendly FA COAs and enemy 

FS COAs to consider and decisive points (especially those where he expects fires to 

play a critical role).

● CSS priorities.

● Type of order to prepare.

● CCIR and RFI.

● Positioning priorities and deception guidance.

● Munitions mix (CCLs) and distribution.

● C2 and liaison arrangements.

● Radio retrans guidance.

● Survey and R&S priorities and guidance.

● Risk guidance.

● Timeline guidance.

● Rehearsal guidance. (See Section III for additional information.)

ISSUE A WARNING ORDER

4-43. Immediately after the commander gives his guidance, the S3 will send the batteries 

and supporting units a WARNO that contains, as a minimum:

● Intelligence update.

● The restated mission.

● AO and known mobility/countermobility information.

● The FA commander’s intent, and that of the supported maneuver commander and the 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (15 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

FA/maneuver commanders two levels up.

● Prioritized EFATs and any other key priorities.

● Timeline estimates — planning/rehearsal/execution.

● CCIR.

● Risk guidance and survivability guidance.

● Reconnaissance.

● Guidance on rehearsals.

● Precombat inspection (PCI)/PCC priorities.

● Other known details.

REVIEW FACTS AND ASSUMPTIONS

4-44. During the decision-making process, the commander and staff must periodically 

review all available facts and assumptions. New facts may alter requirements and analysis of 

the mission. Assumptions may have become facts or they may have become invalid. 

Whenever the facts or assumptions change, the commander and staff must assess the impact 

of these changes on the plan and make the necessary adjustments.

COA DEVELOPMENT

4-45. In a DS FA battalion, the FSCOORD and FS personnel participate in the maneuver 

unit COA development and FA fire planning is an integrated part of the maneuver MDMP. 

In all FA units, the staff analyzes possible FA COAs to determine the best COA to support 

the higher HQ mission. This effort often begins when the first WARNO is received. Each 

FA COA must be feasible (able to be accomplished with current or projected resources), 

acceptable (contains acceptable levels of risk), suitable (consistent with the commander's 

guidance and intent), distinguishable (if more then one), and complete (answers who, what, 

when, where, why, and how).

● Who - The type of unit supported.

● What - The type of operation supported and EFATs for the battalion.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (16 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

● When - The time action will begin or must be completed by (e.g, on-order, D-day, Hhour, or specific DTG for artillery FS activities).

● Where - The assigned AO, such as PAs and routes, in the supported unit sector.

● How - The method the FA battalion will use to conduct or execute its EFATs in 

support of the operation.

● Why - The purpose of FA fires, and/or fires in general, in support of the mission.

4-46. The COAs that a FA battalion will develop and evaluate will address the various 

methods or options that the FA unit has to accomplish its mission and tasks. These may 

include different movement plans, tactical or technical FD controls (fire mission routing, 

sensor-to-shooter links, as examples), task allocations, positioning, logistics plans, or other 

aspects of FA operations. The FA battalion is not evaluating the maneuver or force FA HQ 

COAs, but rather its ability to support the operation. One technique for developing a FA 

COA includes:

● Review EFSTs and supporting EFATs.

● Task subordinate units (who, what, when, where, why — and how, if time 

constrained).

● Determine command post and trains configuration.

● Address fundamentals of the battlefield operating systems (BOS) (for CSS, it could 

be the tenets of CSS; for FA, it could be the five requirements for accurate, predicted 

fire).

● Task organic sections (usually part of the headquarters element). Again, indicate the 

who, what, where, when, and why.

● Graphically and/or verbally explain the COA, ensuring every specified and implied 

task is accounted for.

ANALYZE RELATIVE COMBAT POWER, FACTS, AND ASSUMPTIONS

4-47. First, the S2 focuses on artillery ratios to help determine what assets are needed to 

accomplish EFATs. By analyzing FA ratios and determining and comparing each force’s FA 

strength and weakness as function of combat power, the staff can gain some insight into 

friendly FA capabilities in support of the operation. The analysis can also reveal what FA 

operation may be possible from both a friendly and an enemy perspective and FA 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (17 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

vulnerabilities (friendly and enemy). (The FS estimate conducted by the FSE or supported 

unit should be the start point or extension for this analysis. The FA S2 must also understand 

the overall relative combat power assessment prepared by supported and higher HQ.)

GENERATE OPTIONS

4-48. Based on this analysis and the FA commander’s guidance, the staff generates options 

for FA COA development in support of the mission. Brainstorming is the preferred 

technique for generating options. Once the staff has explored various concepts, they should 

examine each to determine if it satisfies COA selection criteria.

ARRAY INITIAL FORCES

4-49. The S3 and S2 should integrate the SITEMP into the COA development. The S3 

overlays the SITEMP (see Section II for information on SITEMP) on the operations map 

and deconflicts positioning of firing units, critical nodes, and radar positions given the 

impending situation. The S3 ensures that PAs are not on enemy AOAs, regimental 

objectives, or other conflicting areas. It is very difficult to position out of range of the 

threat’s artillery so the S3 should consider positioning units in areas that will cause artillery 

delivery problems for the enemy’s artillery systems (e.g, sight to crest, intervening crest, and 

traverse limit problems). The staff conducts this process to eliminate PAs that do not meet 

the above criteria. Given the remaining PAs, the S3 can now narrow the focus of FA COAs 

to support the mission.

DEVELOP THE SCHEME OF MANEUVER (MOVEMENT PLANS)

4-50. The S3 section posts the MCOO on the operations map underneath the operations 

graphics overlay. The O&I section plots the HPTs or critical target areas (areas where the 

supported commander plans to engage HPTs, TAIs, chokepoints, NAIs, trigger points, etc.) 

by phase based on the HPTL, fire plans, templates, etc. The BAO and/or FDC provides the 

S3 with ammunition information (types and quantities of propellants, projectiles, rockets, 

missiles) for the upcoming mission. With this information the S3 and BAO determine which 

munitions mix is available in the greatest amounts. The S3 uses the range of the greatest 

percentage of propellant/shell (rocket/missile) mix available to the battalion to determine the 

planning range. This process avoids a common pitfall--using the wrong planning range to 

choose PAs. This information, passed through FSO channels, also provides the maneuver 

commander with the predominant range capability of his FS systems.

4-51. Using the correct planning range, the S3 draws range fans starting from the HPTs or 

critical target areas back to the proposed PAs. All PAs on the MCOO that are inside these 

range fans are identified as optimal PAs to engage HPTs or critical target areas. PAs outside 

of the range fans are identified as less than optimal. Units in less than optimal PAs will be 

required to expend propellants and munitions that are in short supply (e.g, rocket assisted 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (18 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

projectiles [RAP]) to range the target area. During this process the FDO refines the optimal 

ranges given the conditions of accurate predicted fires. The FDO must ensure he addresses 

issues of powder temperature, gun above or below target, high angle fire requirements, and 

met data.

4-52. Once the S3 identifies the optimal PAs for each target area, by phase, he copies them 

onto the operations overlay and gives the MCOO back to the S2. There are times when the 

S3 must use less than optimal PAs and he does so understanding the constraints of those 

PAs. The FDO looks at each PA and identifies any technical fire delivery issues (e.g, site to 

crest, intervening crest, traverse limits) that must be resolved. When any of these issues are 

identified, the FDO should shoot a "dry" mission in the computer using data from the PA to 

determine if the identified concerns are valid. If the S3 directs occupation of any of these 

PAs, the FDO addresses these identified issues with the battery FDC during the battalion FA 

technical rehearsal.

4-53. The S3 (and brigade FSO) should perform a quality control check of the FA/FS 

scheme of maneuver to ensure it addresses:

● Battery/TOC/CSS movement plans, at least into primary positions.

● Alternate and supplementary positions.

● Azimuths of fire and planning range fans.

● EFST/EFAT requirements and key subordinate tasks.

● R&S requirements (radar support and coverage areas).

● Survey, met, engineer, and ADA support.

● C2 and CSS plans.

● Priorities of support.

EXAMINE C2 CONSIDERATIONS

4-54. The S3 examines C2 considerations that will influence support to the supported unit 

(e.g, FSCMs, radar zones, retrans stations, establishment of quickfire channel).

PREPARE COA STATEMENTS AND SKETCHES

4-55. The S3 prepares a COA statement and supporting sketch (containing PAs, movement 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (19 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

plan, FSCMs, planning range fans, radar coverage, listing of EFATs, etc.) for each possible 

FA COA. Together, the statement and sketch should cover who, what, when, where, how, 

why, and any significant risks. At this point, the S3 should have well defined EFATs, each 

containing a specific task, its purpose, method of accomplishment, and task effects (desired 

results).

BRIEF COMMANDER AND REFINE COA

4-56. After the COAs have been developed, they are briefed to the commander for review. 

After the briefings the commander gives any additional guidance. If he rejects all COAs, the 

staff must begin again. If he accepts one or more of the COAs, they begin the wargaming 

process. The COA briefing may include:

● Update intelligence.

● Possible enemy employment of FA assets (SITEMP).

● The restated mission.

● The supported commander’s intent for FS/FA.

● The COA statement and sketch.

● The rationale for each COA.

COURSES OF ACTION ANALYSIS (WARGAME)

4-57. COA analysis is wargaming the COA(s). It is a critical step that ensures the 

development of a fully integrated and synchronized support plan. In DS FA units, the 

FSCOORD/FSOs will participate in the supported unit’s wargaming process. The steps of 

the wargame process are:

● Gather the tools, materials, data, and draft event template.

● List all friendly forces (display FA units by platoons or batteries).

● List assumptions, to include higher HQ.

● List EFSTs/EFATs and known decision points.

● Determine evaluation criteria to measure the relative effectiveness and efficiency 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (20 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

(e.g, list EFSTs/EFATs, their purpose, method used to accomplish the tasks, and 

desired effects).

● Select the wargame method and a recording technique (see FM 101-5).

● Wargame the battle with emphasis on FA fires (use the procedures in the paragraphs 

below).

WARGAMING

4-58. Wargaming the COAs is critical to ensure the battalion can provide effective fires in 

support of the mission. The wargaming process is as follows:

Create a DST

4-59. Create a DST that relates the details of the event template to decision points that are of 

significance to the battalion. (A maneuver unit/higher FA HQ DST may assist the FA 

battalion, especially DS units.) This is accomplished by overlaying the event template on the 

operations graphic to depict time phase lines (TPLs) on the battlefield (see Section II for 

additional information on event template/TPLs refinement). The S3 then lists the EFATs for 

the battalion. These may be battalion mass missions, special munitions missions, unit 

movements, reconnaissance, or survey emplacement. The DST does not dictate decisions to 

the S3, but rather identifies critical events and threat activities relative to time and location 

that may require tactical decisions. The DST provides a structured basis for using 

experience and judgment to reduce battlefield uncertainties.

Wargame Each EFAT

4-60. Wargame each EFAT in order. The S2 discusses timing of the battle off his TPLs, the 

S3 addresses how the EFAT accomplishes the EFSTs, and the FDO briefs mission execution 

times (time of flight, shift times, first round to last). The wargame sessions may cover the 

entire operation or a particular phase.

Wargame the Fire Plan(s)

4-61. Wargame the fire plan(s) to determine if they are executable. The S2 describes what 

the enemy is doing and their rate of march, the S3 adds the type of target, the FA impact 

area (front, center, or rear of formation) and the number of rounds and volleys required. The 

FDO then states whether or not the battalion is laid on the target, who will fire the mission, 

shift time required, time of flight, and total time to execute the mission. It is critical that 

honest times, based on the unit’s current level of training and not standard times from MTP 

manuals, are used. Given this information and using TPLs, place a decision point (star) on 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (21 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

the operations graphic that represents the last time on the battlefield, when the enemy 

reaches this point, the FA can achieve its greatest effects. Two points are worth 

emphasizing:

● First, decision points established by the FA battalion in the forward battle area should 

correspond to the trigger points of the supported unit that is watching the decision 

point, unless the FA battalion has organic assets observing the area. For DS FA units, 

the decision points may be the same as those of the supported maneuver unit, or they 

may be decision points unique to the FA battalion.

● Second, as the S2 identifies threat forces at or near the decision points he alerts the 

S3 and FDO, who ensure the FA battalion is prepared to fire any missions tied to the 

decision points. FSOs should know the mission execution times of all supporting 

battalions.

Determine Other FA Decision Points

4-62. Use the FA battalion DST to determine decision points for critical FA events such as 

unit movements, special munitions missions, radar cueing, CSS operations, etc. In the same 

manner as described above, the S3 and the staff wargame the battle. They determine where 

to place decision points that will trigger specific critical events. For example, the S3 could 

establish a decision point to cue the radar to observe a breaching operation when lead 

elements of the breach force report their location at a certain point.

Display Decision Points on Operations Overlay

4-63. Graphically depict each decision point on the operations overlay. This will assist in 

focusing the staff on critical events that must occur during the battle. Time permitting, the 

staff may develop a FASM (see Appendix A for example) that addresses by unit, each task 

they are required to execute (usually created after the commander’s decision on COA 

selection).

COA COMPARISON

4-64. After analyzing each COA, the S3 evaluates how each COA will meet certain 

predetermined criteria. The criteria should be fairly explicit, quantifiable, and unique to the 

situation. Initially evaluate each COA against the criteria, not each other, to prevent bias. 

Clearly identify the criteria standards prior to the comparison. (e.g, If the COAs require 2, 3, 

and 6 moves respectively are they rated 1, 2, and 3 or 1, 1, and 3?) The comparison 

ultimately leads to a staff recommendation of one COA to the commander. Table 4-1 is an 

example of a COA comparison matrix.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (22 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

Table 4-1. COA Comparison Matrix (Example)

CRITERIA WEIGHT COA 1 COA 2 COA 3

Accomplishment of EFATs, especially #1,2, & 5 4 1 = (4) 3 = (12) 2 = (8)

Logistical resupply — Class V & III 3 2 = (6) 3 = (9) 1 = (3)

FA maneuver — Min of 2 Btrys available - Ph I & 

IV 3 2 = (6) 1 = (3) 3 = (9)

C2 — especially during EFATs #1, 2 & 5 3 1 = (3) 3 = (9) 2 = (6)

Counterfire operations — during Phases I & IV 2 3 = (6) 2 = (4) 1 = (2)

Simplicity — fewest moves 3 1 = (3) 2 = (6) 3 = (9)

Survey operations — requirements for hasty survey 1 1 = (1) 2 = (2) 3 = (3)

Met operations — distance and time validity 1 2 = (2) 1 = (1) 3 = (3)

Force protection — exposure to ground attack 3 1 = (3) 3 = (9) 2 = (6)

Future operations — tubes, critical ammo, PAs 2 3 = (6) 2 = (4) 1 = (2)

Numerical Total

Weighted Total

1 (lower) = better

17

(40)

22

(59)

21

(51)

COA APPROVAL

4-65. The commander may agree with the recommendation, modify it, or select another. 

Once the commander makes his selection, the staff immediately issues a WARNO with 

essential information so batteries and supporting units can refine their plans.

FSP / FASP PRODUCTION

4-66. Based on the commander’s selected COA and final guidance, the units finalize 

schedules of fires and prepare the FSPs and FASPs as addressed below. Once approved by 

the commander(s), the FSP and/or FASP are disseminated, rehearsed, and executed. Section 

III addresses rehearsals in more detail.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (23 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

SCHEDULING FIRES

4-67. The FA fire planning process is a cooperative effort involving close coordination 

between personnel in FSEs and FA TOCs. The FA battalion S3 usually directs the final 

stages of the process and the preparation of approved FA fire plans and schedules as he has 

the most current and anticipated status of the firing units. The final approving authority is 

usually the supported maneuver commander or FSCOORD, or in some cases, the FA 

commander responsible for a specific FA mission.

4-68. In a DS/R FA battalion scenario, the FSEs, on the basis of the maneuver commander's 

guidance for fires, plan and tentatively schedule targets to be fired by the FA units. 

Ultimately, the DS FA battalion S3, working with the brigade FSO and the reinforcing unit 

S3 (when applicable), refines all of the requested fires into one or more FA fire plans. The 

fire plan(s) includes all on-call and scheduled individual targets, groups, series, programs, 

preparations, counterpreparations, and/or other targets or schedules of fires that must be 

fired at a specific time or event and/or in a predetermined time pattern. Each fire plan may 

support a particular plan, phase, event, or a specific FA task.

4-69. Fire planning and scheduling for GSR/GS units may primarily be done by the higher 

FA HQ as part of the overall fire planning effort. GSR/GS units may receive completed fire 

plans and schedules assigning their responsibilities. However, they may also be given 

targeting data and specific missions or tasks, and required to develop their own fire plans 

and schedules. An example would be a GS FA battalion given the mission to fire a SEAD 

program in a designated zone as part of a deep attack helicopter operation. The FA brigade 

HQ may give the battalion the mission and general guidance. The battalion then conducts 

the target development and coordination with the aviation brigade or attack helicopter 

battalion FSE to prepare the program and establish a trigger or method of fire control.

4-70. Appendix B addresses specific scheduling techniques, considerations, and definitions 

of scheduling terms. While the appendix primarily addresses manual targeting and fire 

planning, much of the information is also applicable to fire planning in general and must be 

read to fully understand automated fire planning.

FIRE SUPPORT PLAN

4-71. The FSP, developed in the FSE, outlines the integration and synchronization of all FS 

assets into the scheme of maneuver. A simple FSP may consist of only the fires portion of 

the concept of operations subparagraph in the maneuver OPORD and the FS subparagraph 

(See Figure 4-2). The FS subparagraph includes a section for each FS agency involved in 

the operation. The appropriate FS representatives (air force, naval, etc.) prepare their input.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (24 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

Figure 4-2. Elements of a Fire Support Plan

4-72. If the FSP requires amplification that is too extensive for the FS sub-paragraph, the 

FSE publishes a FS annex to the maneuver OPORD. The combined information in the 

fires/FS subparagraphs, FS annex, and any FS related enclosures or appendices then 

constitute the FSP. The FSP may include a FASP as an appendix to the FS annex. For 

detailed information on the FSP refer to FM 6-20-30, FM 6-20-40, or FM 6-71.

FIELD ARTILLERY SUPPORT PLAN

4-73. The FASP is a tactical plan for employing all organic, assigned, attached, and 

supporting FA assets. It disseminates the maneuver/FA commander’s guidance, assigns 

responsibilities for FA tasks (such as EFATs), and outlines the commander’s concepts for 

FA fires, movement, C2, TA, CSS, and force protection. The FASP is one of the products of 

the battalion’s MDMP. A FA battalion prepares one of two basic types of FASPs depending 

on its FA tactical mission.

DS BATTALION FASP

4-74. A DS FA battalion prepares a comprehensive FASP that covers the employment of all

FA assets in support of a maneuver operation, to include reinforcing units, attached radars, 

or other FA assets. The battalion develops the FASP as part of the larger combined arms 

MDMP process. The FASP is based primarily on the supported maneuver and FA battalion 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (25 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

commanders’ guidance and intent for fires, the scheme of maneuver, the concept for fires, 

and higher HQ OPORDs, FSPs, FASPs, and guidance. The DS battalion FASP usually 

becomes an appendix to the FS annex in the maneuver OPLAN/OPORD. Thus the DS 

battalion is integrally involved in development of both EFSTs and EFATs.

4-75. The DS FA commander, as both the FSCOORD and the force FA commander, must 

ensure that the FSO and the FA battalion S3 closely coordinate preparation of the FSP and 

the FASP. The FA battalion S2 coordinates IPB, TA, and targeting with the targeting officer 

in the FSE and with the maneuver S2. The S6, S1, and S4 also coordinate key aspects of 

their functional areas with their maneuver staff counterparts, and the brigade FSE as 

appropriate. The commander and staff of a reinforcing FA unit will also participate closely 

in the FASP development.

R/GSR/GS BATTALION FASP

4-76. A FA battalion with a R mission may develop a joint FASP with the DS battalion or 

develop an independent FASP, in a parallel process synchronized with the DS battalion’s 

MDMP. A FA battalion with a GSR, or GS mission usually develops its own FASP in a 

parallel process coordinated with the MDMP of the supported FA unit or higher FA HQ. 

This type of FASP generally addresses only battalion unique requirements and directives not 

covered in the FASP of the supported or higher FA HQ or unit SOP. It also provides the FA 

commander’s concept, intent, and guidance for execution of the battalion’s mission. It is not 

published as part of a maneuver OPORD.

4-77. R, GSR, or GS FA battalion may not need to publish a full FASP. If the reinforced or 

higher FA HQ FASP is detailed enough, a R, GSR, or GS battalion may issue only a 

FRAGO that provides the limited additional information needed. This is possible when the 

commander and staff of a R, GSR, or GS unit directly participate in the preparation of the 

FASP prepared by a DS battalion, FA brigade, DIVARTY, or Corps Arty.

FASP PREPARATION AND DISSEMINATION

4-78. The FA battalion S3 and the operations section have primary responsibility for 

preparation and dissemination of the FASP. All staff sections provide/prepare their input as 

outlined in unit SOP. The XO ensures staff coordination and quality control, and encourages 

cross-talk between internal and external staff elements during the process.

4-79. A FA battalion can use any of several formats to include: a formal, five-paragraph 

field order format, a FASM, FRAGOs, or oral orders, depending on time available. Newer 

C2 systems, such as AFATDS and MCS, allow automated preparation and dissemination of 

the FASP. See Appendix A for information on FASP content and a description of the 

FASM.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (26 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

4-80. The FA battalion disseminates copies of the FASP to all subordinate and reinforcing 

FA units, any attached or supporting elements, and force FA HQ. The unit may supplement 

the FASP with verbal updates or FRAGOs detailing changes, additions, etc.

SUMMARY

4-81. The following table provides an overview of the FA battalion MDMP.

Table 4-2. FA BN Planning Process

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (27 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

Table 4-2. FA BN Planning Process (Continued)

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (28 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

* An example of a combined HPTL/AGM/TSS/Collection Plan is provided in Figure 4-3. 

This is only an example of one format that can be used to display HPTL, AGM, and TSS 

information.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (29 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

Figure 4-3. HPTL/AGM/TSS/Collection Plan

SECTION II — FA INTELLIGENCE PREPARATION OF THE BATTLEFIELD

4-82. This section discusses how to conduct an FA IPB and to incorporate it into the 

battalion’s MDMP. The S2 must expand the supported maneuver unit and/or higher FA HQ 

IPB products, particularly the threat data, to focus on survivability and mobility issues for 

the FA battalion. The S2 must answer, "How can the threat and terrain affect my FA unit?" 

FM 34-130, Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield, contains detailed IPB information.

4-83. The FA battalion S2’s order of battle studies must focus on:

● Threat Maneuver Force Doctrine

■ Enemy task organization to include signature items (e.g, equipment that 

uniquely identifies the type of enemy force or the main effort).

■ Numbers and capabilities of vehicles by type (e.g, light vs. heavy, 

amphibious, gasoline vs. diesel, caliber/range).

■ Formations used.

■ Movement rates: Day, night, MBA, pre-battle, battle, etc.

■ Depth and width of the brigade (or regiment), battalion, and company 

(battery) in both offense and defense.

■ The threat SOF or specialized threat forces present to the FA battalion and 

rear area operations.

■ Threat air assets (fixed/rotary-wing), doctrine, capabilities, and 

vulnerabilities.

● Threat Artillery Doctrine and Capabilities

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (30 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

■ Weapon types and the number of tubes per battalion.

■ Capabilities of each system: Ammunition, ranges, rates of fire.

■ Dispositions: Deployment considerations, distances between firing units and 

specific artillery groupings.

■ Counterfire capability: Radars, ranges, typical locations, time from acquisition 

of incoming rounds to time counterfire mission is fired.

■ Enemy EW and reconnaissance threat to friendly counterfire radars: Detection 

capability, jamming capability.

■ Types of fire by maneuver phase: What type of indirect fires will the enemy 

conduct during each maneuver phase?

● Threat Air Defense Artillery Doctrine

■ Numbers and capabilities by echelon.

■ Disposition: Deployment on the battlefield.

■ Air phases of support.

STEPS IN FA IPB PROCESS

DEFINE THE BATTLEFIELD ENVIRONMENT

4-84. The battlefield environment, to include the AO and area of interest (AOI), is normally 

provided to the FA battalion S2 by either the supported maneuver unit or the higher FA HQ. 

The S2, together with the commander and S3, reviews the identified AO and AOI to 

determine if changes should be recommended based on the battalion’s mission. As an 

example, if enemy FA can range the supported maneuver zone or the FA battalion from just 

beyond the maneuver/higher FA AOI, the FA battalion commander want to request an 

expansion of the AOI to include those enemy indirect fire assets that pose a significant 

threat. The AO and AOI, as defined by the commander, focus the S2’s efforts, R&S, and 

RDO development.

DESCRIBE THE BATTLEFIELD EFFECTS

4-85. This step includes weather analysis; MCOO; observation, cover, and concealment; 

AOAs, obstacles, and key terrain; and FA specific considerations. The supported unit or 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (31 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

higher FA HQ normally provides the products that describe the battlefield effects. The FA 

battalion S2 must refine all products to accurately reflect the battalion’s AO and AOI.

4-86. The defining product in this step is the MCOO (Figure 4-4). It is a graphic depiction of 

an in-depth study of the battlefield area incorporating terrain and weather. Refinement of the 

MCOO must:

● Analyze terrain from an FA perspective.

● Determine intervisibility lines.

● Identify avenues of approach and potential PAs.

● Identify key and decisive terrain.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (32 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

Figure 4-4. Modified Combined Obstacle Overlay

Analyze Terrain

4-87. Identify terrain that may cause firing problems. The FA definitions for different types 

of terrain are:

● SEVERELY RESTRICTED (green crosshatch marks) - causes extreme difficulty 

for weapon emplacement and firing.

● RESTRICTED (green single-hatch marks) - hinders emplacement and firing to a 

lesser degree and probably requires a detailed reconnaissance effort to locate suitable 

positions.

● UNRESTRICTED - is suitable for unit positioning.

4-88. To determine SEVERELY RESTRICTED, RESTRICTED and UNRESTRICTED 

areas, the FA battalion S2 analyzes:

● Elevation.

● Slope.

● Soil composition.

● Mobility problems.

Determine Intervisibility Lines

4-89. The second step is to graphically depict the areas that deny intervisibility between 

opposing forces on the same overlay. Draw intervisibility lines where the terrain dictates. 

An intervisibility line is an area on the battlefield that opposing forces cannot observe 

beyond. Some examples include ridgelines, wadi systems, finger off a ridge, forested areas, 

etc. Intervisibility lines are particularly important when looking for PAs that are hidden 

from enemy AOAs. Following a map reconnaissance, the S2 can coordinate with the 

maneuver brigade or higher FA HQ for use of their stereoscope and satellite photography to 

further analyze the terrain. Most brigade level S2s are issued a computer assisted terrain 

analysis model called "Terra-Base," which is helpful in determining intervisibility lines.

Identify Avenues of Approach

4-90. The third step is to identify and graphically depict air and ground AOAs on the 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (33 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

MCOO overlay. Use the standard symbols in FM 34-130. Refine the higher or supported 

HQ IPB products that usually depict brigade and division-sized AOAs. Depict regiment and 

battalion sized AOAs that can affect the positioning plan.

4-91. Depict all enemy platoon and above size mobility corridors that can affect the 

battalion's AO. Focus this effort down to enemy platoon level because of the threat an 

enemy platoon poses to artillery units. An enemy tank platoon can easily destroy a firing 

unit. If the MCOO becomes too busy and unreadable with platoon-sized mobility corridors--

only identify company-level mobility corridors. Finally, combine two or more mobility 

corridors into their appropriate battalion and regimental AOAs.

4-92. During this process the S2 must carry the higher-level unit’s AOAs throughout the FA 

battalion’s AO. The maneuver brigade usually stops its depiction of enemy AOAs at the 

brigade battle positions as they are not concerned about platoon- or company-sized units.

4-93. During the COA development process, the S3 should position units away from 

identified enemy mobility corridors and AOAs. If the situation dictates that units must be 

positioned on enemy air or ground AOAs, then the S2 should brief the affected commanders 

on the specific threat to his location. This provides the battery commander with critical 

information to consider during his own COA development.

Identify Key and Decisive Terrain

4-94. The fourth step is to identify and highlight key and decisive terrain using standard 

symbols. This information is graphically displayed on the MCOO overlay. During COA 

development, the S3 will avoid positioning batteries in these areas because they are where 

the close-in fight will likely take place.

Identify Potential Position Areas

4-95. This step is a key reason for performing the first four steps. The S2 evaluates the AO 

and templates all possible battery-sized PAs given the constraints of terrain identified in 

Steps 1-4. See the appropriate battery-level FM for friendly PA dimensions. Enemy PA 

dimensions will vary based on the type of weapon and tactics used. This templating of PAs 

is maintained for use during current and future operations. The S2 provides a product that 

assists the S3 in choosing appropriate battery PAs during COA development. This is most 

important during operations when the staff has limited planning time.

EVALUATE THE THREAT

4-96. Analyze threat templates that accurately portray how enemy forces normally execute 

their operations and how they react to current conditions. Determine which enemy 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (34 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

capabilities may significantly affect or be targeted against friendly FA operations.

4-97. Use doctrinal templates (which show how enemy doctrine dictates their tactical 

approach without terrain and weather constraints) to assist in providing answers to important 

FA questions: What are the HVTs for the enemy forces? What phases of FS will the enemy 

use based on friendly maneuver force actions? To which areas can the enemy FA and 

mortars range with conventional and rocket-assisted projectiles? Where will enemy FA, 

mortar units, electronic intelligence, and counterfire acquisition assets reposition? At what 

point will the enemy firing units need to resupply? How are they being resupplied? What is 

the enemy threat in friendly rear areas? (These questions are examples only.)

EVALUATE THREAT COAs

4-98. Concurrent with the development of friendly FA COAs by the battalion staff, the S2 

analyzes the SITEMP (which is a doctrinal template adjusted for terrain and weather) and 

event template (which identifies and analyzes significant battlefield events and activities that 

provide indications of enemy COA). This is his next step in preparing for the COA analysis 

and comparison.

4-99. The S2 will usually receive the maneuver brigade or higher FA SITEMPs. Normally, 

the SITEMPs do not address all the concerns of the FA battalion. The S2 should refine them 

to focus on specific FA issues--including enemy indirect fire systems and units down to the 

battery level. As a minimum, the S2 must refine two SITEMPs: first is the most probable 

threat COA; second is the most dangerous threat COA.

Refinement of the SITEMP

4-100. The refinement of the SITEMP involves the following steps.

● Analyze the enemy’s mission (Usually provided by the supported maneuver unit or 

higher FA HQ).

● Locate enemy artillery and mortars (to battery/firing element level for FA and to tube 

level for FA and mortars in small scale contingencies).

● Analyze threat maneuver forces.

● Analyze threat AOAs and objectives.

● Analyze threat NBC strikes and capabilities.

● Analyze terrain for possible airborne and air assault insertion sites, terrorist or special 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (35 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

forces type safe havens or assembly/staging areas, or small element indirect fire areas 

(use NAIs to focus R&S efforts).

Event Template

4-101. The event template graphically depicts the events and timing of the upcoming battle. 

The template helps the S2 gauge the pace and tempo of the operation and identify potential 

targets by type, number, location, and time. The essential element in developing the event 

template is to have graphics that tie an enemy event to a location and that show trigger 

events to assist in synchronizing fires. At a minimum, the S2 should develop the event 

template for the enemy’s most probable course of action and possibly most dangerous COA.

4-102. The brigade or higher FA HQ S2 will normally provide the FA battalion with the 

event template. This template focuses on the brigade/division/corps fight and the FA 

battalion S2 must refine it to focus on specific FS/FA issues. The primary problem the S2 

faces is in the time increments used by the maneuver forces. The S2 may need to use smaller 

time increments (e.g, minutes vice hours) to facilitate FA planning. The steps in refining the 

event template for FA use are:

4-103. Named Areas of Interest. Copy all applicable NAIs onto the battalion event 

template. This includes any FA battalion specific NAIs necessary to prevent the battalion 

from being surprised by enemy actions such as a rear area airborne insertion, partisan 

activity, attack along an unexpected flank, etc. NAIs assist the FA battalion TOC in 

monitoring the progress of the battle, executing tasks, and anticipating battalion 

requirements. The S2 uses NAIs specific to the FA battalion in developing and executing the 

FA battalion’s requirements for the R&S plan. Firing units, survey teams, ammunition 

convoys, and logistical elements may monitor some NAIs during the execution of their 

primary missions. External coverage must be coordinated if coverage of a battalion specific 

NAI is beyond the battalion’s capabilities.

4-104. Time Phase Lines. The S2 develops TPLs that clearly depict the pace of the battle 

through all phases of the fight. The artillery’s success or failure is determined in terms of 

minutes and seconds, so the S2 must focus TPLs in these terms. Increments of 5- to 15-

minutes work best (e.g, 10, 20, 30).

4-105. There are two types of TPLs: friendly offensive operations (blue lines) and threat 

offensive operations (red lines). Thus, if friendly units are conducting a defense, the S2 uses 

red TPLs to time the enemy offense. If friendly forces plan a counterattack, the S2 uses blue 

TPLs.

4-106. Radar Zones. The S2 incorporates proposed radar zones onto the event template. 

FSOs and the battalion staff will generate proposed operations and areas requiring coverage 

by radar zones. Based on the capability of the radar or the number of zones allocated by the 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (36 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

force artillery HQ, the battalion staff finalizes the number, type, location, cueing assets, 

and/or time for all approved radar zones.

4-107. The TPLs on the event template assist the S2 in determining a proactive cueing 

schedule covering critical events such as friendly breaching operations or an enemy artillery 

fire plan by phase. TPLs also assist in determining triggers to implement or cancel 

preplanned radar zones. An example of an event template is at Figure 4-5.

No PIR/IR/

EFST/DP

Enemy 

Event

Target No

NAI/TAI

Latest Time 

Information of 

Value

Friendly 

Decision 

Points

Actions/Reports 

Required

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (37 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

1 Fire 

SCATMINE 

@ Bde 

Obstacle

Enemy CRP 

at NAI 4, 

MRR 45 

min from 

Bde 

obstacle

AG0002, 

NAI 3

H-5 DP1 Alert FSCOORD, 

S3, FDO, Bde FSO; 

send PERINTREP 

to battalion

2 Will enemy 

use chemical 

on BP?

Enemy 

Phase II/III 

fires on BP.

NAI 4 H Alert FSCOORD, 

FSOs; check RDO; 

warn CHEMO and 

battalion

3 Mass the 

battalion on 

lead MIBN.

Lead MIBN 

@ PL Boom 

(10 min 

from target 

area)

AX0001, 

NAI 5

H-10 Alert FSCOORD, 

S3, FDO, Bde FSO; 

send out 

PERINTREP

4 Mass the 

battalion on the 

enemy’s 

BRAG

Beginning 

of Phase II 

fires (CRPs 

within 

visual range 

of BP)

CRP @ 

NAI 4

H-15 CFFZ 1 in effect? 

Who is available to 

mass? Can 

DIVARTY help?

5 When will the 

firing batteries 

be in jeopardy 

from enemy 

direct fire?

1st echelon 

MIBN begin 

to breach 

the southern 

comp BP 

(45 min 

warn)

TF FPF, 

AJ0001

H+20 Alert the 

FSCOORD, S3, 

battery 

commanders; send 

out PERINTREP

LEGEND:

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (38 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

BP = Battle Position

CFFZ = Call for Fire Zone

CHEMO = Chemical 

Officer

CRP = Combat 

Reconnaissance Patrol

DP = Decision Point

IR = Information 

Requirement

MIBN = Motorized Infantry Battalion

MIBR = Motorized Infantry Brigade

NAI = Named Area of Interest

PERINTREPS = Periodic Intelligence 

Reports

PIR = Priority Intelligence Requirement

PL = Phase Line

BRAG = Brigade Artillery 

Group

TAI = Targeted Area of 

Interest

TF FPF = Task Force Final 

Protective Fires

Figure 4-5. Enemy Critical Events Matrix on the Event Template

IPB Refinement

4-108. The process doesn't end when the S2 has produced the IPB products. IPB refinement 

is an ongoing process. The FA battalion S2 uses his knowledge of the AO and AOI in 

conjunction with intelligence feeds from all sources to update the IPB products and advise 

the commander and S3 on changes to the threat COA and on impacts for the battalion.

SECTION III — FA BATTALION REHEARSALS

REHEARSAL PRINCIPLES

4-109. Rehearsals are an integral part of the planning process. An effective rehearsal both 

practices and tests the plan. FM 101-5 contains a detailed explanation of rehearsal types and 

techniques.

4-110. Time availability is the critical element in conducting rehearsals. WARNOs provide 

subordinates enough lead time and details to synchronize their rehearsal schedules with 

battalion and higher rehearsals. A DS FA battalion integrates its rehearsals into the 

maneuver force’s rehearsal plan. A FA battalion with a R mission must coordinate 

rehearsals with the reinforced unit, while a GS battalion coordinates with its higher FA HQ. 

All rehearsals should complement higher rehearsal plans. The principles for an effective 

rehearsal program include:

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (39 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:41 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

● Clearly identify rehearsal objectives (review commander guidance on type, scope, 

focus, and commander’s intent for the rehearsal).

● Prioritize tasks and events (focus on EFSTs, EFATs).

● Establish high standards (What constitutes successful completion of a rehearsal 

event? Will the unit limit repetitions to retraining to correct substandard tasks or to 

also reinforce successful training?).

● Conduct multi-echelon, synchronized rehearsals.

● Determine all rehearsal participants.

REHEARSAL TYPES

4-111. Each of the five types of rehearsals described in FM 101-5 achieves a specific result 

and has a specific place in the MDMP time line.

● Confirmation brief.

● Backbrief.

● Combined arms rehearsal (CAR).

● Support Rehearsals.

● Battle drill or SOP rehearsal.

REHEARSAL TECHNIQUES

4-112. FM 101-5 identifies six primary rehearsal techniques that differ in the level of detail, 

time, resourcing, and operational security.

● Full dress.

● Reduced force.

● Terrain model.

● Map.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (40 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:41 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

● Sketch map.

● Radio.

SCRIPTING THE REHEARSAL

4-113. Use of a script keeps the rehearsal on track and serves as the checklist to ensure the 

rehearsal addresses all battlefield functions and all critical issues. A script has four parts:

● Agenda — Use the FSEM, FASM, FASP, RDO, and other tools as appropriate to 

drive the rehearsal and to keep it focused.

● Response Sequence — Establish a logical sequence for player response to rehearsal 

events (e.g, by BOS, front-to rear, left-to-right). Disseminate the sequence prior to 

the rehearsal to all participants.

● Unit Actions Checklist — Describe friendly and enemy actions succinctly yet in 

enough detail that critical items aren’t forgotten or assumed. Use established formats 

or checklists.

● Sequence Of Events — Provide advance notice of the rehearsal format.

CONDUCTING A REHEARSAL

BEFORE THE REHEARSAL

4-114. The unit should accomplish the following prior to the rehearsal:

● Determine objectives, standards, and scope of the rehearsal; the rehearsal type and 

technique; the participants; and the date, time, and place for the rehearsal. Coordinate 

rehearsal schedules.

● Disseminate rehearsal information. Include a list of personnel, equipment, 

information, and/or materials they need to bring.

● Prepare rehearsal support items: models, maps, sketches, overlays, and copies of key 

documents (e.g, OPORDs, matrices, or handouts).

● Review the agenda, identify decision points, branches, and repetition requirements.

● Validate time required with time available and modify as necessary.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (41 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:41 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

● Coordinate adequate representation of elements that cannot attend.

● View and prepare the rehearsal site as appropriate.

DURING THE REHEARSAL

4-115. The following paragraphs provide a generic sequence of events.

● Step 1. Review Ground Rules. Participants, sequences, times.

● Step 2. Deploy Enemy Elements. Briefly describe key factors.

● Step 3. Deploy Friendly Elements. Briefly describe key factors.

● Step 4. Initiate Action Sequence. Enact friendly and enemy events.

● Step 5. Identify Decision Points. Both friendly and enemy.

● Step 6. Identify End State. For the COA or branch.

● Step 7. Recock. Repeat for all decision points, branches, COAs.

● Step 8. Rehearsal Review — Identify and resolve outstanding issues.

4-116. The staff ensures all changes, coordination, and new requirements resulting from the 

rehearsal are clearly understood by all participants and documented by the recorder. All 

changes are considered verbal FRAGOs until the staff publishes the written changes.

AFTER THE REHEARSAL

4-117. The staff must translate modifications identified during rehearsals into verbal and/or 

written changes to previously published plans, orders, and even SOPs. Post rehearsal actions 

may include the following:

● Revise the FSP, FASP, schedules of fires, pre-planned and on-call target lists, RDO, 

EFSTs, and EFATs.

● Notify key personnel not in attendance of the results of the rehearsal and all changes 

or issues.

● Disseminate a verbal or written FRAGO and supporting documents as necessary to 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (42 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:41 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

document and disseminate the changes.

● Coordinate changes with supporting/supported elements.

● If time is too short to properly incorporate all target changes, designate new targets 

as on-call targets.

● When time becomes available, conduct an internal/staff AAR to identify changes 

necessary to the rehearsal process and SOP.

SCHEDULING REHEARSALS

4-118. The FA battalion must coordinate and synchronize its rehearsal schedule with higher 

FA HQ and maneuver force rehearsals. Units can conduct rehearsals in a top-down or 

bottom-up approach. The latter method better prepares subordinates for the higher HQ’ 

rehearsals. The nested rehearsal technique facilitates rehearsal planning and conduct of 

rehearsals.

THE NESTED REHEARSAL

4-119. The nested rehearsal technique integrates mission or task specific rehearsals and 

makes maximum effective use of time by initiating the preparation/rehearsal process 

immediately upon receipt of the first WARNO. The goals of the nested rehearsal are to:

● Ensure all types and echelons of rehearsals are prioritized.

● Ensure all rehearsals are fully time-resourced.

● Ensure leader involvement in subordinate rehearsal processes.

● Provide command-driven, bottom-up refinement of all plans.

● Prevent procrastination of rehearsal processes.

4-120. Before implementing the nested rehearsal concept:

● Identify mission/task specific PCCs and PCIs.

● Revise the battalion battle book to include detailed battery through section level 

rehearsals and drills.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (43 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:41 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

4-121. Standardization of battle drills ensures all leaders will understand what type of 

rehearsals and standards are expected at critical phases of the planning process. Several key 

principals guide the nested concept:

● Higher rehearsals occur last in the timeline.

● Lowest level drills occur first and as soon as possible.

● All orders and rehearsal DTGs are directed by the higher HQ.

● Stagger same-echelon rehearsals to facilitate leader supervision.

● Leaders and key personnel attend all subordinate echelon CARs.

EXAMPLE NESTED REHEARSAL

4-122. This section uses the maneuver brigade and DS FA battalion as an example in 

describing the nested rehearsal process.

Phase One — WARNOs

4-123. Initial WARNOs go out giving all units broad mission/task guidance and tentative 

OPORD and rehearsal timelines. The FA battalion receives the brigade WARNO and issues 

its WARNO which provides:

● The nature of the mission.

● Approximate DTG of the brigade OPORD and the battalion FASP.

● The tentative DTGs of the brigade FS & combined arms rehearsals, FA battalion 

support rehearsals, and battery rehearsals.

4-124. Battery commanders review the battalion WARNO and issue guidance concerning 

battery, platoon, and section rehearsals and anticipated EFATs. Platoon and section leaders 

review the commander’s guidance and begin developing their rehearsal plans.

Phase Two — Planning/Preparation

4-125. The brigade and battalion develop and wargame their plans, and assemble the 

detailed information for OPORDs, FSPs, and the FASP. As the MDMP progresses, 

subsequent WARNOs provide more detailed information on missions, tasks, EFSTs, and 

EFATs. Rehearsal times may also change, which can cause a ripple effect in all rehearsal 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (44 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:41 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

time lines. Synchronization of all higher, parallel and subordinate rehearsal schedules is a 

major task for leaders at all levels.

4-126. Units should issue as much detailed information as possible before section and 

platoon rehearsals begin. The most critical information includes the type of tasks, the 

conditions under which they must be performed (e.g, night, MOPP4, digital versus voice, 

AFATDS/IFSAS/FDS interface), and any changes from SOP.

Phase Three — Rehearsals

4-127. The rehearsal process begins with section and platoon PCCs, drills, and rehearsals. 

Battery leadership should attend these when possible. These lower level rehearsals may 

begin even before the FASP is published.

4-128. Lower rehearsals complement and build toward higher rehearsals. Units may modify 

plans based on feedback from lower level rehearsals. Staggering battery rehearsals can 

facilitate battalion observation. Additional section through battery level rehearsals can occur 

when the battery is not conducting its formal rehearsal. However, units must balance 

rehearsal time with planning and preparation time.

4-129. An example battalion rehearsal timeline is shown in Table 4-3. Actual times and 

sequences will vary based on the situation.

Table 4-3. Example Rehearsal Schedule

FA 

BATTALION 

TIMELINE

REHEARSAL ACTIONS

1900 Bde issues WARNO with rehearsal guidance/schedules. FA Bn initiates staff 

estimates.

2000 FA Bn issues WARNO with Bn rehearsal guidance/schedules.

2030 Battery commanders receive WARNO and issue alerts and rehearsal guidance.

2100 FA Bn staff finalizes mission analysis and prepares briefing.

0000 FA Bn staff briefs mission analysis and continues COA development.

0300 COA development brief.

0500 FA Bn issues second WARNO with FASP time. FA Bn begins wargaming.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (45 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:41 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

0600 Platoons and sections begin drills. Times established by battery commanders.

0800 FA Bn begins production of FASP (including rehearsal plan).

FA Bn issues third WARNO with mission-specific rehearsal information.

0900 FA Bn issues/briefs FASP.

FA Bn disseminates final EFATs, movement, targeting, and fire control information.

0930 FA Bn Cdr receives confirmation briefs from battery commanders & staff.

1100 Bde, Bn FSEs, FISTS, & COLTs/Strikers begin drills.

1100 C Btry rehearsal begins - EFAT 1& 4. - Bn Cdr attends, receives backbrief.

1100 ALOC — CSS support map rehearsal begins. - Bn XO attends.

1200 B Btry rehearsal begins - EFAT 2 & 4. - Bn CSM Bn S3 attends.

1200 CP/TOC — Drill/SOP rehearsal as necessary. - Bn Cdr, XO, or S3 attends.

1300 A Btry rehearsal begins - EFAT 3. - Bn Cdr, XO, or CSM attends.

1330 Remaining battery commander & staff backbriefs to FA Bn Cdr begin.

1500 FA Bn integrated FS/tactical/technical support rehearsal begins.

1700 Mvr Bde FS rehearsal begins. - FA Bn Cdr participates at FA Bn TOC or Bde FSE.

1900 Mvr Bde combined arms rehearsal begins.

FA Bn Cdr participates at FA Bn TOC or Bde FSE.

2100 Additional FS/FA rehearsal(s) as needed. Goal = Improve/reinforce rehearsed tasks 

and/or rehearse new tasks identified during previous rehearsals.

FA BATTALION REHEARSALS

4-130. The following information provides broad guidance and possible techniques. 

Timeframes mentioned are rough estimates based on lessons learned feedback from units, 

publications, and other published documents. Actual rehearsal techniques, schedules, and 

time frames will vary depending on the situation and unit SOPs.

CONFIRMATION BRIEFS AND BACKBRIEFS

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (46 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:41 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

4-131. FA commanders and staff leaders give and receive confirmation briefs and 

backbriefs. Since confirmation briefs often occur immediately after the briefing or issuing of 

the OPORD, commanders and staff should prepare in advance. If time is limited, the FA 

battalion commander may have the XO and S3 take some of the briefings from subordinate 

leaders. A supported maneuver force may also use this disseminated briefing technique, 

however the DS commander should try to give his briefing to the maneuver commander 

whenever possible.

COMBINED ARMS REHEARSALS

4-132. FA battalion participation in CARs will occur more frequently, and will be more 

extensive for FA battalions with a DS or R mission. Divisional GSR or GS FA battalions 

may participate, to a lesser extent, in division CARs. FA battalions at corps level may have 

little involvement in corps CARs, but may participate extensively in corps artillery or FA 

brigade rehearsals. (Note: The following discussions are oriented toward DS/R battalions 

and the CAR process. In most cases, use of "CAR" can be replaced with "higher FA HQ 

rehearsal" and the information will be just as applicable for GS/GSR units.)

4-133. The maneuver or higher FA HQ commander, the type of rehearsal, and the technique 

will determine the extent of the FA battalion’s involvement in a CAR. As a minimum, a FA 

battalion’s FS personnel and the FA battalion TOC will participate in CARs.

4-134. When time is limited, the FA battalion may integrate some of its support rehearsals 

into the CAR. However, this should not interfere with the CAR. The battalion should 

rehearse critical tasks prior to the CAR.

SUPPORT REHEARSALS

Fire Support Rehearsals

4-135. Purpose. FS rehearsals verify synchronization of the FSP with the scheme of 

maneuver. They focus on the execution of EFSTs and the FSEM, the effectiveness of 

FSCMs, and the timing and synchronization of all FS efforts. FS rehearsals are most 

applicable to DS FA battalions.

4-136. Types. Two possible types of FS rehearsals are:

● A maneuver brigade FS rehearsal involves the brigade staff and all other elements 

involved in the FS process. It rehearses all EFSTs, or when time is limited, the ones 

designated by the maneuver commander. This rehearsal can be used prior to the 

CAR, as a preparation tool, or after the CAR, to reinforce previous rehearsals, or to 

address weaknesses or changes identified during the CAR.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (47 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:41 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

● A small-scale rehearsal involving only the FA FS personnel in FSEs, FISTs, 

COLTs/Strikers and possibly the FA battalion TOC. It focuses on the functioning of 

the FS chain. Units use these rehearsals to prepare for other rehearsals, to reinforce 

training, or when limited time is available.

4-137. Agenda. Use the FSEM and DST, focusing on critical EFSTs. Normally prior to 

rehearsal, the DS battalion FDO, or force FA HQ, will announce a consolidated target list. 

For each target or EFST in the FSEM, address location, trigger point, engagement criteria, 

primary/backup observer and communications methods, clearance of fires, method of 

engagement, and attack guidance. CARs are excellent opportunities to identify terrain and 

route management issues. Ensure the DS battalion S3 presents FA movement plans and outof-action cycles for DS and R units as appropriate. Rehearse radar target handoff and 

counterfire, having the radar section leader insert one or two acquisitions per phase of the 

rehearsal. Inserting unplanned counterfire requirements and close support requests into the 

rehearsal at key points in the FSEM is necessary to evaluate priorities of fire and possible 

FS related decision points.

4-138. The sequence should usually mirror that of the CAR, following all necessary 

branches and decision points. However, the FSCOORD or BDE FSO may determine the 

specific sequence.

FA Tactical Rehearsals

4-139. Purpose. Tactical rehearsals ensure the FASP properly plans and synchronizes FA 

tactical fire control, movement, and key CSS operations.

4-140. FA tactical rehearsals focus on:

● The tactical execution of EFATs, the FASM, and schedules of fires — primary and 

backup methods (shooter focus).

● Tactical fire control and mission routing procedures.

● Clearance of fires requirements and procedures.

● Commander’s attack criteria and priority of fires considerations.

● The effectiveness of FA movement and positioning plans, primary and alternate, for 

firing, C2, and CSS elements.

● Targeting, counterfire, and SEAD operations.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (48 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:41 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

● Mutual support/continuity operations.

● Communications requirements — use and positioning of retrans equipment, use of 

voice versus digital.

● Survey requirements.

● The timing and synchronization of all FA efforts with each other and with the 

maneuver operations.

4-141. Types. Methods for conducting FA tactical rehearsals include:

● A robust, detailed rehearsal involving all elements involved in the tactical fire control 

process — FA battalion TOC, firing batteries, brigade/battalion FSEs, radars, key 

CSS personnel, and reinforcing units. It would address the full range of tactical 

issues and extend down to platoon and possibly section level.

● A leader-focused rehearsal may involve only the FA TOC, the brigade FSE, firing 

battery C2, and radar. The rehearsal may focus on the highest priority EFATs or 

FASM events or on particular aspects of tactical operations, such as fire missions and 

movement.

4-142. Agenda. Use the FASM, focusing on critical EFATs. The S3 should also review the 

maneuver DST, the FSEM, EFSTs, and consolidated target list for any critical events with 

FA applicability that may not be reflected on the FASM. For each target or EFAT in the 

FASM, address location, trigger point, engagement criteria, primary/backup observer and 

communications methods, clearance of fires, method of engagement, and attack guidance. 

The battalion S3 should present FA movement plans and out-of-action cycles for all FA 

units as appropriate. If time permits, rehearse radar, survey, and counterfire contingencies 

that require evaluation of alternate plans or methods.

4-143. The sequence may mirror the CAR, or higher FA HQ rehearsal, or the battalion 

commander or S3 may determine the sequence.

FA Technical Rehearsals

4-144. Purpose. FA technical rehearsals are used to ensure that the FASP properly 

addresses FA technical FD and to exercise the technical FD process. FA technical rehearsals 

focus on:

● The technical execution of EFATs and the FASM — sensor-to-shooter links and 

primary and backup methods (FDC focus). Rehearsal of backups includes evaluation 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (49 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:41 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

of reactions to catastrophic loss of an FDC (battalion or battery) and loss of digital or 

voice capability.

● Integration of tactical and technical fire control processes and computation of firing 

solutions, to include the communication and interaction between FS, FD and firing 

elements.

● Identification of technical FD issues — high angle fire, MSD, 

target/munition/range/FSCM conflicts.

● Digital database verification — Setup, communications, positions, FSCMs, target 

and attack guidances, mission routing and intervention points, target list, and 

scheduling data.

● Digital CONOPS — minor and catastrophic.

● Digital interface requirements — AFATDS-IFSAS/FDS, AFATDS version 

differences, and any other digital systems.

● Integration of voice and digital operations, to include backup plans.

4-145. Types. FA technical rehearsals can include the following:

● A robust, detailed digital rehearsal designed to exercise the entire FA digital 

communications system, verify databases, and ensure interoperability of different 

digital systems. This rehearsal verifies that all nodes can effectively communicate, all 

message formats can be passed, and fire mission routing will execute as required.

● (AFATDS NOTE: In AFATDS, a unit cannot rehearse a plan digitally until it is 

implemented into the Current Situation. Before each phase can be rehearsed, it must 

be implemented by all AFATDS OPFACs involved in the rehearsal.)

● A rehearsal focused on technical FD, to include the FS/Ops/FDC mission 

routing/handoff process. While FS personnel may be involved, the focus is on the 

exchange of fire mission data and timing issues rather than the tactical decisionmaking process.

● A FDC rehearsal from the battalion FDC down to firing sections.

4-146. Agenda. The agenda and sequence will vary dependent on the focus. In a technical 

rehearsal with a FD focus, the FASM and EFATs may be the key reference. For rehearsals 

focused on digital operations, the unit may use a combination of the FASM and a digital 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (50 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:41 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

rehearsal SOP. The latter would identify the major digital communications events to be 

rehearsed and the database elements to be verified.

4-147. Digital considerations. Units must consider the potential dangers inherent in 

automatic data distribution during digital rehearsals, and take safeguards to separate the 

rehearsal and "real world" events. As an example, digital missions initiated during a 

rehearsal may automatically generate artillery target intelligence (ATI) messages or mission 

fired reports (MFR) messages to external OPFACs that are not participating in the rehearsal. 

Also, movement of unit icons in AFATDS during the rehearsal may generate unit updates to 

external OPFACs. (In order to process rehearsal targets in AFATDS, firing units must be 

able to range their respective targets).

4-148. These external OPFACs will be unable to differentiate between "real" and 

"rehearsal" information, unless they have been notified of the rehearsals and have been 

clearly briefed on how to identify rehearsal traffic from real data. Because of this, units 

should consider modifying their digital communications settings to prevent external 

dissemination of rehearsal data. Units must ensure that all elements reset required settings 

after the rehearsal is over.

4-149. At the same time, units must be prepared to quickly restore "real world" settings and 

databases and return to the current battle. Units must keep rehearsal fire missions distinctly 

separate from live missions. The S3 should postpone rehearsals when a "real world" fire 

mission needs to be processed. The commander may need to terminate the rehearsal to 

prevent database corruption and confusion.

FA CSS Rehearsals

4-150. Purpose. CSS rehearsals verify and reinforce FA CSS planning and synchronization, 

and ensure that the FASP and FASM address essential CSS tasks. FA CSS rehearsals 

address: 

● The CSS required to support execution of EFATs and the FASM — primary and 

backup methods.

● Positioning and movement of the battalion trains — Synchronization with FASM and 

higher/subordinate CSS locations and operations.

● Ammunition distribution, positioning, expenditure, and resupply.

● Maintenance and recovery operations — when, where, how.

● Refueling and resupply requirements — when, where, how.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (51 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:41 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

● Medical treatment and evacuation procedures.

● EPW procedures.

4-151. Types. FA battalion CSS rehearsals may include:

● A robust rehearsal involving the TOC, ALOC, BSOC, CSS leaders, firing batteries, 

reinforcing units, and possibly the brigade FSE.

● A limited rehearsal conducted in the ALOC, by the XO, and involving primarily 

leaders from the CSS sections.

4-152. Agenda. Useful guides include a CSS rehearsal checklist and the FASM; however, 

the agenda may vary dependent on the rehearsal’s focus.

Integrated Rehearsals

4-153. Units may integrate FS and FA tactical, technical, and CSS rehearsals to maximize 

use of limited time. The commander will determine the amount of focus placed on each 

major area. As a minimum, integrated rehearsals usually:

● Verify EFSTs/EFATs planning, to include:

■ Each HPT, its number, location, purpose, and priority.

■ Primary and alternate triggers, observers, and sensors.

■ The unit that will deliver fires.

■ Attack guidance — shell-fuze combination, number of volleys, and units to 

fire.

■ Method of engagement is specified — time on target (TOT), at my command 

(AMC), when ready.

■ Time-space relationship between unit response time, duration of fires, and 

scheme of maneuver.

● Rehearse the mission thread from the observer/sensor to the firing unit for each 

EFST/EFAT. Validate the following:

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (52 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:41 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 4 The Field Artillery Battalion Planning Process

■ Primary and backup sensor-to-shooter communication links are coordinated - 

supported unit, observers (ground/air), FSEs, FDCs, firing sections, radars, 

intelligence assets.

■ Correct solution of the FS system.

■ Attack methods (shell, fuze, unit).

■ The use of intervention points in automated FS systems.

■ Correct function of mission routing information.

■ Coordination and deconfliction of targets, if required.

● Identify key FA actions that support each phase, to include:

■ Movement requirements, especially the trigger events that initiate moves and 

their relationship with the EFSTs and EFATs. Discuss survivability move 

criteria.

■ Verification of time-space relationships between EFATs and FA movements 

to ensure units are in position to mass during critical periods and verifies the 

terrain management plan.

■ Logistic requirements, especially critical CSS tasks.

● Verify FSCMs and coordination requirements for critical targets.

● Review who has priority of fires during each phase.

● Verify the digital database.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch4.htm (53 of 53) [1/7/2002 1:38:41 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

RDL

Homepage

Table of

Contents

Document

Information

Download

Instructions

Chapter 5

Deliver Fires

This chapter focuses on execution - the delivery of fires. The chapter has five sections. 

Section I covers the fire mission process, including tactical and technical FD, massed fires, 

and continuity of operations. Section II discusses various types of special fire missions. 

Section III provides information on counterfire, to include support for theater missile 

defense. Section IV discusses FA support for SEAD operations. Section V provides general 

information on FA meteorological operations.

SECTION I — FIRE MISSION PROCESSING

5-01. FA functions directly associated with the delivery of fires are encompassed in the fire 

mission process. The delivery of FA fires depends on:

● Accurately locating an appropriate target (TA process).

● Initiating a call for fire into the FS system (the fire request).

● Analyzing the fire mission to determine the proper method of attack (tactical FD in 

FSEs, force FA HQs, and battalion and battery FDCs).

● Converting the call for fire into gun data (technical FD in battery/platoon FDCs and 

on newer weapon systems like Paladin and MLRS).

● Delivering the required ordnance on the target to meet the needs of the supported 

commander (deliver fires).

● Determine and report BDA.

5-02. Whether this process is done manually or through an automated system the process is 

the same. Automating fire control does not change what we do but how we do it. The basic 

fire mission flow is shown in the DS example in Figure 5-1.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (1 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

Figure 5-1. Fire Mission Flow (DS Example)

5-03. To expedite fires, the unit can coordinate the use of various quickfire linkages, 

designed to facilitate rapid fire mission execution, while achieving desired control. For 

example, in Figure 5-2, a quickfire channel could be established from a FIST, through the 

Bn FSE, and then directly to the Bn FDC. Or for even faster response and more 

decentralized control, the FIST may send the mission directly to the BOC or POC that will 

execute the mission. This is often used for priority targets and FPFs. Quickfire channels can 

be used for any observer or sensor, such as the radar shown in the figure. Any FSE or FA 

CP that is normally in the fire mission flow, but is bypassed during quickfire operations, 

should receive a notification of each fire mission through message of interest processing. 

While the example is of a DS FA battalion, the technique can be used to expedite fires to 

any FA unit.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (2 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

Figure 5-2. Quickfire Channel Example

FIRE MISSION REQUESTS

5-04. Units plan and execute FA fires digitally, as much as possible. However, FA battalions 

may receive planned and non-planned missions from a wide variety of sources, in both voice 

and digital formats. They may have been generated at lower or higher echelon maneuver, 

FS, or FA elements. They may have been routed through several elements in the FS/FA 

system or arrived in a battalion or battery FDC directly from the requestor.

DIGITAL

5-05. Digital fire missions may be received from FA and non-FA digital systems. 

Procedures and capabilities may vary depending on which digital systems are interfacing 

with one another. FA battalion commanders face two major challenges in the digital arena:

● Maintaining technical expertise in a rapidly changing hardware/software 

environment. Each new/upgraded device and software version brings new 

capabilities, procedures, problems, and workarounds.

● Finding digital training opportunities involving digital equipment that the unit does 

not possess (e.g, AFATDS to IFSAS communications).

5-06. Training opportunities should be aggressively sought out. Digital, FA technical 

support rehearsals should thoroughly address digital interface issues and possibilities. 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (3 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

Whenever possible, critical digital fire missions should be rehearsed along the entire sensorto-shooter link, under the same digital conditions anticipated for the actual operation 

(extended communications distances, surge digital traffic capacity, degraded operations, 

alternate routes). For DS battalions this involves significant coordination responsibilities for 

both FS and FA digital operations.

VOICE

5-07. Use of voice may be especially effective for unplanned, immediate fire requests, or 

during adverse communications conditions. FDCs must anticipate the circumstances and the 

types of voice missions they may encounter. The tactical solution and effects on the target 

should be essentially the same regardless of whether the mission was processed voice or 

digital. Missions involving FS personnel, radars, and other FA elements are usually easy to 

handle. However, missions from non-FA personnel may require innovative solutions to 

coordination, communication, and clearance of fire.

UNTRAINED OBSERVERS

5-08. Occasionally the FA battalion may need to process fire missions from untrained 

observers. Often these are critical requests where the requestor is under fire. This is a battle 

drill that needs to be practiced. Specific members of the battalion and firing battery FDCs 

should be identified as the primary handlers of untrained observer missions. These personnel 

should possess good communications skills, patience combined with a sense of urgency, and 

the ability to remain calm in stressful situations. These individuals should be identified 

during training and given the opportunity to practice untrained observer missions during 

major training exercises. FM 6-40 contains a detailed explanation of untrained observer 

procedures.

TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION

5-09. The battalion FDC performs the tactical FD functions. It is the process that results in a 

fire order. A fire order is the FDO’s decision, under supervision of the S3, on whether and 

how to attack a target. The FDO considers the following:

● Location of the target. Is it cleared to fire? Is it within range? Can the target be 

attacked?

● Nature of the target. How large is it? What is its degree of protection?

● Ammunition available. What do the batteries have on hand to fire?

● Firing units available. Who is in range and ready to fire?

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (4 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

● Maneuver commander's guidance and/or TSOP. What do we want to do to the target?

● Request for fire. What did the observer ask for? Can the battalion give it to him? 

Should the battalion give it to him?

● Munitions effects. Given the ammunition available, nature of the target and 

commander's guidance, how should the target be attacked?

● Tactical situation. When should the battalion fire? Are special instructions required?

5-10. The objectives of tactical FD are as follows:

● Provide continuous accurate and responsive FS under all conditions.

● Maintain the flexibility to engage all targets types over wide frontages.

● Mass the fires of all available units quickly.

● Engage a number and variety of targets simultaneously.

CENTRALIZED CONTROL

5-11. Centralized tactical fire control may be used when there are few firing units, when 

ammunition is low, during critical operations where the commander needs to carefully 

control operations, or when restrictive rules of engagement are in place. Under maximum 

centralized control, all fire requests go through the brigade FSE and FA battalion FDC. 

Also, AFATDS intervention point rules and commander’s guidances are restrictive. Most 

missions are stopped for review at each OPFAC (as a minimum at the brigade FSE and 

battalion FDC), with only pre-designated critical missions flowing automatically through the 

fire control system.

DECENTRALIZED CONTROL

5-12. Decentralized tactical fire control (TFC) is used when maximum responsiveness and 

speed of execution is necessary. Some degree of decentralized control may be used even 

when resources are scarce if the maneuver commander (with input from his FSCOORD) 

determines the risks inherent in reduced control are warranted.

5-13. Decentralized control involves the use of sensor-to-shooter linkages and quickfire 

channels that may bypass some or all of the normal intervening OPFACs. Another method is 

to modify the AFATDS intervention rules and commander’s guidances so that most 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (5 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

missions flow through intervening OPFACs without stopping.

5-14. With decentralized control, FA battalion commanders and S3s must more closely 

monitor ammunition expenditures and the number of rounds fired from current positions. 

The potential for ammunition shortages and forced survival moves may increase under 

decentralized control procedures.

QUICKFIRE CHANNELS

5-15. When significantly responsive fires are necessary, a quickfire channel may be 

established. This may be a voice or digital link. The quickfire channel can be established as 

a direct link between the sensor (observer) and the shooter, or it may have one or more 

intervening C2 elements that evaluate and or relay traffic. Quickfire channels can be 

established using existing nets, with the only changes being in the actual routing or reporting 

of information. Establishment of quickfire channels may also involve the use of alternate 

nets or communications methods.

5-16. Quickfire channels are sometimes used in the following instances:

● Counterfire — to link a radar and a firing unit.

● SEAD/TMD — to link an EW/intelligence asset or an aircraft with a firing unit.

● Immediate suppression — to link a FO/COLT/Striker or other observer with a 

designated firing unit.

● Deep operations — to link scarce, time blocked EW and intelligence assets such as 

UAVs with firing units to find and immediately attack specific targets or target types.

5-17. Quickfire channel situations may involve supplementing the FA battalion with special 

communications equipment or coordinating nonstandard digital communications protocols. 

The S6 plays a critical role in identifying and evaluating EFATs involving quickfire 

channels. Wargaming and rehearsals require detailed analysis, as testing of the 

communications links may not be possible until during or immediately prior to the event. 

Requesting lessons learned information from other units that performed similar operations 

can prove extremely beneficial in identifying potential problems that can not otherwise be 

caught during planning and rehearsal.

AUTOMATED TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION

5-18. The delivery of FA fires is significantly enhanced through the use of AFATDS, 

IFSAS, FDS, and LTACFIRE. These automation systems digitally link the FA battalion 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (6 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

with its force FA HQ and adjacent, subordinate, reinforced, and supported units. The 

systems automate tactical FD and planning functions. AFATDS, IFSAS, FDS, and 

LTACFIRE can process and disseminate the following:

● Conventional fire plans.

● Target information.

● Fire missions generated from incoming target intelligence (tactical FD).

● FSCMs and other forms of battlefield geometry.

● Ammunition and fire unit data.

● Messages of interest to other OPFACs.

● Met and survey data.

● OPLANs/OPORDs, FS estimates, wargaming, graphics, and matrixes (AFATDS 

only).

● Movement control and logistics management (AFATDS only).

5-19. Although AFATDS, IFSAS, FDS, and LTACFIRE can perform all of the above 

functions, only tactical FD will be discussed in this segment.

5-20. AFATDS TFC program analyzes nominated targets, selects the method of attack, 

reviews available firing units and selects the optimal firing unit(s) for engagement. After 

analysis is completed and approved by the FDO (either through intervention or preestablished standards), the TFC program directs the delivery unit to attack the target.

5-21. The first step in providing for tactical FD involves establishing setup parameters in the 

computer. These parameters, entered prior to operations, consist of the tactical database and 

commander’s criteria. Much of the general planning data is entered at maneuver brigade/DS 

FA battalion level or higher and disseminated downward, with some modification at each 

level. Unit locations, ammunition counts, and other data is input at lower levels and 

forwarded to higher HQ.

5-22. The tactical database consists of geometry, firing units, and ammunition and met 

information. The tactical database includes information from unit plans and orders such as 

the maneuver unit’s zone, FSCMs, ammunition status, available firing units, firing unit 

locations, and atmospheric conditions.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (7 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

5-23. The commander’s criteria are simply the translation of the maneuver commander’s 

concept for fires into system language. It includes information such as attack methods, 

priority zones, target types, shells, priority of selecting firing units, and exclusion of any 

firing units or shells/fuzes. The computer uses commander’s criteria to produce a fire order. 

Therefore, this information must be kept current and accurate.

5-24. AFATDS, IFSAS, FDS, and LTACFIRE contain information from the joint munition 

effects manuals (JMEMs) concerning amount and type of ammunition and the optimum 

number of units to fire for a particular target. The information enables the computer to select 

the best ammunition for a particular target. If the commander wants to reserve a certain 

ammunition for future use or to vary the JMEMs data, that guidance should be converted 

into commander's criteria and entered into the computer (FSE assisted by FDC). Once they 

have been established, the computer implements the criteria without delay in mission 

processing. Moreover, commander's criteria may be overridden manually anytime an urgent 

situation warrants it.

5-25. It is essential that the FDO, in concert with higher FA HQ and the brigade FSO (if 

applicable), continually assesses and adjusts the commander's criteria based on his guidance 

for the different phases of the operation. Changes in the tactical situation may make 

assumptions and guidance that were valid earlier inadequate or even dangerously wrong. If 

anticipated ammunition fails to arrive, firing units are lost, or if new threat units or 

equipment arrive in the supported unit's sector, the parameters in the computers must be 

adjusted. In a manual environment, this process is no less important, but it is much less 

easily overlooked. The FDO must aggressively seek new guidance from the FSCOORD (or 

battalion commander), brigade FSO, and S3 and adjust the commander's criteria to reflect 

current reality.

5-26. In the automated tactical FD process, AFATDS, IFSAS, FDS, and LTACFIRE 

automatically prepare a request for additional fires whenever the unit cannot provide the 

volume of fire specified by the commander's criteria. The unit sends the request to the force 

FA HQ and/or appropriate FSE.

TECHNICAL FIRE DIRECTION

5-27. Technical FD is the process of converting weapon and ammunition characteristics 

(muzzle velocities, propellant temperature, and projectile weight), weapon and target 

locations, and met information into firing data. Weapon sections use the results of this 

process for firing.

5-28. Technical FD is an increasingly decentralized process. Most technical fire 

computation is done in the battery or platoon FDC, and transmitted to the firing section, or it 

is done on the weapon system itself. As newer weapon systems are fielded, the latter method 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (8 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

will predominate, and battery and platoon FDCs will increasingly assume a backup role.

5-29. The technical FD capability will be incorporated into future versions of AFATDS, but 

currently is done within BCS, FDS, or the onboard automation system of the newer 

individual weapon systems (Paladin, Crusader, MLRS, and high mobility artillery rocket 

system (HIMARS) at the time of this publishing).

5-30. Manual technical FD procedures are also maintained within cannon FDCs in case of 

catastrophic loss of automation capability.

MASSED FIRES

5-31. Massing all available fires enables the artillery to inflict maximum damage on the 

enemy with a minimum expenditure of ammunition. It reduces the vulnerability of the firing 

unit to the enemy's TA capabilities. Failure to mass fires may give the enemy time to react 

and seek protection. A clear understanding of the maneuver commander's guidance for FS 

and an accurate commander's criteria input into the AFATDS, IFSAS, FDS, or LTACFIRE 

are key to determine how much FA is enough. Every mission received must be evaluated, in 

the light of the commander's criteria, and sufficient massed fire should be employed to 

achieve effects required. If the FDO consults the JMEMs or accepts computer generated 

gunnery solutions, he will discover that most targets worth engaging should be engaged with 

volleys from two or more batteries or battalions. Suppression can be achieved, but the 

desired effects are achieved on few, if any, of them.

5-32. A FA battalion should maintain the maximum feasible degree of centralized control 

over the firing systems. There will very likely be many more calls for fire than assets 

available to fire them and still achieve the effects specified by the commander. The 

maneuver commander or his FSCOORD must be the one to decide which missions are 

critical to the success of the unit and which missions will not be executed or will be delayed. 

Commander's criteria are critical in managing the fires of the battalion. If good 

commander’s criteria are developed and accurately entered into the automated systems, the 

computer can assume much of the burden of sorting the missions as they are received and 

assign them the appropriate priority.

5-33. One of the best techniques available to the FDO for massing fires is the use of TOT. 

Also, the FDO can effectively mass fire for effect on mobile targets through use of AMC in 

his fire order. With these techniques the element of surprise is not lost since the delivery of 

fires is controlled. Survivability of firing units is enhanced, because mass fire techniques 

require fewer rounds to achieve the desired effects and because massed fires temporarily 

saturate enemy TA devices. These two techniques for massing fires, when properly applied 

against appropriate targets, can result in maximized effects for the amount of ammunition 

used.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (9 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

5-34. The key to massing fires effectively when more than one battery is to be fired for 

effect is the efficient use of voice to execute digital fire order(s). By using voice to execute 

the order(s), the battalion FDO can ensure that targets are engaged with the required number 

of firing units in a synchronized manner. Unit TSOPs should address the procedures for both 

digital and voice fire orders.

CONTINUITY OF OPERATIONS

5-35. AFATDS, IFSAS, FDS, and LTACFIRE equipped units have at least two or three 

central processing units (CPUs) in the battalion TOC. This redundancy has significantly 

reduced the need for complex and carefully orchestrated MSU operations. Once the systems 

are initialized and the data sharing paths established according to the operation, the 

computers will automatically, without human intervention, update all other systems with 

which a particular station is sharing information. A loss of any single computer or group of 

computers in AFATDS, IFSAS, FDS, and LTACFIRE will not have a catastrophic impact. 

CONOPS functions are built into the software for rapid reaction to the loss of an operational 

element. The CPU at brigade FSE has the capability to serve as a backup system for the 

battalion if planned.

5-36. In addition to CONOPS, manual means will remain an effective backup to 

catastrophic loss of automated capability. The TOC should thoroughly plan and rehearse 

transfer to manual backup operations. A battalion FDO can establish manual operations 

more easily if the following tools are on hand:

● A current fire order standard. Issuing a correct fire order will greatly reduce 

confusion and errors.

● Written attack guidance. The JMEMs and graphical munition effectiveness tables 

(GMETs) are too cumbersome to be useful in a fluid tactical situation.

● A current ammunition count for the firing units. In cannon units, this includes 

projectiles, propellants, and fuzes by lot.

● A current situation map. As a minimum, the following information must be clearly 

and accurately displayed:

■ Maneuver boundaries.

■ Firing unit locations.

■ FSCMs.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (10 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

■ The FLOT.

■ Observer locations.

● Range fans or the range-deflection protractor (Graphical Training Aid [GTA] 6-5-1) 

for checking ranges.

SECTION II — FA FIRE MISSIONS

5-37. This section provides general information and guidance concerning FA fire missions 

that may require special consideration by a FA battalion. Additional information about these 

missions, from the perspective of the observer, FDC, or FSE can be found in FM 6-30, FM 6-

40, and FM 6-20-40.

IMPROVED CONVENTIONAL MUNITIONS (ICM)

5-38. ICM munitions are delivered by 105mm and 155mm howitzers and by MLRS (rockets 

and missiles). There are three types of ICM:

● Antipersonnel (APICM). APICM is a cannon ICM most effective against 

unwarned, exposed personnel. When the submunitions hit the ground, the grenade is 

hurled upward 4 to 6 feet and then detonates.

● Antipersonnel, Antimaterial (APAM). APAM is a missile ICM most effective 

against unwarned, exposed personnel and light material targets. It is a fragmentary 

grenade that explodes on impact.

● Dual-purpose (DPICM). DPICM, delivered by cannons and MLRS, is most 

effective against lightly armored vehicles and other materials. It is also effective 

against personnel. DPICM submunitions explode on impact, using both a shaped 

charge and fragmentation to achieve its effects.

CONSIDERATIONS

Dud Rates

5-39. Anytime ICM is fired, between one and three percent of the submunitions fail to 

detonate. About 50% of these duds will be armed. These dud rates may increase in adverse 

weather and terrain conditions. This hazard must be considered in development of the 

maneuver commander’s guidances and in planning and firing missions. In AFATDS units, 

consideration of this hazard and the maneuver commander’s guidance should be reflected in 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (11 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

the AFATDS guidances and/or the FSCMs established by the FSE/FSCOORD. During 

periods of extensive ICM use, safety warnings about duds may need to be reissued within 

both military and civilian channels.

Weather and Terrain

5-40. Generally, ICM should not be fired into forests, mountainous areas (slope greater than 

60%), or extremely rocky or uneven terrain. Deep snow or surface water, soft sand, and 

marshy terrain can also decrease the effectiveness of ICM and increase the dud rate. High 

winds may adversely affect the dispersal pattern, as well as the effectiveness and dud rate.

Height of Burst

5-41. Height of burst (HOB) is normally not a major factor for ICM, but it can sometimes 

vary and affect the dispersal pattern and dud rate. HOB can be adjusted for cannon ICM but 

not MLRS ICM. FM 6-30 and FM 6-40 provide observer and gunnery information on 

cannon ICM HOB adjustment. If frequent HOB problems occur (too low or too high), the 

FDO or S3 should attempt to determine if the problems may be peculiar to a particular lot of 

ammunition, crew procedures, muzzle velocity variances, or other factors.

Danger Close

5-42. Caution should be used when firing ICM in danger close situations as an ICM round, 

rocket, or missile has a relatively large dispersal pattern and strong winds can affect the 

submunitions. A single round, rocket, or missile may be fired initially to verify targeting 

data and weather impact. Subsequent adjustments should be made with the entire firing unit. 

The observer should make corrections from the near edge of the effects pattern.

ILLUMINATION

5-43. Illuminating projectiles are available for 105mm and 155mm howitzers. They are used 

to illuminate a designated area, to aid in adjusting FA fires at night, for marking locations, 

or to orient friendly forces. They can also be used to mark targets (by air or ground burst) 

for air attack, or to "wash out" enemy passive night-sight systems when used at ground 

level. Depending on the caliber, an illumination shell can provide light for up to 2 minutes 

and can light an area up to 1,000 meters in diameter.

5-44. The amount of illumination ammunition required for a particular mission depends on 

the observer-target (OT) distance, the visibility, and the size, width, and depth of the area to 

be lit. The FDC and the observer must coordinate selection of the proper illumination 

pattern and controlled rate of fire to maximize illumination effectiveness with minimal 

ammunition expenditure.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (12 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

5-45. Illumination is conducted by using one of the following techniques:

● The one-gun illumination pattern is used when effective illumination can be 

achieved by firing one round at a time.

● The two-gun illumination can be fired in range-spread or lateral-spread patterns. 

This is commonly used for aerial observers.

● The four-gun illumination pattern illuminates a large area. Four rounds burst at the 

same time in both lateral and range spread patterns.

5-46. Illumination missions may be fired as illumination only missions or as coordinated 

illumination missions. In the latter, firing of the illumination is coordinated with the firing of 

high explosive (HE), DPICM, or other attack munitions so that the observer can see the 

effectiveness and adjust fire as necessary.

CONSIDERATIONS

5-47. Except in unusual situations, the majority of a unit’s illumination missions may be 

relatively close to the FLOT, involving shorter ranges and lower propellant charges. Using 

the lowest propellant charge possible also reduces damage to the round’s parachute. The S3 

should factor this into ammunition estimates and ensure the S4, BAO, and firing batteries 

understand the ammunition plan.

5-48. Identify EFATs involving illumination early in the MDMP. This facilitates the 

preparation of CCLs of ammunition and delivery of CCLs at the proper time and place (e.g, 

illumination package Bravo, not-later-than (NLT) 1900 hrs, to battery A’s supplementary 

position.) See Chapter 7 for additional discussion of CCLs.

5-49. Illumination missions may be lengthy missions, increasing the firing unit’s 

vulnerability to enemy acquisition and attack. The S3 should consider directing platoons to 

fire illumination missions from supplementary positions as much as possible. If a high 

counterfire threat exists, the S3 should monitor lengthy missions and consider shifting the 

illumination to a backup unit or terminating the mission if it is low priority (with 

maneuver/higher FA concurrence). Wargaming during the MDMP can assist the S3 in 

identifying the best solution.

5-50. Coordinated illumination missions may involve several weapon systems and firing 

units, and without proper planning can tie up assets for relatively extended periods. During 

the MDMP, the S3 should evaluate EFATs requiring coordinated illumination missions to 

determine their potential impact on the overall fire plan, and the priorities of the fires 

potentially ongoing at that time.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (13 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

5-51. Illumination can interfere with friendly night vision devices and expose friendly troops 

to enemy observation. S3s and FDOs must ensure that all firing restrictions are understood 

and properly disseminated and that all FSCMs and commander’s guidances are correctly 

entered into both manual and automated fire control systems.

5-52. On a non-linear battlefield there may be more frequent safety/FSCM conflicts 

involving illumination as the canister continues on after the illumination package is ejected. 

Increased use of high angle fire may be necessary and selection of firing units may require 

more detailed planning.

SMOKE/WHITE PHOSPHOROUS (WP)

5-53. Smoke can significantly reduce the enemy’s effectiveness both in the daytime and at 

night. Combined with other suppressive fires, it gives more opportunities for maneuver 

forces to deploy and aircraft to attack frontline targets. The effective delivery of smoke by 

the FA at the critical time and place helps the combined arms team accomplish its mission. 

(See Table 5-1 for smoke capabilities and effects.)

Table 5-1. FA Smoke Capabilities and Effects

SMOKE MUNITIONS

5-54. Smoke munitions are available for both 105mm and 155mm cannon systems. There 

are three types of smoke projectiles used for FA delivered smoke. Each has different 

characteristics and capabilities that must be considered in their employment. The various 

smoke projectiles are often used in combination to more quickly and effectively deliver the 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (14 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

required smoke coverage in the time required and for the conditions on the battlefield:

● Hexachloroethane (HC). HC projectiles, available for 105mm and 155mm 

howitzers, are used for screening, obscuration, spotting, and signaling. The projectile 

is not designed to cause casualties. The round expels smoke canisters that emit 

smoke for a period of 40 to 90 seconds.

● Burster-type WP. WP projectiles are available for 105mm and 155mm howitzers. 

They can be fired with point-detonating (PD) or MTSQ fuzes. Normally, shell WP is 

employed for its incendiary effect. It is also used for screening, spotting, and 

signaling purposes.

● M825 WP. The M825 WP projectile is a FA-delivered 155mm base-ejection 

projectile designed to produce a smoke screen on the ground for a duration of 5 to 15 

minutes. The projectile contains 116 WP-saturated felt wedges that fall to the ground 

in an elliptical pattern. Each wedge then becomes a point or source of smoke. These 

burning wedges can also present a potential obstacle or hazard to friendly soldiers 

passing through the smoked area. FS planners must consider this when planning 

smoke operations.

EMPLOYMENT TECHNIQUES

5-55. Smoke is used for obscuration, screening, deception, and signaling.

● Obscuring Smoke. A smoke screen placed directly on or near the enemy with the 

primary purpose of suppressing observers and minimizing their vision.

■ To defeat flash ranging and restrict enemy counterfire programs.

■ To obscure enemy observation points (OPs) and reduce the accuracy of 

enemy observed fires.

■ To obscure enemy direct fire weapons, including wire-guided missiles, to 

reduce their effectiveness up to 90 percent.

■ To obscure enemy lasers to reduce their effectiveness.

■ To instill apprehension and increase enemy patrolling.

■ To slow enemy vehicles to blackout speeds.

■ To increase command and control problems by preventing effective visual 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (15 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

signals and increasing radio traffic.

■ To defeat night observation devices and reduce the capability of most infrared 

(IR) devices.

■ To increase effectiveness of obstacles.

● Screening Smoke. A smoke curtain used on the battlefield between enemy 

observation points and friendly units to mask maneuvers.

■ Deceptive Screens. Smoke draws fire. Deceptive screens cause the enemy to 

disperse his fires and expend his ammunition.

■ Flank Screens. Smoke may be used to screen exposed flanks.

■ Areas Forward of the Objective. Smoke helps maneuver units consolidate 

on objectives unhindered by enemy ground observers.

■ River-Crossing Operations. Screening the primary crossing site denies the 

enemy information. Deceptive screens deceive the enemy as to the exact 

location of the main crossing.

■ Obstacle Breaching. Denies the enemy the ability to observe the breaching 

unit and to place accurate fires on that unit.

● Deception Smoke. A smoke curtain used to deceive and confuse the enemy as to the 

nature of friendly operations.

● Signaling Smoke. Smoke used to orient or signal friendly forces.

DELIVERY TECHNIQUES

5-56. There are two types of delivery techniques used to employ FA smoke: immediate, and 

quick smoke.

5-57. Immediate Smoke. Immediate smoke is used to quickly obscure point or small area 

targets of 150 meters or less, for short durations. It is frequently used in a suppressive role 

against targets of opportunity, either by itself, or in conjunction with immediate suppression 

HE or ICM. The HE/ICM provides immediate suppression while the smoke extends the 

suppression over a wider area and a longer period. Immediate smoke is also used for 

planned, on-call fires against known or suspected enemy locations.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (16 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

5-58. Immediate smoke missions normally are fire for effect (FFE) missions fired by one 

platoon, and are designed to provide obscuration for approximately 1-5 minutes. The initial 

volley may be fired with shell WP, fuze quick, or a mix of shell WP and shell HC in order to 

obtain rapid effects (within 30 seconds of impact). If additional volleys are fired, all 

howitzers should fire HC smoke. When firing the M825 smoke round, all howitzers should 

fire the M825 projectile for the initial and subsequent volleys. Unit TSOP should dictate the 

number of volleys and which howitzers will fire WP and which will fire HC smoke, if 

applicable. If immediate smoke is required for longer than 5 minutes, the requestor should 

notify the FDC during planning, or early in the fire mission. Because of potential target 

location error and changing environmental factors, the FA battalion S3 and FDO should 

always anticipate and plan for at least one correction, even for planned immediate smoke 

missions.

5-59. Quick Smoke. Quick smoke is used to quickly provide obscuration, screening, 

deception, or signaling smoke over a small to moderate area (100 to 600 meters) for 

approximately 5-15 minutes. (Environmental factors may extend quick smoke effects over a 

1,500 meter area.) It may be fired as a planned target or target of opportunity. However, 

smoke screens larger than 250 meters in length should be preplanned due to ammunition 

constraints and the possible need to segment the target. Quick smoke missions usually 

involve the fires of one or two firing batteries. A "standard" quick smoke mission is 

frequently used in TSOPs or in FASPs to facilitate planning and ammunition coordination. 

Deviations from the standard must then be identified early in the planning process or request 

for fire.

5-60. Quick smoke requests may be processed as adjust-fire or FFE missions. Accurate and 

effective FFE smoke is sometimes difficult to achieve due to surface winds and other 

environmental factors. The S3 and FDO should consider this during planning, and 

coordinate with the requestor to determine procedures for ineffective or inaccurate FFE 

smoke missions (switch to adjust fire procedures or repeat the FFE with an adjustment).

5-61. Obscuration, screening, or deception smoke over a relatively large area (600 — 1,500 

meters) or for an extended period of time (greater than 15 minutes is usually fired as a 

planned mission as the ammunition, firing unit, and coordination requirements can be 

significant. To expedite emplacement of larger smoke screens, the FDC may direct multiple 

quick smoke missions. The S3, S4, and BAO must carefully evaluate EFATs involving large 

smoke missions to determine the impact on overall ammunition capability.

CONSIDERATIONS

Adjust Fire Missions

5-62. Adjust fire mission techniques vary dependent on the type of mission and ammunition. 

The following techniques apply only to standard adjust fire smoke missions as immediate 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (17 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

smoke missions are FFE missions.

● Shell Smoke (HC). HE is used in adjustment until a 200-meter bracket is split. The 

observer then requests shell smoke. One smoke round is fired, and any necessary 

corrections (to include HOB) are made until the smoke is accurately located. Then 

FFE is requested. A subsequent adjustment may be necessary for maximum 

effectiveness.

● Improved Smoke (M825). The M825 does not need HOB adjustment. As a result, a 

200-meter bracket is not split and FFE is started after a 200-meter bracket is 

achieved.

● Burster-type WP. HE projectiles are used during the full adjustment with WP fired 

when FFE is requested.

Available Means

5-63. For a FSO this entails analyzing all available sources, such as FA, mortars, and 

chemical unit smoke generating sections. FA battalion S3s must evaluate which firing 

unit(s) and what type of ammunition are best capable of supporting each FA smoke EFAT. 

MDMP wargaming and rehearsals must include careful evaluation of smoke EFATs and 

alternate smoke plans to ensure that the proper quantities and types of smoke ammunition 

are in the right places at the right times. In DS FA units, the S3 and FSO coordinate the 

integration of FA and mortar smoke capabilities. Mortars can back up a FA smoke EFAT, or 

the FA unit can back up the mortars. The FA S3 must also understand that based on the 

conditions and the size of the screen, two or more platoons or batteries may be required to 

effectively fire the mission.

Ammunition and Timing

5-64. Smoke EFATs must be carefully evaluated for ammunition and timing requirements. 

Basic loads usually include minimal smoke ammunition to support a few immediate or 

quick smoke missions. Projectile type, fuze, and, for 155mm, propellant requirements must 

be considered. Ammunition to support larger smoke requirements should be positioned near 

or delivered to the shooter relatively close to the time it will be needed. Backup plans must 

be considered, especially when smoke is a constrained resource. Timing is critical as firing 

too early or late can have adverse effects for the requesting unit, and can result in wasted 

ammunition.

5-65. FA battalion commanders and S3s must ensure that the supported maneuver 

commander and FSO or senior FA HQ thoroughly understand the FA battalion’s smoke 

capabilities, and that planning for smoke does not exceed available resources. At times, the 

S3 may need to direct redistribution of smoke ammunitions to correct for imbalances or 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (18 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

changing circumstances, such as loss due to hostile fire or accident. The S3 must quickly 

calculate the impact on smoke EFATs to determine the actions and notifications required.

Firing Unit Information Requirements

5-66. For the FDC to provide an effective smoke screen, the FDO needs to obtain additional 

information not normally provided for other missions. From the observer, the FDO needs 

the following:

● The center grid of the smoke screen.

● The length (size) of the smoke screen.

● The screen time (duration), in minutes.

● The maneuver target direction. The direction from the point at which the maneuver 

element will be most susceptible to enemy observation to the target.

● Wind direction in reference to the maneuver target line. The observer must let the 

FDC know if the wind is head, tail, left cross, or right cross in relation to the 

maneuver target line.

5-67. From the met station (or from currently available met data), the FDO will need to 

know the relative humidity for line 00 of the latest met message.

5-68. The FDO relies on a series of tables to determine the number of rounds to fire to 

establish and maintain the smoke screen for the desired duration requested. Until the 

necessary information is received, the FDO cannot properly calculate the number of rounds 

required. For planned missions, the FDO must analyze how potential changes in conditions 

may impact on firing requirements. If the number of aimpoints, rounds, or guns exceeds unit 

capabilities, the FDO will notify the S3 per unit TSOP.

Environmental Factors

5-69. Environmental factors impact significantly on the effectiveness of smoke. 

Atmospheric stability, wind direction, and wind speed are the major factors influencing the 

effectiveness of smoke. Whenever significant changes in weather conditions are expected, 

the S3 and FDO should determine the potential impact on smoke EFATs, such as higher 

ammunition requirements.

5-70. Wind. High winds can reduce the effectiveness of smoke. Wind speeds ranging from 

4 to 14 knots are best for the production of smoke screens. The observer is the normal 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (19 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

source of wind data for the target area.

5-71. Temperature. A rise in temperature may increase the rate of 70, causing smoke to 

dissipate more rapidly and lose effectiveness.

5-72. Humidity and Precipitation. High humidity and precipitation may enhance the 

effectiveness of smoke.

5-73. Terrain. Smoke seeks low spots. In built-up areas smoke may be effective for longer 

periods when trapped between buildings where strong winds are not prevalent. Smoke may 

cause fires in dry vegetation or in built-up areas. Smoke is normally not effective in deep 

mud, water, snow, or in mountains or other steeply sloped areas.

5-74. Night. Smoke is also effective at night. Atmospheric conditions at night may produce 

different effects on smoke than experienced during day.

SCATMINE

5-75. FA SCATMINE, which is currently limited to 155mm howitzers, gives the maneuver 

commander an all-weather capability to quickly emplace minefields. The two types of FAdelivered SCATMINE are:

● Area denial artillery munitions (ADAM). ADAM is an antipersonnel mine 

activated by deployed trip lines. ADAM are often used in conjunction with remote 

anti-armor mine system (RAAMS) to hinder the clearing of a RAAMS minefield by 

dismounted troops. ADAM may also be used alone against personnel and unarmored 

targets.

● RAAMS. RAAMS are used to create antiarmor or antivehicle obstacles. A 

percentage of the RAAMS have an antidisturbance device to hinder mine-clearing 

operations. RAMMS are most effective when used in conjunction with ADAM.

5-76. Both the ADAM and RAAMS have a self-destruct (SD) capability that destroys the 

mine if it has not been detonated within a certain period of time. Both the ADAM and 

RAAMS come in two SD versions — long (48 hours) and short (4 hours).

5-77. The corps commander has the authority to employ SCATMINE. He may delegate this 

authority for specific operations or limited periods as follows:

● Long duration down to maneuver brigade.

● Short duration down to maneuver battalion.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (20 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

EMPLOYMENT

5-78. There are four basic uses of FA-delivered SCATMINE:

● To create an obstacle.

● To reinforce an existing obstacle.

● To deny use of an area.

● To interdict or disrupt enemy operations.

Create an Obstacle

5-79. FA-delivered SCATMINE enables the maneuver commander to quickly create an 

antipersonnel, antivehicle, antiarmor, or multi-purpose obstacle. ADAM can be fired by 

itself to create an obstacle effective against personnel and light vehicles. RAAMS can be 

used to create an antiarmor obstacle, however, ADAM are usually used in conjunction with 

RAAMS to prevent easy clearing of the obstacle. A combination ADAM/RAAMS minefield 

creates a multi-purpose obstacle that obstructs personnel, vehicles, and equipment.

5-80. Like any obstacle, SCATMINE is best used at a choke point covered by effective 

indirect and direct fire. The principles of obstacle coverage apply even more strongly to 

SCATMINE because:

● The mines are surface-laid and visible.

● FA-delivered minefield tend to be small and of low density (because of ammunition 

constraints).

● They are easily bypassed and/or breached. An undisturbed enemy can work through 

a SCATMINE minefield relatively quickly.

Reinforce an Obstacle

5-81. ADAM and RAAMS can be used in combination or individually to reinforce other 

antipersonnel, antivehicle, and antiarmor obstacles emplaced by engineers or maneuver 

forces. ADAM can strengthen antipersonnel obstacles such as concertina wire, or disrupt 

beaching of antiarmor obstacles like abatis and trenches. This is especially useful when time 

or unit resources limit the size or effectiveness of an engineer or maneuver force obstacle. 

The SCATMINE may be fired in soon after the primary obstacle has been completed, or it 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (21 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

may be scheduled as a planned mission to be fired at a specific time or on-call based on an 

event or other triggering factor. SCATMINE can also refresh or strengthen obstacles that 

have been weakened, breached, or are otherwise ineffective in obstructing the enemy.

Area Denial

5-82. SCATMINE can be emplaced on key terrain or facilities to deny the enemy use of the 

area. This may be critical high ground, a potential landing area, or other location that can not 

be effectively controlled by other means. As with obstacles, area denial minefields have 

little or only short-term effectiveness unless covered by direct or indirect fires.

Interdiction/Disruption

5-83. SCATMINE can be used by itself, or with other munitions (from any FS system) to 

interdict movement and disrupt enemy operations. It can be effective in the following 

situations:

● River crossing sites, airmobile landing zones, or beachheads.

● Large multi-column convoys in restricted terrain.

● Concentrated vehicle and/or troop formations (at critical times or locations — such 

as dismounting mechanized infantry).

● Counterfire — artillery firing locations.

● SEAD — EAD sites (most effective when synchronized with air operations).

● Logistics facilities — ammunition and POL sites, railyards, tactical air or helicopter 

landing zones.

5-84. For interdiction and disruption, SCATMINE is most effective when used in 

conjunction with other munitions. The other munitions cause damage, injuries, fires, 

disorientation, and fear. This creates hasty movement, forces armored elements to button up, 

and hinders clearing operations.

5-85. For counterfire and SEAD, fire DPICM first, then smoke (optional), followed by 

SCATMINE. The smoke will obstruct vision and may initially force an increased MOPP 

posture further degrading vision. This makes it difficult for the enemy to see and clear the 

SCATMINE, which disrupts the enemy’s ability to reorganize, reconstitute, and move. The 

SCATMINE causes additional injury and damage and continues to interfere with operations 

after the firing has ended. SCATMINE by itself may not be very effective for counterfire or 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (22 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

SEAD as the enemy may be able to remain in place and continue firing with little disruption, 

especially in SP units.

5-86. Because interdiction/disruption minefields are often not observed or covered with 

direct fire, they are more effective when synchronized as part of a larger operation. As an 

example, used for SEAD, SCATMINE would be most effective immediately prior to or 

during an air operation in the area. SCATMINE at an enemy river crossing site would be 

most effective just as the enemy was trying to establish the site or use it for a major 

operation.

SCATMINE MISSIONS

5-87. FA SCATMINE minefields consist of two general types:

● Planned minefields. A planned target, on the target list. Planned minefields are 

normally less than 600 meters wide, but may be as large as necessary to achieve the 

effects desired. They also:

■ Are emplaced as scheduled or on-call targets.

■ Require extensive coordination between maneuver, engineer, and FS/FA 

personnel.

■ Require extensive logistical support.

■ Use primarily long SD mines.

■ Allow safety zones to be computed before firing.

● Target of opportunity minefields. Are emplaced as a result of an immediate call for 

fire request on an unplanned target. They:

■ Are a standard minefield based on unit TSOP (For example - 400x400 meters, 

high angle, medium density, two aimpoints).

■ Consist of a combination of 24 RAAMS and 6 ADAM projectiles (these 

numbers may change depending on the threat and the commander’s 

guidance).

■ Use only short SD mines (carried as part of the basic load).

■ The safety zone, based on a single aimpoint, is computed immediately after 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (23 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

the minefield is fired.

SCATMINE CONSIDERATIONS

5-88. Battery minefield angle (BMA), range, and target size all impact the fire order 

requirements for effective SCATMINE delivery. Because SCATMINE missions can be 

lengthy missions to fire (10-30 minutes), the S3 must consider the time the unit will be 

unavailable to fire other missions and the increased vulnerability of the unit to enemy 

acquisition and counterfire. The S3 should consider force protection measures, such as using 

additional howitzers to decrease the time, firing the mission from an alternate (possibly 

hardened) position, or directing a survival move after mission completion.

Safety Considerations

5-89. Firing SCATMINE close to friendly troops is potentially hazardous, as SCATMINE is 

an area weapon that can be affected by high winds. If the center of the minefield is less than 

700 meters from the nearest friendly position, the unit should follow danger close 

procedures as the edges of the minefield could easily fall within normal danger close 

distance (600 meters). Planned danger close SCATMINE minefields should be adjusted in 

with HE or ICM whenever possible.

5-90. A safety zone should be computed for each SCATMINE minefield. The controlling 

FSE is generally responsible for determining safety zones. However, the actual data may be 

computed by the firing FA FDC or by the FSE. See FM 6-40 for specific techniques.

Recording and Reporting the Minefield

5-91. The SCATMINE delivery unit’s FDC is responsible for initiating the scatterable 

minefield report, first by radio and later by hard copy. The FDC submits the report through 

the FSE to the engineer, generally with an information copy through FA channels. See FM 6-

40 for more information.

COPPERHEAD

5-92. Copperhead is a 155mm cannon-launched guided projectile with a shaped warhead 

and a laser seeker. When fired at moving or stationary hard targets, Copperhead homes in on 

laser energy reflected from the target during the final 20 seconds (approximately) of its 

trajectory. The ground laser operator may use a G/VLLD, a laser target designator (LTD), or 

modular universal laser equipment (MULE). Airborne systems with lasers include the AH64, OH-58D, and unmanned aerial vehicles.

CONSIDERATIONS

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (24 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

5-93. Much of the responsibility for planning and executing Copperhead missions rests with 

the FSEs and observers. However, the FA battalion S3 and battalion and battery FDOs must 

thoroughly understand the process in order to better support the mission, to anticipate 

changes, and to identify effective workarounds or troubleshooting techniques when 

problems arise.

Planning

5-94. Copperhead targets can be engaged as planned targets or targets of opportunity, 

however, planned targets are preferred. Planned targets fall into two categories: priority and 

on-call.

● For priority targets, data are precomputed and set on the guns, and the Copperhead 

round is laid in its loading tray. Unless otherwise specified on the target list, two 

Copperhead rounds are prepared in advance for each Copperhead priority target.

● On-call targets are processed the same as priority targets, except the guns are not laid 

on firing data until after receipt of the mission. On-call target procedures for 

Copperhead are the same as those for conventional on-call missions.

5-95. NOTE: FDC personnel must ensure that at least two howitzers and two Copperhead 

rounds are prepared for any mission. This action increases firing unit responsiveness if a 

round or howitzer malfunctions. The criteria in Table 5-2 are used for all Copperhead 

missions.

Table 5-2. Copperhead Criteria

TARGET STRENGTH 

(Observer Entry)

ROUNDS SPECIFIED (FDC 

ENTRY)

NUMBER OF HOWITZERS

11 2 2

2 2 2

3 3 2

4 4 2

5 5 2

62 6 2

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (25 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

1 If a single target element is important enough to warrant firing Copperhead, the observer should 

request 2 rounds and "By round, AMC." This reduces response time in case of a target miss and 

prevents wasting the second round if the first succeeds in destroying the target. An optimum of one 

round per target is used as a planning factor.

2 No more than six rounds will be prepared for any given mission.

Control Procedures

5-96. If the number of rounds to be fired is not specified in the call for fire, the FDC will fire 

the number of rounds specified for that target on the Copperhead target list. If the number of 

rounds is not specified on the target list, the FDC will fire one round at the target and direct 

the howitzer(s) to prepare, but DO NOT LOAD, a second round. The message-to-observer 

(MTO) will reflect 1 round.

5-97. When the observer requests AMC, the Copperhead rounds will be fired at intervals of 

at least 30 seconds when the observer gives the initial command to fire. When BY ROUND, 

AMC is requested, the observer will control the firing of each Copperhead round. The 

observer must understand this and act accordingly so as not to waste rounds.

Pulse Repetition Frequency (PRF) Code Set 

5-98. The three-digit PRF code set on the Copperhead round must match the PRF code set 

on the observer’s designator. The FDC should have a list of all observer PRF codes by call 

sign, from which it selects the proper PRF code for the observer lasing the mission. The 

PRF code is then sent to the howitzers in the fire commands and is placed on the 

Copperhead round. The observer verifies the PRF code announced in the MTO. Early 

identification and coordination of PRF codes is a key FDO/FSO responsibility.

DANGER CLOSE

5-99. The term "danger close" is used when friendly troops are within a prescribed distance 

of the intended impact of munitions, specifically 600 meters for cannon FA and 2,000 

meters for MLRS. This is simply a warning and not a restriction to both the maneuver 

commander and the FDC to take proper precautions. Risk-estimate distances are used in 

danger close situations to determine whether or not to fire. Risk-estimate distances are 

defined as the distance in meters from the intended center of impact at which a specific 

degree of risk and vulnerability will not be exceeded. Risk estimate distances are for combat 

use and are not minimum safe distances for peacetime training.

5-100. The risk-estimate casualty criterion is the 5-minute assault criterion for a prone 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (26 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

soldier in winter clothing and helmet. The probability of incapacitation (PI) means that a 

soldier is physically unable to function in an assault within a 5-minute period after an attack. 

The 0.1 percent PI value can be interpreted as being less than or equal to one chance in a 

thousand. The ground commander must accept risk when targets are inside 0.1 percent PI.

Table 5-3. Risk-Estimate Distances

Item/System Description

Risk Estimate Distances (Meters)

10% PI 0.1% PI

1/3 2/3 Max Rg 1/3 2/3 Max Rg

M102/M119 105mm Howitzer 85 85 90 175 200 275

M109/M198 155mm Howitzer 100 100 125 200 280 450

M109/M198 155mm DPICM 150 180 200 280 300 475

M270A1 MLRS 2 km 2 km 2 km 2 km 2 km 2 km

M270A1 ATACMS 5 km 5 km 5 km 5 km 5 km 5 km

CONSIDERATIONS

5-101. Normally the observer will include danger close notification in his call for fire. 

However, untrained, or non-FA observers may not provide this alert. In the latter case, an 

FSE or FDC should notice the danger close situation during mission checks. AFATDS 

currently does not provide automatic danger close alerts, but may have this capability in 

future versions. In relatively static situations, various automated FSCMs, such as RFAs, can 

sometimes be used to provide increased warning of danger close situations.

5-102. In danger close missions the situation, type of ammunition being fired, the number of 

rounds, method of fire, observer-target-gun (OTG) angle, weather, and terrain conditions all 

must be considered to ensure safe firing. HC smoke or illumination rounds do not present as 

much danger as HE or ICM rounds. Likewise, a battery or battalion fire-for-effect mission 

carries more risk than an adjust fire mission. Leaders should closely monitor danger close 

missions to ensure extra caution is applied, any required TSOP guidelines are followed, and 

commander’s risk guidances are not violated.

5-103. FSOs and FDOs should quickly assess the experience of the observers and firing 

elements whenever possible. FSOs, FIST chiefs, and battery commanders can often answer 

these queries. In the case of an inexperienced observer, the FDC may need to guide the 

observer’s decisions and give recommendations. If a firing section is inexperienced or 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (27 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

undermanned, the platoon leader or sergeant may want to directly observe the firing.

5-104. If the FSE/FIST and FDC can anticipate the danger close situation (such as a FPF), 

they should discuss the possibility of adjusting in the fires before they are required. If the 

weather changes significantly over time, the FDC will need to update firing data for a new 

met and the FDC may coordinate a check round with the observer to verify accuracies.

5-105. Weather and terrain can impact certain munitions such as ICM, smoke, illumination, 

and variable time (VT) fuzes. High winds can blow ICM bomblets and illumination rounds 

off course. Some munitions such as smoke, illumination, and WP present a potential fire 

hazard that may be critical in danger close situations. Dry, grassy terrain, spilled fuel, 

damaged vehicles loaded with ammunition, wooden structures all present potential hazards.

5-106. Mountainous and urban terrain complicate danger close missions as steep slopes 

make observer adjustment more difficult to estimate, and crests or buildings can interfere 

with firing, stopping rounds or causing VT fuzes to function early. High angle fire can 

alleviate problems with crests or buildings, but may have greater dispersion (probable error). 

Rocky terrain and hard surfaces present increased risk of ricochets, especially with flat 

trajectories.

5-107. The OTG angle is a factor because range dispersion of artillery fires is generally 

greater than lateral dispersion. Consequently there is less risk when the firing trajectory runs 

parallel to the forward edge of the friendly troops than when it is perpendicular to them.

5-108. Whenever possible, the most accurate weapon system and shell/fuze/charge 

combination should be used for danger close situations. Ground burst smoke or illumination 

can be used as marker to verify expected impact, observer, and target locations.

SECTION III — COUNTERFIRE

5-109. The counterfire battle is not a separate battle, but one aspect of the overall combined 

arms fight. As such it must be properly integrated and synchronized with all elements of the 

maneuver commander’s battle plan. Successful counterfire operations will complement all 

aspects of the combined arms battle.

5-110. Effective counterfire includes the destruction or neutralization of enemy weapons (to 

include EW weapons such as jammers), counterfire TA systems (such as radars and EW 

systems), supporting C2 and communications, transportation, and logistics sites. However, 

the critical aspect in counterfire operations is information management, which involves two 

key areas: intelligence/TA and information processing. Friendly and enemy intelligence and 

TA assets compete to find the various parts of each others indirect fire system, analyze the 

information, decide the most effective method to attack, and disseminate orders to shooters, 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (28 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

jammers and other attack assets. Accuracy (of information and fires), speed, and 

effectiveness all combine to determine the outcome of the counterfire battle. FM 6-121, 

Field Artillery Target Acquisition, provides thorough tactics, techniques, and procedures for 

FA TA assets.

RESPONSIBILITIES

5-111. The maneuver commander at brigade and higher levels has overall responsibility for 

the planning and conduct of counterfire operations as part of the overall combined arms 

battle plan. In a FA battalion the key counterfire personnel are the FA battalion commander, 

S2, S3, targeting officer, and where applicable the brigade FSO, radar section leader, and 

LNO (from a reinforcing battalion, if available). The maneuver commander receives input 

and recommendations from his FSCOORD, FSO, maneuver S3 and S2, other staff officers 

involved in counterfire operations. He issues decisions and guidance as necessary to direct 

counterfire efforts, to ensure effective coordination occurs, and to ensure that counterfire is 

synchronized with all other battlefield operations. While DS FA battalions receive this 

guidance through direct involvement with the supported maneuver units, R, GS, and GSR 

units frequently receive this counterfire guidance through the supported or higher FA HQ.

5-112. The FA battalion commander has overall responsibility for the FA battalion’s 

execution of counterfire responsibilities. In a DS battalion, the FA battalion commander, as 

the FSCOORD, advises the maneuver commander on the integration of counterfire into 

combined arms operations, the priority of counterfire within the overall operation, and basic 

counterfire priorities.

5-113. A FA battalion’s counterfire responsibilities will vary dependent on the echelon, 

tactical mission, and guidance from the maneuver and senior FA commanders. A DS FA 

battalion may have full responsibility for planning and executing a counterfire plan in 

support of a maneuver force, while a GS FA battalion’s responsibilities may be limited to 

planning and executing its participation in a larger counterfire plan developed by a FA 

brigade, DIVARTY, or Corps Arty. Acquired counterfire targets may be fired by the 

battalion or forwarded through FA or FS channels for attack by other FA or even non-FA 

assets.

5-114. A major part of counterfire is a FA battalion’s counterbattery efforts. The S3, based 

on the commander’s guidance, considers counterbattery force protection measures in all 

phases of operations, from placement selection, to movement, and firing. He directs 

measures to decrease the battalion’s vulnerability to detection and minimize exposure to 

enemy fires. He and the S2 attempt to locate and destroy enemy mortars and artillery that 

pose the greatest threat before they can attack. Reactive counterbattery drills are executed to 

quickly counter enemy artillery and mortars before they can inflict significant damage on 

the battalion.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (29 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

DS/R BATTALIONS

5-115. A DS battalion supporting ground forces usually manages the counterfire battle 

within the maneuver zone of responsibility. Much or most of this responsibility may be 

given to a reinforcing unit. At this echelon, the DS battalion commander, as the FSCOORD, 

is responsible for directing the planning and execution of counterfire operations for the 

supported maneuver force. This includes:

● Supporting the maneuver commander’s force protection priorities, normally stated in 

terms of assets, functions, and/or positions that are critical to the unit’s mission, and 

when they are critical.

● Development, dissemination, and management of intelligence and order of battle 

information on the enemy’s indirect fire system. This concerns all systems in the 

maneuver unit’s zone of responsibility, as well as any outside the zone that can 

impact the maneuver unit’s mission. This includes:

■ Indirect fire weapon systems — mortars, cannons, rocket, and missile 

launchers.

■ TA assets — observers, radars, sound/flash systems, and electronic 

intelligence.

■ C2 elements relevant to counterfire operations.

■ Enemy indirect fire tactics.

■ Enemy counterfire tactics — to include use of lethal and nonlethal ground and 

air forces against friendly FA.

● Advising the maneuver commander in establishment of attack guidance for 

counterfire targets.

● Coordination of the maneuver unit’s counterfire operations with higher echelon 

counterfire operations.

● Integration of counterfire into the maneuver plan in a complementary manner that 

helps enable specific maneuver operations.

● Achieving indirect fire superiority within the maneuver zone.

GS/GSR BATTALIONS

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (30 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

5-116. GS and GSR units are usually not responsible for development of the counterfire 

battle plan as the force FA HQ or an FA brigade HQ normally will plan counterfire. Much 

of the counterfire intelligence and order of battle information will be collected, analyzed, 

and disseminated from these higher echelons. However, radars and other TA or intelligence 

assets may be attached to, or reporting to GS/GSR units. The GS/GSR FA battalion 

commander must understand his unit’s responsibilities as a role player in the larger 

counterfire fight, and ensure efficient execution of assigned counterfire tasks. At division 

level, a GS/GSR battalion may be given significant responsibilities for actual execution of 

the counterfire fight.

COUNTERFIRE CONSIDERATIONS

TYPES OF COUNTERFIRE

5-117. Counterfire can be proactive or reactive. Corps is generally responsible for proactive, 

deep counterfire planning and operations. They establish overall priorities and allocate 

resources that direct or influence lower level counterfire operations. However, the basic 

principles of proactive and reactive counterfire are applicable even at the DS battalion.

Proactive Counterfire

5-118. Proactive counterfire involves the aggressive use of all available intelligence, TA, 

and attack assets to quickly find and destroy as much of the enemy’s indirect fire assets as 

possible; preferably before they have a chance to fire or to effect the outcome of the battle.

5-119. Counterfire PIR are identified and prioritized by the maneuver commander based on 

advice from his staff, FSCOORD, and FSO. Intelligence and TA assets are then tasked to 

acquire the needed information. Attack assets are aligned against identified and anticipated 

targets, and general counterfire missions. Intelligence, TA, and attack requirements beyond 

the unit’s capabilities are forwarded to higher HQ for support.

5-120. The force FA HQ (possibly a DS battalion) works closely with the supported 

maneuver unit to develop and coordinate procedures to receive, analyze, process, and 

disseminate the acquired information. This involves the establishment of commander’s 

guidances and priorities and of communications channels. Quickfire channels may be used 

to facilitate the attack of critical counterfire targets or to weight the counterfire battle in a 

specific area of the battlefield or a particular phase of a battle. Targets may be attacked 

immediately or developed into preparations and counterfire programs synchronized with 

maneuver and air operations to gain a synergistic battlefield effect.

5-121. Proactive counterfire involves the aggressive use of non-FA attack systems to 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (31 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

include:

● Aircraft - fixed and rotary-wing. Planned missions may be increased and air assets 

may be encouraged to aggressively seek indirect fire targets of opportunity whenever 

possible.

● Ground force operations. This may involve quick, moderately deep penetrations 

oriented on destroying or encircling specific enemy artillery forces, or small, 

focused, special forces type attacks.

● EW attacks. Proactive jamming and other EW attacks are frequently best used in 

conjunction with other attack methods, especially major combined arms team attacks 

as they do not have an attrition effect comparable to other attack methods.

● The use of free fire areas (FFAs), especially where counterfire planners have found, 

or expect to find, concentrations of enemy indirect fire systems.

5-122. Proactive counterfire frequently involves the dedication of additional indirect fire 

assets, such as mortars, FA, and naval gunfire to the counterfire effort. This support may be 

focused during a specified time frame to better allow the synchronization of all assets 

supporting the counterfire battle. Frequently one or more FA battalions may be given a 

reinforcing mission with the specific purpose of concentrating on proactive counterfire in a 

designated maneuver brigade zone. A DS battalion may even briefly receive reinforcement, 

or priority of fires from an entire FA brigade in order to proactively prosecute counterfire 

long enough to influence a battle.

5-123. Major, proactive counterfire efforts are especially effective in providing force 

protection to the combined arms force, enabling major maneuver operations, and in reducing 

the enemy’s ability and will to fight. Because proactive counterfire can be resource 

intensive, it may be planned for a specific time during a battle. This may be immediately 

preceding a friendly offensive operation or at a culminating point where a friendly or enemy 

attack begins to stall. Proactive counterfire can also be used during lulls in the ground fight, 

when more assets may be available, to reduce enemy FA capability prior to the next major 

maneuver operation.

Reactive Counterfire

5-124. Reactive counterfire focuses on fires in response to enemy artillery or EW weapons 

that have begun firing, jamming, or otherwise impacting the overall battle or the counterfire 

fight. Reactive counterfire is not a passive activity. It requires careful analysis of anticipated 

and potential reactive counterfire requirements, and the planning and coordination to ensure 

that effective reactive counterfires are immediately available when and where they are 

needed.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (32 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

5-125. In the defense, planning of reactive counterfire programs and counterpreparations is 

especially critical when an enemy attack is imminent. These programs are fired 

immediately, while FA and maneuver S2s attempt to identify the main effort and to 

determine how significantly the enemy has weighted his indirect fire assets in that area. 

Effective reactive counterfire involves the rapid reallocation, movement, and focus of 

counterfire assets to quickly counter and eliminate a possible enemy indirect fire advantage.

5-126. During offensive operations, reactive counterfire is essential in protecting attacking 

forces and in blunting the enemy’s ability to use indirect fires to defeat the friendly force 

attack. Units may establish radar CFZs to provide increased force protection to key attack 

elements and to allow rapid reactive counterfire to be placed on any enemy indirect fire 

elements that threaten a protected friendly force. Planners may position CFFZs on locations 

where enemy FA is suspected but accurate targeting data has not been refined. Quickfire 

channels and preclearance of fires can be used in these circumstances to facilitate rapid 

reactive counterfire (and FSCMs such as FFAs). Speed is especially important in reactive 

counterfire as the enemy artillery or mortars must be destroyed or neutralized before they 

can do significant damage.

5-127. FA fires are a primary source of reactive counterfire due to the quick reaction time 

required. FA units may need to quickly move to forward supplementary positions 

specifically intended for use in attacking deep, reactive counterfire targets. These are often 

brief, intensive, shoot-and-scoot operations. If extended stays in these positions are 

necessary, hardening of the PAs should be planned.

AMMUNITION

5-128. Counterfire operations can require significant amounts of ammunition, especially 

DPICM and extended range munitions. Accurate IPB templating, and the use of counterfire 

CCLs of ammunition and standard counterfire fire orders can help the S3 and BAO can 

more accurately anticipate both expenditures and resupply requirements.

5-129. At maneuver brigade level, effective allocation of counterfire tasks is essential to 

efficient ammunition distribution when a reinforcing unit is involved. If the reinforcing unit 

is an MLRS unit (or a 155mm unit supporting a 105mm battalion), assigning the reinforcing 

unit a majority of the counterfire responsibility may allow the DS unit to carry additional 

ammunition to support the close battle. If both the DS and R unit are a similar caliber, the 

S3 has more flexibility in directing fire missions, however primary counterfire shooters 

should be identified to facilitate planning, ammunition management, and positioning. To 

range some counterfire targets, the designated firing units may need to be well forward with 

increased amounts of extended range ammunition.

5-130. MLRS is an especially effective counterfire weapon. However, ammunition reload 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (33 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

times must be considered. During extensive counterfire operations, the S3, S4, and BAO 

must be extremely proactive in pushing CCLs forward to the launchers to keep reload times 

to a minimum.

RADAR MANAGEMENT

5-131. FA counterfire operations frequently involve the attachment or support of one or 

more counterfire radars. The following paragraphs provide information concerning radar 

management. FM 6-121. contains detailed information on radar operations and TA.

5-132. The S3, S2, and the radar section leader, in coordination with higher FA headquarters 

and FSEs of supported maneuver units, must work closely to ensure organic, attached, or 

assigned radars are effectively managed. In determining the positioning, movement, 

orientation, and cueing of radars the S3 and S2 must consider:

● Radar capabilities.

● Security.

● Communications.

● Position Considerations.

● Survey.

● Mission.

RADAR POSITIONING

5-133. The primary consideration in selecting a radar position is mission accomplishment. 

The secondary consideration is survivability. Radar position selection starts when the S2 

and/or targeting officer conduct terrain analysis. They use the MCOO, Terrabase, Firefinder 

positioning analysis system, and the situational template developed and refined by the 

intelligence section. They conduct map reconnaissance and select several potential 

positions. After detailed analysis of these, they recommend primary, alternate and 

supplemental positions to the S3, who accepts, rejects, or modifies the positions. The staff 

should consider the following when positioning radars:

● Does the position support the commander’s intent?

● Where are the enemy’s indirect fire systems, or where will they most likely be?

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (34 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

● Where will the enemy focus his indirect fires?

● Can the radar acquire targets throughout the zone of the supported force?

● What are the EW, ground, and air threats to the radar?

● Does the position effectively maximize the radar’s range capabilities while 

simultaneously minimizing the risk of enemy TA?

● Does the position offer a screening crest?

● What is the track volume and aspect angle?

● When applicable, are AN/TPQ-36 and AN/TPQ-37 radars positioned to complement 

each other?

● Does the position offer good communications with the FA battalion?

● Does the position consider future operations and movement?

● Where are the radar alternate positions? Supplemental positions?

● Are there positions to move forward or fall back to?

● Where are the positions of other friendly units?

● Is the radar on a high-speed avenue of approach that could potentially make it 

vulnerable to rapid advancement by the enemy?

● Where are possible sites for enemy chemical strikes or air assaults?

● Is the route clear of enemy, chemicals, and mines?

● What is the friendly scheme of maneuver?

5-134 When possible, the radar section leader or section chief should reconnoiter the sites 

and provide input to the S3. The S3 coordinates the radar’s position(s) with the maneuver 

unit S3 via the FSE.

RADAR ZONE MANAGEMENT

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (35 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

5-135. Radar zone management involves the use of both sectors of search and various types 

of zones. The S3, S2, targeting officer, radar section leader, and the brigade, division, or 

corps FSE work together to ensure that sectors and zones adequately support the overall 

plan. This involves close coordination with their counterparts in R (or reinforced), GSR, and 

GS FA units and higher/lateral FA HQ.

Sectors Of Search

5-136. Sectors of search are areas on the battlefield where radars focus their TA capabilities. 

The S3 and S2/targeting officer determine sectors of search during the decide function of the 

targeting process, on the basis of a thorough IPB. They also make decisions concerning 

what targets should be acquired and attacked, where and when targets are likely to be found, 

and who can locate them. Doctrinal employment considerations, in conjunction with 

templates and intelligence produced in the IPB process, dictate the areas in which the radar 

should focus its searches. The location of friendly boundaries and FS coordinating measures 

may also affect the assignment of sectors of search. The area given to a specific radar as a 

sector of search may be affected by the positioning of a common sensor boundary (CSB).

Zones

5-137. Zones are a means of prioritizing radar sectors of search into areas of greater and 

lesser importance. Zones allow radar managers to orient on the maneuver commander’s 

battlefield priorities. Four types of zones can be entered into a Firefinder radar computer. 

These are CFZs, CFFZs, artillery target intelligence zones (ATIZs), and censor zones (CZs). 

The firing unit locations the radar has developed as targets are displayed for transmission in 

the order of the priority of the zones in which targets are located. The zone priorities for 

location identification, from highest to lowest, are:

● Locations of weapons firing into a CFZ.

● Weapons firing from a CFFZ.

● Weapons firing from an ATIZ.

5-138. All other weapon firing locations are displayed after locations associated with these 

zones. All locations other than those associated with a CFZ or CFFZ are formatted by the 

radar computer as target reports in ATI;CDR format. If the radar has no zones loaded, then 

all locations are transmitted in the ATI;CDR format. The radar computer will not develop 

weapon locations that are within a censor zone. See FM 6-121. for additional information on 

radar zones.

RADAR MOVEMENT

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (36 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

5-139. The S2 or targeting officer moves the radar based on METT-TC and the radar’s 

accumulated cueing times. Moving the radar at a critical time in the battle may cause the 

supported unit to take heavy losses. The radar should move when the enemy’s FA is 

silenced or moving. The best way to anticipate the enemy FA movement is to force it to 

move with counterfire. When the radar moves, coverage must be coordinated with the force 

FA HQ.

5-140. During the wargaming process, the battalion S2 and S3 decide when they want to try 

to force the enemy’s FA to move and when accumulated cueing time can cause radar 

detection. They include these events as decision points on the DST.

RADAR CUEING

5-141. The longer a radar radiates, the more susceptible it is to enemy acquisition. Cueing 

allows the radar to transmit intermittently, for relatively short periods in order to reduce 

vulnerability. Cueing should be event driven. The critical factor when planning radar cueing 

is responsiveness. It should allow for the radar to locate the enemy positions during initial 

volleys of fire, preferably the first rounds.

5-142. The S2 and/or targeting officer has basically two techniques for cueing: situational 

(proactive) and demand (reactive). While situational cueing in generally preferred, the S2 

can use these separately or in combination.

5-143. Situational cueing can potentially be the most responsive. This method ties cueing 

to events and/or triggers that are determined during the IPB and planning processes. For 

example, during offensive operations an event or trigger may be a breaching or air assault 

operation. In a defensive or offensive operation, cueing may be tied to suspected enemy 

phases of fire depicted on the DST. Situational cueing also focuses the radar on the 

commander’s intent and what is critical.

5-144. Demand cueing is the activation of a radar once the enemy has begun firing. For 

demand cueing to be effective cueing agents must be designated and a responsive 

communications system between the agents and radar established. Possible cueing agents 

may include COLTs, FISTs, OH-58Ds, scouts, FSOs, intelligence and electronic warfare 

(IEW) systems, or the S2.

5-145. The S2 and/or targeting officer in the controlling FA TOC will establish cueing 

guidance to include authorized agents, communications links and conditions under which 

the radar may be cued. The information will be published in the TA tab to the FA support 

plan. Specific cueing guidance must be established to fully exploit the radar’s capabilities 

and still minimize or eliminate unnecessary radiation that may result in the radar being 

located by ELINT. An important part of cueing is the cueing schedule. The cueing schedule 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (37 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

informs the radar on how long to radiate. FM 6-121. states: "Maximum continuous 

transmission time for Firefinder radars should never exceed 2 minutes when an EW threat 

exists." Some cueing guidelines used effectively by units at the National Training Center 

were as follows:

● If the ELINT threat is high, the radar should cue no more the 15 to 30 seconds "on" 

and 15 to 60 second "off," and

● During the enemy’s most intense fires, the cueing time should increase to 30 to 45 

second "on" and 5 to 15 seconds "off".

WARGAMING

5-146. The S2 and targeting officer plan, coordinate, and synchronize the counterfire fight 

during the wargaming process. They recommend CFFZs, decision points, and triggers for 

cueing and moving radars and for changing zones. They coordinate with the FSEs for 

supported force CFZs. The following should be considered when planning counterfire 

during wargaming:

● What is the counterfire unit? (Unit designated by the S3 on the FDO’s 

recommendation, considering range, munition, and position.)

● What will happen if multiple acquisitions occur simultaneously?

● What is the standard fire order? (The FDO recommends a standard fire order for S3’s 

approval, ensuring it meets the commander’s guidance.)

● What are the decision points on when to move the radar? (Decision points are based 

on the phases of fire or accumulated cue time.)

● What are the decision points to change the radar zones? (The decision points are 

based on the phases of fire or maneuver unit’s advance.)

● What are the decision points on when to start cueing?

● Are radar zones planned throughout the depth and width of the battlefield, 

anticipating enemy and friendly movement?

● When does the S3 want the enemy’s artillery to move?

● Does the plan account for overwhelming success? For catastrophic failure?

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (38 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

● How many tubes must be destroyed to meet the commander’s intent?

● Can the CFFZs be pre-cleared with the FSOs? Consider use of FSCMs such as FFAs 

and RFAs.)

● What are the decision points on massing the battalion on the enemy’s artillery?

● What is the cueing schedule during the difference phases of fire?

● What is the methodology to track the destruction/force ratio of the enemy artillery?

5-147. There are several critical decision points in the wargaming process. One of the most 

important involves forcing the enemy’s forward artillery to move, which allows the radar 

and the counterfire unit to move (without jeopardizing force protection). This may be 

accomplished by suppressive, neutralization or destruction fires. Another critical decision 

arises when target acquisitions occur simultaneously: the counterfire unit can become 

overwhelmed. Table 5-4 lists the options available when the radar receives multiple 

acquisitions.

Table 5-4. Multiple Target Acquisitions

Type Targets Direct Support Unit With A 

Reinforcing Battalion

Direct Support Unit Without a 

Reinforcing Battalion

Multiple Targets in Range ● R Bn engages one target 

and passes other target to 

the DS Bn. 

● R Bn engages both targets 

simultaneously. 

● R Bn engages both targets 

sequentially.

● DS Bn engages both 

targets simultaneously. 

● DS Bn engages both 

targets sequentially. 

● DS Bn engages one 

target and passes the 

other target to force FA 

HQ/FSE for attack with 

other assets. 

Multiple Targets in Range, but 

the DS Bn is Involved in 

Missions with a Higher 

Priority

● R Bn engages one target 

and passes the other target 

to the force FA HQ/FSE 

for attack with other 

assets.

● DS Bn passes the targets 

to the force FA HQ/FSE 

for attack with other 

assets.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (39 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

Multiple Targets - Some Out 

of Range

● R Bn and DS Bn engage 

the target within range and 

pass the other target to 

force FA HQ/FSE for 

attack with other assets.

● DS Bn engages the target 

within range and passes 

the other target to the 

force FA HQ/FSE for 

attack with other assets.

REHEARSING COUNTERFIRE

5-148. Counterfire rehearsal synchronizes the counterfire fight with the scheme of maneuver 

and the sensor-to-shooter link. The S2 and/or targeting officer should rehearse the 

counterfire plan with the radar and intelligence sections. They should rehearse management 

of radar zones during different phases, using radio nets (digital and voice with cueing 

agents); decision points for movements and prepare to march order; times to be ready to 

radiate (cueing schedules); and reporting accumulated cueing.

COUNTERFIRE DRILL

5-149. The following paragraphs provide a scenario that describes possible TOC counterfire 

procedures. They focus on the interactions of the staff, which are most important in 

synchronizing the counterfire fight.

PLAN

5-150. During the MDMP and wargaming processes the maneuver and FA battalion staffs 

identified counterfire, targeting, and TA data, requirements, and responsibilities. The 

OPORD, FS annex, FASP appendix and TA tab provide all necessary information. All FA 

assets are in place, ready to support the mission. The battalion has an attached Firefinder 

radar.

ACQUIRE

5-151. As the battle begins, the radar acquires enemy artillery firing from a CFFZ. The radar 

section assigns a target number from its allocated block of numbers and immediately calls in 

the counterfire information grids (impact and origin).

DECIDE

5-152. The O&I section receives the radar fire mission digitally or by voice. The automated 

FD system operator or radio operator sounds off with "fire mission, radar" or a similar SOP 

phrase to alert the FDC. (For a basic radar acquisition (ATI:CDR) the operator would sound 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (40 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

off with "radar acquisition" or a similar, by SOP, phrase and the information processed to 

determine what action was required.) Then he announces target number, origin and impact 

grids and time acquired to the S2 and assistant S3. The FDO immediately sends a fire 

mission to the battery(ies), with a fire order of "AMC" for MLRS, or "do not load" (DNL) 

for cannons. The assistant S3 and S2 plot the grids. The assistant S3 makes a quick map 

spot, determines if units are in range of the target and informs the S3. The S2 begins to 

verify his template and identify the type unit(s). The S3 requests clearance of fires through 

the FSE, if necessary. The FSE clears the fires (through maneuver channels) and the FDO 

cancels "DNL."

DELIVER

5-153. The FDO fires the mission and requests additional fires from the force FA HQ, if 

necessary. If attack criteria is achieved, the S3 directs end-of-mission (EOM) on that target. 

Alternative actions the S3 may direct are:

● Handoff. The battalion may be forced to handoff the mission to force FA HQ or FSE 

if it cannot service the mission.

● End of Mission. The S-3/FDO may have to direct EOM before the mission is fired 

because FSCMs or boundaries are violated and clearance cannot be granted in a 

timely manner, clearance of fires is denied, or there is a duplication of missions.

ASSESS

5-154. The O&I section coordinates with maneuver and force FA HQ to receive BDA. The 

S2 updates logs and revises enemy artillery positions based on origin grids, and revises 

enemy most likely COA based on impact grids. The targeting officer evaluates the S2’s 

revised enemy artillery positions and recommends refinement to the radar zones (in 

coordination with targeting officers in higher/supporting headquarters). The S2 may also 

need to update the RDO, make cueing schedule changes, move the radar, and arrange for 

coverage during movement. The S3 may also need to relocate firing elements.

THEATER MISSILE DEFENSE (TMD)

5-155. TMD is a joint mission, accomplished by establishing an effective battle 

management/command, control, communications, computers, and intelligence (BM/C4I) 

system that permits the joint force commander to integrate and enhance the joint force's 

capabilities to:

● Destroy theater ballistic missiles (TBMs) in-flight (active defense).

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (41 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

● Reduce the vulnerability of friendly force and critical assets from the effects of 

theater missile attacks (passive defense).

● Destroy hostile theater missile capability by offensive actions against missile 

launchers; C4I; and logistics facilities; and other theater missile infrastructure (attack 

operations).

5-156. Army FA plays a key role in TMD attack operations by supporting TA operations 

and by executing deep fires to attack all elements of the hostile TBM system. This mission 

is primarily conducted by rocket/missile units under the control of corps, joint task force 

(JTF), or other echelon above corps commands. However, in smaller theaters or during 

deep, rapid maneuver penetrations, TBMs may periodically be within the ranges of cannon 

or rocket systems. Firefinder radar support for TMD, currently limited by range capabilities, 

will improve as newer, increasingly capable radars are fielded.

CONSIDERATIONS

5-157. FA participation in TMD attack operations is in essence a counterfire operation. 

However, sensor-to-shooter response times are especially critical in TMD operations as 

TBMs usually displace immediately after firing. Also, TMD sensor-to-shooter coordination 

is frequently more complex because of the number and type of 

TA/intelligence/communications assets involved, and the extreme distances between 

sensors, shooters, and C2.

5-158. FA weapons and TA systems supporting TMD operations are frequently in a 

dedicated role, making them unavailable for other support. TMD support may be part of a 

battalion’s standard FA tactical mission (normally a unit in a GS role), or may be assigned 

as a non-standard mission. Because of the complexity of TMD support, FA battalion 

commanders must ensure that responsibilities are clearly defined as the responsibilities 

inherent in standard FA tactical missions may not be appropriate.

5-159. While TMD support is usually a higher echelon operation involving only a few FA 

units, all FA units need to understand the attack guidances involved if TBMs are acquired as 

targets of opportunity. TBMs are usually high value/high payoff targets, attacked 

immediately upon detection. However, FA battalion S2s should have a thorough knowledge 

of the enemy threat and recent intelligence on NBC considerations. S3s, FDOs, and FSOs 

(where applicable) should understand the command’s attack criteria and ensure that digital 

attack guidances reflect current, accurate information

5-160. Airspace management is a critical issue in TMD operations. While this is usually 

coordinated through FS channels, FA battalion commanders must understand the issues and 

ensure that their units both provide accurate unit data and receive and post all fire control 

measures.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (42 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

SECTION IV — SUPPRESSION OF ENEMY AIR DEFENSES

5-161. SEAD involves all activities to neutralize, destroy, or temporarily degrade surfacebased enemy air defenses (EADs) by lethal and non-lethal means. Effective SEAD increases 

friendly aircraft survivability, enhances air operations, and facilitates rapid US air 

superiority. This in turn supports the ground maneuver and counterfire battles. Army SEAD 

operations are primarily designed to support operational and tactical plans by protecting air 

assets near the FLOT or during cross-FLOT operations. However, the increasing range of 

FA weapons has extended the FA’s ability to support increasingly deeper air operations.

5-162. The bulk of the planning, targeting, and coordination for SEAD support is usually 

done in FSEs. Both ground force FSEs and aviation unit FSEs may be working together in 

planning and coordinating SEAD for an air operation in support of the ground force. 

Additional information on SEAD can be found in FM 6-20, FM 6-20-30, and FM 6-20-40.

5-163. FA battalions DS to ground or aviation units may be very involved in overall SEAD 

planning and coordination due to the battalion commander’s FSCOORD responsibilities. 

This includes planning and executions of both EFSTs and EFATs. SEAD responsibilities for 

other FA battalions may be limited to executing SEAD related EFATs. However, there may 

be instances where a GS, GSR, or R FA battalion plays a major role in the overall SEAD for 

an operation. In this situation, the FA battalion commander (and/or the S3) may go to the 

planning HQ or FSE and actively participate in the detailed SEAD planning. GS, GSR, and 

R battalions should also consider the possibility of establishing temporary liaison with the 

aviation or ground force FSE during the planning and execution of critical SEAD missions.

5-164. FA battalion involvement in SEAD may include:

● Planning, conducting, or participating in SEAD programs designed to degrade and 

suppress EAD assets throughout the zone or to destroy, degrade, and suppress EAD 

within a specific area or corridor.

● Planning, executing, or participating in SEAD fire plans designed to support specific 

air operations.

● Providing immediate fires to rotary or fixed-wing aviation assets in support of an 

ongoing air operation.

5-165. A SEAD plan or program may involve several FA battalions, with divisional cannons 

and MLRS providing fires along ingress and egress routes while corps MLRS units fire 

deeper SEAD fires. Early identification of air routes and attack by fire (ABF) areas is 

crucial in focusing TA assets and intelligence templating efforts, in developing attack plans, 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (43 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

and in coordinating air corridors and ACAs with FA positioning requirements.

5-166. One technique for localized SEAD for a deep attack is to prep the ABFs with FA 

fires before occupation by the attack helicopters. MLRS fires are well suited for this role 

and may prep all ABFs simultaneously. Time separation is critical to preventing fratricide 

and to allow the helicopters to occupy the ABFs unopposed. The unit should fire the ABF 

prep based on an H-hour with the last rounds impacting from one to ten minutes before the 

aircraft arrive in their ABFs. Terrain and weather conditions must be taken into account 

since large amounts of dust and debris may disrupt the aircraft’s ability to begin locating and 

engaging targets in the engagement area.

5-167. FA fires can also be used to orient the attack aircraft to the engagement area. They 

should be fired as the aircraft are arriving in their ABFs and are establishing situational 

awareness. The EA prep serves two purposes. First, it suppresses the enemy elements that 

are the target of the attack and therefore any EADs that are accompanying them. Second, the 

flashes from the munitions provide the air crews with a visual reference of the location of 

the targets.

5-168. SEAD targets should be fired during egress in the same fashion as the ingress targets. 

Any targets discovered during ingress should be included in the egress program. The egress 

SEAD should be fired on-call if the attack aircraft can communicate with the FSO. If all 

communications with the helicopters is lost during the deep attack, then the egress SEAD 

should be fired on a planned time schedule. This allows the aircraft to know when it is safe 

to proceed down their egress route without being hit by SEAD fires.

CONSIDERATIONS

5-169. The battalion S3 and FDO work closely with the appropriate FSE, maneuver S3, and 

higher FA HQ to maintain current mission data. They review SEAD EFATs (and EFSTs) to 

ensure firing units will be in position, on time, with the necessary ammunition, able to fire 

the missions. They review the relative priorities, potential mission conflicts, and enemy 

threats to better anticipate how alternative or backup plans must be executed. The S3 

verifies who has triggering responsibility, who has what authority to change mission factors, 

and who he or the firing unit must contact if problems develop. He ensures the battalion 

FDO and firing units (primary and backup) are properly briefed in all aspects of the SEAD 

mission.

5-170. Firing positions must not interfere with established air corridors or restricted 

operating zones (ROZs). ROZs are areas where aviation unit C2 aircraft operate (frequently 

over friendly terrain). S3s should query FSEs or force FA HQ early to identify air corridors, 

ROZs, and ACAs.

5-171. The primary and backup triggers for each SEAD EFAT should be evaluated during 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (44 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

rehearsals. Timing is frequently important in SEAD fires to prevent fratricide of friendly air 

and obscuration of the main target. Aircraft may arrive early or late, targeting information 

may not develop, or the FA firing unit may be unavailable, delayed, or involved in another 

mission. The S3 must be able to quickly decide whether or not to fire or abort the mission. 

Since aborting a FA SEAD mission can have serious impact on the air mission, wargaming 

analysis and prior coordination are critical to understanding the commander’s guidances and 

priorities that should guide the S3’s decision. The FA battalion commander may retain abort 

decision-making authority on critical SEAD EFATs.

5-172. Aerial observer procedures should be reviewed in case immediate fires are requested. 

Requirements for fixed-wing observers will be different than for helicopter-based observers. 

Individual requests by flight leaders (pilots) for SEAD support are treated as targets of 

opportunity. These targets can be added to the current SEAD plan and fired during egress or 

during a re-attack of the target. The S3 and FDO must anticipate these missions, considering 

time, ammunition, firing units, and potential target types, and develop tentative fire orders 

for the more likely scenarios.

5-173. The S3 or FDO may have to recommend or make rapid adjustment to the SEAD fire 

plan to adjust for changing circumstances. When adjusting fire plans and servicing of 

immediate SEAD fire requests the S3 and FDO must carefully review the potential impact 

on other fires. Successful execution of adjustments depends on a complete understanding of 

the commander’s intent, priorities, and the concept of operations, and a thorough review of 

branches and sequels during planning will facilitate these adjustments during execution, and 

accurate situational awareness (operational and CSS).

5-174. Smoke may be used to obscure enemy air defenses or to signal the lifting or shifting 

of fires to allow aircraft to attack. The S3 should ensure the use of smoke is well 

coordinated.

5-175. The S2 works closely with targeting officers in the FSEs and with S2s in maneuver, 

aviation, or higher FA HQ to ensure the battalion has the most current targeting information. 

If the battalion performs SEAD targeting, the S2 must submit requests for SEAD related 

intelligence and targeting information as early as possible. Direct coordination with aviation, 

air force, and MI elements may be necessary to get accurate information in a timely manner. 

The battalion S2 or targeting officer in a FA battalion may briefly move to the FSE 

responsible for planning SEAD support to an operation.

5-176. SEAD targets include C2, ADA weapons, and radars. Often, one C2 facility or radar 

will service several EAD weapons and are thus key targets. Because of the ranges involved 

in supporting deep operations, target locations must be as accurate as possible. During 

coordination of SEAD targeting, FA battalion S2s and S3s should discuss target location 

accuracy with FSEs when they identify potential problems.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (45 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

5-177. The sources for development of SEAD targets in the close battle area are primarily 

visual observation by ground and air observers, electronic and imagery assets, or templating 

techniques. SEAD targets supporting deep air operations are provided primarily by Air 

Force tactical air reconnaissance flight reports, other aircraft reports, or satellite imagery 

available through corps and echelons above corps intelligence coordinators, all of which 

may require more coordination and/or special communications or automation arrangements.

5-178. The S6, working with the S3, reviews SEAD EFATs for unique communications and 

automation requirements. Due to the varied C2 arrangements, participants, and distances 

involved unusual communications arrangements may be necessary. Retrans or relay of voice 

and digital traffic may be necessary. Additional communications equipment may be 

warranted. Quickfire channels may be used. The battalion S6 may need to work directly 

with a ground or aviation force FSE to ensure communications arrangements are adequate. 

Alternate (backup) communications plans should be developed.

SECTION V — METEOROLOGY

5-179. Met data are one of the prerequisites for accurate predicted fire. With today's 

emphasis on first round fire for effect and trends toward longer distances, accurate met 

corrections for artillery fires are crucial to:

● Conserve ammunition.

● Decrease time in adjustment.

● Obtain a greater surprise effect.

● Reduce the potential for fratricide.

5-180. FA met involves the determination of current atmospheric conditions. Atmospheric 

conditions along the trajectory of a projectile or rocket directly affect its accuracy and may 

cause the projectile or rocket to miss the desired point of impact. A 5 to 10 percent effect on 

the firing tables is possible even with stable atmospheric conditions. For example, tests in 

Southwest Asia have shown that firing artillery at maximum ranges in extreme heat and low 

air density resulted in met corrections up to 4,700 meters.

5-181. While most FA battalions are primarily receivers and users of met information, FA 

battalions in separate maneuver brigades have an organic met section, and thus a 

responsibility for management of met operations. This includes preparation of the met plan 

as a part of the FASP/FSP (An example of a met tab is in Appendix A). During contingency 

or stability and support operations, any FA battalion could potentially have a met section 

attached. Detailed information on FA met is in FM 6-15, while use of met in gunnery 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (46 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:51 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

solutions is covered in FM 6-40.

JOINT/COMBINED MET CONSIDERATIONS

5-182. During joint and combined operations, an FA battalion may need to rely on non-US 

Army met support. The following information will assist the FA battalion in understanding 

met availability in joint and/or combined operations. Requests for met support from joint or 

combined met elements should be coordinated well in advance. In coordinating this support 

the S3 should request assistance from corps or division met personnel to ensure that the data 

can be received in a useable format, that it will be conducted within the appropriate area, 

and that it will be provided on the needed schedule.

Joint Operations Met

5-183. The US Air Force (USAF) has numerous fixed and deployable weather teams 

deployed throughout the world capable of performing upper air soundings. The information 

they gather cannot be used for ballistic solutions to the gunnery problem. The FA battalion 

S3 should understand that the presence of a USAF met team does not provide a ballistic met 

capability.

5-184. The US Navy has mobile environmental teams capable of sounding he atmosphere 

and producing ballistic data. The message produced is in STANAG format. These teams are 

deployed on a mission basis. They typically support their own units, but also support joint 

operations and could be requested to support US Army artillery operations.

Combined Operations Met

5-185. The US and several of its allies have agreed on standard met message formats that 

allow the exchange of atmospheric data among member countries with the assurance that the 

same atmospheric standards were used. Combined force artillery commanders and S3s may 

be able to assist the FA battalion with met issues.

BASIC MET GUIDANCE

5-186. The basic decisions concerning met data involve the following:

● Verifying that the met message is free of major errors.

● Determining which met message to use when multiple messages are available.

● Determining how long the met message can be used before the data may no longer be 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (47 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:52 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 5 Deliver Fires

valid.

5-187. Guidance is normally provided by TSOP or in the force FA HQ met tab of the FASP 

in the division or corps FSP. However, at times the FA Bn FDO, or the battery/platoon 

FDOs may need to make the key decisions concerning met usage. The general order of 

preference for determining which met data should be used is as follows:

● Current met message from a station within 20 km of the firing point.

● Current met message from the nearest station more than 20 km from the firing point.

● Met messages more than two hours old but from a station within 20 km of the firing 

points. A 4-hour old met message may be used except when day/night transitions or 

frontal passages are occurring.

MET MESSAGE VALIDITY CONSIDERATIONS

5-188. The validity of a met message decreases with time, distance, and weather. The 

accuracy of a met message decreases as the distance from the met sounding site increases. 

Local topography has a pronounced effect on the distance that met data can be reasonably 

extended. In mountainous terrain, or near large bodies of water, distinct variations in 

atmospheric conditions occur over short distances. Met messages for artillery are considered 

valid 10 to 20 km from the balloon release point depending on the nature of the terrain.

5-189. The passage of time decreases the accuracy of a met message because of the 

changing nature of weather. There are no specific rules for determining the usable time, 

since that determination will depend on the characteristics of the atmosphere, periods of 

transition, met section movement, personnel, supplies and equipment, and the altitude. 

Generally, the more the weather changes, the less valid the met becomes.

REGISTRATION

5-190. If the current applied met appears invalid and a valid met is not available the S3 and 

FDO should consider conducting a registration or using residual data from an adjust fire 

mission until a valid met is available.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch5.htm (48 of 48) [1/7/2002 1:38:52 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

RDL

Homepage

Table of

Contents

Document

Information

Download

Instructions

Chapter 6

Movement and Positioning Considerations

The movement and positioning of FA battalions on today's fluid, crowded battlefield is a 

complicated process involving terrain management, selection of positions, movement 

planning and control, and the coordination of survey support for firing and TA operations. 

Clearance, coordination, and synchronization are operative terms that are critical to the 

successful conduct of FA movement and positioning. FA units are competing for battle 

space with all other elements, and the increased use of dispersed, scoot-and-shoot tactics by 

newer FA weapon systems creates a significant challenge for the FA battalion commander. 

This chapter provides the FA commander and staff with information to aid in planning the 

displacement and movement of the FA battalion. It has five major sections: Section I

addresses terrain management, Section II focuses on positioning, Section III covers 

movement, Section IV discusses survey, and Section V provides a brief overview on 

deployment.

SECTION I — TERRAIN MANAGEMENT

6-01. Terrain management is primarily the responsibility of the unit that controls the 

ground in a particular area or sector. This is usually an Army maneuver unit, however, 

especially during stability operations and support operations, the controlling agency could 

be a host nation government or military force, or a UN-affiliated military force or civilian 

relief organization.

6-02. FA battalions are integrally involved in the terrain management process as the 

positions and routes that the FA requires to accomplish its mission must be carefully 

planned and coordinated with all the units who control or use the required terrain. Terrain 

management involves the planning and coordination of positions and movements for units 

and individual elements or teams that are part of, or in support of, a FA battalion. Terrain 

management coordination is primarily the responsibility of the S3, however the, S2, S4, S6, 

and, where applicable, FSOs all play a role in the planning and coordination of positions 

and movements. Because a maneuver unit usually controls the required terrain, FSEs play a 

critical role in terrain management for all FA assets that must operate within a particular 

maneuver unit’s zone.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (1 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

6-03. The S2 provides valuable advice on the terrain, road and weather conditions, 

security and threat considerations (military and civilian), obstacles, and any intelligence 

information related to positioning and movement. The S2 also frequently assists the S3 with 

coordination of MP support for moves, for reconnaissance of routes or PAs, and for 

acquiring maps or photographs of areas.

6-04. The FSEs with the maneuver units are responsible for assisting the maneuver S3 and 

the FA S3s in the coordination of positions and routes for FA units. The FSO is in the best 

position to monitor the current locations of all friendly units while simultaneously 

understanding FA requirements. Frequently, the brigade FSO will be working on behalf of 

and in conjunction with the FSCOORD/DS FA battalion commander. In addition to 

coordinating terrain management issues for supporting DS and R FA battalions, the brigade 

FSO may be involved in coordinating with division or corps FSEs or FA HQs for battle 

space for division and corps GS units operating within or moving through the brigade zone.

6-05. Corps and divisional GS/GSR units frequently coordinate terrain management 

through DIVARTY or Corps Arty. Occasionally, the higher level coordination will consist 

of general area coordination. The FA battalion will then conduct direct coordination with 

the lowest level maneuver unit to obtain the specific locations or routes needed for the 

battalion. Usually the brigade FSE is the best element with which to coordinate.

POSITION COORDINATION

6-06. Terrain management for a FA battalion involves the selection and coordination of 

numerous types of positions. The type of FA unit or element and the type of position 

required will have various implications for terrain management for PAs. (A PA is a general 

planning area within which a unit or element will position and operate, based on METT-TC 

and the actual terrain within the area. The boundaries of a PA describe the area within 

which a commander can select an appropriate position or positions. The size of a PA is 

dependent on METT-TC, especially the mission, type of unit and weapon system, echelon, 

and tactics. A battalion PA may contain smaller PAs for the HQ, trains, and subordinate 

units. A unit may designate separate smaller PAs for planning primary, supplementary, and 

alternate positions, or a single larger PA that allows for the siting of more than one of these 

position types within the limits of the PA.) While CP positions, hide locations, or assembly 

areas usually may be placed near other friendly units, weapon firing areas or radar 

operating positions should generally not be positioned close to other elements (e.g, BSAs, 

CPs, critical logistics or communications sites, populated areas) without appropriate 

consideration for the risks. As much as possible, S3s and FSEs should coordinate the use of 

PAs large enough to allow some flexibility in the final placement of the unit or element. 

Designation of too small an area may not provide enough terrain for the unit to properly site 

or camouflage all of its elements. Platoon or battery firing areas must be large enough to 

allow proper dispersion, and in the case of MLRS or Paladin, to allow for the selection of 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (2 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

multiple firing points within the area.

6-07. Some weapon systems have special considerations. As an example, the danger area 

around an MLRS launcher, due to blast and flying debris during a launch, is 300m to the 

front and 400m to the rear of the launcher. FSOs must ensure that all unit commanders 

understand the risks and stay clear of FA weapon systems. FA battery and platoon 

commanders must also understand terrain management priorities and allocations to avoid 

endangering or disrupting friendly units. The maneuver commander may designate specific 

sections of terrain as "No-Go" areas for FA weapon firing positions. This may be used more 

frequently for MLRS due to the larger firing signature and danger area.

6-08. When CP or trains positions must be placed near other similar elements (such as the 

BSA), consideration should be given to consolidating elements or, as a minimum, 

consolidating defensive plans. Both vehicular and electronic traffic should be considered in 

the planning and coordination of positions.

6-09. Terrain management is a three-dimensional process as firing locations must be 

coordinated with air corridors and other three-dimensional control measures. FSEs play a 

key role during planning by obtaining as much information as possible as early as possible 

from Army aviation and Air Force elements. Current and future operations must be 

considered as certain control measures, such as air corridors, may not go into effect until 

later in an operation.

6-10. FA battalion S3s should try to identify their PA requirements as early as possible so 

that FSEs can work with the maneuver units to prioritize and allocate battlespace early in 

the planning sequence. Alternate and supplementary position requirements must be 

considered and continuous coordination and communication is necessary. Alternate and 

supplementary positions are especially vulnerable to occupation by other Army units or 

even displaced civilians.

6-11. Frequently, coordination may also be required with local civilian governments. This 

coordination may be accomplished by the maneuver S3 as part of overall terrain 

coordination for the combined arms force, or the responsibility may fall to the FA battalion 

after general position requests have been approved by the maneuver S3.

MOVEMENT COORDINATION

6-12. FA battalions may move individually or as part of a larger force such as a maneuver 

brigade or a FA brigade. The movements may consist of administrative or tactical road 

marches, combined arms team movements or combat formations, or the short tactical 

displacement of elements.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (3 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

6-13. Terrain management issues concerning FA movements include more that just 

ensuring that FA movements are synchronized with the battle plan. Since many Army units 

compete for limited routes, FA movements must be coordinated and synchronized as part of 

the overall force movement plan. Frequently a FA battalion will require several routes for 

movement of all battalion elements. Often, the time allocated for a FA unit to transit a 

given route or routes will determine the type of movement technique used, the speed 

traveled, and the number of rest stops. Careful coordination with the maneuver unit 

responsible for the routes is necessary to ensure that FA units are adequately prioritized and 

included in overall movement plans. Positions for assembly areas or rest/refuel stops may 

be necessary.

6-14. When the FA battalion moves as part of a larger force, the FA S3 must understand 

all larger unit TSOP issues, control measures, movement techniques, and the expected 

reactions to ground or air attack. In a combined arms force move, elements of the FA 

battalion may need to be dispersed throughout the larger force to allow adequate artillery 

support.

6-15. As with PAs, close coordination between FA battalion S3s and FSEs is critical to 

terrain management for moves. Conflicts that arise may be forwarded through maneuver 

channels as well as FA channels. FSEs usually try to monitor other unit movements to 

ensure they do not interfere with the FA movement plan. The FA battalion S4 is also in a 

good position to learn about the movement of other CSS elements and should pass on 

information to the S3 as appropriate.

SECTION II — POSITIONING

6-16. A FA battalion requires a wide variety of position locations in the accomplishment 

of its mission. The methods and techniques of organizing and positioning the elements of a 

FA battalion are usually situationally dependent. However, several standard positioning 

principles must be considered. Reconnaissance is also very important to the positioning and 

movement of the FA battalion. This section addresses position selection considerations, 

types of positions, and reconnaissance.

POSITION AREA SELECTION CONSIDERATIONS

6-17. Several factors influence the S3's decision on where and how to organize and 

position the firing batteries, trains and CPs. The specific details of many of these factors 

will be identified during MDMP and IPB development. Some of the factors the FA staff 

should consider in PA selection are:

● Mission. 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (4 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

● The tactical situation.

● Force mix and weapon capabilities and limitations (to include attached/R/GSR FA).

● Logistical considerations.

● Impact of ammunition constraints (types, quantities, achievable ranges).

● Survivability.

● Future operations.

● The zone of the supported unit.

● Communications.

● Enemy capabilities.

● Weather and terrain.

6-18. Firing units should be positioned laterally and in depth. This increases their 

survivability and their flexibility in responding to calls for fire across the zone of action of 

the supported unit. The S3 must also consider minimum and maximum range implications 

(weapons and ammunition) and requirements to mass fires. In static or offensive operations, 

where the FLOT is moving forward, the S3 generally wants to position firing elements so 

the majority of the range fan (such as 2/3’s) is forward of the FLOT or forward edge of the 

battle area (FEBA). In retrogrades, or other operations where the FLOT is moving or may 

move rearward, the S3 may position firing units further behind the FLOT or FEBA. In all 

cases, the mission, METT-TC, and location of critical targets will be the primary 

considerations for positioning firing elements.

TYPES OF POSITION AREAS

6-19. The following list describes the types of positions that may be used by a FA 

battalion. CP locations are discussed in more detail in Chapter 2. CSS positions are 

discussed in Chapter 7. Positioning considerations for radar are covered in Chapter 5. Radio 

retrans sites are discussed in Chapter 3. Battery level positions are discussed in detail in FM 

6-50, FM 6-60, and FM 6-70.

● Hide/firing positions/areas for cannon, rocket, and missile systems.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (5 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

● Battery/platoon, battery operations center (BOC)/POC locations.

● CP locations: main CP, ALOC, BSOC, JTOC.

● Logistics locations: UMCP, refuel/rearm points, ammunition points.

● Assembly areas.

● Radar section or met section positions.

● Radio retrans sites.

● Primary, alternate, supplementary positions.

■ A primary position is one from which a unit will accomplish its assigned 

tactical mission.

■ An alternate position is one to which a unit moves if the primary position 

becomes untenable or unsuitable for accomplishing the mission. The alternate 

position must allow the unit to perform the same mission assigned to it in the 

primary position.

■ A supplementary position is one to which a unit moves to perform a 

specific mission. As an example, a firing battery may be instructed to use a 

supplementary position to fire a SCATMINE or smoke mission.

● Current and planned/successive positions.

6-20. Locations such as CPs and logistics positions may be established separately or may 

be located with each other, with other FA elements, or with non-FA elements. For example, 

a DS FA battalion CP may be co-located with the supported maneuver brigade CP; or the 

battalion trains may be co-located with the brigade trains. A DS and R FA battalion may 

consolidate UMCPs.

ASSEMBLY AREAS

6-21. A FA battalion may occupy an assembly area as an individual entity or as part of a 

larger force. DS and R units may occasionally occupy an assembly area as part of a 

combined arms force. GS and GSR units may be part of a FA brigade assembly area. There 

are two basic methods for organizing assembly areas:

● As a single assembly area divided into sub-sections.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (6 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

● As separate, dispersed assembly areas for sub-elements or groups of sub-elements.

6-22. These methods are discussed below. While these paragraphs address combined arms 

assembly areas, the two techniques can also be used for establishing FA only assembly 

areas. GS and GSR FA battalions may sometimes occupy FA brigade assembly areas 

established on similar techniques. Additional information on maneuver brigade assembly 

areas can be found in FM 71-3, The Armored and Mechanized Infantry Brigade.

A Sectioned Assembly Area

6-23. In this method the force (in this case a maneuver brigade) divides the assembly area 

into subordinate areas of responsibility, with subordinate battalions around the perimeter. 

C2, CS, and CSS units and elements are located in the middle. This technique provides 

excellent perimeter defense. In a combined arms assembly area, the FA battalion may 

disperse its batteries within the center based on the situation. This can allow 360-degree FS, 

with each battery oriented on a maneuver battalion (see Figure 6-1).

Figure 6-1. Example of a FA Battalion in a Sectioned Assembly Area

6-24. Depending on the size of the assembly area, minimum range limitations may require 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (7 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

the battalion to rely on support from other FA battalions for close in fires. High angle fires 

may be required more frequently. Logistics operations, especially transfer of ammunition, 

are facilitated as all the FA units are within the same location.

6-25. As part of a FA brigade, a FA battalion may be assigned its own sector within the 

brigade assembly area, with the FA brigade HQ in the center section. As an individual unit, 

the battalion would assign sectors to each firing battery and place its C2 and CSS elements 

in the middle. In battalions with a consolidated CSS structure, ammunition and fuel may be 

dispersed to a larger degree, which may include placing them in firing battery sectors. This 

would facilitate CSS responsiveness and improve survivability.

Dispersed Assembly Areas

6-26. A brigade may assign separate assembly areas to subordinate elements (see Figure 6-

2). In this method, subordinate elements provide their own 360-degree security. Areas 

between subunits would be secured through visual and electronic surveillance or patrols. 

Brigade C2 and the bulk of the CSS elements would occupy positions central to the 

outlying subordinate element areas.

Figure 6-2. Example of a FA Battalion in Dispersed Assembly Areas

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (8 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

6-27. In a combined arms assembly area group, a FA battalion may disperse all of its 

firing batteries among the outer positions. The bulk of the battalion C2 and CSS would be 

located in the central position. This method increases overall survivability from air attack 

and provides better mutual support. However logistics is more complicated as CSS 

elements would have to traverse the unsecured ground between locations. Also, the firing 

batteries are more exposed to ground attacks on the maneuver battalion positions.

6-28. Another option is to locate the entire battalion within the central assembly area. This 

improves C2 and logistics but increases vulnerability to air or ground attack on the central 

position. It is also more difficult for the battalion to provide close in fires to the central 

location in case of attack and for the batteries to provide mutually supporting fires to each 

other.

6-29. A variation of both techniques can be used whereby the bulk of the battalion C2 and 

CSS is placed in the center and one or two firing batteries are dispersed to subunit assembly 

areas farthest from the expected enemy locations. At least one firing battery is positioned in 

the center location.

6-30. In a FA brigade situation, the FA battalion most likely would have it’s own 

assembly area as part of the FA brigade assembly area group.

OCCUPATION OF BUILT-UP AREAS

6-31. When a FA battalion has the option of positioning within or outside of a built-up 

area, the S3 should consider the following advantages and disadvantages in making his 

decision.

ADVANTAGES

6-32. The enemy’s TA capabilities are significantly degraded because of the effects of 

terrain masking on observation. The inherent heat and noise signatures of the cities distort 

sound ranging and IR detection systems. The inherent FM emissions make radio direction 

finding (RDF) difficult. Conventional photographic reconnaissance is more difficult 

because there is a greater demand on image interpretation with the clutter of an urban 

landscape. It is easier to hide in an environment where the unit equipment is less out of 

place than in a rural and more natural environment.

DISADVANTAGES

6-33. Some of the disadvantages of occupying built-up areas include:

● Urban areas are often on likely avenues of approach. To enhance survivability, FA 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (9 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

normally avoids positioning along likely enemy avenues of approach. In urban 

combat, this may often not be possible because every road or alley is a possible 

avenue of approach. A battalion should use available obstacles, such as overturned 

vehicles and demolished structures, to delay an enemy force. The S3 must 

coordinate all obstacles with the supported maneuver force.

● Any unit deployed in urban terrain is vulnerable to human intelligence (HUMINT) 

and sabotage activities, especially by civilians and special forces.

● Survey is more difficult. Reduced line-of-sight and magnetic interference (metallic 

and power line interference) can interfere with conventional survey. Line-of-sight 

problems can interfere with laying in howitzers. Firing elements may use hasty 

survey technique more often. See FM 6-50 for hasty survey techniques.

● Communications with higher and supported units by FM radio is significantly 

degraded because of line-of-sight problems. Careful siting of antennas and retrans 

stations may be required to overcome the problem. Units may rely more on wire 

usage.

● FA firing units may find themselves surrounded by enemy forces as the result of the 

nonlinear nature of urban combat. The firing unit must be prepared to defend itself 

against enemy assault while performing its primary role of delivering FS. Depending 

on availability, a maneuver squad or platoon not committed elsewhere may be 

required to provide local security for a firing unit. However, it is likely that an FA 

battery must be prepared to prevent a breach in the line by defending its own 

position against enemy ground assault. This means that firing batteries must be 

trained and equipped to build barricades, prepare demolitions, lay minefields, and 

prepare Claymores and booby traps.

● Positioning FA units near urban structures may create site-to-crest problems. The 

height of some of the buildings along the gun-target line directly in front of the 

battery position may have to be reduced to avoid the use of high-angle fires. 

Engineer support should be sought to ensure rubble doesn’t hinder friendly 

movement. The S3 should ensure firing elements report site-to-crest problems so 

that he can anticipate the impacts and plan appropriate adjustments to fires. If 

several weapons are masked, the S3 may need to plan on increased volleys from 

available shooters and/or increased support from other FA assets.

● Lay and occupation times increase as a result of movement, construction, spade 

emplacement, and reduced line-of-sight. Units may need multiple aiming circles to 

lay a firing element. Also, the use of other lay techniques, such as referring between 

pieces, will be difficult because howitzers may not be able to see each other. Newer 

weapon systems with internal positioning systems are not as affected by this.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (10 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

● Displacement may be difficult because of the rubbling effect and the width of roads 

in the urban area. In addition to site-to-crest problems, individual sections may have 

difficulty traversing and elevating weapons because of interference of buildings.

RECONNAISSANCE

6-34. Units conduct reconnaissance to identify the best battalion and firing unit positions, 

march routes, start and release points (SPs/RPs), CPs, OPs, and communications sites. This 

includes a thorough analysis of the terrain. Reconnaissance helps the unit move from one 

location to another as quickly and in as organized a manner as possible. At times, the 

reconnaissance effort may be part of a larger reconnaissance effort and will need to be 

coordinated.

PLANNING AND COORDINATION

6-35. Based on the tactical situation and METT-TC, the commander and the S3 will 

determine if reconnaissance is possible and if so, the type of reconnaissance and 

composition of the party. Normally, the S3, S6, and battery commanders, when available, 

form the reconnaissance party. In some cases, the S2 may go with the reconnaissance party 

to plan for radar positions, OPs, and all-around security. Composition of the reconnaissance 

party is generally prescribed in unit TSOPs. During the reconnaissance, the party makes 

decisions regarding:

● Ability to accomplish the mission.

● All PAs, communications sites, and observation posts.

● All-around security.

● Routes of march (primary and alternates) and rest/refuel sites.

● Survey requirements.

● Position entrances and exits.

● Concealment/defilade.

● Trafficability.

● SPs and RPs.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (11 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

● Use of route markers or traffic control points.

● Order of march/ displacement.

● Enemy and friendly situations.

● Bridge capacity.

● Time of movement/travel times.

6-36. Concurrently, the staff (primarily the S3) coordinates with the maneuver HQ, 

normally through the brigade or regimental FSO, to:

● Verify the battalion can support the mission from its planned positions.

● Resolve any conflicts in positioning or movement between the FA battalion and the 

maneuver elements.

● Ensure all elements know the current and planned PAs.

6-37. Determine how specific maneuver operations, such as the obstacle and deception 

plans, affect the reconnaissance, its intended routes, and the subsequent tactical movement 

of the unit.

RECONNAISSANCE TECHNIQUES

6-38. The battalion commander and staff can use one or a combination of the three 

reconnaissance methods - map, ground, and air. The best reconnaissance is a combination 

of all three. Normally only a map reconnaissance is possible, frequently followed by a 

ground reconnaissance.

Map Reconnaissance

6-39. Any reconnaissance begins with a map reconnaissance, especially when time is short 

or when the enemy occupies the projected position. A map reconnaissance can identify 

potentially unsuitable routes, ambush sites, natural obstacles, and chokepoints. Some things 

to consider include:

● Actual terrain conditions cannot be determined.

● Roads, towns, and terrain features may have changed.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (12 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

● Other units may be in the position.

● Military load classifications of bridges aren’t listed on maps. Bridges must be 

physically inspected. The engineers may have a classification listing available; 

however, ensure it is not outdated.

● Enemy forces may be in the area.

Ground Reconnaissance

6-40. This is the best method of reconnaissance and is used whenever possible. Security 

may be an issue as most reconnaissance parties are small. When the ground threat is high, 

reconnaissance parties also must take actions to prevent fratricide with friendly elements in 

or near the area to be reconnoitered. Ground reconnaissance is the most time consuming 

technique.

Air Reconnaissance

6-41. Use air reconnaissance to support map and ground reconnaissance whenever 

possible, especially when time is short, air assets are available, and air superiority exists in 

the area to be reconnoitered. Considerations include:

● The physical condition of the ground is difficult to determine.

● The route to be used cannot be adequately reconnoitered.

● Key staff elements cannot accompany the commander.

● The reconnaissance could give away future plans and intentions.

SECTION III — MOVEMENT

6-42. This section addresses movement techniques and considerations common to most 

battalions. It also provides information on planning and controlling movement. Additional 

information can be found in FM 6-50, FM 6-60, and FM 6-70.

MOVEMENT TECHNIQUES

6-43. FA battalions may conduct several types of movement, individually or as part of a 

larger movement by a combined arms force or a FA brigade. DS and R FA battalions may 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (13 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

participate in approach marches and combat formations, which are primarily maneuver or 

combined arms moves.

● Administrative movement.

● Tactical road march (close, open, infiltration and combined arms).

● Airborne or airmobile movement.

● Combined arms movements.

■ Approach march.

■ Combat formations.

● Tactical displacements.

ADMINISTRATIVE MOVEMENT

6-44. Units conduct administrative movement when contact with the enemy (ground or 

air) is unlikely. Movement emphasizes efficient use of organic and supporting 

transportation assets. The S4 plans administrative movements.

TACTICAL ROAD MARCH TECHNIQUES

6-45. The tactical road march is a unit move in a combat-ready posture normally 

conducted in the combat zone. Enemy contact is possible during the march or soon after 

arrival at the unit’s destination. Units frequently move by tactical road marches to assembly 

areas to prepare for combat operations. Three techniques can be used during tactical road 

marches:

● Close column.

● Open column.

● Infiltration.

Close Column

6-46. In a close column, vehicles are spaced about 20 to 25 meters apart during daylight 

(maximum 50 meters). At night, vehicles are spaced so that each driver can see the two 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (14 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

lights in the blackout marker of the vehicle ahead. Close column is normally used for 

marches under blackout driving conditions, in restricted terrain, when maximum C2 is 

required, or when necessary to quickly clear a bridge, intersection, or key route for other 

traffic. It is also useful during periods of limited visibility, or when moving through builtup or congested areas.

6-47. The advantages of the close column march technique include:

● Simplicity of command and control.

● Maximizes the traffic capacity of a route.

● Reduces march column length.

● Concentrates defensive firepower.

6-48. Disadvantages of the close column march technique include:

● Provides little dispersion.

● Increases vulnerability to enemy observation. Strength and nature of the column is 

more apparent to enemy observers.

● Increases vulnerability to attack, especially air attack.

● Increases risk of accidents, especially during night, periods of limited visibility or 

poor weather/road conditions, and during long moves.

● Reduces convoy speed and increases driver fatigue.

Open Column

6-49. In an open column, the commander increases the distance between vehicles to 

provide greater dispersion. The distance between vehicles varies from 50 to 100 meters, and 

may be greater if required. The open column technique is normally used during daylight 

and when traversing icy, slick, or steep roads where the accident risk is high. Units may 

also use it at night with infrared light, blackout lights, or passive night-vision equipment. 

This is the most common movement technique because it offers the most security while still 

providing the commander with a reasonable degree of control.

6-50. The advantages of the open column march technique include:

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (15 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

● Speed (the fastest march technique).

● Increases dispersion decreases vulnerability to effective enemy observation and 

attack, especially air attack. 

● Lessens chance of an entire march column being ambushed.

● Eases passing of individual vehicles encountered during the move.

● Improves vision on dusty roads and reduces risk of accidents.

6-51. The disadvantages of the open column march technique include:

● Increases column length, requiring more road space, and increases passing times. 

This can complicate movement planning.

● Decreases C2 as communication within the column is more difficult.

● Decreases the ability of the column to quickly mass defensive fires against an 

ambush.

● Increases risk of column breakup if a vehicle breaks down or loses contact with the 

vehicle to its front.

● Increases risk of other traffic becoming interspersed in the column.

Infiltration

6-52. During a move by infiltration, vehicles are dispatched individually, in small groups, 

or at irregular intervals at a rate that keeps the traffic density down and prevents undue 

massing of vehicles. Infiltration is suited for tactical road marches when there is enough 

time and road space and when the commander desires the maximum security, dispersion, 

and deception.

6-53. The advantages of the infiltration march technique include:

● Provides least vulnerability to hostile observation.

● Provides passive defense against air and artillery attack.

● Deceives the enemy as to the size of the unit.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (16 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

● Ideal for covert operations.

6-54. The disadvantages of the infiltration march technique include:

● Requires more time to complete a move.

● Is the most difficult to command and control.

● Smaller elements are more vulnerable to enemy ground attack.

● Individual vehicles or smaller groups may get lost.

● Complicates and protracts recovery of disabled vehicles.

● Unit integrity is not restored until the last vehicles closes. This can complicate the 

onward forward movement or deployment of the unit.

Combined Arms Road Marches

6-55. When the FA battalion moves as part of a combined arms force the battalion may 

move as a single serial within the overall force (see Figure 6-3). The position of the FA 

serial within the combined arms march is determined by the situation. The battalion may 

also move dispersed by battery within the movement. This technique may allow the 

battalion to place one battery more forward in the march column and to better disperse FA 

assets to provide mutual support, to support the force, and to increase survivability. When 

moving as part of the larger force, the FA battalion will need to coordinate reconnaissance 

and quartering party activities with the maneuver force.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (17 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

Figure 6-3. Example of a FA Battalion in a Combined Arms Tactical Road March

AIRBORNE/AIRMOBILE MOVEMENT

6-56. FA towed cannon battalions may be moved/inserted by way of airborne or airmobile 

operations. Airborne movements are usually conducted as part of a combined arms force 

operation. Airmobile moves are also frequently conducted as part of a combined force 

operation but may also be an FA only move. FA only airmobile operations may be used 

when ground movement isn’t possible due to impassable terrain or enemy forces, to 

conduct an artillery raid, or to quickly shift firepower or reinforce an operation.

6-57. As air transportation assets are limited, airborne and airmobile movement frequently 

involves only the critical elements of the battalion, possibly only one or two firing batteries 

and a HQ/CSS slice. The remainder of the battalion may follow later. Reconnaissance is 

frequently difficult, and is an OPSEC issue as it can give away locations and plans. 

Additional information on airborne and airmobile operations is in Chapter 8.

COMBINED ARMS MOVEMENTS

6-58. FA battalions, especially DS battalions, may occasionally make their movement as 

part of a maneuver ground operation. Two types of combined arms ground movements are 

the approach march and combat formations.

Approach March

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (18 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

6-59. An approach march is a tactical movement that emphasizes speed over tactical 

deployment (see Figure 6-4). It is used when the enemy’s location is known, which allows 

the force to move with greater speed and less physical security or dispersion. The approach 

march terminates in a march objective, such as an attack position, assembly area, or assault 

position, or can be used to transition to an attack.

Figure 6-4. Example of a FA Battalion in a Combined Arms Approach March

6-60. There are several key differences between an approach march and a tactical road 

march. An approach march employs a larger security force. Units conducting an approach 

march are task organized before the march begins to allow them to transition to the mission 

without making major adjustments in the organization. Units conducting an approach 

march establish appropriate intervals between vehicles and normally do not employ a close 

column. In addition, more routes are used during an approach march.

6-61. As the approach march nears areas of likely enemy contact, the maneuver 

commander divides his main force into smaller, less vulnerable columns that move on 

multiple routes or cross-country while continuing to employ security elements.

6-62. A FA battalion that is part of an approach march will normally disperse among 

march columns based on how it expects to deploy during or at the end of the march. The 

ability to provide fires for the force is also a major consideration. If cross-country 

movement is expected, vehicles with limited mobility may need to travel in whichever 

column will use the more trafficable routes. These elements would link back up with their 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (19 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

units as FA positions stabilize and better routes become available.

6-63. As the approach march disperses into smaller columns, security becomes an issue 

for FA units. At some point firing batteries and CPs may need to separate from the march 

column to establish firing capability to support the force. RPs should be used to identify 

where and when FA units are no longer part of the approach march. Generally, at least one 

battery will need to be in position at whatever point the maneuver commander desires 

support for the screening force in anticipation of enemy contact.

6-64. The requirement to provide fires may occur earlier than anticipated, before FA units 

have departed the march column to assume firing positions. The FA battalion should have a 

plan (battle drill) for this situation and should include this in the rehearsal plan. The plan 

may consist of one firing battery and the battalion jump TOC pulling out of the march 

column and assuming operations with further actions determined based on how the 

situation develops. The availability of reinforcing FA or fires from force FA units must also 

be considered during an approach march.

6-65. A DS FA battalion may also have to plan and coordinate march locations for a 

reinforcing battalion, and radars,. The later may be required in screening/security forces 

forward or to the flanks. Several EFSTs and EFATs will probably be planned in support of 

the approach march and many will involve linkages between COLTs/Strikers (or other 

security force elements) and the firing elements that will provide the fires.

Combat Formations

6-66. A FA battalion, especially one with a DS or R mission, may move as part of the 

supported maneuver force’s combat formation. Combat formations are used for movement 

when the unit anticipates combat. Maneuver brigades use six basic combat formations:

● Column.

● Line.

● Echelon.

● Box.

● Wedge.

● Vee.

6-67. These formations and the guidelines for their use are described in more detail in FM 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (20 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

7-30, The Infantry Brigade, and FM 71-3. A diagram of a FA battalion moving in an 

infantry brigade echelon formation (Figure 6-5) is provided as an example of a combat 

formation.

Figure 6-5. Example Combat Formation (Brigade in Echelon Formation)

6-68. The deployment of FA elements within a combat formation will be dependent on the 

situation and the maneuver commander’s concept for fires. As with the approach march, the 

timing and execution of FA elements departing the formation to assume firing positions is a 

critical activity that requires detailed planning and rehearsal.

MOVEMENT CONSIDERATIONS

6-69. Consideration for planning movements include:

● Current mission and future operations.

● Tactical situation (to include other movements).

● Communications (to include automation).

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (21 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

● Force mix and weapon capabilities.

● Survivability/security/threat.

● Time/distance.

● Routes.

■ Road/route capacities and conditions.

■ Bridge capacities.

■ Critical points, intersections/forks, and checkpoints.

■ Location of friendly/enemy/natural obstacles.

● Weather and terrain.

DISPLACEMENT TECHNIQUES

6-70. Whereas movement primarily concerns the method of transportation and the actual 

travel techniques used, displacement addresses the broader organization and sequencing of 

a unit move. The battalion can displace by unit, echelon, battery or element (that is, by 

platoon, section or vehicle).

DISPLACEMENT BY UNIT

6-71. In a displacement by unit, the battalion displaces with all elements moving at once. 

This method is best used when the battalion is supporting a unit not in contact or when 

augmenting fires are available.

6-72. The advantages of this method are as follows:

● This type of displacement is most easily controlled.

● It is the fastest method.

● Long moves are made more easily.

6-73. The disadvantages of this method are as follows:

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (22 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

● The battalion presents a big target.

● While moving, the battalion is not providing any immediate FS.

● The traffic will further congest already crowded roads.

● The commander has little flexibility once the movement has started.

DISPLACEMENT BY ECHELON

6-74. In displacement by echelon, the battalion usually moves in 2-3 groupings organized 

for the situation rather than by specific unit. As an example, the battalion may displace one 

or two firing batteries, a portion of the C2 element and some service elements in one 

echelon. The rest of the battalion stays in position to support the ongoing operation until the 

first echelon is in place. The remainder of the battalion moves as a second echelon.

6-75. The advantages of this method are as follows:

● The maneuver operation receives continued FA FS.

● The mutual support unit control of the remaining elements is simpler.

● Command and control are facilitated.

● The size of moving convoys is smaller than in a displacement by unit.

6-76. The disadvantages of this method are as follows:

● Each of the moving elements is relatively large.

● Support to the operation is degraded by as much as two-thirds, depending on the 

technique used.

● The commander’s flexibility is limited.

DISPLACEMENT BY BATTERY

6-77. In a displacement by battery, each battery of the battalion moves only after the 

preceding battery has completed its move and is in place. The CP and trains move by a 

separate schedule. This method is used primarily to support a unit in contact.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (23 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

6-78. The advantages of this method are as follows:

● Support to the maneuver operation is continuous.

● By use of the mutual support unit, C2 of fires are continuous.

● Command and control of the movement are centralized.

6-79. The disadvantages of this method are as follows:

● FA support to the operation is degraded by one-third throughout the movement of 

the battalion.

● The movement is slow.

● The movement of individual units presents a significant target.

● The commander's flexibility is not maximized.

DISPLACEMENT BY ELEMENT

6-80. In a displacement by element, the battalion displaces by individual elements as 

recommended by the battery commanders. Their recommendations are based on knowledge 

of the level of training of the battery.

6-81. The advantages of this method are as follows:

● Flexibility of the commander is increased.

● Maximum continued support to the maneuver operation is ensured.

● The signature of the moving unit is very small.

● The higher the level of training of the unit, the more effective this technique 

becomes.

● Command and control of the movement are decentralized. The C2 elements are 

released to concentrate on the conduct of the battle.

● Flexibility in selection of movement routes is unlimited.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (24 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

6-82. The disadvantages of this method are as follows:

● Considerable time is required to complete the move.

● Control by the mutual support unit is not facilitated.

● Command and control problems are increased.

● The smaller elements are more at risk to ambush and attack by enemy elements or 

sympathizers.

● Information flow must be rapid and accurate.

MOVEMENT CONTROL MEASURES

6-83. Units use graphic and procedural control measures to control movement and 

positioning of forces. Common graphic control measures include objectives, phase lines, 

checkpoints, and boundaries. Procedural controls, such as periodic reports by subordinates, 

also assist with controlling movement. All subordinates should report crossing or 

occupation of key graphic control measures and checkpoints, initiation of movement, and 

closure at designations. Units should immediately report problems that impact the 

movement plan. TSOPs will provide much movement guidance with movement plans 

addressing changes or additions as necessary. Refer to FM 101-5-1 for additional 

information on maneuver control measures.

START POINT

6-84. Each movement has an easily recognized SP. It should be far enough from assembly 

areas that units are organized and moving at the detailed rate by the time it is reached. Each 

unit should have a separate route to the SP. Each unit is responsible for reconnoitering its 

route to the SP and determining times of arrival and clearance of the SP. If the unit is 

displacing as part of a larger unit, the SP is also the point at which control of movement is 

normally assumed by the larger unit.

RELEASE POINT

6-85. The RP gives the march column a common point for reverting to own or parent unit 

control. It should be on the route and recognizable on both the ground and the map. It is 

important that units disperse quickly from the RP. Again, separate routes should be used 

from the RP to the new PA for each unit as much as possible.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (25 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

CRITICAL POINTS

6-86. Critical points are points used for reference in giving instructions, places where 

interference with movement may occur, or places where timing may be critical. Movement 

should generally continue uninterrupted through these critical points unless one is 

designated as a planned stop (possibly to refuel, rearm, rest, or allow passing of a higher 

priority unit). Critical points may include key intersections or points along the route where 

direction of movement changes. Guides or signs may have to be used.

CHECKPOINTS

6-87. Checkpoints are features identifiable on the ground and on the map. They are used in 

reporting progress along the route. Checkpoints may be used as target reference points 

when planning defensive fires for the convoy.

RALLY POINTS

6-88. Normally a rally point is a geographical feature identifiable on the ground and on a 

map. It is used as a point of assembly and recovery from dispersion due to enemy attack. 

Some designated rally point(s) should be located near or on the alternate route to the new 

position.

RESTRICTIONS

6-89. These are points along the route, such as bridges or intersections, where movement 

may be limited or obstructed for specified periods of time. The planner must consider these 

restrictions and try to organize the move so minimal interference occurs at these points.

COMMUNICATIONS

6-90. Because OPSEC considerations may restrict use of radios during tactical movement, 

communications frequently relies heavily on personal contact, visual signals, code words, 

and signs, markers, or control measures. Use of radios may be restricted to emergencies. 

Progress at checkpoints may be reported by personnel manning the checkpoint, through use 

of a wire or digital communications network. TSOPs and rehearsals are especially 

important to the execution of tactical road marches during radio silence.

TRAFFIC CONTROL

6-91. Traffic control is the responsibility of the controlling HQ. The MPs are usually 

employed at critical points along the route to give directions and minimize delays. Road 

guides, posted by the quartering party, can help the MPs control traffic and resolve 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (26 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

conflicts.

ROUTE MARKING

6-92. Route marking aids in movement control. The advance party or a route marking detail 

should post signs, and/or personnel at those critical points where elements of the march 

might make a wrong turn. Details concerning traffic control and route markings are in FM 

55-30, Army Motor Transport Units and Operations, and FM 19-25, Military Police Traffic 

Operations.

SPEED CONTROL

6-93. It is critical that the head of the column not exceed the authorized speed of the 

slowest vehicle in the column in order to reduce column whipping. All personnel involved 

must maintain the correct interval, both between vehicles and between march units.

PREDETERMINED SIGNALS

6-94. Use established signals (in TSOP) to aid in convoy control (e.g, colored flags in 

daylight, and flashlights at night). See FM 21-60, Visual Signals.

HALTS

6-95. Halts may be made for rest, personal comfort, messing, refueling, maintenance, 

checking of equipment, allowing other traffic to pass, and for getting back on schedule. The 

time and length of halts are detailed in the movement order or in unit TSOPs. Activities 

performed during halts should be planned and conducted as drills and may be outlined in 

TSOPs or battle books. As much as possible, all halts should be planned based on time, 

distance, and speed estimates in order to determine where all halts may occur, whether 

potential locations are appropriate, and if special arraignments or changes to the movement 

plan are necessary. The are generally two types of halts

● A short halt is usually taken for 15 minutes after the first hour and for 10 minutes 

every two hours thereafter. All march elements should stop at the same time. The 

availability of sites, rather than time, may determine when short halts actually occur. 

For tactical road marches of 3 hours or less, the commander may elect not to use 

short halts.

● A long halt is a stop for an extended period, generally 30-60 minutes or more. 

Additional time must be added to the total travel time for a long halt. Locations for 

long halts generally require more extensive planning as security, dispersion, 

camouflage, and other requirements are more complicated. Also, long halts often 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (27 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

include activities such as refueling, maintenance, section drills or training, team 

briefings, or other actions.

6-96. Dispersion and camouflage during halts are critical to survival. Wooded areas, builtup areas, and terrain features should be used as much as possible to conceal the column 

during halts. When possible, vehicles should disperse along opposite sides of the road to 

prevent a straight-line target for attack by enemy air. Columns generally should not stop 

near crossroads, railroads, and other easily identifiable reference points.

MOVEMENT PLANNING

6-97. Movement planning is part of the MDMP process. Movement times, sequences, and 

techniques should be evaluated, wargamed, and rehearsed as necessary to ensure that 

movement plans will support the operation. Much of the direction for movement should be 

addressed in unit TSOPs and battle books. METT-TC and situation specific factors will 

determine much of the movement plan. Movement planning consists of three major steps:

● Determine requirements for the moves.

● Analyze movement considerations, capabilities, and techniques.

● Establish movement priorities and control measures.

6-98. METT-TC usually dictates requirements for moves. During an operation, movements 

usually consist of short, tactical displacements or marches. However, when the battle tempo 

dramatically fluctuates, or when a FA battalion changes mission, longer moves are often 

required.

6-99. A FA battalion may plan and conduct its moves as part of a larger force. The 

following techniques, considerations, and control measures will assist the FA battalion in 

the planning and conduct of battalion level unit movement. FM 55-30 and the following 

references also contain useful information.

● By rail — FM 55-15, Transportation Reference Data.

● By air — FM 55-9, Unit Air Movement Planning, and FM 90-4, Air Assault 

Operations.

● By water — FM 55-15.

6-100. For movement as part of a combined force involving other nations or for movement 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (28 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

conducted in allied nations, planners should also review.

● STANAG 2041 and QSTAG 520, Operation Orders, Tables and Graphs for Road 

Movement (see FM 55-30 for applicable details).

● STANAG 2154 and QSTAG 539, Regulations for Military Motor Vehicle Movement 

by Road.

PLANNING FACTORS

Distance

6-101. Distance factors include the following:

● Vehicle distance is the distance between two consecutive vehicles.

● Column gap is the space between two march elements. It is calculated in length or 

time units, measured from the rear of one element to the front of the next.

● Traffic density is the average number of vehicles in one mile or kilometer of road. 

It is expressed in as vehicles per mile or kilometer.

● Column/serial/march unit length is the length, including gaps, of the various march 

elements from front to rear.

Rate (Speed)

6-102. Speed factors are as follows:

● Speed is the actual rate of a vehicle at a specific moment. It is expressed in miles or 

kilometers per hour.

● Pace is the speed of a column set by the head vehicle to maintain the average speed 

prescribed in the movement order.

● Rate of march (ROM) is the average distance traveled in a period of time. It 

includes short halts.

Time

6-103. Time factors include the following:

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (29 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

● Start time is the time that the lead vehicle crosses the SP.

● Arrival time is defined as the time the lead arrives at a certain point.

● Clearance time is when the last vehicle passes a certain point.

● Completion time occurs when the last vehicle passes the RP.

● An extra time allowance (EXTAL) of 1 minute per 25 vehicles is normally allotted 

over and above the calculated pass time. If there are fewer than 25 vehicles in total, 

EXTAL is not added. If there are over 600 vehicles, 2 minutes per 25 vehicles is 

allotted.

● Pass time (PST) is the actual time between the lead vehicle of a column, serial, or 

march column passes a given point and when the last vehicle passes the same point.

● Time distance (TDIS) is the time needed to move a certain distance at a given rate 

of march.

● Road clearance time (RCT) is the total time a column needs clear a section of road. 

(RCT = TDIS + PST).

● A time gap is the time aspect of the column gap.

PLANNING FORMULAS

6-104. As the composition of each march column is different, the movement planner must 

determine time distance, pass time, arrival time, and completion time. The basic factors 

used in movement planning are distance, rate of march (speed), time, number of vehicles, 

and vehicle density. Generally, the distance and number of vehicles is a given number, and 

the movement planner is primarily concerned with estimating total time required for the 

overall unit move, the total time for the road march portion of the move, and the rate of 

march and vehicle density.

6-105. When a FA battalion moves as part of a larger force, the S3 may be given the start 

and RPs, the anticipated rate of march, directions for open or closed column march, and 

guidance for short or long halts. He must then estimate his total march time — the time 

between when the first vehicle crosses the SP and when the last vehicle crosses the RP. Or 

the battalion may be given the start and RPs and a time allocation (normally designated by 

start time and RP clearance time). In this case the S3 must compute requirements for rates 

of march, vehicle density, column gaps, and halts. Since the battalion may move may be 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (30 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:02 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

dispersed among several march columns, moving along multiple routes, the S3 and the 

battery commanders must work together to make the calculations.

6-106. Total movement time consists of three major segments:

● Assembly time is the time between when first elements depart their current positions 

and the start time (when the lead vehicle crosses SP).

● Total march time is the time between when the head vehicle of the march column 

crosses the SP and when the last vehicle crosses the RP.

● Occupation time is the time from when the last vehicle crosses RP and the time 

when all elements from the column have completed arrival in their new positions.

● Closure time may also be calculated to account for the recovery of vehicles that may 

drop out of the march column and cause the separation of the trail party from the 

main body of the march column. Closure time may be estimated as a specific hour or 

as a period of time after the RP clearance time. (i.e, Closure time is expected at 1700 

hours or 3 hours after the last vehicle in the column crosses the RP.)

6-107. Estimate assembly time using the distance each unit must travel from current 

positions to the SP and the organization time each unit needs to get all vehicles in the 

proper order. TSOPs, movement rehearsals, and experience are critical to keeping assembly 

time to a minimum.

6-108. Total march time (TMT) is the sum of march TDIS plus PST plus long halts. These 

times are computed as follows (veh = vehicles, mph = miles per hour, kph = kilometers per 

hour):

TMT =

(hours)

TDIS +

(hours)

PST (minutes)

__________ +

60

Long Halts

(hours)

TDIS =

(hours)

Distance (miles or km)

__________________________

ROM (mph or kph)

PST =

(minutes)

Number of veh x 60

__________________________ +

Density x speed

Number of veh

__________________________ +

25

Time Gaps

(in minutes)

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (31 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:02 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

6-109. Occupation time is estimated based on the distance the elements must travel from 

the RP and the positions they must occupy. It is the period between the official end of the 

road march (when the last vehicle crosses the RP) and the time the last element has 

occupied its position. When possible, occupation time can be reduced by placing the 

elements with the most distant positions in the front of the column.

6-110. A battalion hasn’t completed its move and fully closed on its new position until all 

elements have arrived. During longer moves or adverse conditions, recovery operations 

may extend final closure several hours beyond the march column’s completion time. The 

trail party will try to recover all vehicles quickly enough to maintain contact with the main 

body of the march column, however, this may not be possible. Generally the trail party will 

try to consolidate all recovery teams that fall behind, traveling at the speed of the slowest 

vehicle. The trail party may compete with other units for routes and travel times. It may be 

incorporated into other unit march columns or may not be able to use the route until it 

become clear. Closure time is only significant if the battalion anticipates extensive recovery 

operations where the bulk of the battalion’s recovery assets and a sizable maintenance 

effort cause the trail party to become separated from the march column.

6-111. The RP is normally the terminal point of a road march. Arrival time is computed by 

adding TDIS and long halts to the start time. If the unit passes the SP at 1000 and its TDIS 

was 6 hours and there was one long halt of 1-hour duration, the planner adds these and 

derives an arrival time of 1700. Completion time is calculated by adding PST to arrival 

time, or by adding TDIS, PST, and halts to the SP time.

DISSEMINATION OF MOVEMENT PLAN

6-112. Units disseminate a movement plan through the use of a movement order, which is 

a type of OPORD. The order covers the friendly and enemy situations, destination, routes, 

rate of march, maximum speed, details of air and ground alert guard, halts, vehicle distance, 

time gap, SP, RP, critical point, service support, and command and control. Other data such 

as route markers may be included as necessary.

6-113. A strip map or sketch of the route is usually included as an annex to the movement 

order. All key personnel, to include each driver, should receive a strip map. It should show 

the start and RPs, restrictions, and critical points with the distance shown between each.

6-114. A road movement table is an annex to the movement order. It consists of two parts. 

One part, the data paragraphs, shows information pertaining to two or more march 

elements, a list of march units, and all other information arranged in tabular form. The other 

part breaks information into specific march units and could include number of vehicles, 

load class of the heaviest vehicle, points of departure and destination, route, route to SP, 

critical points, route to the destination from the RP, and a remarks section.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (32 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:02 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

SECTION IV — SURVEY

6-115. Survey is used to establish accurate locations and directional control for weapons 

and TA assets. It establishes a common grid that permits the massing of fires, the delivery 

of surprise observed fires, the delivery of effective unobserved fires, and the transfer of 

target data from one unit to another. With the increased availability of GPS devices in 

vehicles and weapon systems, requirements for survey support are decreasing. However, 

understanding of standard survey principles is critical for successful operations during 

degraded operations. See FM 6-2, Tactics, Techniques, And Procedures for Field Artillery 

Survey for additional information.

6-116. Survey control is a command responsibility. Each force FA HQ is responsible for 

establishing a common grid throughout its area of operations. During MDMP development, 

the supported maneuver commander, S3, and FSCOORD identify key survey issues. In 

advising the maneuver commander, the FSCOORD analyzes the commander's guidance, 

the scheme of maneuver, rate of movement, effects desired on HPTs, and accuracy 

requirements for weapons and TA sensors. The FSCOORD ensures that the FSP and FASP 

provide the necessary survey guidance and tasks. Details for survey support to mortars and 

non-FA TA assets may need to be addressed in both the FSP and FASP as the non-FA units 

may not receive the FASP.

6-117. A FA battalion may receive survey instructions and guidance directly from the 

FSCOORD/FSE/FA commander during direct involvement in the combined arms force 

MDMP or through their higher FA HQ in a FASP. The FA battalion commander, S3, and 

survey section chief are the key individuals involved in reviewing the instructions and 

guidance, identifying the battalion’s total survey requirements, and developing battalion 

survey plans.

6-118. The FA battalion commander’s guidance must provide the following:

● Priorities for survey to include survey methods.

● Accuracies required if other than TSOP. Modified survey techniques may be needed 

as the result of METT-TC.

● Times that critical tasks in the survey plan must be completed.

● Position requirements (primary, alternate and supplementary).

● Future plans.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (33 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:02 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

6-119. The FA battalion S3 must coordinate continuously with higher-echelon staff and 

commanders and advise the battalion commander on any deviation from previous guidance. 

If the tactical situation or the absence of accessible survey control points (SCPs) requires 

use of hasty survey or field-expedient methods of establishing SCPs (position and azimuth 

system [PADS] in conjunction with the GPS), the force FA commander must be informed.

6-120. The S3, advised by the survey section chief, develops the survey plan using all 

available assets and techniques to best meet the guidance given by the commander. The S3s 

of both reinforced and reinforcing battalions must coordinate their efforts and plans. Survey 

assets may have to be pooled on occasion without regard to unit identity to achieve the 

mission. GS/GSR units will closely coordinate their survey requirements with DS units 

when operating in a DS unit’s AO, especially during offensive operations. During defensive 

operations involving rearward movement, DS/R units may rely heavily on force FA and 

GS/GSR unit survey information to facilitate survey operations. The battalion survey plan 

must be coordinated with force FA HQ to ensure use of consolidated SCP data and to 

eliminate duplication of effort.

FA BN SURVEY SECTION

6-121. The survey section is responsible for providing survey control to all organic, 

assigned, and attached firing elements, TA assets, observers, or other elements (e.g, OH58Ds, EW and intelligence units, and mortars). The section operates under the control of 

the operations section.

6-122. A battalion survey section usually consists of a section chief, an assistant and two 

surveyors, and the following equipment: a HMMWV, secure FM radio, HTU, a PADS, and 

a survey set.

6-123. The survey section chief is the primary advisor for survey operations within the 

battalion. He assists the S3 with survey planning and directs and supervises survey 

activities. Specific duties include:

● Coordinate and supervise battalion survey operations.

● Develop the survey plan with guidance from the S3.

● Coordinate directly with BCs concerning survey requirements.

● Perform general reconnaissance and observation as required by the S3.

6-124. (NOTE: The survey PADS team must also assist the S3 and S2 in acquiring combat 

information as they perform their normal mission. They are particularly useful in gathering 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (34 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:02 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

information about the terrain.)

SURVEY PLANNING FACTORS

6-125. The FA commander and S3 must be aware of the basic capabilities and limitations 

of survey before they can issue effective guidance and/or orders to the survey section. They 

must be aware of the factors discussed below.

● Available survey assets and equipment.

● Total survey requirements.

■ Weapon locations — FA cannon/rocket/missile systems, and mortars.

■ TA locations — FA and non-FA radars, observers (FOs, COLTs/Strikers), 

MI equipment.

■ SCPs.

■ Force FA requirements.

■ Target area survey.

● Time and distance factors.

● Operational status of other positioning systems — those in weapon or TA systems 

and other vehicular and handheld systems.

● Weather and terrain.

● Availability and accuracy of existing SCPs.

SURVEY PLANNING TIMES

6-126. The following times are used in planning survey:

● PADS survey team:

■ Cross-country: 10 kph.

■ Unimproved road: 25 kph.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (35 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:02 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

■ Improved road: 50 kph.

■ Maximum mission time: 7 hours (system shutdown and reinitialization 

require about 40 minutes). The system must be updated on an SCP after 

seven hours. This update takes approximately five minutes.

■ Maximum mission radial distance: 55 km (system will require update data).

PLANNING GUIDE

6-127. The battalion commander and S3 can use the following guide to ensure that most of 

the issues relating to survey planning are covered. It is not exhaustive and may have to be 

modified to meet a particular situation.

● Select primary, alternate and supplementary PAs for all assets requiring survey.

● Set time requirements associated with providing survey (planning, reconnaissance, 

fieldwork, and completion).

● Determine accuracy requirements for weapons and TA systems (third, fourth, or 

fifth order survey). Standard requirements should be reduced only if time is a critical 

factor. An example might be providing only direction to FA units and requiring 

other units to establish their own locations by use of hasty techniques.

● Set a survey priority for each asset requiring survey. This may mean that survey will 

be controlled at the highest feasible level and not be done independently by 

individual battalions and units.

● Determine the availability of starting SCPs, PADS update points and closing points 

and the accuracy of each point. If they are not readily available, include the 

requirement to emplace them in survey priorities.

● Consider performing survey updates at SCPs during rearm, refuel, and resupply 

(R3P) operations (sometimes referred to as R3SP operations).

● Coordinate at all levels. The requirements from higher HQ must be determined so 

that they can be included in the planning process.

DEGRADED SURVEY OPERATIONS

6-128. Degraded conditions for survey operations may occur due to unavailability of 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (36 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:02 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

satellite systems or inoperable automated position/direction systems. During these times the 

FA battalion will rely more heavily on the use of PADS and on hasty survey techniques. 

During offensive operations, DS, R, and other forward FA battalions may require survey 

assistance from force FA HQ survey assets. During defensive operations, force FA survey 

teams can more easily assist DS and R units as they move rearward, however, this requires 

early identification and coordination of requirements.

6-129. Hasty survey techniques may be used during degraded operations or when adequate 

survey control is not available. See FM 6-2 for additional information on degraded and 

hasty survey techniques.

SECTION V — DEPLOYMENT

DEPLOYMENT READINESS

6-130. FA battalions must be capable of deploying anywhere in the world with little or no 

notice to provide fires for contingency forces. The following discussion is not intended to 

be all-inclusive but rather to highlight deployment planning considerations. Additional 

information can be found in:

● FM 25-5, Training for Mobilization and War.

● FM 55-9, Unit Air Movement Planning.

● FM 100-17, Mobilization, Deployment, Redeployment, Demobilization.

● FM 100-17-1, Army Pre-Positioned Afloat Operations.

● FM 100-17-2, Army Pre-Positioned Land.

● FM 100-17-3, Reception, Staging, Onward Movement, and Integration.

● TB 55-46-1, Standard Characteristics (Dimensions, Weight, and Cube) for 

Transportability of Military Vehicles and Other Outsize/Overweight Equipment.

FM 100-17-1 and FM 100-17-2 have "Commander’s Guides" as appendices.

6-131. The key to proper deployment readiness is development of a detailed deployment 

TSOP and necessary deployment plans. Unit leaders should thoroughly analyze their 

potential deployment missions, evaluate various scenarios and options, and identify Army, 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (37 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:02 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

post, and supported unit requirements. Plans and TSOPs should address all aspects of 

deployment, from training and preparation, to alert, recall, predeployment, deployment, and 

in-theater embarkation activities, and rear detachment requirements.

TRAINING

6-132. The battalion training plan should address training on all aspects of deployment. 

This includes everything from background briefings on the regional characteristics 

(weather, terrain, political/military, customs/laws, etc) and full, certification-type 

deployment exercises. Combined arms training strategies and mission training plans 

provide detailed training guidance.

ADMINISTRATIVE AND LOGISTICAL READINESS

6-133. The unit should establish and update unit movement plans, rear detachment plans, 

recall plans, and alert rosters. Recall plans should be practiced often and revised as 

necessary.

INTELLIGENCE/INFORMATION OPERATIONS

6-134. Early deploying units usually face a maze of complex information requirements--

some relating to the enemy, others to local laws, availability of facilities, and similar 

considerations. Commanders and staff officers should quickly identify all sources of 

information and establish connectivity with appropriate agencies. Regional, 

deployment/staging, and CSS information should be obtained and incorporated into 

planning and training as early as possible, preferably during peacetime. This is critical in 

preventing information overload from interfering with core tactical mission planning.

FORCE TAILORING

6-135. A deploying FA battalion may be task organized as a composite battalion, with both 

cannon and MLRS batteries. Commanders must identify this potential during deployment 

planning and training. Leaders should give special attention to logistical and ammunition 

requirements.

LOGISTICS

6-136. Successful force projection requires flexible logistics and support systems. New 

supply channels will generally be established, and critical items, such as automated C2 

parts and systems, may be in short supply initially. FA battalions should consider all classes 

of supply and logistical support when preparing to deploy as part of a force projection 

package.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (38 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:02 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 6 Movement and Positioning Considerations

JOINT OPERATIONS

6-137. FA units may support any of a number of components during joint operations. The 

most likely situations include support of a MAGTF, SEAD support for fixed/rotary wing 

aviation operations, and force protection fires. Unit leaders should review joint terminology 

and all applicable references identify C2 requirements (communications and automation). 

The S3 should carefully research requirements for control measures and clearance of fires 

procedures as unusual situations often require unusual FS arrangements.

COMBINED OPERATIONS

6-138. Contingency operations frequently involve operations with other nations. 

Commanders should ensure that all soldiers are aware of and sensitive to cultural 

differences that may impact their operations. Units should identify requirements for 

interpreters, digital C2, and liaison.

HOST NATION SUPPORT

6-139. The FA battalion must quickly determine the amount of host nation support it can 

expect and the conditions under which the staff will be interoperating with local 

government, municipal, or business leaders.

DEPLOYMENT

6-140. Usually, higher HQ develop deployment timeline based on METT-TC and reverse 

planning. These factors include but are not limited to: aircraft availability; type, size, and 

amount of equipment, and personnel and equipment attached. Movement officers must 

understand all aspects of deployment, and meticulously track automated unit equipment 

lists.

DEPLOYMENT PACKAGES

6-141. Since contingency forces are tailored to meet the specific mission requirements it is 

possible that only parts of a FA battalion will deploy as part of a force projection package. 

These packages assume that a battalion C2 slice will accompany each package. This 

facilitates support and rapid integration of the battalion’s follow-on elements. Deployment 

packages will vary widely depending on the situation and the type of FA unit involved.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch6.htm (39 of 39) [1/7/2002 1:39:02 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

RDL

Homepage

Table of

Contents

Document

Information

Download

Instructions

Chapter 7

Combat Service Support

The term "combat service support" describes the full range of personnel services and health 

services functions as well as the traditional logistical support of supply, maintenance, field 

services, and transportation. It includes all the requirements related to manning, arming, 

fueling, fixing, moving, and sustaining the force during military operations. The basic 

mission of CSS is to sustain the force. CSS planning must focus on maintaining and 

supporting the battalion's soldiers and weapon systems as it executes the commander's intent 

while conducting operations. This chapter has five sections. Section I addresses CSS 

organizations and functions in general. Section II covers CSS planning. Section III provides 

information on logistical support. Section IV focuses on personnel and health services 

support. And Section V provides an overview on reconstitution.

SECTION I — ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTIONS

7-01. This section outlines the CSS organizations within the FA battalion and the external 

support elements with which a FA battalion interfaces. TOE structure differences impact 

CSS. Some FA battalions have a HHSB while other battalions may have a HHB and a SB. 

FA battalions may also have a centralized CSS structure that places much of the CSS at 

battalion, or a decentralized structure with self-sustaining firing batteries that are assigned 

most of their own CSS.

7-02. Regardless, of the TOE/MTOE structure, the FA battalion commander can task 

organize the CSS assets for centralized or decentralized C2. Centralized CSS lightens the 

CSS burden on the firing batteries and can increase mobility. Decentralized CSS gives the 

firing batteries more control over their CSS, facilitates attachment of a battery to another FA 

unit or to a maneuver unit, and allows independent operations. In determining how much 

centralization will be required, the battalion commander considers:

● METT-TC.

● Personnel status (strength and experience) of these sections.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (1 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

● Availability of equipment.

● Availability of external support.

● Capability of the battalion staff to supervise additional sections.

7-03. This chapter contains frequent references to the various classes of supply. Table 7-1

provides a brief description of each of the classes. FM 100-10, Combat Service Support,

contains additional, detailed information on supply classes.

Table 7-1. Classes of Supply

CLASS COMPOSITION

CLASS I Subsistence, gratuitous health, and comfort Items (e.g, beef, sundry packs, vegetables, 

bread)

CLASS II Individual clothing and equipment and general supplies (e.g, jackets, boots, tools)

CLASS III Petroleum, oils, and lubricants (POL) (e.g, gasoline, oil, grease) 

CLASS IV Construction materials (e.g, wire, lumber, cement)

CLASS V Ammunition (e.g, grenades, 7.62mm, mines, explosives)

CLASS VI Personal demand items (e.g, candy, soap, cameras, cigarettes)

CLASS VII Major end items (e.g, trucks, rifles)

CLASS VIII Medical supplies (e.g, bandages, drugs, syringes, stretchers)

CLASS IX Repair parts and components (e.g, batteries, spark plugs, axles, cotter pins)

CLASS X Material to support nonmilitary programs (e.g, tools)

SECTION RESPONSIBILITIES

S1 SECTION

7-04. The S1 section is responsible for personnel services and the general administration of 

the battalion, to include support to the batteries. The S1 section manages strength 

accountability, casualty reporting, replacement operations, administrative services, 

personnel actions, legal services, finance services, and CP functions. The S1 section directly 

provides many of the services, while others, like legal and financial support often involve 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (2 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

coordinating external support.

7-05. The S1 section also has primary staff responsibility for EPW operations and medical 

planning. It coordinates with the S2 for interrogation of prisoners and with the S4 for 

processing captured equipment and satisfying transportation requirements. The S1 

coordinates with the medical section leader to ensure that patient treatment and evacuation 

are planned and coordinated throughout the battalion area.

MEDICAL SECTION

7-06. The battalion aid station (BAS) sorts, treats, and evacuates casualties or returns them 

to duty. It stocks medical supplies for the battalion and manages all Class VIII support. The 

BAS is also responsible for maintaining and evacuating the battalion’s damaged medical 

equipment for repair.

7-07. The medical section (treatment team) officer, a field surgeon, or a physician’s 

assistant, manages the BAS. He coordinates the operation, administration, and logistics of 

the medical section and combat health service support for the battalion. This includes 

coordinating patient evacuation to the supporting medical company and providing support to 

batteries.

S4 SECTION

7-08. The S4 section is responsible for supply, transportation, and field service functions. It 

coordinates requisition of supplies and their distribution to battery supply sections and turns 

in captured supplies and equipment. In combat, the S4 concentrates on nine classes of 

supply: Classes I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, IX and X.

7-09. The S4 section is responsible for obtaining water. The S4 uses organic transportation 

to transport water from the designated water supply point in or near the supporting CSS 

support area or from forward sources that are tested and approved by the medical section.

MAINTENANCE SECTION

7-10. The battalion maintenance section is responsible for unit maintenance on all battalion 

equipment except COMSEC and medical equipment. The section maintains Class IX (repair 

parts), The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) records, and the prescribed 

load list (PLL) stocks. It also provides recovery and towing operations. In battalions with 

distributed CSS (firing battery maintenance sections), the battalion maintenance section 

supports the firing battery maintenance with higher level maintenance, major repairs, and 

contact teams.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (3 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

7-11. Some battalions have consolidated maintenance activities; however, the responsibility 

for operator and crew maintenance remains with battery commanders. During maintenance 

operations, maintenance elements of the battalion are task-organized to maximize forward 

support to the batteries.

AMMUNITION SECTION

7-12. Some battalions have only a three-person ammunition management section (or 

support platoon HQ in light cannon units), and no battalion level ammunition sections. 

Other battalions have an ammunition platoon with a platoon HQs and three ammunition 

sections. 

7-13. The ammunition management section (or platoon HQs) performs battalion level 

management of all ammunition requirements. It coordinates both external and internal 

resupply efforts. The BAO, working with the S3 and S4, coordinates the requisition, receipt, 

preparation, and delivery of Class V. The ammunition sections, where applicable, pick up 

and deliver ammunition, establish temporary ammunition points, and assist with residue 

removal when necessary. At times, battalion ammunition sections may be placed under 

battery control, or battery ammunition sections may be consolidated under battalion control.

BATTERIES

7-14. Battery CSS capability varies with the type of FA unit, and the TOE structure of the 

battalion. Normally, all batteries have their own supply sections. The battalion medical 

element provides a combat medic, who usually accompanies the battery, the S6 provides 

communications maintenance contact teams (on an as-needed basis), and the battalion S1 

section provides personnel and administrative support on a GS basis.

7-15. In light (105mm) battalions, the firing batteries generally have their own ammunition 

sections, but receive maintenance, POL, and food service support from battalion. In 155mm 

battalions, each battery may have its own maintenance, food service, and POL sections, and 

firing batteries may additionally have their own ammunition sections. On some TOEs, 

battery maintenance sections may be on the service battery TOE. Some firing batteries also 

have a support platoon HQ that supervises battery CSS assets. In MLRS battalions, MLRS 

batteries usually have their own organic maintenance sections.

7-16. Firing battery and platoon leadership teams carefully monitor their unit’s CSS status, 

plans, and requirements. When CSS assets are directly under their control (organic or 

attached), they proactively manage and direct this CSS as necessary. When most or all CSS 

assets are consolidated under battalion control, battery or platoon level CSS management 

consists primarily of reporting requirements, requesting support, ensuring that CSS is 

properly executed in the unit area, and on identifying potential CSS problems that may 

adversely impact mission accomplishment.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (4 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

7-17. Because battery CSS capability varies by unit type and TOE/MTOE structure (which 

change), FA battalions working with other FA units should verify CSS organization.

FA BATTALION CSS

7-18. FA battalions receive CSS from various division and corps CSS elements, generally 

located in brigade, division, or corps CSS locations. To facilitate CSS operations, the force 

FA HQ, the division support command (DISCOM) or corps support command (COSCOM), 

and the division or corps G4s, frequently coordinate for the support to come from the closest 

CSS facility, such as a BSA, division support area (DSA), or a corps support group (CSG). 

When an FA battalion draws its CSS from the BSA or DSA, its may draw the support from 

either division or corps CSS elements located with those areas (dependent on command 

relationships and CSS arrangements).

DIVISIONAL FA UNITS

7-19. A FA battalion DS to a maneuver brigade usually receives its CSS from the BSA 

located in the brigade rear area, about 20-25 km behind the FLOT. The BSA will include the 

brigade rear CP, brigade and task force CSS assets, and division and corps CSS assets that 

support the brigade, division, and corps units operating in or near the brigade AO. The 

division, specifically the DISCOM, normally positions a forward support battalion (FSB) in 

the BSA to support the brigade, its supporting FA battalion, and other assets as directed.

7-20. The DS cannon battalion XO and S4 work closely with the maneuver brigade S4 and 

the FSB support operations officer to coordinate CSS and develop a logistics plan. The FA 

battalion commander and the brigade FSO assist the XO and S4 in communicating FA 

requirements to the brigade commander to ensure that FA requirements are adequately 

prioritized. If the DS battalion is supported by a R FA unit, the commander, XO, and S4 of 

the reinforcing unit will also participate in this CSS process, usually working through the 

DS battalion. The DIVARTY S4 assists the battalion in coordination with DISCOM 

elements.

7-21. Divisional GS FA units may receive some or all of their CSS from out of a BSA or 

the DSA, depending on distances and the arrangements coordinated by the FA battalion’s 

S4. Divisional GS FA units may locate their trains locations in or near a BSA or DSA as 

appropriate. The DSA is normally between the BSAs and the division rear, and next to airlanding facilities and the MSR. The main support battalion (MSB) (or division support 

battalion [DSB] in newer CSS structures), operating from the DSA, normally provides much 

of the CSS support for the divisional GS FA battalion.

7-22. All FA units operating in the division rear, drawing support from the DSA, or desiring 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (5 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

space in the DSA should coordinate with the DISCOM S2/S3 support operations branch, the 

division rear FSE, and/or the DIVARTY S4 as appropriate. More detailed information on 

DISCOMs can be found in FM 63-2, Division Support Command, Armored, Infantry, and 

Mechanized Infantry Division, FM 63-2-1, Division Support Command, Light Infantry, 

Airborne, and Air Assault Division, and FM 63-2-2, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures 

for the Division Support Command (Digitized).

NONDIVISIONAL/CORPS FA UNITS

7-23. The challenge for nondivisional/corps FA units is in maintaining consistent, timely 

CSS during movement between different division and brigade zones. FA battalions, or their 

FA brigades, may need to leave a small CSS element at a previous support area to close out 

any critical CSS issues that cannot be transferred to or assumed by supporting CSS elements 

in the new location. To overcome this problem, one technique used in at least one corps is 

the creation of corps forward logistical elements (FLEs) specifically designed to support a 

corps FA brigade. The FLE moves with the FA brigade in order to maintain better 

continuity of CSS support. The FLE will normally operate from within the nearest brigade, 

division, or corps support area. In corps that do not use the FLE concept, the FA battalion’s 

CSS may come from the nearest support area. 

7-24. Nondivisional FA units operating in the forward part of a division area may receive 

CSS from out of the BSA or the DSA. This support may come from either divisional or 

corps CSS elements operating within the BSA or DSA, depending on battalion’s tactical 

mission, command relationships, the type and extent of the support and the arrangements 

coordinated by the HQs involved. The COSCOM determines the type and amount of corps 

level CSS needed in the BSAs and DSAs based on the amount of support the division needs 

and the number of corps units operating in the division zone. COSCOM CSS elements 

operating from a BSA or DSA may consist of a corps support battalion (CSB), elements 

from a CSG, or a smaller support element formed to provide forward support. The corps 

artillery G4 or FA brigade S4 will normally assist the nondivisional FA battalion in 

arranging CSS from a nearby BSA or DSA when necessary. The key distinction for a 

nondivisional FA unit receiving the CSS support is to determine whether the support is 

coming from divisional or from corps CSS elements, and to clearly identify the channels for 

submitting CSS requests.

7-25. Nondivisional FA units operating in the division or corps rear areas may receive their 

support through the nearest DSA, CSG, CSB, or other corps CSS element. Distance, 

operational requirements, and the CSS capabilities within each of the logistical support areas 

will be key factors in determining where the FA unit can be best supported. A nondivisional 

FA unit receiving support from within the DSA may receive that support from either 

division or corps CSS elements within the DSA. The FA battalion’s higher FA HQs (FA 

brigade or corps artillery) will assist the battalion in coordinating the support with the 

DISCOM or COSCOM, as appropriate. The battalion will then primarily communicate 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (6 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

directly with the appropriate CSS element and possibly the division or corps rear FSE. In 

some cases, a nondivisional FA battalion may receive CSS from both a DSA and from a 

CSG or CSB.

7-26. A major consideration for nondivisional FA battalions supporting light divisions is 

the spartan nature of the division’s logistical support structure. Light divisions rely heavily 

on corps CSS packages, so the addition of nondivisional FA units usually requires well 

thought out CSS augmentation.

FA BATTALION TRAINS

7-27. The FA battalion trains is a grouping of equipment and vehicles to provide CSS 

support to the batteries. The organization of the FA battalion trains varies with METT-TC 

and available space. The battalion trains is normally made up of battalion CSS assets and 

may include elements of the FSB. Generally, trains can be organized for combat in a:

● Single location - All support operating under direct control of the unit is termed "unit 

trains."

● Dual locations — "combat" and "field" trains locations.

■ The combat trains contains those elements providing critical battlefield 

support forward with the batteries.

■ The field trains contains elements operating farther back with or near support 

units of the next higher HQ.

7-28. In either the single or dual location trains concept, C2 of CSS assets is primarily an 

S4 and S1 function, especially in HHSB based battalions. However, the HHSB leadership 

team, or where applicable the HHB and SB leadership teams, assist the S1 and S4 with 

management, movement, and security for the trains location(s).

UNIT TRAINS

7-29. When CSS resources are centralized in one location, they are called unit trains. This 

option provides:

● Centralized coordination and control of logistical personnel and equipment.

● Enhanced security and capability for ground defense.

● A single base for CSS activities.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (7 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

7-30. Unit trains may be appropriate in slow-moving or static situations, when firing 

batteries have organic or attached support, when the tactical situation forces the trains to be 

a self-contained operation, when the battalion is in an assembly area or during an extended 

tactical march. Unit trains will normally consist of most of the battalion level CSS assets, 

except for those positioned with the battalion main CP, those detailed out to the firing 

batteries, and possibly a UMCP. The UMCP may be established closer to the firing 

batteries, possibly positioned near the main CP, in order to facilitate rapid repair and 

evacuation of equipment. The HHSB (or SB) commander commands the unit trains.

7-31. Towed FA units normally lack sufficient resources to effectively use the dual trains 

concept, and thus usually operate under a unit trains organization. The unit trains is 

normally in or near the BSA or closet support area. The operations center for the unit trains 

is the ALOC. The planning considerations for trains, logistics packages (LOGPACs), and 

other CSS operations for SP units are generally relevant to towed units as well.

DUAL (COMBAT AND FIELD) TRAINS

7-32. The preferred method of supporting a SP battalion is through dual trains. The use of 

the dual trains technique provides (Figure 7-1):

● Immediately responsive forward support tailored to the tactical situation.

● Flexible resource usage.

● Increased resource survivability.

● Enhanced responsiveness when the tactical situation is very fluid or when the 

supported unit is operating over extended distances.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (8 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

Figure 7-1. Dual (Combat and Field) Trains

Combat Trains

7-33. The battalion combat trains is organized to provide immediate critical CSS. It is the 

hub of CSS operations for the battalion. The HHSB (or HHB) commander usually 

commands the combat trains, which may include:

● The ALOC (which also serves as the CP for the combat trains).

● POL (awaiting distribution to the batteries).

● Ammunition (awaiting distribution).

● Maintenance contact teams with a recovery capability.

● Battalion aid station.

● Decontamination assets.

● Elements of the communications platoon.

● UMCP.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (9 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

● Supporting elements from the FSB, MSB/DSB, or CSB.

7-34. The combat trains is located close enough to the FLOT to be responsive to the 

forward units; but, if possible, it should not be within range of enemy indirect fire. It 

generally occupies an area between the field trains and about 5 to 8 km behind the forward 

battery or platoon PAs. Combat trains must move often to stay in supporting distance of the 

firing units.

7-35. A FA battalion often establishes a UMCP to provide forward maintenance support to 

the battalion. The battalion maintenance technician supervises the UMCP. Under the dual 

trains concept, the UMCP may locate within the combat trains, especially when increased 

security is required. However, the unit may also establish the UMCP outside of but near the 

combat trains if necessary to better accomplish the mission.

Field Trains

7-36. The field trains includes those elements not in the combat trains and not required for 

immediate support of the batteries. It is usually in or near the BSA, DSA, CSG, or FLE. The 

SB (or HHSB) commander commands the field trains, which may include:

● The BSOC (which also serves as the CP for the field trains).

● PAC.

● Remaining maintenance sections (to perform scheduled maintenance and 

maintenance for trains elements).

● Remaining battalion ammunition trains.

● Food service sections

● Supply sections.

DETERMINING TRAINS ORGANIZATION

7-37. The commander must consider several factors when determining the trains 

organization.

● Status of Unit Personnel and Equipment. Shortages may hinder the battalion’s 

ability to establish dual trains. This factor alone could dictate unit trains.

● Phase of Combat. During phases when fronts are relatively static or the battle area is 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (10 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

condensed, unit trains may be preferable. During fast-paced offensive or defensive 

maneuvers, or operations over extended distances, dual trains may be advisable.

● Survivability. If a significant ground threat exists, the battalion should consider 

using unit trains, or combining the combat trains and the battalion CP to improve 

survivability. If air attack or indirect fire is the primary threat, dual locations increase 

dispersion and afford smaller targets. On a non-linear battlefield, with dispersed 

firing batteries, decentralization of CSS may reduce the trains to a relatively small 

element requiring the unit trains technique for security.

● Location of the Support Area. The battalion commander must consider the distance 

from the BSA, DSA, CSG, or FLE to the firing batteries and trains. Over short 

distances, the battalion can often provide responsive support from a single location. 

As the distance increases, responsiveness from a single location decreases. Although 

the use of dual trains does not decrease that distance, it decreases the turnaround time 

between battery and combat train locations.

● Terrain. Areas with paved, well-marked supply routes facilitate use of unit trains. 

Battalions should consider using dual trains when restrictive (e.g, mountainous or 

swampy) terrain slows CSS and hinders positioning or dispersal of unit trains and in 

desert areas where lack of natural camouflage increases vulnerability to air attack.

● Amount of Centralization. Decentralization of CSS to the batteries can facilitate 

use of unit trains if the distances are not too great. Because decentralization decreases 

the size of the battalion trains, dual trains may become difficult to operate and secure. 

Centralized CSS facilitates the use of dual trains, but can sometimes be less 

responsive if CSS management and coordination is not properly executed.

● Responsiveness Versus Risk. During wargaming and COA analysis the FA 

battalion commander and staff must evaluate the risk and responsiveness tradeoffs 

associated with dual and unit trains. If acceptable risk (within the maneuver/higher 

FA commander’s guidance) is not achievable, the battalion commander should 

inform the appropriate HQs and coordinate the most effective solution possible.

TRAINS SECURITY

7-38. The HHSB (or HHB/SB) commander is responsible for trains security. When dual 

trains are used in units with a SB, the HHB commander is usually responsible for the 

combat trains and the SB commander is responsible for securing the field trains. When the 

battalion collocates the field trains with the BSA, DSA, CSG, or FLE, the HHSB (or SB) 

commander coordinates with the commander of the support area (and/or battalion) and the 

appropriate rear CP to integrate the battalion field trains into the overall defensive plan. In 

all trains areas, a perimeter defense is planned. Elements in the trains are assigned a specific 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (11 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

sector to defend. Mutually supporting positions that dominate likely avenues of approach are 

selected for vehicles armed with heavy machine guns. Reaction forces and OPs are 

established. These are based on the unit TSOP. To enhance security, an alarm or warning 

system is arranged. Sector sketches, fire plans, and obstacle plans should be prepared. The 

HHSB commander directs rehearsals to ensure that all personnel know the parts they play in 

the defensive scheme.

COMMAND AND CONTROL OF TRAINS

7-39. C2 of CSS is the overall responsibility of the battalion XO. The S4 routinely 

coordinates all logistic operations while the S1 coordinates all personnel, administrative, and 

health services operations. Both follow the XO's guidance, and closely coordinate with each 

other. The battalion uses the ALOC, and sometimes the BSOC, as CSS C2 organizations.

7-40. When the battalion uses unit trains, it may establish only the ALOC, which will 

manage all CSS actions, especially if the unit trains are positioned in or near the BSA, DSA, 

CSG, or FLE. If the unit trains are away from the support area, the FA battalion may place a 

small CSS liaison element in the support area to facilitate coordination. When the battalion 

uses dual trains, it may establish both the ALOC and the BSOC. The BSOC, with the field 

trains, normally operates from in or near the BSA, DSA, CSG, or FLE.

7-41. The ALOC is the focal point of battalion CSS operations and the combat trains 

operations center. It should have the capability to serve as an alternate battalion TOC (less 

tactical FD capability). The ALOC concentrates on ammunition and POL resupply, priority 

equipment repair and salvage, and emergency medical care. The ALOC must:

● Stay abreast of the tactical situation (battle tracking).

● Monitor the battalion command net to identify CSS requirements.

● Receive requests, reports and requirements from subordinate elements.

7-42. ALOC personnel analyze, consolidate, and forward battalion requirements to the 

BSOC or to the appropriate supporting agency. The BSOC coordinates and directs elements 

in the field trains to take actions to meet the requirements of the forward units.

7-43. The BSOC serves as the operations center for the field trains and the key interface 

with supporting CSS elements in the BSA, DSA, CSG, or FLE. The BSOC coordinates all 

CSS actions that occur outside of the battalion. The BSOC may perform the following 

actions:

● Receipt/distribution of Class V from the supporting ATP.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (12 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

● Receipt/distribution of mail and official documents.

● Receipt/preparation/distribution of Class I items (e.g, water, ice).

● Receipt/distribution of Class II, III, IV, VII, VIII, and IX from supporting CSS 

companies.

● Monitor repair operations performed by the supporting maintenance company.

● In-process new personnel.

● Process awards, personal and finance transactions, and legal actions.

● Provide FS planning for the rear area/CSS operations.

7-44. Both the ALOC and BSOC include S1 and S4 personnel cross-trained to ensure 

continuous operations. The S4, assisted by the personnel staff NCO (PSNCO), supervises 

ALOC operations. The S1, assisted by the S4 NCO in charge (NCOIC), usually supervises 

the BSOC. S6 section personnel may augment both operating centers to provide 

communications and automation support. Table 7-2 outlines one possible ALOC/BSOC 

organization.

Table 7-2. CSS Operation Center Manning

ALOC (Combat Trains) BSOC (Field Trains)

S4 (ALOC OIC) S1 (BSOC OIC)

PSNCO (ALOC NCOIC) S4 NCOIC (BSOC NCOIC)

Battalion maintenance technician Battalion maintenance officer

Ammunition officer Ammunition NCO

Field surgeon or physician’s assistant

7-45. The ALOC and BSOC maintain control of vehicles moving forward to the logistic 

release points (LRPs) (Figure 7-2). The battalion TSOP establishes procedures for resupply 

without request in case of communications failure.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (13 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

Figure 7-2. Logistic Release Point

TRAINS COMMUNICATIONS

7-46. Trains use a combination of FM radio, MSE, messenger, and wire for 

communications. The primary means for passing CSS traffic is the admin/log radio net, with 

the ALOC functioning as the NCS. The ALOC also relies heavily on the MSE/facsimile 

network.

7-47. The primary subscribers on the admin/log net are the S4, S1, HHSB (HHB/SB) 

commander, BMO, BAO, medical section, and others (as required). See Chapter 3 for an 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (14 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

example admin/log net. The ALOC also monitors the FA battalion command net and 

supported FA/maneuver and higher HQS admin/log nets as appropriate.

7-48. Procedures for submitting routine reports (such as the personnel daily summary and 

the DA Form 2406 [Materiel Condition Status Report]) are established by TSOP. CSS 

reporting may be accomplished by any of the various C2 methods (voice/FAX/data), or in 

hard copy included as a part of LOGPAC operations. These reports are consolidated by the 

ALOC and disseminated as necessary. When messenger communications are necessary or 

used for hard copy backup, the battalion can prevent excessive travel by combining 

document and parcel delivery with CSS traffic as much as possible.

TRAINS POSITIONING

7-49. The HHSB (HHB/SB) commander coordinates with the XO, S3, S1, and S4 when 

selecting a trains location. The battalion must coordinate trains positions with the maneuver 

commander who owns the ground. It can accomplish this through a FSE at a main or rear 

CP, the force FA HQ, or a DISCOM/COSCOM support battalion. The basic options are: 

positioning the battalion trains with another element or separately.

7-50. If the FA battalion collocates its trains with another unit, it may have little input in 

the location. For example, if a FA battalion establishes its field or unit trains in the BSA or 

DSA, the brigade S4, or the division G4 and DISCOM S3, selects the location. Early 

planning and coordination are necessary for the FA battalion to provide input on selection of 

combined trains locations. Collocating the trains with the maneuver trains facilitates 

coordination between the FA battalion and the supporting division and/or corps CSS 

elements. This arrangement also enhances security for battalion CSS elements. However, 

turnaround time, communications, or other mission-related considerations may require 

location of the trains elsewhere.

7-51. In a low ground threat situation, an alternative is to position the battalion’s unit (or 

field) trains separate from the BSA, DSA, CSG, or FLE, in a location more conducive to 

supporting the FA battalion. The actual locations will depend on the trains concept used and 

the distances involved.

7-52. Two or more FA battalions may also collocate trains elements when they operate in 

the same vicinity. This enhances security and potentially allows some mutual CSS support, 

depending on weapon system types, command relationships, and coordination. This 

technique is especially useful for DS/R battalions, and for nondivisional battalions operating 

near each other, or near a divisional FA unit.

7-53. A good trains location will have the following:

● Defensible terrain - allows selective use of limited personnel assets and avoids 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (15 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

obstacles to CSS operations.

● Sufficient space - permits the dispersion of both vehicles and activities.

● Firm ground - supports heavy ammunition and POL vehicles.

● Landing pad - facilitates aerial resupply and medical evacuation.

● Road network - leads to the batteries and higher-level CSS elements; also, a suitable 

network within the position.

● Communications - extends both forward to the batteries and to rear CSS elements.

● Water source, if possible.

7-54. Built-up areas provide excellent locations for trains because they provide cover and 

concealment for vehicles and sheltered areas for maintenance operations at night. When 

built-up areas are used, trains elements should occupy buildings near the edge of the area to 

reduce the chance of being trapped. Seldom will a site be found that has all of the desirable 

traits. Priority is given to those considerations that are critical to mission accomplishment.

TRAINS OPERATIONS

7-55. The S4 is responsible for selecting battalion supply routes for resupply, evacuation, 

and maintenance support. Proposed routes should extend forward from the support 

elements/areas to the batteries. The S4, with the S3, identifies primary and alternate routes, 

and coordinates all routes with the maneuver unit responsible for the terrain (and for 

approving the routes). The S4 should also coordinate routes with adjacent combat, CS, and 

CSS units to avoid conflicts.

7-56. The S4, in coordination with the commander and S3, establishes CSS priorities that 

guide subordinate CSS leaders in executing their responsibilities. These guidelines address 

which supplies, resources, and units have priority, convoy size and security, supply routes 

used, trains mobility (uploaded ready for hasty moves, or downloaded/stockpiled), day/night 

movement restrictions, perimeter security, and other instructions necessary for efficient and 

effective trains operations.

TRAINS DISPLACEMENT

7-57. Proper positioning of trains minimizes displacements and increases the quantity and 

quality of support. In repositioning, the technique used to displace the trains may be the 

same as that used by the rest of the battalion, or may differ based on METT-TC. The trains 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (16 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

may displace as one entity (independent of or as part of the rest of the battalion), by echelon, 

by section, or by infiltration.

SECTION II — PLANNING

7-58. CSS planning must address CSS support during all phases of an operation. The 

battalion staff develops the CSS plan concurrently with the tactical plan. Supporting CSS 

plans are as detailed as planning time permits. Use of TSOPs and contingency plans greatly 

help the CSS staff officers in the planning effort. The FASP addresses only the key what, 

where, when, why, and how CSS issues as well as deviations from the routine procedures 

established in the TSOP.

CSS PLANNING PROCESS

7-59. To develop and execute sound plans, CSS personnel must achieve and maintain a 

high degree of situational awareness and initiate actions well before the start of operations 

they are to support. Careful management of the information flow demands that information 

requirements be clearly identified early in the process, vigorously pursued, and shared with 

all involved.

LOGISTICS PREPARATION OF THE BATTLEFIELD

7-60. FA LPB is a conscious effort to identify and assess factors that facilitate, inhibit, or 

deny support to FA units at the tactical and sometimes operational levels. It involves a 

review of known EFATs for CSS tasks and the use of the S2’s IPB products as an aid in 

analyzing the manning, arming, fueling, fixing, moving, and sustaining factors. The goal is 

to determine FA CSS requirements that will allow the development of a logistic estimate 

and feasible concept of support.

7-61. The process requires that the FA battalion commander, XO, and S3 understand data 

needed by CSS staff to plan and provide timely, effective support. It requires that the S1 and 

S4 understand the mission, the scheme of operations/fires, and battlefield time and space 

implications for support. The LPB is a coordinated effort which:

● Determines data requirements to support required actions.

● Identifies sources for pertinent data and collects raw or processed data.

● Analyzes collected data and develops it into decision information by assessing the 

impact on the mission and competing COAs.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (17 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

● Integrates decision information into the MDMP by incorporating it into logistical 

estimates and FA plans and actions.

7-62. Sources that provide relevant logistical data include the following:

● Higher HQ briefings, plans and orders.

● FA commander’s planning guidance and intent.

● Operations and intelligence briefings and overlays.

● Wargaming and rehearsals.

● MTOEs, subordinate status reports, and route reconnaissance overlays.

● Traffic circulation and highway regulation plans.

BATTALION LOGISTIC ESTIMATE

7-63. A logistic estimate, which includes LPB, is a continuous analysis of logistic factors 

affecting mission accomplishment. Emphasis is on how the status of CSS will impact on 

proposed COAs. Logistic planners use these estimates to recommend the best COA (that can 

be supported) and to develop plans to support the operations.

7-64. Logistic estimates at the battalion level are usually informal. As a minimum they are 

formulated in a briefing format that should address facts, assumptions, and conclusions in 

each of the following areas:

● Manning (e.g, quality of life, personnel and health service support).

● Arming (e.g, Class V status, restrictions, distribution system, RSR, CSR, and CCL).

● Fueling (e.g, Class III [bulk] status, distribution system, restrictions).

● Fixing (e.g, maintenance and Class IX status, repair times, and evacuation policy).

● Moving (e.g, status of transportation assets, critical LOC, and MSR status).

● Sustaining the soldiers and their systems (e.g, Class I, II, III [Package], IV, VI, VII, 

X, water, and field services status).

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (18 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

● COA(s) that can be supported.

7-65. Consumption factors and transportation requirements are fundamental parts of the 

CSS analysis. Guidance for computing these requirements can be found in:

● FM 55-15, Transportation Reference Data.

● FM 55-30, Army Motor Transport Units and Operations.

● FM 100-10, Combat Service Support.

● Operations Logistics Planner (distributed on two diskettes).

● TB 44-46-1, Standard Characteristics for Transportation of Military Vehicles and 

Other Oversize/Overweight Equipment.

7-66. To ensure effective support, CSS operators and planners must understand the 

commander’s tactical plans and intent and develop plans that effectively and efficiently 

apply resources against requirements. General considerations include:

● Missions and tasks for each of the supported elements.

● When and how they will conduct operations.

● Current and proposed locations of the supported units, by timeline.

● The types and quantities of support required.

● The priority of support by time, type, and unit.

● The overall tactical situation and general unit status.

7-67. Support capabilities are assessed as follows:

● What CSS resources are available (organic, lateral, and higher HQ).

● Where the CSS resources are and when they will be available.

● Whether they will be delivered or must be picked up.

● Packaging, material-handling, loading, or transloading considerations.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (19 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

7-68. On the basis of mission analysis, resources are compared with requirements. Shortfalls 

are evaluated in close coordination with operations planners to determine their effect on 

selected COAs.

7-69. The CSS staff must complete the CSS estimates in time for commanders to confirm 

the feasibility of the plan, modify plans and priorities as necessary, and calculate risks. 

Timely completion also facilitates the generation and coordination of supply and support 

requests.

PLANNING FOR CHANGING MISSIONS

7-70. Flexibility and innovation must characterize CSS planning and execution, as FA units 

often change missions, areas of operations, and command and support relationship during an 

operation. Transition from one area of operation to another normally results in a change in 

support areas and support elements. Therefore, units must forecast future needs with the 

gaining division or corps support element. Of particular interest are the planning 

requirements for classes V and IX and maintenance support.

● The FA battalion S4 must verify that the ATPs in its new area of operation will be 

able to support its requirements.

● The DISCOM/COSCOM may augment the gaining support element with authorized 

stockage list (ASL) push packages and maintenance support teams from the losing 

support element or other CSS assets. 

● The battalion XO and CSS staff must ensure that adequate support is in the new 

location on time, without being removed from the old location too early.

SPECIAL CSS PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS

HEAVY-LIGHT FORCES MIX

7-71. Heavy-light or light-heavy force mixes make CSS arrangements especially 

challenging. When a FA brigade, with medium weapon systems, supports an infantry 

division, planners must consider that infantry division DISCOMs have little, if any, ability 

to provide the necessary support for the medium FA battalions. Even with COSCOM 

augmentation, infantry divisions have insufficient means to maintain and sustain a 

reinforcing SP FA battalion. In such situations, mission and/or unit specific CSS 

augmentation packages must accompany heavy forces’ FA units. This includes POL, 

ammunition, and maintenance support with necessary repair parts, recovery and lift 

capabilities.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (20 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

7-72. Class IX supplies and maintenance can also present unique CSS planning 

requirements. For example, a heavy division DISCOM does not have the ASL or 

maintenance personnel to support 105mm FA howitzer units. As FA battalions move from 

one brigade or division sector to another, gaining support battalions may require 

augmentation from losing support battalions, to include ASL push packages and additional 

maintenance support teams. Habitually associated maintenance support teams (MSTs) can 

facilitate this process. Also, COSCOM transportation assistance may be required to move 

ASLs from losing to gaining support units.

ARMY XXI/DIGITIZED FORCE CSS

7-73. CSS concepts and organizational structures are changing to reflect a paradigm shift 

from a supply-based CSS system in the past to an advanced distribution-based CSS system 

for Army XXI. These changes are leveraging advancements in technology and information 

operations. 

7-74. The distribution-based CSS system combines situational awareness capabilities with 

efficient delivery systems to form a seamless distribution pipeline. This pipeline represents 

"inventory in motion" and the CSS imperative of increased velocity. In contrast, static 

inventories comprise a supply-based system. Storing this static inventory in large stockpiles 

at each echelon does not provide the mobility or flexibility required by the Force XXI 

maneuver commander. The Force XXI distribution-based system eliminates most stockpiles; 

substituting speed for mass. Logisticians control the destination, speed, and volume of the 

distribution system. With intransit visibility (ITV), total asset visibility (TAV), advanced 

materiel management, and advanced decision support system technology, Force XXI 

logisticians will have access and visibility over all of the items within the distribution 

pipeline. This visibility allows logisticians to redirect, cross-level, and mass CSS assets 

more effectively in support of the maneuver commander's intent. The distribution-based 

system gains speed through greater efficiency. Direct throughput from theater and corps to 

the brigade battlespace is the rule rather than the exception with distribution-based CSS. 

Throughput distribution bypasses one or more echelons in the supply system to minimize 

handling and to speed delivery to forward units. Supplies are tailored and packaged for 

specific supported units based on a specific time and location point of need, synchronized 

through support operation channels based on the combat commander's OPTEMPO. 

Advanced delivery platforms such as the palletized load system (PLS) and the container roll 

in/roll out platform (CROP), will use ITV/TAV to deliver directly from echelons above 

division to points as far forward as possible. Extensive use of "hub and spoke" transfer 

nodes will reduce transportation and material handling requirements.

7-75. Multi-functional, modular units in direct support of the combat, combat support, and 

combat service support units form the cornerstone of this concept and represent the CSS 

imperative of an agile CSS force structure. Force XXI battlefield CSS operations will 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (21 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

provide support as close to the point of need as possible. A common operational picture 

coupled with information from the GCSS-A will allow the Force XXI CSS commander to 

anticipate requirements and project support further forward than ever before. CSS 

organizations will become modular, mobile, and multi-functional. They will be adaptable to 

support force projection and velocity of combat operations in both linear and non-linear 

environments.

7-76. These changes will impact FA CSS operations. FM 63-2-2, contains additional 

information on digitized division CSS operations.

SECTION III — LOGISTICAL SUPPORT

7-77. The four functional areas that are of primary interest for battalion logisticians are 

supply, maintenance, field services, and transportation.

SUPPLY

METHODS OF SUPPLY

7-78. The battalion always maintains combat-essential supplies and repair parts (basic loads 

and PLLs). The minimum stockage level is normally directed by division or higher. These 

supplies allow a unit to sustain itself in combat for a limited period without resupply.

7-79. The battalion has three methods by which to replenish its stocks:

● Supply point distribution.

● Unit distribution.

● R3P distribution.

Supply Point Distribution

7-80. In supply point distribution, unit representatives, using organic transportation, go to a 

supply point to pick up supplies. This is the normal method used by the battalion supply 

section to obtain supplies.

Unit Distribution

7-81. In unit distribution, non-organic transportation delivers supplies to a unit. The 

battalion often uses this method to resupply subordinate elements. When feasible, supplies 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (22 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

are shipped directly from the issuing unit as far forward as possible. This means some 

supplies are issued directly to the battalion from COSCOM or theater Army level, especially 

classes III and VII. This issue usually occurs no farther forward than a BSA. CSS planners 

must consider material handling equipment (MHE) requirements for supply transfers.

7-82. The most efficient resupply of forward units is done by use of LOGPACs. LOGPACs 

are organized for each battery and element; usually in the unit or field trains under the 

supervision of the battalion S4 NCOIC (or the SB commander). They are moved forward to 

the LRPs daily for routine resupply. When possible, all LOGPACs are moved forward in a 

march unit under the control of an OIC or NCOIC. Special LOGPACs are organized and 

dispatched as required by the tactical situation and logistical demands. The S4 must plan and 

coordinate LOGPAC operations to ensure that they fully support the commander's tactical 

plans.

7-83. Battalion TSOPs establish the standard LOGPAC. Normally, a battery LOGPAC 

includes:

● POL trucks carrying bulk fuel and packaged POL products.

● Vehicles carrying additional supplies join the LOGPAC as coordinated by the S4 

NCOIC and supply sergeant.

● Cargo trucks carrying Class I requirements based on the ration cycle. These may tow 

water trailers and carry full water cans for direct exchange. The trucks also carry 

supplies requested by the unit, incoming mail, replacement personnel, and other 

items required by the unit.

7-84. The battery LOGPAC moves forward under the control of an S4 representative. The 

convoy normally contains additional vehicles, such as maintenance vehicles with Class IX 

supplies to move to the UMCP or additional ammunition or fuel vehicles for the combat 

trains. The LOGPACs follow the MSR to an LRP, where the battery supply sergeant or a 

guide takes control of the battery LOGPAC.

7-85. The battery representative directs the LOGPAC to the locations where battery or 

platoon resupply occurs. The supply sergeant informs the S4 representative of requirements 

for the next LOGPAC. The LOGPAC returns to the LRP with outgoing mail, personnel, and 

identified equipment.

7-86. The S4, in coordination with the S3, determines LRP locations. Locations are based on 

the tactical situation and should be well forward and easily located. Normally, two to four 

LRPs are planned and are included on the operation overlay along with the MSR, combat 

trains, and field trains. The ALOC notifies subordinates and the BSOC well in advance, 

which LRP will be used. The battalion may establish TSOP standards for LOGPAC delivery 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (23 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

(arrival time at the LRP) and the length of time it will remain in the battery or platoon area. 

If the tactical situation dictates changes, or if a LOGPAC is delayed, the S4 must notify 

units, the ALOC/BSOC, and the TOC.

7-87. A senior representative from the trains (S4, HHSB (HHB/SB) commander, or senior 

NCO) should be present at the LRP while the LOGPAC is in effect. The purpose is to meet 

with the supply sergeants for coordination of logistical requirements and to ensure that the 

LOGPAC is released and returned efficiently. A coordination meeting is normally held 

immediately before the supply sergeant picks up his LOGPAC. Coordination may include 

the following:

● Changes in logistical requirements, plans, or TSOPs.

● Battery reports on personnel, logistics, and maintenance.

● Updates on the tactical situation and logistical status.

● Delivery, receipt, and distribution of unit mail.

7-88. The S4 representative moves the LOGPAC convoy from the LRP to the unit or field 

trains. The battalion S4 NCOIC then begins organizing the next LOGPAC.

7-89. The HHSB (or HHB) first sergeant, normally operating from the combat trains, plans 

and coordinates resupply of the CP, combat trains, and attached elements. The platoon 

sergeant or the senior NCO at a facility must report his requirements to the HHSB (or HHB) 

first sergeant or to the ALOC. The methods of resupply are the following:

● Form small LOGPACs (the most desirable method). The platoon sergeant picks up 

LOGPACs at the LRP, as would a battery supply sergeant.

● Deliver the LOGPAC directly to the CP, combat trains, and attached elements.

● Resupply attached elements from a nearby battery LOGPAC. The S4 coordinates this 

resupply before dispatching the LOGPACs.

7-90. While the LOGPAC is the preferred method of resupply, other methods of resupply 

are sometimes required. These methods include:

● Resupply from the combat trains (emergency resupply). The combat trains has a 

limited amount of Class III and V supplies for emergency resupply. The S4 

coordinates emergency resupply from the combat trains and then refills or replaces 

the combat trains assets. The S3, on the basis of recommendations from the S4 and 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (24 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

on battalion operational requirements, determines distribution priorities for critical 

items. Normal supply priority is Class III, Class V, and Class IX.

● Prestocking. This is the placing and concealing of supplies on the battlefield. It is 

normally done during defensive operations when supplies are placed in subsequent 

positions (for example, ammunition for immediate consumption).

● Mobile prepositioning. This is similar to prestocking except that supplies remain on 

trucks, often positioned forward on the battlefield.

Rearm, Refuel, Resupply Point Distribution 

7-91. This technique combines features of both supply point and unit distribution. It 

emphasizes Class III, V, and IX resupply, typically along the route of an extended battalion 

road march. However, resupply of all classes will occur whenever possible. R3P operations 

may also include survey update operations (R3SP). Close coordination between the S3 and 

S4 is essential to ensure the proper selection of the location and timing of this supply action. 

The S4 is responsible for the preparation of the R3P site; and coordinates with the S3 to 

schedule the movement of units through this site. The HHSB/HHB or SB commander or a 

CSS staff officer may supervise R3P operations. The battalion XO monitors all R3P 

planning and operations, with special emphasis on the communication and coordination 

between staff elements and with the firing batteries, to ensure effective, efficient operations 

in concert with the commander’s guidance. While R3P distribution is rapid and often 

convenient, it does require that the unit take itself out of action to accomplish the resupply 

function. However, since the unit will normally perform R3P distribution in conjunction 

with a scheduled move, the overall loss of support capability is minimal.

CLASSES OF SUPPLIES

7-92. Each class of supply requires unique considerations, during logistics planning and 

operations, which helps speed requisitioning and distribution procedures. Battalion 

commanders and their staffs need to be aware of supply accountability procedures as 

presented in AR 710-2.

7-93. The FA battalion usually coordinates directly with the appropriate supply activity of 

the supporting division or corps support element. However, the DIVARTY or FA brigade 

monitors items of command interest by means of TSOP-directed CSS reports. The following 

paragraphs briefly describe each class of supplies as it impacts on the FA battalion.

Class I: Rations

7-94. A battalion automatically requests Class I on the basis of daily strength reports for its 

units. The ALOC forwards the strength report to the BSOC or directly to the food service 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (25 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

section (under unit trains). The food service section gets subsistence from the supporting 

Class I point in the BSA, DSA, CSG, or FLE. The S4 or his designated representative, in 

conjunction with the battery commanders, develops a feeding plan with instructions 

concerning how and when to feed.

7-95. Flexibility in ration cycles and meal preparation methods is necessary to effectively 

support fluid FA operations. Often, meal preparation is centralized in the trains location, 

with the senior food service sergeant supervising preparation and coordinating delivery 

arrangements with the ALOC. A- or B-rations are prepared in the trains and delivered to the 

batteries and attached elements as part of the LOGPAC. T-rations are prepared in the trains 

and sent forward, or they are pushed forward to the batteries and then prepared (heated) on 

site. The MREs stored on combat vehicles are eaten only when daily Class I resupply cannot 

be accomplished. The battery 1SG must monitor MRE usage to ensure prompt resupply 

action. At other times, especially during dispersed or non-linear operations, Class I 

operations may need to be decentralized.

7-96. Water is not a Class I supply item, but it is normally delivered with Class I. The 

battalion S4 NCOIC coordinates with the FSB, MSB, CSG, or FLE to pick up water from 

the designated water supply point. Water is delivered to the units by use of water trailers or 

blivets. Also, forward water points are tested and approved by the battalion medical officer. 

Each vehicle should carry water cans to be refilled or exchanged during Class I resupply and 

LOGPAC operations.

Class II: Supplies and Equipment

7-97. This class applies to all supplies and equipment (except cryptographic) prescribed by 

TOEs, common table of allowances, and PLLs. Class II supplies include clothing; individual 

equipment; tentage; organizational tool sets, kits, and hand tools; administrative and 

housekeeping supplies, and equipment (including battle dress overgarment (BDO) and 

decontamination items). The S4 section coordinates for pickup of Class II items from the 

appropriate supply element in the BSA, DSA, or CSG before normal LOGPAC operations. 

Expendable items, such as soap, toilet tissue, insecticide, clothing and TA-50 items, are 

provided during LOGPAC operations.

Class III: Petroleum, Oils and Lubricants

7-98. The brigade S4's POL forecasts form the basis for division and corps stockage levels. 

The FA battalion S4 section normally obtains POL from a Class III supply point in the BSA, 

DSA, CSG, or FLE. Batteries are not required to submit formal requests for POL and 

packaged products resupply, unless the products are unique or quantities unusually high. 

When necessary, the batteries send their requests to the ALOC.

7-99. POL tankers move forward with each LOGPAC. Each tanker may also carry packaged 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (26 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

POL products. Depending on the tactical situation, DISCOM or COSCOM fuel vehicles 

may deliver fuel to the combat trains area. Battery refueling operations may be carried out in 

one of three ways:

● Fuel trucks move to each section or vehicle position.

● Each section or vehicle moves to a centrally located refuel point.

● Vehicles refuel during movement from one position to another.

7-100. Combat refueling (the use of 5-gallon cans) is an alternative to the above methods. It 

is slower; however, it may be required in some circumstances when bulk refueling is not 

available or feasible. The battalion TSOPs should prescribes procedures for all types of 

refueling. These procedures should be practiced during field training.

Class IV: Construction and Barrier Materials

7-101. This class of supply includes consumable items such as construction and fortification 

material and the lightweight camouflage support system. Requisitions for regulated Class IV 

items (fortification and barrier material) are submitted through command channels. Nonregulated items (small quantities of nails and common electrical, plumbing and similar 

hardware items) are requested or obtained from the appropriate support activity, of the 

supporting division or corps support element.

Class V: Ammunition

7-102. Some common ammunition terms include the following:

● The unit basic load (UBL) is that quantity of ammunition authorized and required to 

be on hand in a unit to meet combat needs until resupply can be accomplished. The 

UBL cannot exceed the haul capacity of the unit’s organic vehicles. If the UBL 

exceeds the unit’s organic haul capability, the battalion should notify its higher FA 

HQ immediately for assistance in resolving the situation. The basic load, specified by 

the theater army for the FA, is expressed in rounds, units, or units of weight, as 

appropriate. UBL size and composition are based on mission, enemy, and type unit 

supported, and normally varies among FA units.

● The RSR is the amount of ammunition a commander estimates will be needed to 

sustain tactical operations, without ammunition expenditure restrictions, over a 

period of time. The RSR is expressed as rounds per weapon (on hand) per day, or as 

a bulk allotment per day or per mission.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (27 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

● The CSR is the rate of consumption of ammunition that can be allocated, considering 

the supplies and facilities available, for a given period. It is also expressed in rounds 

per weapon per day. Each tactical commander announces a CSR to the next 

subordinate tactical commander. The CSRs may be published in the OPORD or as a 

FRAGO. They may be included in the FSP or the FASP. To exceed its CSR, the 

battalion must obtain permission from the next higher commander, except in an 

emergency.

● Ammunition for immediate consumption is ammunition drawn for a specific 

purpose, such as a preparation. This ammunition is drawn in addition to the CSR. It 

is drawn to be expended within the next 24 hours and is considered expended when 

issued. If circumstances preclude expenditure as planned, the battalion must report 

this ammunition as excess daily until it is expended or reallocated.

● Ammunition transfer points are temporary sites where Class V materiel is transferred 

from corps or division transportation to issuing unit vehicles. ATPs, run by division 

or corps support units, are usually found in or near BSA, DSAs, CSGs, or FLEs.

● An ammunition supply point is an area designated to receive, store, and issue Class V 

material. It is normally located at or near the DSA or CSG and is operated by a corps 

ammunition company.

● A CCL is a single or multi-type load of ammunition built to the anticipated or actual 

needs of a firing unit, thereby facilitating throughput to the lowest echelon. CCLs are 

often designed to fit standard transportation assets and for transportation as a single 

unit. FA ammunitions are packaged and delivered in completed rounds (e.g, fuzes, 

primers, propellants and projectiles) and rocket or missile pods. See Table 7-3 for FA 

examples of CCLs.

Table 7-3. FA Sample CCL Packages

EXAMPLE PACKAGE G

# DODIC NOMENCLATURE QUANTITY PERCENT

1. D544 M107/M795 HE 4 Pallets (32 Projectiles) 18

2. D563 M483A1 DPICM 18 Pallets (144 Projectiles) 82

3. D541 M4, WH Bag, 2 Pallets (168 Prop Chgs) 74

4. D533 M119A2, RB 2 Pallets (60 Prop Chgs) 26

5. N340 M739, Fuze, PD 1 Box (16 Fuzes) 9

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (28 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

6. N463 M728, Fuze, VT 1 Box (16 Fuzes) 9

7. N289 M762, Fuze, ET 9 Boxes (144 Fuzes) 82

8. N523 M82, Primer 1 Box (500 Primers) 100+

TOTAL WEIGHT: 13 Short Tons

EXAMPLE PACKAGE J, SMOKE

# DODIC NOMENCLATURE QUANTITY PERCENT

1. D528 M825 Smoke 20 Pallets (160 Projectiles) 100

2. D541 M4, WH Bag 1 Pallet (84 Prop Chgs) 53

3. D533 M119A2, RB 4 Pallets (120 Prop Chgs) 75

4. N285 M577, Fuze, MT 10 Boxes (160 Fuzes) 100

5. N523 M82, Primer 1 Box (500 Primers) 100+

TOTAL WEIGHT: 12 Short Tons

RSR Calculation

7-103. The RSR is the battalion’s estimate of the amount of ammunition it will require for 

an operation. Determining the RSR is the responsibility of the battalion S3 and can be 

accomplished in a number of ways. These include personal experience, historical data from 

similar battles, and use of automated planning factors on the Operations Logistics Planner’s 

diskettes. RSR reporting requirements may verify with TSOP and the tactical situation. 

Generally, the RSR is submitted through the supported maneuver force or senior FA HQs, 

with information copies to appropriate HQs. All RSRs are consolidated and reviewed at 

higher HQ, and used in determining the CSR for each unit. The FA battalion will generally 

receive its CSR through the same channels that it reports its RSR.

7-104. The manual method discussed here provides a method in computing an RSR for 

artillery ammunition. To determine the RSR, use the following steps:

● Step 1 - Determine the level of the operation using Table 7-4.

Table 7-4. Levels of Operation

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (29 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

LEVELS OF OPERATION

Level of Operation

Percent of Commitment

Commitment of Higher HQ Reserves

Maneuver Fire Support

Heavy 60+ 100 Probable

Moderate 30+ 50+ Not Anticipated

Light 30- 50- No

● Step 2 - From Table 7-5, select the type of weapon system for which the RSR is 

being calculated. Rounds are expressed in number of rounds per tube per day 

(rounds/tube/day).

● Step 3 - Select the type of operation and level of operation in Table 7-5. If the type of 

operation is not listed, use the conversion table listed in Table 7-6.

● Step 4 - Compute ammunition requirements for the operation by using Table 7-5:

■ Day 1: Number of rounds required for the first day extracted from the first 

day column in the table.

■ Day 2-4: Number of rounds from the succeeding days column multiplied by 

the number of days to be computed (see Note (1), Table 7-5).

■ Day 5: Average the number of rounds from the succeeding and protracted 

days for the weapon system (see Note (1), Table 7-5).

■ Day 6-15: Number of rounds from the protracted days column multiplied by 

the number of days (see Note (1), Table 7-5).

Table 7-5. Daily Ammunition Requirements-Rounds Per Weapon and STON (Example)

Type of Operation Level of 

Operation First Day SucceedingDays (1)

Protracted

Period (2)

Rounds STON(3) Rounds STON Rounds STON

105mm Howitzer

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (30 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

Covering Force 1-Heavy 491 16.8 511 17.5 198 6.8

2-Moderate 319 10.9 332 11.4 129 4.4

3-Light 172 5.9 179 6.1 69 2.4

Defense of Position 1-Heavy 423 14.5 467 16.0 222 7.6

2-Moderate 275 9.4 304 10.4 144 4.9

3-Light 148 5.1 163 5.6 78 2.7

Attack of Position 1-Heavy 376 12.9 381 13.0 210 7.2

2-Moderate 244 8.4 248 8.5 137 4.7

3-Light 132 4.5 133 4.6 74 2.5

155mm Howitzer (Divisional)

Covering Force 1-Heavy 254 17.2 274 18.6 174 11.8

2-Moderate 165 11.2 178 12.1 113 7.7

3-Light 89 6.0 96 6.5 61 4.1

Defense of Position 1-Heavy 203 13.8 207 14.0 183 12.4

2-Moderate 132 9.0 135 9.2 119 8.1

3-Light 71 4.8 72 4.9 64 4.3

Attack of Position 1-Heavy 146 9.9 153 10.4 140 9.5

2-Moderate 95 6.4 99 6.7 91 6.2

3-Light 51 3.5 54 3.7 49 3.3

155mm Howitzer (Nondivisional)

Covering Force 1-Heavy 309 21.0 333 22.6 212 14.4

2-Moderate 201 13.6 216 14.7 138 9.4

3-Light 108 7.3 117 7.9 74 5.0

Defense of Position 1-Heavy 227 15.4 235 15.9 199 13.5

2-Moderate 148 10.0 153 10.4 129 8.8

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (31 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:13 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

3-Light 79 5.3 82 5.6 70 4.7

Attack of Position 1-Heavy 176 11.9 183 12.4 170 11.5

2-Moderate 114 7.7 119 8.1 111 7.5

3-Light 62 4.2 64 4.3 60 4.1

NOTE: (1) Succeeding days are the second, third and fourth days of the battle. For the fifth 

day ammunition requirements, take the average of the succeeding days rate and 

the protracted rate.

(2) Protracted period refers to days 6 through 15. For estimating ammunition 

requirements for periods greater than 15 days, use rates provided in SB 38-26, as 

amended by DA message 262258Z Aug 76.

(3) Short tons (STONS) are computed based on total weight per complete round:

105mm - 68.5 lb/rd , 155mm - 135.7 lb/rd

Table 7-6. Conversion Factor Table

TYPE OF OPERATION CONVERSION FACTOR

Attack of position 100% of attack of position (deliberately organized)

Covering Force 100% of defense of position

Inactive Situation 80% of protracted period

Meeting Engagement 200% of protracted period

Pursuit 40% of protracted period

Retrograde Operation 59% of defense of position (succeeding days)

Assault of Hostile Shore 100% of defense of position (succeeding days)

● Step 5 - Beyond day 15, use SB 38-26.

● Step 6 - Divide the total rounds by the number of days in the operation. This will 

give the number of rounds/tube/day.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (32 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

EXAMPLE

Divisional 155mm battalion conducting a heavy level, attack of position for 10 days.

Requirement: Compute the RSR.

Day 1: 146

Days 2-4: 459 (153 x 3)

Days 6-10: 700 (140 x 5)

Day 5: 146 ((153 + 140)/2)

1451 Total Rounds

Answer = 145 Rounds/Tube/Day for this operation.

1451/10 (Total rounds divided by the total days)

Ammunition Resupply

7-105. The FA ammunition system involves the supply and expenditure of all ammunition 

that FA battalions are equipped to fire. Small-arms ammunition constitutes an insignificant 

portion of FA battalion daily tonnage requirements. It can be handled routinely with normal 

ammunition resupply. Thus a FA battalion focuses on its artillery ammunition.

7-106. The FA battalion S4 plans for and supervises Class V operations and the BAO 

supervises resupply operations. The S3, S4, and BAO must continually coordinate and 

exchange information concerning ammunition. Each must know the RSR submitted to 

higher HQ, the CSR established by higher HQ, and the authorized basic load. This 

information is provided to the battalion and battery commanders so they can plan resupply 

operations and set priorities.

7-107. Most of the ammunition in a theater is distributed through the corps storage areas 

(CSAs), which serve as the focal points of the corps ammunition system. Each corps will 

usually establish a CSA in the corps rear area and one behind each committed division. 

Allocation depends upon METT-TC and the size of the corps’ stockage objective. CSAs 

provide corps-wide ammunition support. They serve as the primary source of high-tonnage 

ammunition for the division. Based on divisional forecasted needs, CSA personnel configure 

CCLs and ship ammunition to ASPs and ATPs. CSAs also provide support to units 

operating in the rear of the corps rear area as well as support for reconstitution operations.

7-108. The corps also establishes up to three ASPs and an ATP (the division RATP in the 

DSA) in each division rear area to support combat units and division ATPs. On occasion, 

the COSCOM may establish ASPs farther forward in the division area, especially when 

supporting covering force operations. The division operates up to four ATPs (one for each 

maneuver brigade, and one for the aviation brigade). The ATPs usually receive the majority 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (33 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

of their ammunition in CCLs delivered directly from the CSA, with the remainder coming 

from the ASP.

7-109. The CSAs receive ammunition from the port and TSA in both breakbulk and 

containerized shipments, and in various load configurations. In the CSA, corps ammunition 

units configure much of the ammunition into standard CCLs specifically designed to fit on 

available transportation assets, such as PLS flatracks, or into mission/unit specific CCLs, 

often for throughput delivery. A smaller amount of ammunition may remain in breakbulk, 

container, or single DODIC configuration. The ammunition is stored or sent forward to the 

ATP, or ASP, or delivered directly to the field trains of FA units (METT-TC dependent). 

CCLs may also be configured in an ASP or ATP. As much as possible, downloading and 

handling of ammunition is kept to a minimum. An overview of the Class V distribution 

system is at Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-3. Class V Distribution

7-110. A FA battalion will submit its ammunition requests directly to the support operations 

officer of the supporting division or corps support battalion in the BSA, DSA, CSG, or FL, 

or to the supported maneuver S4 or senior FA HQs, depending on the situation and 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (34 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

command/support relationships. Division and corps ammunition officers consolidate 

requests, verify CSRs can support the requests, and provide instructions on where and when 

the ammunition can be picked up or will be delivered.

7-111. A FA battalion will usually obtain Class V from an ATP operating in or near a BSA, 

DSA, CSG, or FLE. However, it may also obtain some or all of its ammunition from a corps 

ASP, or even directly from a CSA in some cases. Also, with throughput distribution, corps 

and division assets may deliver ammunition directly to the battalion trains. This may be 

accomplished by vehicle, helicopter, or even parachute. Infrequently, the battalion may pick 

up ammunition directly from a seaport or airport.

7-112. At the designated ammunition site, FA battalion ammunition vehicles often have to 

go to only a single vehicle or trailer to get the items needed (because of CCLs). These are 

primarily transload operations using organic MHE. For FA cannon units this consists of 

pallets with complete rounds versus going to different trailers for each component, e.g, 

projectile, propellant, primers and fuzes. However, some ammunition may be picked up as 

individual items, or may require manual, forklift, or other handling procedures. For MLRS 

units ammunition transload involves launch pod containers.

7-113. Also, the ammunition vehicles used by the corps and division ordnance and 

transportation units may not match the battalion’s ammunition vehicles one-for-one for 

cargo space. The S3, S4, and BAO must consider this when coordinating CCL requests. If 

overall quantity is important, CCLs should be built to maximize corps (or division) 

transportation assets and delivery to the ATPs. If rapid transloading or through-put delivery 

of a critical or low-density ammunition directly to an end-user is more important, the S4 

must thoroughly coordinate the preparation, loading, and delivery of those CCLs at the 

ASP/ATP. They should be clearly marked during transit.

7-114. The FA battalion S4 should coordinate early with the support battalion or 

ammunition element to identify non-transload ammunition handling requirements and the 

availability of additional MHE support. The S4 should identify this before the battalion’s 

ammunition sections depart the battalion trains so that additional personnel or equipment 

can be added as necessary and ammunition leaders briefed prior to departure for the 

ammunition point. This also gives the ammunition point leaders time to ensure that 

ATP/ASP organization and operations will meet the battalion requirements.

Battalion Ammunition Resupply

7-115. Normally, the BAO of each FA battalion is responsible for the resupply of the firing 

batteries. He must know all aspects of ammunition availability at the ATP or ASP, the 

battalion’s RSR and CSR, and the locations (present and future) of the firing batteries and 

resupply points. He obtains this information from the OPORD (e.g, support annex, FASP) 

and close and frequent coordination with the battalion S4/ALOC and/or S3/operations 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (35 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

section. The BAO can best perform coordination and management functions from the 

combat trains. The battalion XO or S4 NCOIC (or SB commander) must coordinate with the 

brigade S4, the DAO representative at the ATP, or the CSG representative at the ATP or 

ASP to ensure that correct locations, procedures, and handling requirements are identified 

and agreed upon.

7-116. The BAO plans how to most effectively use the batteries’ ammunition hauling assets 

and how to use and control convoys for ammunition pickup and delivery. The load plans for 

each vehicle must allow for the delivery of CCLs and complete rounds and make maximum 

use of organic carrying capacity. In coordination with the S3 and S4, the BAO carefully 

plans for the delivery of the appropriate types and lots of ammunition to the right locations 

and the designated times. The capability of the battalion to mass fires must not be 

compromised by Class V incompatibility. Other aspects that must be considered include the 

following:

● The size of a convoy depends on the tactical situation and the level of training of 

ammunition personnel. If the unit is in heavy contact or the enemy has a good 

moving-target-acquisition capability, infiltration by groups of two or three vehicles 

may be best. Other situations (darkness, surge, or peak requirements) may dictate the 

use of larger convoys.

● Each convoy, regardless of size, must have one person in charge and a designated 

succession of control.

● Battery assets should be used and controlled consistent with the resupply option 

selected.

● Each firing battery reports the arrival of an ammunition convoy to the battalion 

operations section.

● Ammunition carrier loads must be configured to carry complete rounds of 

ammunition or proper launch pod loads.

● A series of standardized, preconfigured ammunition loads should be developed and 

the ammunition sections trained to use them. This allows flexibility and saves time 

when briefing crews and transloading.

7-117. On demand, ammunition is sent to a firing battery. There the XO, platoon leader, 

FDO, chief of firing battery, or platoon sergeant signs a hand-receipt for ammunition 

received. The battery is responsible for supervising and directing issue of ammunition to the 

firing sections. All ammunition supplied by an ammunition supply point will be signed for 

on a DA Form 581 (Request for Issue and Turn-in of Ammunition) or for training 

ammunition on DA Form 5515 (Training Ammunition Control Document).

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (36 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

7-118. Technological advancements in real-time forecasting of Class V sustainment 

requirements allow more effective ammunition planning. In addition, throughput 

distribution of Class V, packaged to weapon system requirements, reduces the need for high 

stockage of ammunition at ASP and the extent of ATP operations.

Class VI: Personal Demand Items

7-119. Class VI includes personal items sold through post exchanges (PXs). Requests for 

support are submitted by the S1 through administrative channels when PXs are not 

available. In some cases, ration supplementary sundry packs are issued along with normal 

ration distribution.

Class VII: Major End Items

7-120. The issuing of major end items (howitzers and ammunition carriers) is closely 

controlled through command channels. Issue priorities for the replacement of battle or other 

losses are based on item availability, unit mission, and the tactical situation. The DISCOM 

or COSCOM processes requests (usually in the form of battle loss reports) from requesting 

units. Class VII items may not be available in the early periods of a conflict because of 

limited pre-stocks and the lack of supply lines. These items may be delivered to the 

battalion, or the battalion may be required to pick up the items from a designated support 

unit. In some cases, weapon system replacement items (howitzers) may be provided to the 

battalion with crew, fuel, and ammunition, preferably during routine LOGPAC operations. 

Weapon system replacement operations (WSRO) are discussed in detail later in this chapter.

Class VIII: Medical Supplies

7-121. FA battalions obtain medical supplies through medical channels. A divisional 

battalion medical section gets supplies from the divisional clearing station in the BSA or 

DSA. A nondivisional battalion may obtain its supplies from a divisional clearing station or 

from corps medical assets in a BSA, DSA, or CSG. The battalion medical section provides 

organizational maintenance for medical items. Maintenance above this level is obtained by 

evacuating equipment through medical channels to the medical company in the BSA or to a 

comparable COSCOM element. For organizational maintenance, the medical section also 

stocks medical repair parts.

Class IX: Repair Parts

7-122. The FA battalion stocks repair parts based on a PLL. The battalion equipment 

maintenance clerk orders and stocks high-demand and combat-essential repair parts for 

vehicles, weapons (artillery and small arms), NBC equipment, and food service equipment. 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (37 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

The battalion S6 section (or communications platoon) orders and stocks repair parts for C-E 

equipment.

7-123. Repair parts are issued in response to a specific request or by repairable (direct) 

exchange. The battalion gets repair parts from the Class IX supply point in the BSA, DSA, 

CSG, or FLE. Parts are moved forward during routine LOGPAC operations or as required to 

the UMCP. The maintenance section requests Class IX items (less repairable exchange) and 

major Class IX subassemblies, such as engines and transmissions. It submits requests to the 

supporting division or corps maintenance element of the appropriate support battalion (in 

the BSA, DSA, CSG, or FLE). Repairable exchange for selected items (including 

components and subassemblies) is handled as a simple exchange of the unserviceable item 

(with an attached request for issue or turn-in) for a serviceable item. In combat, exchange 

and cannibalization are the norm to obtain critical Class IX supplies.

Class X: Material to Support Non-military Programs

7-124. Material to support non-military programs, such as agriculture and economic 

development, is not included in Classes I through IX. Class X items are requested and 

obtained by the S4 on the basis of civil-military requirements. Specific instructions for 

request and issue of Class X supplies are provided by division or higher.

MAINTENANCE

7-125. Maintenance involves inspecting, testing, servicing, repairing, requisitioning, and 

recovering equipment. The FA battalion completes repair and recovery as far forward as 

possible, at the lowest capable echelon. When equipment cannot be repaired on site, it is 

moved only as far as necessary for repair. When all maintenance requirements of the 

battalion cannot be met, the XO determines maintenance support priorities for subordinate 

units. These priorities are based on operational requirements of the battalion and on 

recommendations of the S3, S4, and BMO.

7-126. Common maintenance terms include the following:

● A MST is a mobile team from the FSB, MSB, or CSG maintenance company 

organized and equipped to provide forward support.

● A UMCP is a facility established by the battalion maintenance section to collect 

equipment awaiting repair, evacuation, controlled exchange, or cannibalization. It is 

the first point to which battery maintenance teams recover equipment and at which 

some DS maintenance is performed. It is located next to the combat trains.

● Controlled exchange is the removal of serviceable parts, components, or assemblies 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (38 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

from unserviceable, economically repairable equipment and their immediate reuse in 

restoring a like item to combat-operable or serviceable condition.

● Cannibalization is the authorized removal of parts or components from 

uneconomically non-repairable or disposable end items or assemblies and making 

them available for reuse.

● Battlefield damage assessment and repair (BDAR) is the act of inspecting battle 

damage to determine its extent, classifying the type of repairs required and 

determining the procedure best suited to make the equipment mission-capable. 

BDAR may involve the immediate repair of equipment by field-expedient methods; 

however, BDAR procedures shall be used only in combat, at the direction of the 

commander.

● In FA battalions with consolidated CSS, the battery maintenance team is a team 

from the maintenance platoon that is organized and equipped by MTOE to provide 

forward unit maintenance support. Normally, the team deploys a recovery vehicle 

and a maintenance truck forward with the battery, split between each platoon (when 

applicable). In battalions with a decentralized CSS structure the batteries have their 

own organic maintenance sections.

MAINTENANCE CONCEPTS

7-127. The following battlefield maintenance concepts illustrate how echelons overlap to 

provide continuous maintenance support to the batteries.

7-128. The BMO task-organizes the maintenance platoon according to his analysis of 

current and anticipated requirements. He is concerned with providing the appropriate 

support at battery, UMCP, CP, and trains locations.

7-129. Normally, (in centralized CSS battalions or during centralized CSS operations) the 

battalion provides each battery its habitually associated maintenance team. Usually, the 

battalion's recovery vehicles are positioned forward with each firing battery but remain 

under battalion control. This provides a quick-fix capability for those items that can be 

repaired in less than two hours and a recovery capability for those items requiring more 

extensive repairs.

7-130. The battalion normally establishes the UMCP next to the combat trains. It includes 

the maintenance platoon HQ (-), HHSB (or HHB) maintenance team and PLL, number 2 

common tool kit and welding equipment and the DS MST (-). The BMO task organizes the 

UMCP according to the maintenance requirements and the tactical situation. The UMCP 

cannot become a collection point for non-operational vehicles to the extent that it cannot 

move with an hour's notice. Anything that cannot be repaired in the UMCP or that cannot be 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (39 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

towed by UMCP assets is recovered to the field trains or sent directly to the FSB 

maintenance company in the BSA. The battalion maintenance technician (BMT) and the 

senior maintenance supervisor supervise the UMCP.

7-131. The rest of the maintenance platoon is in the field trains (or the unit trains) under the 

control of the BMO and the battalion motor sergeant. The battalion maintenance platoon 

organizes to support six elements - three firing batteries, the CP, the combat trains and the 

field trains (or unit trains) as follows:

● Each of the three firing battery maintenance trucks and PLL trailers provides tools 

and repair parts to support one battery. These vehicles also transport packaged POL 

to support repair operations. The HHSB maintenance truck carries tools and PLL to 

support the vehicles habitually located in the trains and at the CP. (In units with an 

HHB and SB, using dual trains, HHB maintenance supports the CP and combat trains 

while the SB maintenance truck with PLL items supports the vehicles and equipment 

located in the field trains.)

● The BMO sets direct support maintenance element priorities. Since the maintenance 

elements are equipped and trained to support the unit, task-organizing DS 

maintenance assets is not routine. The PLL parts, special tools, and test sets are not 

easily split.

NOTE: Direct support FA battalions organic to light divisions do not have the personnel or equipment 

assets to completely implement the procedures as described. However, the concept is valid for light 

units and must be adjusted on the basis of the unit's organic capabilities.

7-132. The battery maintenance vehicles are in the forward platoon locations. These 

vehicles carry the toolboxes, unit-level technical manuals, a limited number of special tools, 

and repair parts.

7-133. If a damaged vehicle cannot be repaired within two hours, it is recovered to the 

UMCP or the field/unit trains by the forward-positioned recovery vehicles. Recovery 

vehicles are directed by battalion maintenance to support recovery operations regardless of 

battery affiliation.

7-134. Maintenance elements from the FA battalion, FSB, MSB, or CSB repair damaged 

vehicles recovered to the UMCP. When not involved in on-site repairs, the battery 

maintenance teams may also repair vehicles in the UMCP. This is especially true of work 

requiring diagnostic test equipment that cannot be taken into the forward positions.

7-135. Vehicles that the unit can’t repair within six hours, or if their repair would otherwise 

overload the capability of the UMCP, are recovered to the field/unit trains or taken directly 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (40 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

to the FSB, MSB, CSB, or CSG collection point for repair. This recovery is done by the 

battery or battalion maintenance recovery vehicles, or with heavy equipment transporters 

(HETs). The use of HETs applies to FA units equipped with tracked vehicles. The BMT 

coordinates and directs the method to be used. The use of HETs is preferred; however, road 

conditions and availability restrict their use. HETs are requested through the FSB, MSB, 

CSB, or CSG. Some crew members go with the recovered vehicle to the rear to help 

mechanics repair the vehicle and return it to the unit when repaired. They also man 

operational weapon systems on the vehicle to provide additional security to rear areas. 

Installed C-E equipment remains in the vehicle when it is evacuated. Crewmen not going 

with the vehicle remove personal equipment and any special equipment before the vehicle 

leaves the area.

7-136. The UMCP usually displaces with the other elements of the combat/unit trains. 

During periods of frequent displacement, the BMT may direct that the UMCP displace by 

echelon. In this case, some personnel of the maintenance platoon, including the BMT, 

complete repair on vehicles at the old UMCP before displacing. Maintenance platoon assets 

not involved in repairs move with the rest of the combat trains and establish the forward 

UMCP. During rapid forward moves, such as exploitation, the UMCP conducts only 

essential repairs and simple recovery. Other disabled vehicles are taken to collection points 

on the MSR to be repaired or evacuated. Field trains and the maintenance elements of the 

FSB, MSB, CSB, and/or CSG displace forward to subsequent locations. The BMT 

coordinates the repair or evacuation with the battalion motor sergeant in the field trains.

7-137. In the field/unit trains, remaining elements of the battalion maintenance platoon 

perform other tracked and wheeled vehicle maintenance and class IX resupply. The battalion 

motor sergeant coordinates requirements with the S4 (and HHSB/SB commander) and with 

the maintenance element of the FSB, MSB, CSB, or CSG. He also coordinates maintenance 

requirements with the parent HQ of any attached or supporting elements working with the 

battalion.

FIELD SERVICES

MORTUARY AFFAIRS

7-138. Mortuary affairs services are provided by the MSB or CSG supply and service 

company. Mortuary affairs at battalion level consist of three functions: collection, 

identification, and evacuation. The soldier who has knowledge of the casualty should 

usually complete the appropriate forms. Subordinate elements send the forms to the 

field/unit trains with the returning LOGPAC. Unit personnel collect any military equipment 

and turn it over to the supply sergeant for forwarding during LOGPAC operations. Remains 

are placed in a human remains pouch, along with personal effects, and evacuated to the field 

trains. The battalion may establish a collection point, if necessary, at the combat/unit trains 

under the control of the S4. In any case, the unit should evacuate remains as quickly as 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (41 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

possible to the collection point in the BSA, DSA, CSG, or FLE.

SHOWER, LAUNDRY, AND CLOTHING REPAIR

7-139. The MSB, CSB, CSG or FLE may provide shower, laundry, and clothing repair 

services. The FA battalion S4 requests clothing exchange (or gratuitous issue), laundry, and 

shower service through the brigade S4, FSB, MSB, CSB or CSG. The request must specify:

● The location of the unit making the request.

● The desired time for service.

● The range of clothing sizes for unit members.

7-140. The requesting unit must be prepared to furnish soldiers to help set up the shower, 

laundry, and clothing repair operation. Normally, there is one shower, laundry, and clothing 

repair service point per BSA, DSA, and CSG.

SALVAGE

7-141. The supporting CSS element will also provide salvage services. Salvage collection 

points are established in the BSA, DSA, CSG and FLE. They receive serviceable, 

unserviceable (repairable), discarded, abandoned, and captured supplies and equipment. The 

salvage point will not accept COMSEC or medical supplies, toxic agents, radioactive 

materials, contaminated equipment, aircraft, ammunition, and explosives.

LAUNDRY AND RENOVATION

7-142. COSCOM provides laundry and renovation services when the tactical situation 

permits. This service is coordinated through the brigade S4.

TRANSPORTATION

7-143. Should the FA battalion require transportation support beyond its organic 

capabilities, the S4 forwards a request to the maneuver brigade, or force FA HQ S4. They 

forward the request to the movement control officer (MCO) at the DISCOM or COSCOM. 

The MCO makes a determination based on requirements and existing priorities.

SECTION IV — PERSONNEL AND HEALTH SERVICES SUPPORT

7-144. Personnel and health services support functions sustain the morale and welfare of the 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (42 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

soldier. At battalion level, these include personnel and administrative (P&A) services, legal 

services, finance services, postal services, chaplain activities, health services support, and 

EPW support.

PERSONNEL AND ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES

S1 FUNCTIONS

7-145. P&A services are the responsibility of the battalion S1. The duties include the 

following:

Strength Accounting

7-146. Batteries and attached elements submit a personnel daily summary report to the S1 

representative in the ALOC. The S1 forwards a battalion consolidated report to or through 

the maneuver brigade and/or force FA HQ S1. The S1 representative provides the TOC and 

PAC (in the field trains) with an information copy. These reports are the basis for individual 

replacements and Class I resupply. Accurate strength reports also give the commander and 

staff information to plan operations. Battalion TSOPs usually describe daily reporting 

requirements. Personnel strength reports should prominently note any critical skill 

shortages.

Casualty Reporting

7-147. The S1 ensures that both strength and casualty reporting are timely and accurate. 

Initial reports are usually verbal or plain text message. Written reporting occurs as soon as 

possible after the event. The section chief or any individual having knowledge of the 

incident initiates it. The DA Form 1156 is carried by all small-unit leaders and is used to 

report battle and nonbattle casualties. It provides initial information for notifying next of kin 

and for paying benefits. When a soldier is reported missing or missing in action or when the 

remains are not under US control, a DA Form 1155 goes with the DA Form 1156. The first 

sergeant collects the reports and forwards them to the ALOC. The S1 cross-checks the 

reports, requests any needed clarification, adjusts unit strength reports, and forwards the 

reports through the PAC to the maneuver brigade and/or force FA HQ S4 and informs the 

battalion TOC.

Replacement Operations

7-148. The PAC monitors replacement flow. The battalion S1 establishes a replacement 

receiving point (RRP) (usually in the field trains) and notifies the maneuver brigade and/or 

force FA HQ S1 of its location. All replacements or hospital returnees are brought to the 

RRP for initial processing. The division or corps adjutant general is normally responsible for 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (43 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

delivering replacements to the RRP. Replacements are briefed on TSOPs and equipped with 

weapons and field gear before leaving the trains. They normally move forward to their unit 

with a LOGPAC.

Other Administrative Services

7-149. During lulls in the battle, the S1 and PAC complete all other P&A actions necessary. 

Special consideration is given to timely processing of awards and decorations.

LEGAL SERVICES

7-150. The S1 section coordinates legal services support for commanders, staffs, and 

soldiers. The division or corps staff judge advocate sections provide the actual support to the 

FA battalion on a GS basis. The support includes:

● Legal advice to commanders on all matters involving military law, domestic law, 

foreign law, international law, and administrative proceedings.

● Representation to soldiers accused and/or suspected in military justice matters and to 

personnel pending adverse military personnel action.

● Advice to soldiers on complaints, reports of survey, and the right to silence in 

administrative proceedings.

● Legal assistance to soldiers on personal civil legal matters.

FINANCE SERVICES

7-151. Mobile pay teams from the corps area finance support unit provide finance support to 

the FA battalion. During low-intensity operations, the mobile pay teams provide personal 

check cashing services and/or make combat payments to soldiers in amounts established by 

the theater army commander or in lesser amounts if the soldier so desires. The force FA 

commander may establish an amount less than the maximum for personnel assigned, 

depending on the tactical situation and the needs of the soldier. When and where the soldier 

is paid are determined by the commander and coordinated by the S1.

POSTAL SERVICES

7-152. A postal element, assigned by the corps DS postal company, receives and separates 

mail by battalion and then turns it over to the maneuver brigade or next higher FA HQ S1. 

The battalion mail clerk receives and sorts the mail by task organization. He distributes it to 

the unit supply sergeant (assistant mail clerk), who delivers it to the first sergeant or to the 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (44 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

soldier himself (accountable mail) during LOGPAC resupply.

CHAPLAIN ACTIVITIES

7-153. The unit ministry team (UMT) (one chaplain and one chaplain’s assistant) facilitates 

and coordinates religious support across the battalion AO. The UMT often operates out of 

the combat trains, however it positions itself based on its mission and METT-TC. The UMT 

may move forward with LOGPACs when visiting batteries or other battalion locations. This 

team is dedicated to serving the spiritual needs of soldiers. The UMT coordinates with all 

staff members, to include the S1, who receives messages and requests for religious support 

and ensures the necessary UMT information is published in paragraph 4 of the FASP. The 

UMT mission includes:

● Providing worship opportunities.

● Administering sacraments, rites, and ordinances.

● Providing pastoral care and counseling.

● Advising the commander and staff on matters of religion, morals, and morale.

● Ministering to casualties and those suffering battle fatigue.

● Providing spiritual fitness training to enhance soldier morale and unit cohesion.

● Routinely visiting unit soldiers in nearby hospitals.

HEALTH SERVICES SUPPORT

PLANNING

7-154. Battalion health services support is planned by the medical section OIC (battalion 

field surgeon or physicians assistant) and the S1. The battalion medical section provides the 

service. The FSB, MSB, CSB, or CSG medical company provides backup support. To 

support battalion operations, the field surgeon or physician’s assistant and the supporting 

medical operations officer must understand the scheme of maneuver as well as the medical 

support plan.

ORGANIZATION

7-155. The FA battalion medical section is organized with a treatment team, an ambulance 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (45 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

team, and a combat medic section. This organization allows quick evacuation of wounded 

soldiers for treatment by trained medical personnel within 30 minutes of the time they are 

wounded. The medical section in light units consists of the medical treatment team and a 

combat medic section. The medical treatment team establishes the battalion aid station, 

which operates from the combat trains. The ambulance team also operates from the BAS.

7-156. Combat medics habitually work with the same battery. It is often necessary to 

augment these medics with soldiers who have received intense medical training (combat 

lifesavers). The goal is to train one combat lifesaver per section throughout the battalion.

FUNCTIONS

7-157. The functions of the platoon medic are to:

● Provide emergency medical treatment and protection for the sick and wounded.

● Assist section crews in evacuating injured crewmen from their vehicles.

● Provide medical evacuation.

● Initiate field medical cards for the sick and wounded, and time permitting, complete 

cards for deceased personnel.

● Screen, evaluate, and treat patients suffering from minor illnesses and injuries; return 

to duty patients requiring no further attention; and notify the first sergeant of those 

requiring evacuation to the BAS.

● Inform the battery commander and the battalion surgeon of the status of patients seen 

and the overall status of health and welfare of the platoon.

● Train unit personnel self-aid and buddy aid.

● Provide trained combat lifesavers with medical supplies, as required.

7-158. The BAS has medically trained personnel to stabilize patients for further evacuation, 

to perform immediate lifesaving or limb-saving techniques, and to treat minor wounds or 

illnesses and return the patients to duty. Other functions of the BAS include the following:

● Receive and record patients.

● Notify the S1 of all patients processed and the disposition of casualties as directed by 

TSOP.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (46 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

● Prepare field medical records and verify information on field medical cards.

● Request and monitor aeromedical evacuation.

● Monitor personnel, when necessary, for radiological contamination before medical 

treatment.

● Decontaminate and treat small numbers of chemical casualties.

CASUALTY REPORTING AND EVACUATION

7-159. Medical evacuations must be planned in detail. Too often, units rely unreasonably on 

aeromedical evacuation. If these limited assets are available, units must have standard 

procedures for their use. However, units must plan to care for and evacuate their soldiers by 

use of organic equipment.

Individual Casualties

7-160. Medics in forward platoon or battery locations treat casualties immediately after 

appropriate triage. Unit personnel prepare the appropriate documentation and notify the 

ALOC to prepare to receive casualties, to include preparation of litter teams. The unit 

transports the patients to the BAS in the combat trains or the nearest medical 

element/facility (forward aid station, main aid station or ambulance exchange point), 

depending on the arrangements coordinated by the medical section OIC or the S1.

Mass Casualties

7-161. Casualties in this category are beyond the capability of the unit to handle with 

organic assets. The affected unit notifies the TOC and the ALOC immediately, providing the 

general nature and extent of the casualties. The battalion XO normally coordinates and 

directs the battalion response. The battalion medical sections may require medical and 

transportation augmentation from other battalion elements in the trains, or from external 

sources. Following the medical treatment and evacuation, the battalion XO and unit leaders 

must direct reorganization and reconstitution operations as appropriate.

7-162. Mass casualty procedures must be clearly identified in unit SOPs and FASPs. During 

the MDMP, operational and risk assessments should identify the most likely times, places, 

and causes of mass casualties to allow planning of force protection and mass casualty 

measures. Internal mutual support plans are often addressed in SOPs, but arrangements for 

external mass casualty support are often based on the unique situation and available 

resources. The FASP should identify the internal and external mass casualty mutual support 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (47 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

arrangements (not covered by SOP), available assets, triggers, C2 considerations, and 

timeline or phase considerations.

NBC-Contaminated Casualties

7-163. These casualties fall into two categories:

● Soldiers suffering the effects of an NBC attack.

● Soldiers, although fully protected in MOPP 4, suffering a conventional wound.

7-164. For both circumstances, the casualty must be decontaminated before he is entered 

into the unit's casualty evacuation system. The initial procedures include taking appropriate 

protective measures as well as notifying the TOC and the ALOC.

7-165. The battalion establishes a hasty decontamination site, organized under battalion 

control, and augmented by battery personnel as appropriate. The focus of this initial effort is 

on the decontamination of casualties. Decontamination of remaining unit personnel and 

equipment follows, when appropriate, after coordination by the battalion S3.

MEDICAL SUPPLY AND PROPERTY EXCHANGE

7-166. The medical section maintains a three-day stock of medical supplies. To prevent 

unnecessary depletion of blankets, litters, splints and the like, the receiving medical facility 

exchanges like property with the transferring agency. Medical property accompanying 

patients of allied nations is disposed of in accordance with STANAG 2128, Appendix C.

PREVENTIVE MEASURES

7-167. Experience in World War II, Korea, and Vietnam indicates that most hospital 

admissions were for disease and nonbattle injury. Commanders can reduce disease and nonbattle injury by emphasizing preventive medicine, safety, and personal hygiene. See FM 21-

10, Field Hygiene and Sanitation, and FM 21-10-1, Unit Field Sanitation Team.

PRISONERS OF WAR

7-168. The S1 plans and coordinates EPW operations, collection points, and evacuation 

procedures. Prisoners of war are evacuated from the battalion area as rapidly as possible. 

The capturing battery is responsible for:

● Guarding prisoners until relieved by proper authority.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (48 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

● Recovering weapons and equipment.

● Removing documents with intelligence value.

● Reporting EPW events and status to the TOC and ALOC.

7-169. Prisoners are evacuated to the vicinity of the combat trains or UMCP for processing 

and initial interrogation. Crews of vehicles undergoing repair or unoccupied mechanics act 

as guards. Prisoners are then moved to the brigade EPW collection point on returning 

LOGPAC vehicles or by transportation coordinated through the S4. As necessary, the S2 

reviews and reports any documents or information of immediate value. The S4 coordinates 

evacuation of enemy equipment. Wounded prisoners are treated through normal medical 

channels but are kept separated from US and allied patients. For additional information on 

treatment and handling of EPWs, see FM 19-40, Enemy Prisoners of War, Civilian 

Internees, and Detained Persons, and FM 27-10.

SECTION V — RECONSTITUTION

7-170. Planners must be prepared for mass casualties, mass destruction of equipment, and 

the destruction or loss of effectiveness of entire units. Battalion units that have been 

catastrophically depleted or rendered ineffective are returned to combat effectiveness 

through reconstitution.

7-171. Reconstitution consists of the actions to restore units to a desired level of combat 

effectiveness commensurate with mission requirements and availability of resources. 

Reconstitution differs from sustaining operations in that it is undertaken only when a unit is 

at an unacceptable level of combat readiness; sustainment operations are routine actions to 

maintain combat readiness. Commanders reconstitute by either reorganization or 

regeneration. See FM 100-9, Reconstitution.

REORGANIZATION

7-172. Reorganization is the action taken to shift resources within a degraded unit to 

increase its combat power. Measures taken include the following:

● Cross-leveling equipment and personnel.

● Matching operational weapon systems with crews.

● Forming composite units.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (49 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

7-173. Immediate battlefield reorganization is the quick and often temporary restoration of 

units during an operation.

7-174. Deliberate reorganization is a permanent restructuring of the unit. It is the type of 

reorganization considered during reconstitution planning. Deliberate reorganization is 

supported with higher echelon resources (such as maintenance and transportation). 

Additional replacements and other resources are made available. The parent-unit 

commander, one echelon higher than the unit being reorganized, must approve a deliberate 

reorganization.

REGENERATION

7-175. Regeneration is not a battalion commander's prerogative. It consists of:

● Incremental or whole-unit rebuilding through large-scale replacement of personnel, 

equipment, and supplies.

● Reestablishing or replacing essential command, control, and communications.

● Conducting the necessary training for the rebuilt unit.

7-176. The intensive nature of regeneration requires that a unit be pulled out of combat for 

this purpose.

WEAPON SYSTEM REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

7-177. WSRO is a method to supply the combat commander with fully operational 

replacement weapon systems. Three terms that are often used in describing WSRO are a 

ready-for-issue weapons system, a ready-to-fight weapon system, and linkup:

● A ready-for-issue weapon system is a weapon that is mechanically operable 

according to current standards and has all ancillary equipment (fire control, machine 

guns, radio mounts, and radios) installed. The vehicle has been fully fueled and basic 

issue items are on board in boxes. There is no ammunition on board and the gaining 

unit must provide the crew.

● A ready-to-fight weapon system is a crewed, ready-for-issue weapon with 

ammunition stored on board. For a cannon system, the weapon has been boresighted 

and boresight has been verified.

● Linkup is the process of joining a ready-for-issue weapon with a trained crew.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (50 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm

7-178. WSRO is simply a procedure for bringing a weapon system to a ready-to-fight 

condition and handing it off to the combat unit. It involves making a vehicle ready to issue 

and marrying it to a complete crew, who makes it ready to fight. WSRO is an intensively 

managed process for giving the commander usable weapon systems in the shortest possible 

time.

7-179. To manage weapon systems, a common weapon system manager (WSM) is required. 

A WSM is designated at each level of command. The mission of the WSM is to maximize 

the number of operational weapon systems in accordance with the commander’s priorities. 

The WSMs at all levels are charged with quick-fix responsibility; they match serviceable 

vehicles and surviving crews.

7-180. Primary linkup points for weapon systems (weapon with crew) are in the DSA, CSG, 

or assembly areas for formations in reserve. The DISCOM, COSCOM, or support group 

commander organizes the linkup point and provides personnel to make the weapon system 

ready for issue. The crew, working with division or corps elements, readies the weapon 

system to fight.

7-181. Conditions permitting, some familiarization training may be provided to crews in the 

linkup area. Such training should include:

● Refresher gunnery.

● Tactical driving.

● Enemy and allied vehicle identification.

● Passive air defense procedures.

● Local TSOPs.

● Any other subjects appropriate to the operational area.

7-182. It is not intended that such wartime training should be elaborate or should substitute 

for crew qualification. The intent is to familiarize crews with conditions in the combat area 

and with any key model differences if the weapon is a newer or modified version than others 

in the unit.

7-183. Whenever possible, experienced soldiers should be mixed with replacement soldiers 

to form complete crews. New crewmen can join a partial weapon crew (those whose weapon 

has been destroyed or evacuated) at linkup points to form complete crews. There they pick 

up a replacement weapon, make it ready to fight and rejoin their unit.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch7.htm (51 of 51) [1/7/2002 1:39:14 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

RDL

Homepage

Table of

Contents

Document

Information

Download

Instructions

Chapter 8

FA Operations

Chapters 1-7 described the basics of how a FA battalion is structured and how it shoots, 

moves, communicates, and sustains. This chapter discusses how a FA battalion applies those 

techniques and principals in the context of FA operations in a variety of operational 

situations. Section I discusses FA considerations common to all operations. Sections II and 

III cover FA operations in support of offensive and defensive operations, respectively. 

Section IV details FA support of other unique tactical operations, such as airborne 

operations. Section V addresses FA support of stability operations and support operations. 

And Section VI discusses climate and terrain considerations that impact on FA operations. 

Each section addresses tactics, techniques, procedures, and considerations in relation to the 

six tactical task areas discussed in Section I, Chapter 1. The focus of this chapter is on FA 

operations. Fire support tactics, techniques, and procedures are included in FMs 6-20, 6-20-

10, 6-20-30, and 6-20-40.

SECTION I — COMMON FA CONSIDERATIONS

8-01. There are several FA considerations that may be applicable in all or most types of 

operations. Those are addressed in this section. Actions unique to a specific type of 

operation are addressed in the appropriate section.

DEPLOY/CONDUCT MANEUVER

● During wargaming and during the battle, anticipate when tactical movement vice 

tactical maneuvering of the battalion or batteries may be necessary.

● When speed is necessary, consider moving the battalion on multiple routes if 

possible.

● Thoroughly identify terrain management issues during planning, wargaming, and 

rehearsals. Conduct movement and positioning coordination early to reduce conflicts.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (1 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Consider using the hours of darkness for movement and resupply.

DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE

● Develop information on both military and civilian threats.

● Identify and template all enemy FA assets that can affect combined arms operations 

and the FA battalion’s operations.

● Develop and submit prioritized FA related intelligence and target acquisition 

requirements as early as possible.

● Request and collect intelligence information from maneuver units, MPs, nearby 

units, and host nation civil/military elements as necessary to protect FA battalion 

assets from ground attack.

EMPLOY FIRES

DETECT AND LOCATE TARGETS

● Identify all specified and implied targeting responsibilities.

● Develop targets and targeting information to support counterfire and SEAD 

operations.

● Identify which observers (primary and backup) will trigger FA events (e.g, fire 

missions, cueing).

● Coordinate the support of external FA and non-FA intelligence and TA assets to 

acquire targeting information and BDA.

● Plan and direct counterfire radar operations in coordination with force FA radar 

operations.

DELIVER FIRES

● Destroy, neutralize, and suppress enemy indirect fire systems with proactive and 

reactive counterfire.

● Provide close and deep fires to support maneuver operations and to destroy and 

disrupt enemy C2.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (2 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Provide FA illumination to assist friendly force night operations, to mark locations or 

targets, to provide friendly direction orientation, or to degrade enemy night vision 

equipment.

● Mass fires to gain maximum efficiency and effectiveness.

● Interdict and disrupt enemy CSS efforts and troop movements.

● Continuously review and adjust primary and backup EFAT responsibilities. In DS 

battalions the S3 must also maintain close coordination with the brigade FSE to 

monitor changes in EFST and trigger responsibilities. When responsibilities change, 

the S3 must ensure the responsible unit quickly receives all frequencies, lasing codes, 

or quickfire/sensor-to-shooter linkage information. The BAO may need to deliver or 

redistribute ammunition, to include emergency CCLs.

● Provide fires in support of aviation operations (attack helicopters, air cavalry, air 

assault, CAS, and JAAT). Provide SEAD.

● Provide rapid, SCATMINE minefields to support maneuver operations.

● Provide smoke for obscuration, suppression, screening, and deception to support 

maneuver operations.

● Coordinate for meteorology and survey data.

PERFORM LOGISTICS AND CSS

● Stockpile ammunition to support major firing events (such as preparations or 

counterpreparations).

● Time key ammunition deliveries of low-density ammunition (such as illumination) 

and stockpiled ammunition (for fires such as preparations) to arrive soon before the 

time it is required.

● Use helicopter resupply for critical items, especially when supply lines become 

extended.

EXERCISE C2

COMMUNICATE

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (3 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Closely monitor distances during planning and execution to determine when digital 

and voice radio range limitations may become excessive.

● Employ alternate digital routing and voice capability to back up critical digital 

communications.

● Carefully position and move retrans teams to maintain communications in offensive 

and defensive situations.

● Use decentralized techniques such as direct routing and quickfire channels to provide 

immediately responsive sensor-to-shooter linkages for critical fires.

COORDINATE FIRE SUPPORT

● Make maximum use of available FSEs to gather friendly and enemy information and 

coordinate movement and positioning.

● Use liaison as much as possible to ensure effective coordination with other FA units 

and other military and civilian elements as necessary.

● Increase frequency of information/database updates during fast moving operations, 

and whenever danger close fires are planned or anticipated.

PROTECT THE FORCE

● Coordinate support from maneuver units, MPs, nearby units, and host nation 

civil/military elements to assist in defending FA battalion assets from ground attack 

and in repelling attacks.

● Consider using supplementary positions for lengthy, preplanned missions, especially 

when the counterfire threat is high.

● Make maximum use of mask to shield fires and communication from enemy 

acquisition.

SECTION II — FA SUPPORT OF OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS

8-02. This section describes FA tactics, techniques, procedures, and considerations for FA 

support of offensive operations. It addresses those principles that are generally common to 

all offensive operations, and discusses FA considerations unique to specific types of 

offensive actions.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (4 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

BASIC FA TASKS IN THE OFFENSE

8-03. FA prepares the way for the maneuver force by suppressing, neutralizing, or 

destroying the enemy as well as obscuring his vision of friendly movement. FA fires are 

planned to soften enemy defenses before the attack. Short, violent preparations are planned 

and targeted against front-line defenses, OPs, C2, indirect fire weapons, and reserves.

DEPLOY/CONDUCT MANEUVER

8-04. Offensive operations frequently involve an ebb and flow of forward, rearward, and 

lateral movement. During periods of rapid advance, battle space may open up, and PAs may 

be relatively easier to find. When advances stall, or attacking forces are counterattacked, 

battle space may condense. Movement may become a series of shorter tactical maneuvers, 

occasionally involving increased lateral or even rearward movement.

● Plan to use more hasty occupations to support rapid movement.

● Plan to use increased map reconnaissance, since time available for ground 

reconnaissance will likely decrease, and the terrain will not be available while it is in 

the enemy’s possession.

● Request photographic reconnaissance or copies of the products from other 

reconnaissance efforts.

● Consider air reconnaissance, if available.

● Consider locations that the enemy used for his FA units. It may be an indicator that 

the terrain is suitable. However they may contain hazards due to ICM duds or 

SCATMINE from friendly FA attacks.

● FA battalions supported by a single counterfire radar may have difficulty maintaining 

radar coverage during fast moving offensive operations. DIVARTY or Corps Arty 

assistance may be necessary.

● FA battalions may rely more heavily on the faster movement techniques, especially 

in the faster-paced offensive operations.

● Position firing units well forward to range beyond maneuver objectives. Identify 

requirements for extended range munitions.

● Plan alternate routes to bypass enemy obstacles. Request engineer mobility support.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (5 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Consider repositioning light units by air.

DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE

● Identify and prioritize enemy indirect fire assets that can potentially impact friendly 

offensive operations. Develop and provide counterfire targets for preparations, 

counter-preparations, and other proactive and reactive counterfires.

● Find canalizing terrain or road networks in the vicinity of enemy FA that can be 

blocked or interdicted to prevent retreat of enemy artillery, to entrap enemy FA, or 

create TAIs and kill zones. Coordinate intelligence/TA coverage of the area. 

Consider attacking entrapped enemy FA by air or ground forces as an alternative to 

FA attack.

EMPLOY FIRES

Detect And Locate Targets

● Plan for frequent repositioning of TA assets based on FLOT movement.

● Use CFFZs to provide TA coverage on suspected enemy firing positions.

● Ensure radar is in position in time to support the assault on the objective and 

consolidation.

Deliver Fires

● Provide fires at the time and place required by the maneuver commander, to include 

suppressive fires on the objective.

● Isolate the objective with fires beyond and to the flanks.

● Provide fires to support breaching operations. Use ICM, HE, and smoke to suppress 

enemy forces overwatching obstacles. Use smoke to screen the breaching operation, 

and aggressive counterfire and CFZs to reduce the enemy indirect fire threat against 

the breeching force.

● Plan for increased use of hasty survey -- survey availability decreases in relation to 

the speed of the advance.

● Prepare to receive and execute hasty fire plans to support changes in objectives, to 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (6 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

support in repelling enemy counterattacks, or to support developing penetrations and 

exploitations.

● Put survey with lead FA units. Regularly forward updated survey data to force FA 

HQ to facilitate emplacement of following FA assets.

● When the FA battalion supports lead elements, especially during penetrations and 

exploitations, it must increase coordination with its higher FA HQ to maintain 

effective meteorology support.

● Consider using Copperhead against counterattacking forces or against armored forces 

in strongpoints. Anticipate hasty planning procedures.

● Coordinate with division and corps TA assets to identify deep targets.

● Offensive operations may require increased DPICM and less SCATMINE. 

Anticipate changing ammunition requirements as the battle reaches a culminating 

point, and transitions to the defense.

PERFORM LOGISTICS AND CSS

● Coordinate stockpiling of ammunition for preparations.

● Plan for increasingly extended lines of resupply.

● Plan for more frequent moves of the combat trains.

● Synchronize resupply of ammunition and POL. Push well designed CCLs far enough 

forward to quickly link up with firing units.

● Consider aerial resupply using Army air, container delivery system (CDS) and/or 

mass supply (light forces).

EXERCISE C2

Communicate

● Plan retrans capability to cover extended lines of communication (LOC).

● Rely primarily on radio (voice/digital) communications, since establishing wire links 

becomes more difficult in mobile situations.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (7 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

Coordinate Fire Support

● Plan fires to prevent reinforcement, disengagement, and resupply of the objective.

● Plan fires to protect units as they reorganize on the objective.

PROTECT THE FORCE

● Plan for unit defense in a 6,400-mil environment, since encountering bypassed 

enemy elements becomes more probable.

● Plan counter-counterpreparation fires. Include this requirement in ammunition 

requests and distribution plans. Ensure ammunition plans address movement and use 

of the ammunition if it isn’t needed.

● Within the framework of the maneuver deception plan, consider deception 

techniques to confuse the enemy’s intelligence assets.

● Consider using Firefinder CFZs for increased force protection.

● Prepare to provide continuous FS in an NBC environment. The threat of an enemy 

NBC attack may increase as his defeat becomes imminent.

FORMS OF MANEUVER

8-05. Maneuver units use five forms of maneuver in the offense:

● Envelopment.

● Turning movement.

● Penetration.

● Frontal attack.

● Infiltration.

8-06. FA battalion commanders and staffs must understand the differences in these forms of 

maneuver and the implications for supporting FA battalions.

ENVELOPMENT

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (8 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

8-07. Envelopments are usually fast-paced, fluid operations, requiring hasty planning 

techniques and increased reliance on battle drills and fire plans for branches or sequels. A 

DS or R FA battalion supporting a maneuver brigade envelopment will plan and provide 

fires for both the fixing force and the enveloping force. The depth of the envelopment will 

generally be relatively shallow. The following considerations apply:

● A primary consideration is how much FA (if any) to send with the enveloping force. 

Battlespace along the corridor used by the enveloping force will be tight and security 

tentative. Consider the depth of the envelopment, and branches and sequels . The 

battalion may be able to provide much of the needed support from close behind the 

fixing force.

● GS/GSR FA may be pushed well forward to support the enveloping force and to 

provide deep fires to prevent reinforcements, to disrupt C2 and support SEAD for 

supporting air assets.

● Consider using RFLs to control fires of converging forces. S3s should monitor the 

frequency of RFL and FLOT updates and request updates if he determines data may 

have become outdated. The unit may use quickfire voice channels to obtain the most 

current FLOT information.

● CSS support for FA in the corridor of advance may be difficult, as interdiction of 

LOCs may be likely.

8-08. In larger operations, DS/R FA battalions may support either the fixing force or the 

enveloping force. GS/GSR battalions may support either force or provide support to both 

operations. FA units should consider the following:

● Since the enveloping force is usually the main effort, the DS FA battalion supporting 

it may frequently receive reinforcement, while the DS battalion supporting the fixing 

force may not.

● DS/R FA battalions supporting enveloping forces may experience limited battlespace 

and tentative security in the corridor of advance. Shoot-and-scoot tactics may be 

difficult, especially if the advance slows or stalls. The FA unit should increase force 

protection measures due to the threat from bypassed and counterattacking forces.

● Some GS/GSR FA battalions may follow closely behind lead enveloping forces in 

order to support DS/R units and facilitate their movement; to facilitate attack of deep 

targets; and to take the bulk of the counterfire and SEAD responsibilities off the lead 

DS/R FA battalions.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (9 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Many FA battalions may have o/o missions: DS battalions supporting lead forces 

may become GS if their unit relinquishes its lead role and goes into reserve. R FA 

battalions may support two or more DS FA units in succession as follow-and-assume 

forces take the lead role.

● Planning and rehearing require careful coordination, as R/GSR units may support 

multiple planning efforts. Battalions may need to create additional liaison teams outof-hide to cover liaison responsibilities.

TURNING MOVEMENT

8-09. A turning movement is somewhat similar to envelopment. While a small fixing force 

keeps the enemy in his defensive positions, the main force passes around the enemy 

defenses and secures an objective deep in the enemy’s rear area. Many of the considerations 

for an envelopment apply to a turning movement, with the following additions:

● The unit may use short-destruct SCATMINE, fired by FA supporting the fixing 

force, to keep the enemy in his positions or to channel the direction of his 

withdrawal.

● Depending on the size of the objective area(s), after the friendly force takes and 

secures the objective, DS/R FA battalions may have little secure battlespace over 

which to disperse. They may have difficulty supporting the friendly force from inside 

the newly established battle position. Support may be necessary from GS/GSR units 

within range or DS FA units on other objectives in the area. FA battalions may 

require maneuver support to secure adequate firing positions.

● The turning force may need defensive fires after it seizes its objective. This may 

include the use of EAs involving Copperhead, SEAD for air attacks, and hasty 

SCATMINE.

● CSS may be more difficult. Temporary interdiction of LOCs may occur as the force 

concentrates on consolidation and defense of the objective.

PENETRATION

8-10. In a penetration, the friendly force concentrates firepower and forces to rupture 

defenses along a narrow front to create an assailable flank and/or to gain access to the 

enemy’s rear. Often one maneuver unit will achieve the initial penetration, and following 

units will widen or deepen the penetration or will conduct exploitation or pursuit operations 

as appropriate. A FA battalion supporting a penetration may support both of these forces 

(e.g, a DS battalion supporting a brigade level penetration or a GS FA unit supporting 

division or corps level penetrations). In division and corps penetrations, a DS FA unit may 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (10 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

support the penetrating force or a following force. In large unit penetrations FA battalions 

will frequently have o/o missions. 

8-11. FA units supporting a penetration should consider the following:

● FA battalions may participate in short, intense preparations, coordinated with air 

attacks, focused on the point of desired penetration. This will frequently include fires 

on second and third echelon defensive positions.

● The penetration unit will frequently be the main effort. DS FA units supporting this 

effort can expect one or more reinforcing units. FA units supporting follow-andsupport and/or follow-and-assume forces may establish liaison with forward DS units 

to better coordinate survey, positioning, and fire coordination as following units 

assume the lead.

● Exchange of zones of fire responsibilities between FA units is a critical event when 

maneuver forces change roles and conduct passage of lines. Responsibility for 

EFATs may change from one FA unit to another when mission changes do not occur 

according to plan. Liaison and thorough evaluation of branch/sequel possibilities 

during the MDMP are essential to effective battle handoffs.

● The penetrating force will usually have priority of fires, and multiple FA battalions, 

in various roles, may work together as part of a consolidated counterfire plan directed 

from DIVARTY or Corps Arty. The higher FA HQ may use CSBs extensively to 

better assign counterfire radar responsibilities.

● GS FA units may support SEAD operations for attack helicopter and/or airforce 

attacks to destroy, suppress, or fix enemy reserve forces.

● Fire planning for branches and sequels must be thorough, with adjustments during 

the penetration to account for changing factors.

● FA battalions may participate in massed fires involving groups and series of targets 

designed to widen the penetration or destroy/suppress enemy units on the flanks of 

the penetration.

FRONTAL ATTACK

8-12. Units use the frontal attack to attack the enemy across a wide front, along the most 

direct approaches in an attempt to overwhelm and destroy a weakened enemy force or to fix 

an enemy and restrict his movement.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (11 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Frontal attacks usually present the least force protection concerns for a FA unit 

unless they develop into exploitations or pursuits.

● A frontal attack frequently has a main attack and one or more supporting attacks. FA 

battalions DS to the main attack forces are more likely to receive a reinforcing unit. 

FA support to the main attack force, a follow-and-assume force, or the reserve force 

may evolve into support for a penetration, exploitation, or pursuit. Main force attacks 

may be deeper and thus LOCs more extended.

● The main effort, or the most successful friendly attacking force, will most likely 

draw the most fire and larger enemy counterattacking forces. Anticipate higher 

CSRs, greater attrition rates, and increased requirements for transportation and 

maintenance support.

INFILTRATION

8-13. Infiltration is the covert movement of all or part of the attacking force through enemy 

lines to an objective in the enemy’s rear area. It is a form of maneuver normally used with 

and to support other forms of maneuver. Infantry, cavalry, and reconnaissance forces use 

this form of maneuver more frequently than do armored or mechanized forces.

● An infiltration generally presents FA units the highest force protection risk of the 

five forms of maneuver. In smaller operations, FA units may not move forward with 

infiltrating forces. However, FA units may need to use positions well forward to 

range objectives and deep targets. FA units may need intense counterfire programs to 

reduce the counterfire threat. If FA is infiltrated with maneuver forces the battalion 

may need maneuver forces for security. The S3 and S2 must make maximum use of 

all force protections measures during an infiltration.

● FA units may use FA raid tactics and airmobile movement of light FA.

● Judicious use of FSCMs, carefully planned clearance of fire procedures, and frequent 

force location updates are necessary as an infiltration has increased risk of fratricide 

due to intermingled friendly and enemy forces. Consider using hasty NFAs, or RFAs 

for forces that become cut off while infiltrating. The S3 and battalion FDO must 

ensure the TOC maintains accurate situational awareness (manual and digital), and 

quickly disseminates position updates.

MOVEMENT TO CONTACT/SEARCH AND ATTACK

8-14. A movement to contact operation develops a situation and establishes or regains 

contact. A movement to contact may involve the following actions:

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (12 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Search and Attack. A search and attack is a variant of the movement to contact. It is 

conducted by small, light maneuver units, air cavalry, or air assault forces over large 

areas. A search and attack shares many of the characteristics of an area security 

mission.

● Meeting Engagement. This is a combat action that occurs when a moving force, 

incompletely deployed for combat, collides with and engages an enemy at an 

unexpected time and place.

● Approach March. Units may use an approach march when the enemy’s location is 

known, thus allowing the friendly force to move with greater speed and less physical 

security or dispersion than occurs with use of the traveling movement technique. 

8-15. In supporting a movement to contact or a search and attack type operation, a FA 

battalion should consider some of the following actions:

● Provide immediate fires to leading elements/elements in contact.

● Use priority of fires and quickfire channels.

● Attack deep targets with massed fires to prevent enemy reinforcements.

● Since the enemy situation is usually vague, CFZs on lead elements may be more 

useful than CFFZs.

● Plan for hasty attack contingencies.

● Anticipate frequent moves and hip shoots.

● Keep ammunition uploaded.

● Numerous requests for immediate smoke may occur when contact is established. The 

S3 will need to carefully monitor expenditures. Smoke resupply may need to be put 

on the road as soon as the S3 confirms major contact has begun.

● Plan fires along the route and on the flanks to protect the force.

● S3s must watch for rapid changes in the situation, which can occur more easily in 

developing situations. Hasty FPFs or blocking fires can help lead elements to 

disengage or establish hasty defensive positions.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (13 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Since the intelligence situation is often vague, it may be difficult to knock out enemy 

FA until it begins firing. Thus his initial counterfire capability may be strong. FA 

battalion S3s may need to plan/request additional counterfire support early to ensure 

the enemy does not gain an advantage in the early counterfire battle.

● Air reconnaissance (fixed or rotary-wing) may support the operation. The S2 should 

coordinate rapid communication of enemy FA locations to counterfire planners. The 

S3 and supported FSE may decide to develop some or all of these targets into an oncall counterfire program than firing them as they are acquired.

● Before the maneuver force has established contact, a good time to fire proactive 

counterfire targets is just prior to a friendly FA unit’s next planned move. That way 

the firing unit doesn’t give away a position location that may be needed to support 

forces making contact. The same applies to SEAD or other deep planned targets.

● Place coordinated fire lines (CFLs) well forward of friendly maneuver elements. Plan 

o/o CFLs on phase lines to facilitate rapid shifting as the force moves.

ATTACKS

8-16. The attack differs from a movement to contact in that information on enemy 

dispositions is more developed, which allows the maneuver commander to achieve greater 

synchronization. Attacks are characterized as hasty or deliberate. There is no clear 

distinction between a deliberate and hasty attack. They differ mainly in the level and detail 

known about the enemy. Also, deliberate attacks are characterized by a more extensive 

preparation period prior to execution.

HASTY ATTACK

8-17. The hasty attack is the most common type of attack. Hasty attacks normally result 

from a movement to contact, successful defense, or continuation of a previous attack.

8-18. FA considerations associated with a hasty attack include the following:

● There may not be time for an extensive counterfire program prior to the attack, or the 

servicing of many counterfire targets during a preparation (if one is conducted). 

There will also be less time to collect and develop intelligence on counterfire targets. 

This may result in more reactive counterfire missions and greater reliance on 

counterfire radars.

● The unit may not use a preparation due to limited planning time or the need to 

achieve surprise. Short, intense programs, series, or groups may be used to mass fires 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (14 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

on critical areas or targets sets.

● Anticipate immediate suppression and quick smoke fire missions.

● Expect the rapid shift of massed fires to exploit identified enemy weak points.

● DS/R TOCs must work quickly with the brigade FSE to coordinate fires in support of 

multiple brigade/battalion hasty fire plans. GS/GSR battalions may participate in 

hasty fire plans for forward maneuver units, SEAD for air force or Army aviation 

operations, or deep attacks.

● Low-density ammunition types may be in short supply as a hasty attack often occurs 

as a branch or sequel to an earlier operation. The S3 may want to immediately 

request a certain number of CCLs be brought forward and prepositioned in pickup 

areas while actual ammunition requirements are being determined.

● Targeting officers in R units may temporarily move to assist the brigade FSE and 

maneuver S2 with targeting. This may allow the FSE to concentrate on FS 

coordination and facilitate getting targeting decisions made and passed to firing units 

in the short time available.

● Rehearsal time will be extremely limited. The S3 should use WARNOs to quickly 

disseminate EFATs. DS/R units may only have time for one consolidated rehearsal 

with the combined arms team. A digital rehearsal may not be advisable if there is a 

chance units can’t purge rehearsal information and reconfigure automation systems 

with actual attack information in a timely manner.

● The staff must aggressively seek out the information needed to update and 

disseminate AFATDS guidances. FSEs and FSCOORDs are primarily responsible 

for developing and coordinating the necessary information, however FA battalion 

S3s must drive the process to receive the information as early as possible. Guidance 

on the use of SCATMINE, ICM, and smoke is especially critical.

DELIBERATE ATTACK

8-19. Deliberate attacks normally include high volumes of planned fires, major shaping 

operations, and the forward positioning of logistics. Deliberate attacks follow a distinct 

period of preparation used for extensive reconnaissance, detailed planning, task organization 

of forces, rehearsals, and plan refinement. FA battalion considerations include:

● Deliberate attacks may involve an extensive FA preparation, and/or counterfire and 

SEAD programs if enough ammunition is available. Stockpiled ammunition should 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (15 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

not be brought forward and downloaded too early and should be well protected to 

prevent loss to sabotage or an enemy counterpreparation.

● Long preparations increase the unit’s vulnerability to counterfire. A counterfire 

program shortly before the preparation or during its early phase may reduce the 

threat. The battalion should consider using supplementary firing positions for 

counterfire (or SEAD) programs and preparations. If time and resources permit, units 

should also harden firing positions used for long preparations.

● Plan to expend large amounts of smoke to screen friendly movements and obscure 

enemy observation.

● Expect an emphasis on thorough rehearsals. There may be time for several FA 

battalion level FA/FS only rehearsals before and/or after larger combined arms or 

force FA rehearsals.

● Prepare to support the deception plan before the main attack begins by massing fires 

and firing smoke on forward enemy units not in the area of the main attack.

EXPLOITATION

8-20. Exploitation results when a successful attack presents an opportunity for the friendly 

force to take significant advantage of a weakened, collapsed, or disorganized enemy force. 

Exploitations can have several objectives: secure deep objectives or destroy specific enemy 

forces or functions.

8-21. Units usually conduct an exploitation with two or more missioned maneuver forces. 

The primary force is the lead or direct pressure force, which must quickly destroy or bypass 

any enemy forces in route to the main objective. One or more forces follow the lead unit 

with the missions of follow-and-support and/or follow-and-assume. Depending on the 

situation and the plan, one of the forces may also be tasked to block and defeat a responding 

enemy reserve force.

8-22. A supporting FA battalion commander must understand the battalion’s role. In larger 

exploitation operations (division and higher), the FA battalion may support a brigade-sized 

task force with one or more of the discussed missions. The battalion may need to follow the 

brigade at a distance that allows support, but without interfering with follow-on forces. If 

the advance stalls, battlefield space becomes limited, and hinders shoot-and-scoot tactics .

8-23. In brigade or smaller exploitations, the FA battalion supports battalion level forces 

advancing on a narrower corridor to less depth. It will be more difficult for all FA battalion 

elements to follow, and it may not be necessary for more than one or two firing batteries to 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (16 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

move with forward elements, depending on the size of the corridor, the depth of the 

advance, and the availability of reinforcing fires from MLRS.

8-24. In exploitation and pursuit operations a DS cannon battalion may have one or more 

reinforcing FA units to facilitate the rapid movement, and to provide deep fires. However, 

due to limited battlespace, the reinforcing unit may be an attached MLRS battery, or a 

composite 155mm/MLRS battery. Exploitations often involve o/o missions, to shift 

reinforcing FA from the lead unit to the follow-and-assume unit.

● Place additional emphasis on 6,400-mil capability to support units in contact with 

enemy located out of zone. METT-TC will dictate how to achieve this (one or more 

platoons, a firing battery, etc).

● Plan for frequent moves to keep pace with the target array.

● Keep ammunition uploaded and provide for emergency resupply of POL and 

ammunition.

● Maintain perimeter security since bypassed enemy units will try to break out and 

return to their own lines.

● Target deep to sever escape routes or to prevent reinforcements.

● SCATMINE, crater producing munitions (HE/PD), and dud producing munitions 

(ICM), should be carefully controlled to ensure commander’s guidances are 

followed. These munitions could delay the exploitation if not properly employed. 

They may primarily be used on the flanks, for deep fires, or on positions to be 

bypassed.

● In a rapidly advancing exploitation, a DS or R FA battalion may need two counterfire 

radars to ensure coverage as frequent moves may be required. If the advance is not 

too deep, a DIVARTY or Corps Arty controlled radar could support the initial phase 

and pass targets to a GS unit while the DS/R controlled radar moves to a forward 

position in cleared terrain.

● The S2 should closely monitor intelligence reports for information on enemy FA 

moving in to attack the exploitation.

● Aerial resupply can facilitate CSS efforts and assist in evacuation of wounded 

personnel. Regular medivac helicopters may be best for serious wounded personnel, 

and requirements for this support may increase during pursuit and exploitation 

operations.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (17 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

PURSUIT

8-25. An attack or exploitation frequently evolves into a pursuit, when the enemy tries to 

withdraw to a more defensible location. The friendly force exerts unrelenting pressure to 

keep the enemy from reorganizing and preparing defenses. Usually, a direct pressure force 

applies aggressive attacks against the withdrawing enemy force to prevent unhindered 

withdrawal while another highly mobile friendly force encircles the enemy. The encircling 

force cuts off his retreat and, in coordination with the direct pressure force defeats the 

enemy.

● FA fires may attack targets in the enemy’s rear to slow his withdrawal and to cut off 

avenues for retreat.

■ Plan fires on enemy high-speed avenues of withdrawal.

■ Use FA at canalizing points and hasty river crossings where the enemy cannot 

easily bypass destroyed vehicles. These may be TAIs or NAIs with targeted 

intelligence and TA assets and quickfire links to the FA battalion. FA may 

also provide SEAD at these locations while air assets attack.

■ Destruction of enemy bridging equipment may destroy or degrade his ability 

to cross subsequent water hazards.

■ The FA unit should carefully control SCATMINE, crater producing munitions 

(HE/PD), and dud producing munitions (ICM), to ensure commander’s 

guidances are followed. These munitions could delay friendly pursuit if not 

properly employed.

● FA fires will support the encircling force. If the encircling force is large, (brigade or 

larger) the entire FA battalion may follow and support. For smaller operations, the 

FA battalion may need to provide support from locations behind the direct pressure 

force. If adequate security is provided, it may be possible for one firing battery to 

closely follow the encircling force.

■ Increased smoke and suppressive fires may be required by the encircling force 

to assist them in bypassing elements that cannot be quickly overwhelmed.

■ The encircling force’s flanks and/or rear may be more vulnerable to attack 

that those of the direct pressure force. 

● Massed FA fires assist in maintaining pressure on the enemy, demoralizing him, and 

destroying his will to fight.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (18 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Plan to move as an integrated element of the maneuver force.

● Establish FSCMs along the axis of advance to avoid possible fratricide.

● The pressure from maneuver forces will force enemy FA to move frequently. Use 

CFFZs to quickly target and attack enemy FA when it does stop to shoot. However, 

if the FA with the main force is significantly damaged, disorganized, or kept on the 

move, the major threat may come from longer ranging enemy FA units to the 

enemy’s rear or on the flanks.

● CFZs on the lead force may be more useful than CFFZs on suspected enemy firing 

locations. Because of the nature of an exploitation, enemy fires could come from 

many directions.

● Streamline firing units to displace as quickly as possible.

● Position well forward so the unit can promptly deliver effective fires.

● Prepare for increased reliance on radio retrans and/or relay, since communications 

capabilities decrease with distance.

● Have a contingency plan for linkup operations. Maneuver elements may be airlifted 

to deep objectives to cut off the enemy at choke points.

RESERVES

8-26. Reserve operations frequently involve fast moving attacks into developing situations, 

often to support a branch, sequel, or unanticipated event. FA battalions supporting reserve 

force operations should consider:

● Increased involvement in coordinating and supporting hasty fire plans and making 

last minute changes to existing plans just prior to kick-off.

● One or more o/o missions as the FA unit may be used in a GS or GSR role prior to 

executing a DS or R in support of the reserve force.

● Clearance of fires challenges due to intermingled forces, fluid FLOT changes, 

RFLs/NFAs/RFAs, and unusual maneuver force boundaries.

● Deception fires may be used to mislead the enemy as to the timing and location of a 

counterattack.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (19 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Fast tactical march may be necessary to position the FA battalion.

● Forward passage of lines operations as the reserve moves through forward forces.

SECTION III — FA SUPPORT OF DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

8-27. FA allows the defending maneuver commander to attack the enemy before he moves 

within range of direct fire weapons, to maximize the effectiveness of combined arms kill 

zones and engagement areas, to economize maneuver forces for a planned counterattack and 

to swiftly shift firepower to critical points on the battlefield. FA can attack enemy follow-on 

echelons before they close with his maneuver units, thereby preventing the enemy from 

massing overwhelming firepower and allowing the supported maneuver force to defeat the 

enemy in detail.

ORGANIZATION OF THE DEFENSIVE BATTLEFIELD

8-28. Brigade, division, and corps defensive battlefields are often organized along three 

major functional areas — a security area, a main battle area (MBA), and a sustainment area. 

FA battalions operate in and provide support to forces throughout all three areas.

SECURITY AREA

8-29. Maneuver operations in the security area provide early warning and reaction time, 

deny the enemy reconnaissance, and protect the MBA. Operations in the security area are 

very fluid and fast moving. They often involve covering force operations, screens, guards, 

counter reconnaissance, delays, and passage of lines. FA battalions supporting brigade, 

division, or corps controlled security area operations, should consider the following:

● Maintain superior situational awareness to prevent being overrun or suffering 

significant damage from enemy advance elements that may infiltrate through 

dispersed security area forces.

● Minimize the supplies and equipment taken forward. Consider positioning most of 

the battalion trains farther than normal to the rear.

● FS coordination may require more attention to detail, as security operations 

frequently bring together units that may not regularly operate together. Requirements 

for liaison may increase.

● Increased smoke and SCATMINE may be required to slow the enemy, create kill 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (20 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

zones, and allow security forces to disengage and move to successive defensive 

positions.

● Consider augmenting security area elements with additional observers and 

COLT/Striker teams.

● Plan counter preparation fires. Anticipate high reactive counterfire requirements 

immediately before and after initial enemy contact.

● Since many attacks begin during darkness, security operations may require 

significant coordinated illumination missions.

● Consider the effects of night attack, and enemy use of smoke on Copperhead EFATs.

● Distribution and expenditure of low-density, improved munitions must be carefully 

managed as batteries may be more dispersed. This limits the ability of batteries to 

backup each other’s EFATs.

● Security area operations often culminate in a rearward passage of lines.

MAIN BATTLE AREA

8-30. The battle normally matures in the MBA, which contains the bulk of the maneuver 

force’s combat power. Boundaries usually delineate major unit areas or sectors of 

responsibilities within the MBA. Forces may be arrayed in linear or non-linear (area) 

defensive posture. Units may use task force or brigade size BPs or strongpoints. 

Considerations for FA battalions supporting MBA operations include:

● Thoroughly plan to accept battle handoff from withdrawing security force FA and 

support their passage of lines. Units may use SCATMINE to close lanes behind 

withdrawing forces.

● Thoroughly understand the MBA obstacle plan, which may be extensive, and 

monitor battle progress to better anticipate unplanned requirements for FA fires 

supporting obstacles.

● Anticipate frequent planned and unplanned massed fire missions early, especially in 

EAs, as the force attempts to quickly disrupt, delay, and defeat the attacker with fires.

● GS/GSR MLRS units may occupy positions well forward in the MBA, or just beyond 

it to allow early, intensive counterfires and attrition of enemy FA.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (21 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● FA battalion S3s should closely monitor the battle for signs indicating transitions to 

branches and sequels — counterattacks, retrogrades, withdrawals. Review 

positioning and ammunition considerations.

SUSTAINMENT AREA

8-31. The sustainment (rear) area normally contains the bulk of the CSS capability of the 

force and may include artillery units, uncommitted combat forces, CS elements, and C2 

facilities. FA units may occasionally maneuver and fire from within sustainment areas, 

especially in blunting penetrations in the MBA, in providing security to forces in the 

sustainment area, or when firing missiles against deep targets. See the section on rear area 

operations for additional information on FA fires in the sustainment area.

BASIC FA TASKS IN THE DEFENSE

8-32. Several tactical techniques and considerations are common to FA support of all types 

of defensive operations. These are discussed below.

DEPLOY/CONDUCT MANEUVER 

8-33. Movement during early stages of the defense may often be reactive. The battalion 

may experience increased lateral and rearward movement, frequently unplanned, until the 

friendly maneuver force can regain the initiative, slow the advance and/or better anticipate 

enemy actions. The faster the defense is pushed back, the more congested the battlefield 

becomes as friendly units fall back onto one another. All personnel involved in movement 

planning must understand the impacts of battle tempo on movement.

● FA units supporting brigade and division size counterattacking forces may need to 

make a tactical move as part of the brigade or division movement into attack 

position. Integrate FA movement so that the FA units are in their firing positions in 

time to support the attack.

● Identify potential rearward and lateral chokepoints that may best be circumvented by 

early tactical movement.

● FA units should consider the possibility that civilian exodus/evacuation during 

defensive operations may interfere with tactical movement. Request MP support 

when necessary.

● Coordinate movement plans with the maneuver HQ. Consider the obstacle plan in 

planning movements.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (22 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Conduct aggressive ground reconnaissance, selection, and occupation of position 

(RSOP) whenever the defense is forced into unexpected lateral or rearward moves. 

Other units may be slow to react, which can cause congested battle space. FA units 

may use alternate locations more frequently in the defense.

● Use lateral maneuver to methodically move some FA units away from enemy 

penetrations. This facilitates dispersal of FA units while allowing both continued 

support to forward defenses and massing of fires onto penetrating forces. However, 

logistic support may be complicated if the penetration becomes large enough that 

batteries are widely separated, especially if FA trains are forced to move rearward.

● Controlled sequencing of FA unit tactical maneuvering can facilitate positioning of 

FA units for follow-on missions (such as support of counterattacks). This can reduce 

the need for longer, tactical moves.

● Request advance preparation of all possible PAs that the battalion anticipates falling 

back into.

DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE

● Monitor threat posed by enemy reconnaissance and special purpose troops infiltrating 

into friendly territory in advance of main force.

● Determine potential enemy offensive use of NBC capabilities.

● Identify indicators of enemy massing of FA.

EMPLOY FIRES

Detect and Locate Targets

● Reliance on external TA assets to identify deep targets may increase.

● Anticipate movement of CFFZs based on S2s SITEMP and expected rate of enemy 

advance.

● Higher FA HQ/TA units can assist front line TA assets in identifying and 

reconnoitering TA positions toward the rear.

Deliver Fires

● The FA battalion may participate in targeting and scheduling for larger 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (23 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

counterpreparations. The S3 must anticipate how these fires could impact other 

battalion missions.

● Provide target area survey to ensure accurate placement of FPFs, smoke screens, 

SCATMINE minefields, and fires supporting obstacles.

● Identify survey requirements early and request force FA assistance with survey 

points to the rear. Make maximum use of digital equipment to obtain and disseminate 

all known survey points.

● Deliver massed fires to support — planned kill zones, blunting enemy penetrations, 

counterfire/counterpreparation programs.

● Support rear operations against smaller infiltration forces or larger penetrating forces.

PERFORM LOGISTICS AND CSS 

8-34. In the defense, supply lines are frequently shorter. During rearward movement, the 

battalion has the advantage of falling back into friendly territory. This allows advance 

preparation of many PAs and the battalion can fall back onto personnel, supplies and 

equipment. However, civilian evacuations and enemy fires can interfere with LOCs.

● Preposition ammunition for immediate consumption.

● Plan for surge use of CSS. Maximize benefits of shortened supply lines.

● If the batteries of a battalion become widely dispersed around the flanks of a 

penetration, the battalion may need to run a modified dual trains operation or 

coordinate support through other FA units until normal resupply lines are restored.

● Coordinate for forward triage of wounded personnel and forward repair of damaged 

equipment to return both to combat effectiveness rapidly.

● Consider means for channeling EPWs and refugees to the rear area.

EXERCISE C2

Communicate

● Use internal wire communications when possible.

● Plan redundant communications means.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (24 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

Coordinate Fire Support

● Coordinate additional FA fires when survival or unplanned tactical moves 

temporarily hinder battalion or battery mission support.

● Identify FS requirements for stay-behind forces.

● Ensure commander’s guidances address control of SCATMINE and dud/crater 

producing munitions, especially when general or focused friendly counterattacks are 

expected.

PROTECT THE FORCE

● Harden positions whenever possible.

● Coordinate for engineer support and Class IV materials.

● Plan for use of direct fire in support of battery defenses.

● Use CFZs to increase protection of key friendly units.

● Pay increased attention to OPSEC considerations concerning trash and abandoned 

equipment. Review emergency destruction procedures.

● Anticipate the need for survivability moves after the battalion has provided extended 

and/or intense massed fires (planned or unplanned).

MOBILE DEFENSE

8-35. The mobile defense actively orients on the destruction of the enemy force versus the 

retention of terrain. It employs a combination of fire and maneuver, offense, defense, and 

delay to defeat the enemy attack and destroy the enemy force.

8-36. The main effort and key to the mobile defense is usually a striking force (which is 

not a reserve force). Strike force operations may involve ground, airborne, air assault, 

amphibious, attack helicopter, and CAS operations, to include airmobile FA raids.

8-37. FA battalions play a key role in supporting mobile defense operations. DS/R FA 

battalions will participate in planning for all phases of the mobile defense. In division or 

larger operations, DS/R FA battalions may support one of the main defensive units or the 

strike force unit. In both small and large mobile defenses, GSR and GS units may have a 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (25 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

wide range of support requirements, but often are involved in deep targeting and counterfire. 

Other considerations for FA battalions supporting a mobile defense include:

● Position batteries in depth for continuous support as batteries displace.

● Move batteries that will support the striking force into forward positions immediately 

prior to the attack. Anticipate passage of lines.

● Use positioning methods that maximize force protection in non-linear environments 

(larger groups, positioning with or near other elements, off high-speed approaches).

● Anticipate long range fires to support the striking force. Plan extended range 

ammunition or reinforcing (155mm/MLRS) fires accordingly.

● Anticipate participation in mass fire missions to support the striking force attack.

● Consider requesting infantry or MP support for increased force protection where nonlinear conditions exist.

● Place increased emphasis on mutual support by fire between firing elements.

● Plan for increased use of hasty fire planning techniques, immediate smoke, 

suppressive fires, and target of opportunity minefields.

● Plan for fast-paced mobile warfare, operating frequently on the move or from 

vehicular CPs rather than dismounted shelters or tents.

● Place increased emphasis on monitoring security of LOCs. Reroute CSS and use air 

resupply as more frequently.

● Plan for increased use of RFLs, RFAs, and NFAs, especially during strike force 

operations.

AREA DEFENSE

8-38. Area defense focuses on denying the enemy access to designated terrain or facilities 

for a specific time, rather than outright destruction of the enemy. The area defense is 

normally organized around static defensive positions in depth, seeking to destroy the enemy 

forces with interlocking fires. There are two general forms of maneuver for an area defense 

— forward or in depth.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (26 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

8-39. Forward defense emphasizes maintaining forward positions. FA considerations for a 

forward defense include:

● Hasty fire plans for frequent counter attacks forward of the FEBA.

● Increased reliance on massed fire missions to prevent penetrations.

● Longer, more lethal FPFs and anti-breaching fires to support more static defenses 

(increased HE/ICM/SCATMINE, decreased smoke).

● Increased need to harden and camouflage positions due to decreased movement 

options. Greater reliance on counterfire for force protection.

● Use lateral movement and infantry or MP support in response to enemy penetrations 

as terrain may not allow rearward displacement.

● Increased potential for direct fires, anti-armor teams, and other self-defense 

measures.

● Clearly stated guidelines regarding conditions and approving authority for FA 

survival moves.

● Increased use of wire and communications techniques to reduce electronic 

signatures.

8-40. Defense in depth makes maximum use of the depth of the AO to prevent enemy 

penetrations. FA considerations for a forward defense include:

● Increased use of smoke and SCATMINE to assist disengagements.

● Rearward and lateral displacements to support kill zone operations, followed by 

forward movement to support counterattacks.

● Increased use of vehicular TOC operations, and uploaded, on time delivery of 

ammunition.

● Increased reliance on established triggers for planned FA movements.

● Maximized prior development of successive, rearward positions.

● Maximum use of terrain for alternate and supplementary positions, and of relatively 

small movements in the FLOT for FA moves.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (27 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● CSS positioning and movement plans that consider FLOT movements.

RETROGRADE OPERATIONS

8-41. Considerations for retrograde operations include:

● Develop fires for delay plans early.

● Arrange a withdrawal schedule for the FA with supported units.

● Fire long-range fires from initial positions.

● Ensure continuous, responsive FA support is available for all sectors.

● Reconnoiter routes and positions to the rear, primary and alternates.

● Maintain high mobility throughout the delay.

● Monitor the delaying actions in adjacent sectors.

● Contribute to the obstacle and deception plans with FA fires.

● Consider use of CFZs on critical points or withdrawal routes; for example, rivercrossing points and bridges.

ADDITIONAL FA CONSIDERATIONS FOR DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

8-42. FA battalions may support the following defensive techniques, which may be 

conducted as part of larger defensive operations.

DEFEND IN SECTOR

8-43. This mission is characterized by an extremely fluid tactical situation in which 

friendly and enemy units may often be intermixed. To support the sector defense, the FA 

battalion must:

● Position batteries in depth for continuous support as units displace.

● Position batteries off high-speed avenues of approach.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (28 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Track the battle continuously and keep batteries informed as enemy forces approach.

● Plan for rearward displacement. Coordinate routes and recognition signals with the 

supported maneuver unit.

● Ascertain and disseminate locations of existing and planned obstacles.

● Preposition ammunition for counterpreparations and immediate consumption. Keep 

all other ammunition uploaded for rapid movement.

● Conduct communications reconnaissance for fallback positions and preposition 

retrans capability if necessary.

DEFEND A BATTLE POSITION

8-44. BPs are used to focus and control a maneuver unit’s fires, maneuver, and positioning. 

BPs prescribe a primary direction of maneuver fire by orientation of position. They are often 

placed on well-defined, enemy brigade or larger avenues of approach. The commander 

designates the conditions under which the force can abandon the BP. Frequently, the 

maneuver forces CS and CSS elements may operate outside of the BP.

8-45. A battle position defense is generally less fluid than the sector defense. When 

supporting a defense of a battle position, consider the following:

● Position units/batteries to ensure FS is available to security forces.

● Harden unit/battery positions to the maximum extent possible. Request engineer 

support when it is available.

● Ensure the locations of all friendly obstacles and engagement areas are known and 

plotted in battalion and battery CPs

DEFEND A STRONGPOINT

8-46. A strong point is a heavily fortified BP tied to a natural obstacle or restrictive terrain 

to create an anchor for the defense. It is designed to control key terrain and/or block, fix or 

canalize enemy forces. Strongpoints are prepared for all-around defense and rarely are used 

for armored or mechanized brigade or smaller forces. Strongpoints require extensive 

engineer support.

8-47. Defense of a strongpoint is seldom a stand-alone mission. Normally, the strongpoint 

is a part of a larger operation. The FA considerations for the strongpoint are in addition to 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (29 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

those for the overall mission and may include:

● Position units/batteries so all or at least a substantial majority of available fires can 

be massed in support of the strongpoint.

● Consider use of a quickfire net for the unit manning the strongpoint.

● Position observers to overwatch the strongpoint and for controlling fires if 

communications are lost or the position is overrun.

SECTION IV — FA SUPPORT OF OTHER TACTICAL OPERATIONS

8-48. The operations discussed in this section occur often during combat. Some actions, 

such as passage of lines, crossing water obstacles, relief in place, and amphibious 

operations, are usually one phase of an operation. These operations are common to both the 

offense and the defense.

AMPHIBIOUS OPERATIONS

8-49. An amphibious operation is an attack launched from the sea by naval and landing 

forces embarked in ships or other watercraft for the purpose of landing on a hostile shore. A 

successful amphibious assault achieves surprise and concentrates an overwhelming force at 

a point of enemy weakness. The amphibious operation requires detailed planning, precise 

timing in coordinating CAS, NSFS, FA support, and effective command relationships. A 

naval officer is normally the commander of an amphibious task force (CATF). The landing 

force consists of both ground and air components. The CATF exercises the degree of 

authority over the entire force necessary to ensure success. The responsibility for conduct of 

operations ashore lies with the landing force commander (LFC). Planning and execution of 

the landing and assault are his concern. An amphibious operation is conducted in five 

phases: planning, embarkation, rehearsal, movement and assault.

8-50. The FA battalion is not simply a passenger on a ship-to-shore transport; it is an active 

component of the operation. Its active involvement before, during, and after the movement 

and assault is essential to the success of the landing force. When coastal topography permits, 

FA can be positioned on offshore islands to provide fires to support the assault element. As 

part of the landing party, DS artillery provides close support with direct and indirect fires to 

support the amphibious operation. For additional information refer to JP 3-02, Joint 

Doctrine for Amphibious Operations.

DEPLOY/CONDUCT MANEUVER

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (30 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Complete initial reconnaissance by map and air.

● Advance parties arrive with assault elements to prepare positions.

● Occupy firing positions quickly to support assault forces during the early stage of 

beachhead operations.

● Deploy recovery and/or engineer assets to facilitate FA occupation.

● Coordinate for PAs with the landing force commander.

DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE

● S2s should become familiar with Navy and USMC intelligence assets and 

information and determine channels for requesting intelligence and TA support 

during both pre-operation planning and execution.

● Anytime the FA battalion is operating in proximity of the ocean the S2 should 

maintain awareness of potential threats from enemy naval or marine forces.

EMPLOY FIRES

Detect And Locate Targets

● Coordinate with naval sources for initial targeting data.

● Aerial observers are used extensively during ship-to-shore movement.

● Plan TA handoff from the supporting arms coordination center (SACC) to the LFC.

Deliver Fires

● Obtain ballistic met support from Navy shipboard met stations.

● Coordinate with landing force HQ for available survey information.

● Use hasty survey techniques until survey assets are operational. Send survey ashore 

early to establish and extend a common grid.

● Decentralize tactical and technical FD to allow for flexibility until units are 

established ashore.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (31 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Plan to process interservice calls for fire.

● Use engineers to stabilize gun positions, especially on sandy beaches.

EXERCISE C2

Communicate

● Establish radio as the primary means of communications during ship-to-shore 

movement.

● Plan communications to support aerial observers in ship-based aircraft.

● Exchange of interservice SOIs is imperative.

Coordinate Fire Support

● Provide movement plans for early landing and employment of FA units.

● Coordinate fires for the landing force with the SACC prior to landing. Once ashore, 

the LFC assumes responsibility for coordinating all fires.

● Plan SEAD in support of the landing.

● Ensure logistical support planning is an integral part of the FSP.

PERFORM LOGISTICS AND CSS

● Plan for high ammunition expenditure during the initial landing stages.

● Protect equipment and ammunition from salt water.

● Plan for resupply and evacuation by ship, plane or helicopter.

● Allocate vehicle recovery assets to help in resupply operations.

● Coordinate supply and/or logistic activities with naval logistic agencies.

● Cross-load to ensure availability of FA assets ashore.

PROTECT THE FORCE

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (32 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Disperse FA throughout the assault elements during movement ashore, however, unit 

integrity must be maintained.

● Equip personnel with life vests and other life support equipment.

AIR ASSAULT OPERATIONS

8-51. Division (or higher) HQ usually directs the formation of an air assault task force 

(AATF). The task force is designed for a specific mission and will be tailored for the 

specific mission. As an example, it may consist of an infantry battalion, an aviation 

company, and a FA battery. Overall command goes to the AATF commander. Air assault 

operations are used to seize deep objectives and to conduct penetration, covering force, or 

surveillance operations. They can operate in urban areas, jungles, and mountains and are 

used to reinforce threatened sectors.

8-52. FA participation in air assault operations is characterized by maximum 

decentralization of C2. Firing units move to quickly provide FA fires to attack deep targets, 

to bypass enemy concentrations or untrafficable terrain, and to facilitate future operations. 

FA units can expect to conduct SEAD, landing zone (LZ) preparations, and artillery raids. 

Artillery raids involve the rapid movement of artillery assets by air into position to attack a 

high-priority target. A FA raid normally requires operations across the FLOT, is short in 

duration, and does not involve sustained operations. Detailed planning, surprise, and speed 

of execution are key factors for success. FM 90-4 provides more information on air assault 

operations.

DEPLOY/CONDUCT MANEUVER

● Coordinate load plans to ensure critical elements are cross-loaded to prevent 

catastrophic loss in the event of downed aircraft.

● Conduct reconnaissance by map and air initially.

● Plan for air or ground displacement.

DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE

● Imagery can aid in identifying potential firing points, the general lay of the land, and 

major routes in the area.

● The supported maneuver unit S2 and force FA S2 can assist in templating FA and 

non-FA enemy forces in the air assault area and in identifying primary threats.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (33 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

EMPLOY FIRES

Detect And Locate Targets

● Assign or attach FOs to accompany leading elements of the assault force to observe 

and adjust SEAD fires and execute the FSP.

● Coordinate with air reconnaissance and aerial scouts for target identification and 

attack.

Deliver Fires

● Execute fires to support the air movement plan under procedural or positive control 

(procedural control is the preferred method):

■ Initiate and terminate procedural-control of fires according to a strict time 

schedule.

■ Positive-control of fires relies on phase lines, air control points and/or other 

control measures to initiate, shift, and terminate fires.

● Coordinate for met in the new PA.

● Utilize the NSG and PLGR, or use hasty survey techniques until PADS is brought 

forward.

● Plan SEAD fires to support reinforcement, resupply, and medivac for the FA 

battalion as necessary.

● Give priority to intelligence collection in air assault AO to ensure accurate location 

of EAD.

● Support overall SEAD efforts and ensure priorities for SEAD, relative to other fires, 

are well understood by the TOC and battery FDCs.

● Plan fires for false insertions in support of the deception plan.

EXERCISE C2

Communicate

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (34 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Use C2 aircraft and coordinate retrans as necessary during the movement to ensure 

continuous communication between the FSE controlling fires and the assets 

providing those fires.

● Plan and coordinate visual signals (flares and colored smoke).

● Coordinate SOIs between air assault forces and supporting forces.

Coordinate Fire Support

● Coordinate short and intense SEAD fires along the flight route(s) to aid aircraft 

flying past areas of known or suspected enemy positions.

● Consider all SEAD assets: EW, FA, CAS, and attack helicopters.

● Plan to lift and shift fires, ACAs (formal and informal), and other FSCMs as needed 

to coincide with arrival times of aircraft formations.

● Ensure use of FA or mortar smoke on or near LZs meets commander’s guidances and 

does not interfere with air or ground operations.

PERFORM LOGISTICS AND CSS

● Ensure adequate ammunition is available for the assault force artillery.

● Plan, prioritize, and synchronize resupply of all CSS, primarily Class V.

● Evacuate casualties by air.

PROTECT THE FORCE

● Consider enemy air, ground, and artillery threats when planning moves because units 

are most vulnerable in pickup zones (PZs) and LZs.

● Consider the effects of munitions in the LZ or PZ (ICM — duds, HE/PD — 

cratering) that may make the area unusable.

AIRBORNE OPERATIONS

8-53. Airborne operations are joint operations conducted between the Army and Air Force. 

The Air Force provides airlift, CAS, and aerial resupply for airborne ground forces. 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (35 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

Airborne units represent a contingency force that can be deployed worldwide on short 

notice.

8-54. FA units are normally attached to maneuver units for airborne operations (e.g, FA 

battery attached to a maneuver battalion). Parent FA units will assume control of 

subordinate units upon arrival in the airhead and will then establish standard command 

relationships. During brigade airborne operations, the FA battalion will provide an assault 

command post (ACP) to C2 batteries. FM 90-26, Airborne Operations, provides more 

information on airborne operations.

DEPLOY/CONDUCT MANEUVER

● Conduct initial reconnaissance by map or air.

● Plan displacement using air assets.

● Consider decentralized control for unit movement.

DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE

● Aerial photography can be extremely helpful in identifying potential firing points, 

better understanding the general lay of the land, and major routes in the area (from 

friendly and enemy perspectives).

● The supported maneuver unit S2 and force FA S2 may be able to assist in templating 

FA and non-FA enemy forces in the air assault area.

EMPLOY FIRES

Detect And Locate Targets

● Use aerial observers (Army aviation and Air Force AC-130).

● Deploy Firefinder radars as soon as practical after the initial assault.

Deliver Fires

● Plan noncratering munitions on airfields.

● Mass all available indirect fire systems, to include mortars.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (36 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Ensure all units have a 6,400-mil capability.

● Prepare to use hasty survey techniques in the drop zone.

● Establish a common grid for FA and mortars as soon as possible.

● Coordinate met for the AO.

EXERCISE C2

Communicate

● Initially use primarily FM communications.

● Communicate by TACSAT, when available.

● Establish AM radio communications for use over long distances.

● Use visual signals and messengers for short-distance communications.

Coordinate Fire Support

● Rely on aerial photography when maps are not available.

● Ensure positive clearance of all fires (that is, silence is not consent), which is 

essential during initial stages of the operation.

PERFORM LOGISTICS AND CSS

● Resupply requires careful planning and coordination, especially Class V, as airborne 

units have limited CSS capability. Supplies are usually air-dropped or air-landed 

(containerized delivery or mass supply).

● Inspect weapons and equipment for damage after an airdrop.

● Conduct medical evacuation by air.

PROTECT THE FORCE

● Position units based on enemy ground, air, and artillery threats, as well as, the 

amount of space provided by the expanding airhead.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (37 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Be prepared to provide 6,400-mil firing capability if necessary.

● Position units for mutual defense.

● Prepare unit defense taking maximum advantage of available intelligence and aerial 

photographs.

MILITARY OPERATIONS IN URBAN TERRAIN

8-55. Military operations in urban terrain (MOUT) are characterized by extreme limitations 

on freedom to maneuver. Both attacking and defending forces must use available cover and 

concealment offered by urban areas, but both are equally hampered by reduced visibility. 

While the defender normally has the advantage, operations are slow and deliberate and 

small-unit operations predominate. The defender enjoys superior protection as well as 

concealment and covered routes of movement. The attacker can isolate and bypass certain 

areas; but he is forced to fight into other, well-defended areas.

8-56. FA units can use positions in villages and small towns to great advantage. Barns and 

other large buildings offer complete concealment of weapons and equipment. Normally, 

decentralization is required. Detailed orders and TSOPs are necessary due to decreased 

communication ranges and extended frontages for firing units. FA techniques of assault fire 

and direct fire may be required more often on urban terrain than elsewhere. FM 90-10, 

Military Operations on Urbanized Terrain (MOUT) (How to Fight), and FM 6-20-40

contain additional information on MOUT.

DEPLOY/CONDUCT MANEUVER

● Ensure PAs are identified that will support emplacement since there is a 

predominance of concrete surfaces in urban areas.

● Anticipate the possibility that street rubble may hamper movement.

● Anticipate increased movements to overcome obstruction/dead space.

● Ensure howitzer positions allow for high-angle firing.

● Position FA on the edge of the urban area, if possible.

● Provide multiple routes of escape from the position.

● Select howitzer positions that allow direct fire capability.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (38 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE

● Closely coordinate targeting efforts to ensure all protected areas and FSCMs are 

identified and posted to automated and manual systems.

● Determine the status and disposition (friendly, enemy, neutral) of the indigenous 

population and whether or not the enemy is using the urban population for cover.

EMPLOY FIRES

Detect And Locate Targets

● Identify size and location of dead space (where indirect fires cannot reach). Dead 

space is generally five times the height of buildings for low-angle fire and one-half 

the height of buildings for high-angle fire.

● Plan radar coverage to take advantage of the increase in high-angle fires. Radars lose 

effectiveness if positioned too close behind buildings.

Deliver Fires

● Careful use of VT is required to avoid premature detonation.

● Use caution in the adjustment of fires. Rounds can be lost behind building or other 

structures.

● The battalion may support more small-scale battles than normal. This involves 

frequent shifting of fires from one mission to the next. The battalion may need to 

shift ongoing missions between firing units if battle movements or adjustments move 

the fires into the dead space of the initial firing unit.

● More frequently, FDCs must account for bursting radius, delivery errors, and 

standard deviations. Reference cards, TSOPs, and rehearsals are critical in ensuring 

that clearance of fires doesn’t become a slow, cumbersome process.

● Commanders may require close control of WP since it may create unwanted fires and 

smoke.

● Use fuze delay to penetrate fortifications and buildings.

● Plan for increased use of high-angle fires (cannon units).

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (39 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Consider an increase in ammunition expenditure, especially if other FS assets are not 

available.

● To provide maximum flexibility in MOUT’s diverse situations, the reinforcing FA 

unit may be a composite heavy/light/MLRS force.

● Use precision-guided munitions to minimize rubbling.

● Consider the limitations of laser designators in urban terrain, such as:

■ The difficulty in maintaining a continuous laser track on moving targets 

because of structure interference.

■ Obstructions may limit the battalion’s ability to mass fires.

■ The presence of highly reflective surfaces, such as windows that may refract 

laser energy and/or pose a hazard to friendly troops.

■ Presence of highly absorptive surfaces such as open windows or tunnels, 

which may degrade designator effectiveness.

■ It may be hard to position designators to ensure Angle T does not exceed 800 

mils.

■ The need to plan for an increase in hasty survey since conventional survey is 

hampered by decreased line of sight.

■ Determining accurate locations by map spot can be difficult.

■ The need for multiple SCPs. Anticipate survey difficulties due to obstructions, 

rubbling, and electro-magnetic interference (e.g, metal, powerlines, 

transformers)

EXERCISE C2

Communicate

● Anticipate reduction of radio ranges due to line of sight problems.

● Increase use of wire, messenger and visual signals.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (40 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Route wire through sewers and buildings for protection.

● Plan to remote antennas to upper floors to increase their range. Do not position 

antennas on rooftops since they will be vulnerable to fires and possibly give away 

unit locations.

● Locate generators near existing walls outside occupied buildings.

● Use existing civilian telephone systems for unsecured communications, when 

possible.

Coordinate Fire Support

● Avoid collateral damage to civilian populations, if possible.

● Well-defined priorities of fire are extremely important in MOUT.

● Consider use of aerial observers.

● Consider placing observers on overlooking terrain outside the city and using external 

routes for observer movement.

● FSCOORDs and FSOs will encounter more detailed rules of engagement and lists of 

protected or restricted sites and areas during MOUT. FSCM usage may increase.

● Identify potentially hazardous industrial sites that may require restrictive FSCMs.

● Consider underground dangers, gas, water, and power lines. A natural gas explosion 

or electrical fire in the vicinity of a protected structure, civilians, or friendly troops 

can become an ROE violation. 

● Coordinate FA fires carefully due to the close proximity of friendly and enemy units 

(e.g, use of a numbering system for each building may aid in coordinating fires 

within close proximity of friendly troops.

PERFORM LOGISTICS AND CSS

● Anticipate an increased use of certain munitions (delay and concrete piercing fuzes, 

HE, or smoke).

● Use several smaller resupply convoys if movement is restricted.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (41 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Anticipate difficulty moving large CSS vehicles inside firing positions.

● Use locally available power sources and supplies, when available.

● Plan for increased time for resupply actions.

● Consider use of prestocked supplies.

PROTECT THE FORCE

● Use existing structures as hardened positions. Ensure stability of building structure 

prior to occupation. Shock waves may cause weak walls and ceilings to collapse.

● Plan to increase OPs and listening posts (LPs), as terrain allows threat forces to 

infiltrate and get closer to artillery positions.

● Plan foot traffic routes to minimize exposure from observation and sniper fires from 

tall buildings.

● Consider using supplemental positions for battery defense.

● Avoid obvious positions if possible (e.g, parks and schoolyards).

● Establish guidance/drills for key situations (e.g, snipers and minefields).

● Consider unseen dangers (e.g, underground gas, water, or electrical lines).

ENCIRCLED FORCES

8-57. FA battalions may support the breakout of encircled forces as part of the encircled 

force, or from outside the encirclement. When the FA battalion is part of the encircled force 

it should:

● Quickly identify all FA/FS/TA assets within the encirclement and direct or 

participate in the reorganization. Ensure centralized control where possible and 

establish a force FA HQ if necessary.

● Complete 6,400-mil coverage.

● Retain the capability to mass fires where practical.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (42 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Plan for aerial resupply of ammunition and critical items.

● Identify FA outside the encirclement that can range the FA battalion’s zone of fire 

and coordinate support if possible.

● Reorganize FS communications to minimize overloading of these nets.

● Stress survival techniques.

● Identify appropriate FSCMs, such as a RFA or a RFL.

● Use CZs for Firefinder radars in both the encircled force and the main force areas to 

prevent fratricide.

8-58. The FA should be neither the first nor the last unit out of the perimeter during a 

breakout of an encirclement. If more than one firing element is within the perimeter, 

withdrawal should be phased to maximize the time FA fires are available. Consider external 

FA support if available. Maintain unit integrity at platoon or battery level if at all possible. 

The FA commander must keep in contact with both the lead element commander and the 

forces remaining in the perimeter. Moving units must anticipate hip shoots.

8-59. During linkup, the FA commander should:

● Integrate fires with the battle plans and establish FSCMs.

● Position weapons to support the relieving force.

● Plan for subsequent actions to include new missions for the FA.

● Establish and exchange sensor zones for Firefinder radars.

PASSAGE OF LINES

Forward Passage

8-60. During an offensive passage of lines, responsibility for FA fires passes from the 

stationary force to the passing force at the same time control is passed to the maneuver units. 

The stationary FA force may be attached to the passing FA force or it may be ordered to 

reinforce the passing FA force from its present positions, until the passing force has moved 

out of range.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (43 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

8-61. During a forward passage, the FA commander should:

● Establish liaison and communications with the stationary FA HQ.

● Obtain and review the passage plans of the supported force.

● Determine security requirements.

● Obtain available target lists and fire plans from the stationary force.

● Plan and review PAs and routes.

● Review possible enemy observation capabilities in the area.

● Review FSCMs in effect and needed.

● Consider resupply operations for the future.

● Coordinate elements that are needed forward.

● Exchange survey data with the stationary force FA SPCE.

● Exchange Firefinder zone data, particularly CFFZs and ATIZs.

Rearward Passage

8-62. Withdrawal actions in the defense often involve a rearward passage of lines. This 

often occurs when a covering force withdraws behind the FEBA. FA units with each force 

exchange liaison and critical information as early as possible. They coordinate fire plans to 

synchronize and maximize their combined firepower. This includes the transfer of FA 

support responsibilities within the maneuver unit’s sector. This transfer usually coincides 

with the passing of maneuver control. The withdrawing FA commander should:

● Exchange FA fire plans.

● Establish communications requirements.

● Coordinate clearance of PAs and routes, if needed.

● Coordinate resupply, if appropriate.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (44 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Exchange survey data in the area with the passing FA SPCE.

● Establish and exchange recognition signals with the stationary force.

RELIEF IN PLACE

8-63. During a relief in place, the FA commander should:

● Establish liaison and communications between FA units.

● Provide existing fire plans to the incoming FA unit. Exchange LNOs.

● Establish procedures for the relief.

● Establish the contribution of the outgoing FA.

8-64. Normally, the FA units will not be relieved at the same time as the maneuver forces. 

The change of FA responsibilities is as agreed upon by the two FA commanders unless 

otherwise directed.

8-65. The outgoing force passes fire plans to the incoming force so those plans can be 

continued. Both FA commanders should:

● Exchange SOI Information.

● Prepare and disseminate fire plans to support the incoming force.

● Disseminate specific TSOP items of the incoming force.

● Disseminate the current target list to the incoming force.

● Plan fires to support or emplace a barrier or obstacle, as necessary.

● Plan smoke to screen friendly movements.

● Support the deception plan.

RIVER CROSSING OPERATIONS

8-66. During an offensive river crossing, FA units should consider:

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (45 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Aerial observers can provide surveillance beyond the river depending on availability 

and visibility. Smoke may limit ground observation.

● Consider using CFZs, with well thought out cueing techniques, on the river-crossing 

site, associated assembly areas, and air defenses.

● Fire series and groups to neutralize the bridgehead area and then to isolate it. Deep 

fires can also prevent or delay reinforcements.

● Positioning should facilitate rapid crossing.

● Ammunition expenditures, especially smoke and illuminating projectiles, will be 

high during a deliberate crossing. Consider aerial resupply initially to the far bank to 

offset congested crossing sites.

● Maintaining communications is critical when units are split on the two banks of the 

river crossing.

● DS FA units should displace to far bank positions as soon as the maneuver unit 

seizes first-phase objectives on the far bank and secure FA positions are available. 

Other FA units must cross the river before their supported maneuver units move out 

of range. FA crossings require well-planned integration into the overall combined 

arms movement plan.

● Survey assets should cross as soon as possible. When a survey team equipped with 

PADS crosses by river barge or boat, ensure plans allocate time for it to do a 10-

minute zero-velocity update just before crossing. If the crossing will take longer than 

10 minutes (total of loading, transport, and unloading times), then a conventional 

team must put in a starting control point on the far shore.

8-67. During a rearward river crossing, under pressure, consider:

● Anticipate fires to the flanks on enemy crossing sites and infiltrating forces involved 

in enemy flanking efforts.

● Consider using CFZs, with well thought out cueing techniques, on the river-crossing 

site, associated assembly areas, and air defenses.

● Use CFFZs and templating to locate enemy FA that attempts to interdict friendly 

routes of withdrawal, reinforcement, and resupply.

● Plan for increased close fires (FPFs, smoke, and SCATMINE) and massed fire 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (46 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

missions to assist disengagement and withdrawal of the last maneuver elements 

across the river.

● Cross FA as soon as possible, while maintaining mission capability, to avoid 

entrapment and/or congestion.

● If the maneuver force plans to establish defensive positions on the far side, and 

stabilize the FLOT, consider engineer support to harden FA and FO/COLT/Striker 

positions on the far side.

● DS FA units may be able to move into hardened positions vacated by R/GSR/GS 

units. However, consider the risks that the previous fires may have compromised the 

positions. 

SECURITY OPERATIONS

8-68. Units conduct security operations to provide early warning of enemy operations, to 

provide the force being protected with time and space within which to react, and to develop 

the situation for the protected force. The four forms of security operations are cover, guard, 

screen, and area security, which respectively contain increasing levels of combat power and 

security.

COVERING FORCE OPERATIONS

8-69. A covering force operation is usually a division or higher-level operation involving 

cavalry regiments and other forces specifically intended for these types of operations. The 

covering force is a tactically self-contained security force operating a considerable distance 

to the front or rear of a moving or stationary force. Offensive covering force operations 

emphasize reconnaissance along the main body’s axis of advance and attempt to destroy the 

enemy’s reconnaissance and security forces, determine enemy force dispositions, identify 

gaps or weaknesses that the main body can exploit, and to defeat and destroy forces as 

directed. Defensive covering operations focus on counter reconnaissance. They attempt to 

prevent the main body from being surprised, to defeat the enemy’s reconnaissance and 

advance elements, determine the size and direction of the enemy’s main attack, and delay 

and disorganize enemy forces in order to allow the main body more time to prepare its 

defense. Covering force operations are frequently fast-paced operations involving extended 

forces operating over long distances.

8-70. A FA battalion may be part of a larger covering force operation where a FA brigade, 

DIVARTY, or Corps Arty functions as the force FA HQ. The battalion may be DS to one of 

the maneuver forces or may be in a R, GSR, or GS role. Or the battalion may be DS to, and 

serve as force FA HQ of the covering force. In either case, the FA battalion may have one or 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (47 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:29 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

more howitzer batteries from a cavalry regiment attached under battalion control. FA units 

involved in covering force operations should consider the following:

● Locate the enemy and provide immediately responsive fires to leading 

elements/elements in contact.

● Use priority of fires and quickfire channels.

● Attack deep targets with massed fires to prevent enemy reinforcements.

● Plan for hasty attack contingencies.

● Anticipate frequent moves and hip shoots.

● Keep ammunition uploaded.

● Plan for employment of hasty smoke and/or illumination, and increased suppressive 

fires.

● Plan to use SCATMINE to delay enemy formations and employ Copperhead for 

HPTs.

● Prepare for the use of permissive, o/o FSCMs and for rapidly moving FLOTs 

requiring frequent position updates.

● Plan for a passage of lines. Review passage of lines procedures.

● Position supporting FA forward. Consider future missions in selecting FA positions 

when the covering force operation nears completion.

SCREEN

8-71. Screen describes a force whose primary task is to observe, identify, and report 

information. A screen force fights only in self-protection. The screening force maintains 

surveillance, provides early warning to the main body, destroys enemy reconnaissance 

elements within its capability, and impedes and harasses the enemy. Indirect fires are a 

significant means of impeding and harassing the enemy. FA planning and execution in 

support of a screen mission is similar to that for a defend in sector mission.

GUARD

8-72. Guard describes a force whose primary task is to protect the main force by fighting to 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (48 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

gain time, while also observing and reporting information, and to prevent enemy ground 

observation of and direct fire against the main body by reconnoitering, attacking, defending, 

and delaying. A guard force normally operates within the range of the main body's indirect 

fire weapons. The FA battalion supporting this operation, plans, prepares, and executes this 

mission as it would for a movement to contact or other offensive operations.

AREA SECURITY

8-73. Units conduct area security operations to protect friendly forces, installations, and 

actions in a specific area. Area security preserves the force commander’s freedom to move 

his reserves, position FS assets, conduct C2 operations, and provide for sustainment 

operations. Area security actions, which may be offensive or defensive in nature, could 

include area reconnaissance; rear operations; and security of designated personnel, 

equipment, facilities, and critical points. Applications of area security missions are convoy 

and route security. FS considerations, for area security, are similar to those identified to 

support rear area operations.

REAR AREA OPERATIONS

8-74. Rear operations (sustainment area operations) are those activities from a maneuver 

unit’s rear boundary forward to the rear boundaries of subordinates forces, which are 

conducted to ensure the unit’s freedom of maneuver and continuity of operations, including 

continuity of sustainment and C2. The unit must synchronize the rear operations functions 

of terrain management, security, sustainment, and movement in consonance with the higher 

HQ commander's concept and intent.

8-75. A DS FA battalion must plan fires throughout the supported brigade’s AO, to include 

defense for the BSA (e.g, base clusters). The S1, S4, or HHSB commander (or SB 

commander) will normally function as the FSO for the BSA. He is responsible for planning 

fires and forwarding them to the brigade FSE. As the rear area FSO, he should coordinate 

other FS assets through the brigade FSE as well. The battalion S3 should consider the 

following when developing plans to execute FA fires in support of a BSA: PA selection, 

nonstandard mission assignment, o/o mission of R FA.

8-76. While the division and corps rear FSEs are the primary planners and coordinators of 

division and corps rear area fires, R, GSR, and GS FA battalion may participate in the 

process. They may assist in coordinating fire plans with nearby CSS units or host nation 

military, paramilitary, or civil authorities. They may also provide call for fire training to key 

personnel, especially those responsible for base cluster defenses.

8-77. Three levels of response to rear area threats serve as guides for planning rear area 

operations. These levels focus on the nature of the friendly actions needed to defeat the 

threat.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (49 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Level I. Smaller threats that the base or base cluster self-defense measures can 

defeat.

● Level II. Threats beyond the capability of the base or base cluster self-defenses but 

that relatively small response forces (e.g, MPs) can defeat.

● Level III. Threats that require commitment of a combined arms tactical combat force 

(TCF) to defeat them. 

8-78. Commanders will generally reserve FA fires for Level III threats or in supporting a 

MP force engaging a Level II threat in an area where collateral damage is reduced. FA units 

should also consider the following factors.

DEPLOY/CONDUCT MOVEMENT

● Rear FSOs can assist FA battalions with terrain management issues.

● Level III threats may cause significant traffic as CSS units and civilians move away 

from the threat. FA battalions may need to request priority for movement and MP 

assistance (if available).

DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE

● The S2 should closely monitor developing situations in the rear to better anticipate 

potential battalion involvement and determine the nature and extent of enemy rear 

area threats.

EMPLOY FIRES

● Because FA units are not usually given rear area support as a primary mission, 

responding FA units must quickly review assigned EFATs and other tasks to 

determine the impact when given rear area missions. If backup plans are not adequate 

the unit should notify FSEs and force FA HQ so the EFATs can be reassigned or 

terminated.

● Ammunition restrictions on SCATMINE and dud producing munitions may limit FA 

to HE, except for major penetrations. Illumination may require high-angle fire to 

allow safe firing. Consider fire hazards.

EXERCISE C2

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (50 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

Communications

● Communication with the division or corps rear FSE may be difficult due to distances. 

A FA battalion may need to relay fire planning and/or fire coordination information 

through another FA battalion.

● Nonstandard communications arrangements may be necessary. CSS units may not 

have digital equipment that interfaces with FA systems. Host nation civil or 

paramilitary force may not have compatible radios.

Fire Support Coordination

● Commander’s guidance, FSCMs, and ROE for FA fires in rear areas are generally 

restrictive in nature (RFAs, NFAs).

● Commanders may task FA battalion’s in rear areas to provide FOs or FSOs to assist 

with rear area operations. Fire mission requests in rear areas may frequently involve 

untrained observers.

● A FA battalion may participate in development of a hasty fire plan with the FSO of a 

responding TCF, MPs, and other response forces. Consider using RFLs to control 

fires between converging friendly forces.

PROTECT THE FORCE

● FA units requiring force protection fires may request attack helicopters and slower 

fixed-wing CAS support when available.

LINKUP OPERATIONS

8-79. Linkup operations join two friendly forces. Both forces may be moving toward one 

another or one may be stationary. Often, a linkup operation requires a passage of lines. 

When the linkup is made, the linkup force may join the stationary force or it may pass 

through or around and continue the attack. The controlling HQ of both forces establishes the 

command relationship between the two forces and the responsibilities for each. It also 

establishes the control measures. FA considerations include:

● As the linkup nears completion, consider future operations in positioning of battalion 

elements.

● Plan for the increased use of o/o RFLs and CFLs.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (51 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Place increased emphasis on maintaining updated position and FSCM locations in 

both automated and manual systems.

● Anticipate blocking fires to prevent trapped enemy forces from escaping the linking 

forces.

● Ensure clearance of fires procedures address all contingencies and FA forces. 

GS/GSR units may need to clear fires with both linking forces.

● Exchange targeting and communications information, triggers, quickfire channels, 

laser designation codes, and other essential items.

● Exchange recognition signals and disseminate to all personnel.

● FA units supporting linking forces should consider exchanging liaison. If the linkup 

involves a stationary and moving force, the moving force FA should provide liaison 

to the stationary force FA

BREACHING OPERATIONS

8-80. Breaching is a synchronized combined-arms operation under the control of a 

maneuver commander. Breaching operations begin when friendly forces employ suppressive 

fires and end when battle handover has occurred between a unit conducting the breaching 

operation and follow-on forces. FA considerations in supporting breaching operations 

include:

● Anticipate high volumes of suppressive (HE/VT, DPICM) and obscuration 

ammunitions. Develop CCLs to support breaching EFATs and schedule delivery to 

maximize ammunition resupply operations.

● Provide fires during all phases of the breaching — suppress, obscure, secure, reduce 

(SOSR). See FM 6-20-40 for more information on SOSR.

● Backup plans are especially critical to maintaining suppressive and obscuration fires 

while the breaching team is exposed.

● Unplanned breaching operations may require that the S3 quickly review ammunition 

status for impact on other EFATs.

● Position a FO or FIST member forward to coordinate fires for the breaching team. 

Plan for observers in depth.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (52 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Primary and backup FA firing units must understand the primary and backup 

triggering plans to shift fires to the assault force .

● If Copperhead is used against armored vehicles protecting the obstacle site, it may be 

better executed early, as preparatory fires, to prevent interference to lasing from the 

obscuration fires.

● Anticipate SEAD fires if air assets participate in the operation.

● Consider using SCATMINE to prevent reinforcement or counterattack. Ensure it 

does not interfere with the breaching or the follow-on assault.

ARTILLERY RAID OPERATIONS

8-81. An artillery raid is a type of spoiling attack that uses FA as its primary attack 

mechanism. Raid missions support the higher HQ objectives by sending firing elements 

forward to engage enemy targets that are currently beyond the maximum range of available 

FA weapons. Raids may occur in conjunction with a large ground attack that seizes the 

terrain needed for the firing unit, with a small force that creates a relatively small moving 

pocket, or even without a significant ground force (if the threat is low). Light FA units may 

conduct airmobile FA raids. An artillery raid is frequently a platoon or battery size 

operation, but can involve an entire battalion.

PROCEDURES

Unit Selection

8-82. If higher HQ does not specify the firing element, the battalion S3 determines which 

unit/firing element will conduct the raid mission based on:

● Weapon system availability (desired effects on target).

● Ammunition availability (number and type of rounds).

● Location of firing element (proximity to firing points).

● Tactical situation.

Raid Briefing

8-83. For cross FLOT operations, the battalion HQ will conduct a raid briefing with the 

battery commander of the selected battery. If available, the commander of the maneuver 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (53 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

security force should be present during the briefing in order to affect coordination. Due to 

time constraints or travel distance involved, a face-to-face meeting with the maneuver 

commander may not be feasible. For raids to be conducted behind the FLOT with minimal 

external assistance, raid missions may be passed via FM radio (voice or digital). At a 

minimum, the battalion commander or S3 will brief:

● SITUATION. Friendly, enemy, attachments, and detachments.

● MISSION. Who, what, when, where, and why to include the size of the element to 

conduct raid, method of control, and target/FP grids.

● EXECUTION.

Behind the FLOT operation:

■ Route to operations area (OPAREA).

■ SP/CP/RP locations.

■ Firing point OPAREA.

■ Rally point after mission.

■ Target grids.

■ Firing window or TOT.

■ Number/Type rounds per target.

■ Number of howitzers/launchers authorized.

■ Call signs and frequencies.

■ FSCMs.

■ Abort authority and abort code word.

■ Emergency destruction (ED) criteria.

■ FS assets available.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (54 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

Cross FLOT operation. In addition to the elements involved in a behind the FLOT 

operation, the following must be considered:

■ Link up-point with maneuver element guides.

■ Force protection (ADA, EW, FS assets, escort).

■ Passage lane/passage point.

■ Procedures/Signals for passage of lines.

■ Maneuver call signs and frequencies.

■ Maneuver commander name and rank.

● SERVICE SUPPORT.

■ Maintenance support/contact team requirements.

■ Survey support available.

■ Reload requirements.

■ Amount of ammunition to be brought forward.

■ Refuel support.

● COMMAND AND SIGNAL.

■ Retrans location and frequency.

■ C2 (e.g, FDC vehicle, OE254).

Execution Of The Raid

8-84. The following procedures identify responsibilities and outline steps for the actual 

execution of the raid:

● Firing units will carry forward only the number of vehicles necessary to accomplish 

the mission as designated by battalion. (Depending on the importance of the target, 

one additional howitzer/launcher will be brought forward and laid on the target in 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (55 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

case of technical/ mechanical difficulties). Weapons platforms with automated fire 

control systems will move forward with the mission in their system and a hardcopy 

of the mission in case manual fire mission processing is required.

● Firing unit(s) arrive at the link-up point.

● The OIC/NCOIC of the raid party will brief the maneuver unit commander or 

representative at link up point or via FM communications as directed.

● Once the brief is conducted, the leader of the raid unit or a maneuver escort will 

bring the firing elements to the link-up points.

● Security force will move forward and clear the route to the FP.

● If possible, report link-up, movement/checkpoints, and in position to BOC. If 

necessary, a vehicle will be brought forward with the raid element to act as a relay 

between the raid element and the controlling raid HQ if constant communications is 

required. If not, the communication will be maintained between the supported unit 

HQ, the battalion TOC, and the raid OIC. The raid OIC must be prepared to accept 

target updates prior to the designated time.

● Once the maneuver security force has cleared the route and OPAREA, the firing 

element will be called forward to the firing points.

● The mission(s) is (are) fired. Units will report shot on each target and rounds 

complete to the controlling HQ.

● Firing elements will then withdraw to a pre-designated rally point.

● If the firing unit was briefed that it was to perform a follow-on mission, the unit 

would proceed to the next location and fire the mission. MLRS launchers may need 

to reload between missions. Upon rounds complete, the firing element will withdraw 

to the rally point.

● Battalion will provide abort criteria.

CHECKLISTS

8-85. The use of checklists can assist raid planners. These can be developed as part of the 

unit TSOP or battle books. An example of a battalion level checklist for an artillery raid 

operation is provided in the following table.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (56 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

Table 8-1. Artillery Raid Planning Checklist (Example)

ARTILLERY RAID PLANNING CHECKLIST (BATTALION)

ITEM ACTIVITY

1 Verify raid order contains all pertinent data.

2 If not specified by higher HQ, what size FA unit is necessary for successful mission?

3 Who is the raid force commander (maneuver? FA?).

4 What force protection will support the raid force?

■ Maneuver Force?

■ FS Plan?

■ Air Defense? (attack helicopter/CAS Spt)

■ Reconnaissance and Security?

■ Radar?

■ Observers?

5 What are the ABORT criteria?

6 What frequencies will be used to C2 the raid?

7 Any updates on enemy/friendly situation that impact on raid?

8 What is the route (does it require clearance by a maneuver commander)?

9 Passage of Lines.

■ Linkup Grid and Time?

■ Routes?

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (57 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

■ Maneuver Graphics?

■ Engineer Plan (mobility/countermobility)?

■ Air Defense Plan and Coverage?

■ FS and Observation Plan?

■ C2 (Raid Battle Handover Line)?

■ MEDEVAC Support?

■ Maintenance Support?

10 What survey support is optimal/adequate for raid force?

11 Is met available/valid?

12 Will ammunition need to be brought forward? How much?

13 What is the reload plan (approved location for reload operations)? Need to conduct reload to 

complete the mission?

14 Will the Firing Point require clearance by a maneuver force? Will this be in addition to the 

security force?

15 What is the link-up grid for coordinating with the raid force commander? When will link-up 

take place?

16 What is the name, frequency, and call sign of the raid force commander/security force?

17 Notify the raid BC of the raid mission and time/place of briefing.

18 Plot firing positions, passage lanes/points/ routes to OPAREA.

19 Determine/verify firing elements, # of howitzers/launchers and C2 structure.

20 Develop timetable (SP, TOT).

21 Brief the BC of the raid element battery.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (58 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

22 Track planning and rehearsal schedule coordinated by battery.

23 Monitor & track progress of raid

SECTION V — FA SUPPORT OF STABILITY OPERATIONS AND SUPPORT OPERATIONS

8-86. The FA battalion may support a wide variety of stability operations and support 

operations that may or may not involve traditional combat. Because stability operations and 

support operations involve significant political considerations, and are often multinational, 

joint force operations, the FA battalion leadership should understand the nature of the joint, 

multinational, civil, and military relationships, and the cultures of our allies and the host 

nation. The FA battalion’s success relies in large part on the legitimacy provided by 

international agreements, in the battalion’s ability to abide by established agreements and 

ROE, and, often, in the unit’s ability to remain neutral while executing assigned tasks.

8-87. Stability operations and support operations may encompass activities where FA 

organizations are employed in areas outside the US in support of operations in 

nontraditional, noncombatant roles without primary weapons. Disaster relief and 

humanitarian assistance and security are examples. The FA battalion’s communications 

infrastructure, coordination skills, and inherent mobility can enhance and assist a 

command’s overall coordination and liaison effort. Potential responsibilities include 

enhancing effective C2, convoy operations, local security operations, and liaison in support 

of civil-military affairs.

STABILITY OPERATIONS

8-88. Stability operations involve the application of military power to influence the political 

environment, facilitate diplomacy, and interrupt specified illegal activities. They include 

both developmental and coercive actions. Developmental actions enhance a government’s 

willingness and ability to care for its people. Coercive actions apply carefully prescribed, 

limited force and the threat of force to achieve objectives. The types of stability operations 

that a FA battalion may participate in include, but are not limited to the following:

● Peace operations (peacekeeping, peace enforcement, peacemaking and 

peacebuilding).

● Foreign Internal Defense.

● Security assistance.

● Humanitarian and civil assistance.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (59 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Support to insurgencies.

● Support to counterdrug operations.

● Combating terrorism (counterterrorism and antiterrorism).

● Noncombatant evacuation operations.

● Arms control.

● Show of force.

8-89. While each operation is unique, seven broad imperatives help forces develop 

concepts and schemes for executing stability operations:

● Stress force protection.

● Emphasize information operations.

● Maximize interagency, joint, and multinational cooperation.

● Apply force selectively and discriminately.

● Display the capability to apply force in a nonthreatening manner. Demonstrate 

strength without provoking a potential adversary to act.

● Understand the potential for disproportionate consequences of individual and small 

unit actions.

● Act decisively to prevent escalation.

FA SUPPORT OF STABILITY OPERATIONS

DEPLOY/CONDUCT MANEUVER

● Select hard surface roads whenever possible to minimize the risk of encountering 

mines and booby traps.

● Coordinate cleared and approved routes before departure.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (60 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Maps may not be accurate. Aerial reconnaissance may facilitate movement planning.

● Helicopters can quickly emplace advance party teams.

● Closely monitor vehicle locations as they move throughout the AO. Ensure convoy 

leaders report departures, maintain communications during movements, and report 

arrival at the destinations.

● Keep vehicles on hard surfaced roads if stopped. Do not "herringbone" off the road 

unless a credible air or indirect fire threat exists.

DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE

● The S2 should obtain a clear understanding of the intelligence/TA assets available 

and the channels for requesting and reporting intelligence information.

● The S2 should receive a thorough intelligence briefing on the military, political, and 

social factors that may impact on the mission.

● Develop an intelligence collection plan that addresses both military and civilian 

elements.

● The S2/S3, in coordination with appropriate FSEs, should develop or obtain a list of 

protected/restricted areas that are or may be protected with FSCMs. This is necessary 

in targeting, and can identify potential "sanctuary" areas the enemy may try to exploit 

to his advantage.

EMPLOY FIRES

Detect And Locate Targets

● Integrate all information sources to identify potential targets.

● Coordinate TA assets to locate potential targets; potentially in a 6,400 mil capability.

● Develop an observation plan that includes priority intelligence requirements, 

addresses both military and civilian activity, is objective oriented, and focuses on 

monitoring critical areas.

● Ensure accurate target locations by using 1:25,000 or 1:12,500 scale maps for greater 

accuracy.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (61 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

Deliver Fires

● Plan and execute fires within the confines of established ROE and commander’s 

guidances. Plan to provide defensive fires to protect the force, and offensive fires as 

required by the nature of the operation.

● Plan to provide fires in a dispersed, non-linear environment, using battery or platoon 

size firebases.

● Plan to provide fires to support convoys as they move through the AO.

● Control the use of hasty survey techniques.

● When required, use precision munitions and centralized fire control procedures to 

minimize collateral damage.

● Plan and rehearse clearance of fire drills. Clearance of fires may include coordination 

with designated civilian agencies.

● Plan for 6,400-mil capability since a well-defined front line is unlikely.

PERFORM LOGISTICS AND CSS

● The S4 should identify all joint, multinational, and host nation sources of supply and 

any guidelines, especially to use of host nation resources.

● Plan for surge use of specific classes of CSS, increased consumption of Class I and 

VII, and increased use of Class IV barrier material.

● Ensure mine detectors are operational and soldiers trained in their use.

● Consider means for channeling refugees to collection points.

EXERCISE C2

Communicate

● The S6 should review anticipated tactical situations and EFATs for unique 

communication and automation requirements involving joint and multinational 

forces.

● The dispersed nature of the operations may necessitate additional retrans capability. 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (62 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

Consider security for retrans teams.

● Plan to use unsecured communications with allied and NATO forces.

● Plan to use local telephone networks, if available.

Coordinate Fire Support

● Identify and develop/obtain a list of locations that have political, religious, or other 

significant considerations that must be accounted for during FS planning and 

development of commander’s guidances.

● Identify ROE.

● Ensure targeting, clearance of fire procedures, and use of FSCMs minimize collateral 

damage and adhere to ROE.

● Identify unique liaison requirements with joint, multinational, and/or civilian 

agencies and units.

● Identify information operations requirements, assign tasks, and prepare plans as 

appropriate.

● Consider distribution of the FSP down to the lowest level possible — to include 

checkpoints, patrols, and logistics convoys.

PROTECT THE FORCE

● Position units to protect them from potential enemy indirect and direct harassing 

fires, and allow mutually supporting fires.

● Harden positions whenever possible.

● Consider using CFZs on key friendly forces to facilitate counterfire against attacking 

enemy indirect fire assets.

● Train all soldiers on booby trap and mine identification, likely locations, and marking 

procedures.

● Ensure an advanced party clears PAs of mines prior to the main body arriving. 

Initially clear lanes for critical vehicles to move into position (e.g, FDC, howitzers.). 

Clear noncritical areas as time permits.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (63 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Use proper reporting procedures when mines are located. A good method is using the 

acronym HARMM:

■ Halt all movement.

■ Avoid disturbing the mine(s).

■ Report the location of the mine(s).

■ Mark the location.

■ Move out of the area.

● Develop and practice battle drills for responding to mounted and dismounted mine 

strikes.

● Establish a secure perimeter to guard against ground attacks, displaced civilians 

entering the perimeter, and thieves.

● Ensure vehicles never travel alone.

SUPPORT OPERATIONS

8-90. Support operations provide essential supplies and services to assist designated groups. 

They are conducted to help foreign and civil authorities respond to crises and include action 

to save or protect lives, reduce suffering, recover essential infrastructure, and improve 

quality of life. The types of support operations that a FA battalion may participate in 

include, but are not limited to the following:

● Humanitarian assistance in dealing with starvation, epidemics, and similar 

emergencies.

● Environmental assistance in responding to floods, earthquakes, and other natural or 

manmade disasters.

8-91. Although each support operation is unique, seven broad imperatives generally guide 

involvement:

● Secure the force, equipment, and supplies.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (64 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Provide essential support to the largest number of people.

● Hand over assistance operations to civilian agencies as soon as feasible.

● Establish measures of success.

● Conduct robust information operations.

● Ensure operations conform to legal requirements.

FA SUPPORT OF SUPPORT OPERATIONS

8-92. If support operations involve the potential use of force or traditional combat, many or 

all of the considerations applicable to stability operations will also be appropriate to support 

operations. However, support operations usually involve reduced potential for use of 

significant force.

DEPLOY/CONDUCT MANEUVER

● Anticipate dispersed operations and small unit positions. Terrain management may 

involve both military and civilian agencies.

● Road conditions may be poor, especially on frequently used routes. Develop a 

prioritized list of engineer support requirements.

● Consider refugee and military/civilian emergency vehicle traffic .

DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE

● The FA battalion TOC can assist civil authorities with collection and dissemination 

of vital information, requirements, and status reports.

● Ensure the lack of a threat does not make unit soldiers complacent to OPSEC 

procedures. Adversarial intelligence collection activities may occur. Conduct a 

thorough OPSEC review to identify issues. Brief all soldiers on OPSEC precautions 

and reporting procedures.

● Establish close coordination with MPs, the Criminal Investigation Division, and 

other military and civil authorities to monitor threat levels and criminal activities that 

may impact battalion operations. These include theft of military supplies and 

equipment, black-market activities, racial/sexual/ethnic assaults, and similar issues.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (65 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

PERFORM LOGISTICS AND CSS

● The battalion must plan, coordinate, and provide CSS on a dual support basis — 

direct mission-related CSS, and normal battalion-oriented CSS.

● Plan for dispersed maintenance and recovery operations.

● Identify available host nation and multinational support.

● Some relief convoy operations may involve both military and civilian agencies and 

vehicles. This requires careful coordination and security.

EXERCISE C2

● Unit communications equipment may be multi-tasked, assisting with support 

operations as well as in coordinating the battalion’s operations.

PROTECT THE FORCE

● Conduct detailed, comprehensive risk analysis to identify all potential hazards and 

unique situations encountered in support operations.

● Disease and sanitary precautions may be higher force protection priorities than 

normal. Pre-deployment medical reviews should ensure all soldiers are inoculated 

and free of major health problems. In country, preventative measures include proper 

positioning of forces, good sanitary practices, and guidelines on interaction with the 

host nation populace and multinational force personnel.

SECTION VI — CLIMATE AND TERRAIN CONSIDERATIONS

8-93. Both climate and terrain can vary widely between different operational areas, and even 

within the same operational area. FA battalions frequently adjust their TTP to account for 

these differences. Some of the climate and terrain factors that FA battalions should consider 

are discussed in the following paragraphs.

NIGHT OPERATIONS

8-94. Effective operations during hours of darkness are essential in combat. The basic 

ingredient of successful offensive or defensive night operations is the confidence of the 

individual soldier in his ability and equipment in the night environment. This confidence 

stems from detailed planning and effective training. The adverse effects of darkness require 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (66 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

a change in techniques and procedures. However, it is important to note that darkness 

imposes limitations equally on enemy forces.

8-95. The objectives of night operations are to:

● Achieve surprise and avoid losses that might be incurred in daylight over the same 

terrain.

● Compensate for advantages held by a numerically superior enemy who has air 

superiority.

● Retain the initiative by defeating enemy night operations.

● Exploit our technological advantage at night over a less sophisticated enemy.

8-96. Planning considerations for the basic FA tasks in support of night operations are 

discussed in the following paragraphs.

DEPLOY/CONDUCT MANEUVER

● Plan and rehearse RSOP procedures for night occupation.

● Plan for increased movement times at night.

● Plan for the increased use of traffic control points to ensure the correct direction of 

travel is maintained during movement.

● Guide every vehicle into position according to the track plan.

● Erect tentage before darkness and check for light leaks.

● Install generators and light sets before darkness.

DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE

● Scout high traffic routes during daytime to identify potential ambush sites and 

intersections or turns where vehicles and convoys may become misdirected or where 

large vehicles may have difficulty traversing.

● Identify locations of MP, maneuver, and other friendly force checkpoints and patrols. 

Also identify host nation checkpoints. Verify clearance procedures in place to ensure 

there are no misunderstandings in the dark.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (67 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

EMPLOY FIRES

Detect And Locate Targets

● Limited sound flash observations by FOs, COLTs, and Strikers may be possible to 

supplement radar.

● Provide OPs with night vision devices.

Deliver Fires

● Adjust FPFs and danger close targets during daylight, if possible.

● Establish procedures for marking the end of the orienting line (EOL) and the 

orienting station (OS).

● During periods of relatively low activity and stable fronts consider firing from 

supplementary positions at night to reduce night survival moves of the entire battery.

● Review commander’s guidances on use of illumination and smoke.

● Anticipate requests for illumination in the rear when enemy infiltration risk is 

moderate to high. Coordinate FSCMs and clearance of fire procedures. Obtain 

current friendly force locations.

● Plan for the increased time to perform hasty survey techniques.

PERFORM LOGISTICS AND CSS

● Plan resupply operations at night to decrease vulnerability.

● Ensure adequate amounts of illuminating and smoke projectiles are on hand and in 

the proper locations.

● Perform noisy operations while the unit is firing. Firing will mask the noise of heavy 

vehicular traffic and material handling equipment.

EXERCISE C2

Communicate

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (68 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Install and check communications equipment prior to darkness.

● Inspect operation of wire/LAN systems prior to darkness.

Coordinate Fire Support

● Determine the specific area in which the commander desires to use smoke to degrade 

enemy night vision capabilities. Ensure it does not degrade friendly night vision 

capabilities.

● Develop and distribute illumination and smoke plans early enough that the cannon 

units can deliver and prepare as much of the ammunition as possible during daylight 

hours.

PROTECT THE FORCE

● Plan and adjust on-call FPFs around unit positions prior to darkness.

● Establish direct fire sectors prior to darkness.

● Stress light and noise discipline.

● Include self-illumination in the unit defense plan.

COLD WEATHER OPERATIONS

8-97. Cold weather operations involve unique weather and climate considerations. Summer 

has long periods of daylight; while winter has long nights, deep snow, and extreme cold. 

Spring thaws turn low-lying areas into a morass of mud, which severely degrades surface 

mobility. Weather phenomena such as whiteouts and greyouts cause loss of depth 

perception, which increases the hazards of driving. Ice fogs often form over troop 

concentrations and disclose their location. In extreme cold, metal becomes brittle, hydraulic 

oil thickens and parts breakage rates increase. Rates of fire for indirect fire weapons 

decrease as a result of heavily clothed gun crews, cold weapons, and fogged lenses on fire 

control devices. The enemy force is equally affected by these extreme conditions of subzero 

weather and snow.

8-98. Winterization of equipment is critical for sustaining combat effectiveness. 

Indoctrination, training, and acclimatization of individual soldiers in northern region 

environments are essential first steps to overcoming these adversities. Thorough planning 

and preparation will help a FA unit fulfill its mission while facing the extremes of this 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (69 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

environment. In winter, when daylight is shorter, maximize its availability for preparations, 

reconnaissance, rehearsals, and other key activities. Refer to FM 31-70, Basic Cold Weather 

Manual, and FM 31-71, Northern Operations, for more information on cold weather 

operations.

DEPLOY/CONDUCT MANEUVER

● Consider route reconnaissance by both ground and air.

● Determine ice thickness and load-bearing before crossing frozen lakes and rivers.

● Determine PAs prior to movement since frozen, snow-covered terrain may limit the 

number of available positions.

● Anticipate icy road conditions and blocked routes in mountain passes during cold 

weather. Conduct prior reconnaissance.

● Hot springs exist in some cold weather locations. They may freeze during extreme 

cold, but will weaken and thaw before other areas,.

● Plan for increased movement times due to local conditions.

● Use air assets to position artillery weapons, if available.

● Train soldiers to operate equipment on ice and snow.

● Enforce track plans in the PA.

DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE

● Increase air reconnaissance, especially when adverse road conditions.

● Photographic reconnaissance may provide valuable information on possible enemy 

FA locations, especially after fresh snow.

EMPLOY FIRES

Detect And Locate Targets

● Provide amber filters for binoculars and observation devices to help reduce the 

incidence of snow blindness.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (70 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Anticipate degradation of radar operations due to extreme cold weather

● Update meteorology data when abrupt temperature changes occur.

Deliver Fires

● Plan for increased use of airburst munitions. HE-PD, HE-delay, ICM, and 

SCATMINE are ineffective in deep snow and frozen ground. Snow smothers at least 

40 percent of the blast from these munitions.

● Use WP as marking rounds; however, phosphorus may burn undetected in the snow 

for extended periods and create a hazard to friendly troops.

● Plan to use VT fuzes for cold weather operations. However, snow and ice may cause 

premature detonation. Also, extreme cold causes an increase in the dud rate among 

VT fuzes. Use the new improved VT fuze (M732) to reduce this problem.

● Plan for decreased rates of fire as a result of heavily clothed gun crews, cold weapons 

and fogged lenses on fire control devices.

● Place additional emphasis on monitoring propellant temperatures.

● Plan on an increase in the use of high-burst or radar registrations and met plus 

velocity error (VE).

PERFORM LOGISTICS AND CSS

● Plan for decreased logistical resupply due to reduced mobility and difficulty in 

determining grid locations.

● Ensure supply convoys travel in close columns during whiteout conditions and 

prolonged darkness.

● Plan for an increase in parts breakage as metal becomes brittle in extremely cold 

temperatures.

● Plan maximum use of aerial resupply.

● Order larger quantities of POL due to an increased use of personnel heaters and 

vehicle warm-up operations.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (71 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Check vehicle winterization often to ensure continued protection.

● Exercise weapon recoil systems often between fire missions.

● Adhere to preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) as prescribed for 

cold weather operations.

EXERCISE C2

Communicate

● Plan for decreased communications effectiveness.

● Replace batteries, both dry-cell and nickel-cadmium, more frequently since they 

become less effective with the decrease in temperature.

● Cover the mouthpieces of microphones to prevent frost from forming.

● Plan for difficulty in establishing a good electrical ground in permafrost and deep 

snow.

● Keep antennas free of snow and ice.

● Check TMs for radios and power sources for special precautions during operation in 

extremely cold climates.

● Ensure retrans teams are well supplied to endure longer periods without resupply 

during inclement weather. Monitor storms that could cause them to become snowedin in high altitude or mountainous cold weather regions.

Coordinate Fire Support

● Plan for limited ground mobility of artillery weapons and ammunition supply 

vehicles and increased time preparing for operation.

● Frequently relieve observers in exposed, extremely cold static positions.

● Establish a marking system for friendly locations.

PROTECT THE FORCE

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (72 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Provide firing areas with firing platform stability.

● Avoid emplacement in avalanche-prone areas. The sound produced by firing can 

cause an avalanche.

● Maintain seasonal camouflage for use by units.

● Train soldiers on the prevention of cold weather injuries.

● Provide warming areas for soldier use.

DESERT OPERATIONS

8-99. Military operations in desert regions are characterized by rapid, highly mobile warfare 

conducted over great distances. These fast-moving battles, with long-range visibility, are 

more suited to mechanized rather than light forces. Deserts offer little life support. Extreme 

weather conditions in the desert make combat operations demanding on both equipment and 

personnel.

8-100. Active deception techniques play key roles in the concentration and dispersal of FA 

units and security takes on added importance. Long-range engagements are common due to 

terrain, weather, and fields of fire. However, heat waves, mirages, and sandstorms can 

hamper ground observation. Air observation is highly effective in this environment; 

however, the absence of prominent landmarks in some areas degrades this capability. Also 

the lack of trees and hills makes aircraft more vulnerable to enemy air defenses. FM 90-3, 

Desert Operations, provides more information on desert operations.

DEPLOY/CONDUCT MANEUVER

● Position radars to provide the maximum screening crest.

● Consider the effect of sand and dust on visibility and convoy speeds.

● Position howitzers in defilade.

● Avoid predictable FA positions.

DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE

● Friendly ground observation is enhanced but additional early warning is required due 

to rapid movement rates. Quickly disseminate notifications of enemy penetrations or 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (73 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

infiltrations to affected FA units.

EMPLOY FIRES

Detect And Locate Targets

● Anticipate terrain association and navigation errors that increase target location 

errors.

● Use G/VLLDs to perform target area survey.

● Emplace and camouflage radars and equipment at night, if possible.

● Exploit situational cueing.

● Anticipate increased survivability moves.

● Use PADS to establish OP location and directional reference.

Deliver Fires

● Request met support for transitional periods because of abrupt weather changes 

(especially temperature) in the morning and evening.

● Consider range requirements for meteorology support.

● Plan to provide survey control over extended distances.

● Plan for increase in hasty survey. Consideration should include:

■ Graphic resection if maps are available and accurate.

■ Simultaneous observation.

■ P-2 reticle and Polaris-Kochab use.

■ Use of PADS to determine direction and GPS for location in establishing 

SCPs.

● Consider the location of SCPs and their affect on providing control.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (74 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Stress uniform storage and frequent measuring of propellant temperature due to high 

surface temperature effect on propellants.

PERFORM LOGISTICS AND CSS

● Plan for extended supply lines.

● Plan for increased water consumption.

● Plan for increased vehicle overheating, electrical component breakdown, and faster 

tire wear-out.

● Stockpile filters, coolants, lubricants, cleaning materials, and tires.

● Train soldiers in the prevention of heat and cold weather injuries.

● Plan for night and/or aerial resupply. However, dust clouds from helicopters must not 

give away PAs.

● Check vehicles batteries often and maintain adequate supplies of distilled water. 

Electrolyte in wet-cell batteries evaporates quickly.

● Perform frequent PMCS on vehicles, equipment, and weapons.

EXERCISE C2

Communicate

● Consider increased ranges for radio communications.

● Plan for early emplacement of retrans assets.

● Protect radio equipment. Failure rates increase due to blowing sand and large 

temperature variances.

Coordinate Fire Support

● Anticipate rapid enemy movement.

● Provide SEAD fires in support of CAS and attack helicopters.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (75 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Prepare to support forces dispersed over wide expanses of terrain.

PROTECT THE FORCE

● Anticipate more heat and burn cases and snake and insect bite victims.

● Use the terrain to provide depth and dispersion.

● Use wadis for concealment.

● Use desert camouflage nets.

● Request attachment of anti-tank teams if contact with enemy armor or mechanized 

forces is anticipated.

● Employ crew-served weapons to maximize effective ranges.

JUNGLE OPERATIONS

8-101. Jungle operations involve a greater, but not exclusive, reliance on air assets for 

mobility, observation, and resupply of engaged forces. Surface mobility (wheeled and 

tracked) is limited. Light forces are best suited for jungle operations. They can be inserted 

and extracted by helicopter. High temperatures and humidity take their toll on equipment 

and soldiers. Frequent jungle operations include ambushes, raids, and small unit patrols. 

They seek to attack and destroy enemy forces, their bases, and their supplies.

8-102. Close in fighting is common in jungle terrain. FS may be limited to high-angle 

indirect fires and CAS. If the friendly force has a substantial advantage in FS, the enemy 

will most likely try to establish and maintain extremely close contact. This limits the 

effectiveness of FA because of the fratricide danger. For the FA battalion commander, the 

challenges are varied and many. His greatest frustration may be in trying to mass the 

weapons of the battalion because frequently firing units are dispersed over large areas in 

order to support small-unit operations. FA considerations for operations in jungle 

environments are discussed in the following paragraphs. FM 90-5, Jungle Operations, 

provides more information on jungle operations

DEPLOY/CONDUCT MANEUVER

● Select positions accessible by roads, when available.

● Plan to reposition using air assets.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (76 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Anticipate difficulty in mobility for wheeled and tracked vehicles.

● Anticipate weather conditions and its effects on mobility.

● Plan equipment loads to maximize available air assets.

DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE

● Consider increased ground reconnaissance in and around FA PAs and routes and 

security assistance from MP and maneuver units.

● The S2 should look for signs that the enemy is using cleared locations as firing areas 

while using nearby cover for hide areas.

EMPLOY FIRES

Detect And Locate Targets

● Ensure safety considerations are stressed since map reading (self-location, target 

location and friendly unit location) is difficult.

● Plan for increase use of Firefinder radar for counterfire missions.

● Use ground surveillance radars and remote sensors, if available.

Deliver Fires

● Understand the following ammunition considerations:

■ HE-delay penetrates the treetops and splinters the trees, creating additional 

fragmentation.

■ Smoke has limited effectiveness in dense vegetation.

■ WP is effective as a marking round. Consider using an airburst WP round as 

the initial round in adjustment.

● Plan for a reduction in illumination effects because of vegetation.

● Anticipate increased hasty survey techniques as SCPs may be scarce and difficult to 

establish.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (77 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Use creeping fires in heavy vegetation.

PERFORM LOGISTICS AND CSS

● Anticipate increased maintenance problems due to moisture and rust.

● Expect ammunition expenditure to be high and plan accordingly.

● Use air as the primary means of resupply, when possible.

EXERCISE C2

Communicate

● Plan for communication degradation in a triple-canopy jungle.

● Ensure antenna cables and connectors, as well as power and telephone cables, are off 

the ground. This minimizes the effects of moisture, fungus and insects.

● Elevate antennas above the jungle canopy when possible.

● Coordinate for aerial observers or airborne C2 platforms to act as relay stations, 

when possible.

● Use directional antennas to increase the range of FM communications.

● Plan the use of retrans assets.

Coordinate Fire Support

● Plan to fire high-angle missions.

● Plan for an increase in requests for SEAD.

PROTECT THE FORCE

● Position units for mutual defense, especially when thick vegetation increases 

vulnerability to ground attack.

● Plan and adjust for mutual support.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (78 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Prepare to use anti-personnel mines (Claymores) and direct fire cannon munitions 

(105mm, Beehive) for immediate use while in position.

● Establish local all-around security.

● Select alternate and supplemental positions.

● Plan for increased health hazards, disease, and snake and insect bites.

MOUNTAIN OPERATIONS

8-103. Mountain operations include many of the same problems found in cold weather 

regions. Mountainous areas typically have rugged, compartmented terrain with steep slopes 

and treacherous mobility. Weather may span the entire spectrum from extreme cold with ice 

and snow in winter to extreme heat during the summer. In mountain operations, the 

advantages favor the defender, and the focal point is the battle to control the high ground. 

Infantry units are the most suitable force for this type of combat, particularly when properly 

supported. Also, the terrain promotes isolated battles that make C2 difficult. Small-unit 

commanders often operate semi-independently

DEPLOY/CONDUCT MANEUVER

● Position FA in defilade to increase their survivability. But beware of snow and rock 

slides in these positions.

● Give SP units priority in PA selection due to terrain limitations.

● Maximize helicopter airlift for movement, especially for elements such as retrans 

sites, observers, and PADs.

● Plan for air reconnaissance of routes and positions, when possible.

● On narrow mountain roads, turnaround locations for large vehicles and those pulling 

trailers may be scarce. Locate potential turnaround points during route 

reconnaissance.

● Plan for increased hasty survey. Place special emphasis on accurate altitude.

DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE

● Increase use of aerial reconnaissance and intelligence platforms and internal and 

external intelligence reports to compensate for reduced visibility and ground 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (79 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

reconnaissance.

● Placed increased emphasis on terrain considerations (such as use of defilade) in 

templating enemy FA.

● Don’t underestimate the enemy’s ability to position mortars in difficult terrain. 

Range capabilities are more useful in templating.

EMPLOY FIRES

Detect And Locate Targets

● Place FOs on high ground to maximize visibility; however they may need to be 

staggered at different levels if low-level clouds are possible.

● Anticipate poor visibility due to clouds, fog, or snow blindness.

● Employ Firefinder radar to detect high-angle fires.

● Position Firefinder radar to maximize terrain masking.

● Plan for ground surveillance radars and remote sensors, if available.

Deliver Fires

● Choose shell/fuze combinations based on terrain, e.g, HE-PD, HE-delay and ICM are 

ineffective in snow; but are highly effective in rocky terrain. Also, consider slope or 

unevenness of the terrain and the adverse impact on both SCATMINE and ICM 

effectiveness:

■ RAAMS and ADAM must stabilize within 30 seconds of impact for the 

submunitions to arm.

■ Uneven terrain (plowed ground, jumbled rocks and so forth) may keep 

ADAM trip wires from deploying properly.

■ DPICM does not function if the angle of impact is greater than 60o.

● Anticipate difficulty in adjusting fires due to the mountainous terrain.

● Anticipate increased fire high-angle fires, and high-angle registration.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (80 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Plan high-angle fires with airburst munitions on reverse slopes of hills and 

mountains.

● Use SCATMINE to restrict routes, especially at chokepoints.

● Anticipate difficulty in transfer of firing data due to the wide variance in altitude of 

firing units.

● Plan frequent met updates due to rapidly changing weather conditions.

EXERCISE C2

Communicate

● Consider the masking effects of mountains or hills on communications.

● Use directional antennas to increase range.

● Maximize line-of-sight radio communications.

● Plan retrans capabilities, to include helicopter radio relay. Airlift retrans units onto 

hilltops, when possible.

PERFORM LOGISTICS AND CSS

● Use helicopter and airdrop resupply when appropriate.

● Plan for increased maintenance on vehicles and equipment due to the increased strain 

caused by terrain and weather.

● Plan for additional cold weather contingency items required for sustained unit 

operations in mountainous terrain.

PROTECT THE FORCE

● Coordinate attack helicopter or air force support for the FA battalion as the 

mountains may reduce the use of mutually supporting fires.

● Request MP ground reconnaissance of routes, especially at chokepoints.

● Consider the danger of flash flooding in dry river beds or flood plains.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (81 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Chptr 8 FA Operations

● Consider using open column convoy techniques through mountain passes and other 

restrictive terrain.

● Maximize use of terrain for cover and concealment to compensate for limited 

hardening potential. Position units in defilade.

● Position OPs, LPs, and crew-served weapons to enhance survivability by providing 

early warning and defensive fires.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/ch8.htm (82 of 82) [1/7/2002 1:39:30 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

RDL

Homepage

Table of

Contents

Document

Information

Download

Instructions

Appendix A

Field Artillery Support Plan

This appendix discusses the format and content of a formal FASP, written in the fiveparagraph field order format as an appendix to a FS annex of a maneuver OPORD. Section I

provides basic guidance on the content for the various parts and paragraphs of a FASP while 

Section II provides an example of a FASP. See Chapter Four for general information about 

the FASP.

SECTION I — FIELD ARTILLERY SUPPORT PLAN FORMAT

A-01. The FASP is the FA battalion commander’s tactical plan for employing the fires of 

all FA assets under his span of responsibility. For a DS battalion this means the FASP must 

address all FA supporting the supported maneuver force. It also means that the battalion 

must develop the FASP as an integral supporting document to the maneuver plan, usually as 

an appendix to the FS annex of the maneuver OPORD. R, GSR, and GS battalions usually 

prepare a stand-alone FASP focused on the battalion’s assets and mission execution.

A-02. The FASP explains the FA missions and tasks and provides the FA battalion 

commander’s guidance, intent, and concept of FA operations. The FASP assigns 

responsibilities to subordinate and supporting elements, focusing on all tasks necessary to 

execute all EFATs. The FASP must address maneuver/FA commander guidance, changes to 

fire order standards involving how and when to attack targets, and assignment of unit 

responsibilities for specific HPTs and other key targets or missions. The FASP also 

addresses movement/positioning plans, C2 arrangements (such as sensor-to-shooter links), 

TA tasks, CSS information, and force protection measures.

A-03. The battalion’s FASP generally does not duplicate information from the maneuver 

OPORD/FSP or a DS/higher FA HQ FASP, or from the battalion’s TSOPs. However, it may 

be necessary to repeat critical information in the battalion’s FASP if the higher level 

FSP/FASP or the battalion’s TSOP are not disseminated to all of the battalion’s 

subordinate/supporting elements.

FASP OUTLINE

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (1 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

A-04. The following pages provide an outline of the format for a FASP. The outline is 

annotated for specific information requirements or suggestions. This format is available in 

automated C2 systems such as AFATDS and MCS.

______________

(Classification)

Copy no __ of __ copies

Unit preparing order

Geographical location

Date-time group (DTG) of order

APPENDIX __ (FA SUPPORT PLAN) TO ANNEX __ (FIRE SUPPORT) TO OPORD

Reference: List any maps, charts, or other documents (TSOPs, and so on) required to understand the 

order. Reference to a map will include the map series number (and country or geographic area, if 

required), sheet number (and name if required), edition, scale (if required), and the force common datum 

(see note below) from a GPS (specify type of GPS and datum used) or from the center of the lower 

margin on a map. Reference listed here should not be reprinted in tabs unless tabs are separated from the 

basic document.

Note: Universal transverse mercator (UTM) coordinates from the same point computed on a different 

datum may differ as much as 900 meters.

Time Zone Used Throughout Order: The time zone applicable to the operation. Times in other zones 

are converted to this zone for this operation. Consistency must be maintained through all documents.

1. SITUATION. Paragraph 1 is used exclusively to provide information. It includes items of 

information affecting FA operations that may or may not be included in the fires paragraph of the 

maneuver OPORD/OPLAN or the fire support annex. It gives an overview of the general situation so 

subordinate commanders can understand the environment in which they will be operating. If all organic, 

attached, or supporting commanders do not receive complete copies of the maneuver OPORD/OPLAN 

and the fire support annex, then the FASP repeats those items critical to the execution of their missions.

a. Enemy Forces. Subparagraph 1a provides enemy information vital to the FA unit. This 

includes enemy indirect fire capabilities that may influence FS activities, the ground threat, the air 

threat, counterfire threat, and any other enemy information of particular relevance to FA units. 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (2 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

Reference may be made to an intelligence annex, an overlay, a periodic intelligence report, or to 

an intelligence summary (INTSUM). Consider using the intelligence annex as a tab.

b. Friendly Forces. Subparagraph 1b contains the missions and commander’s intent of higher 

HQ (two levels up) and/or that of supported maneuver elements. Missions of adjacent, supporting, 

and reinforcing units also may be outlined here. Information should be limited to that which 

subordinate commanders need to know to accomplish their missions. The supported maneuver 

commander’s intent for fire support as well as the force FA commander’s intent during GS and 

GSR missions are included.

c. Attachments and Detachments. Subparagraph 1c should list units attached to and detached 

from the FA unit (if not included clearly in the task organization), the terms of attachment, and 

effective DTGs, if appropriate.

d. Assumptions. If the FASP supports an OPLAN, assumptions may be required. If the FASP is 

part of an OPORD, assumptions are not included.

2. MISSION. Paragraph 2 is a clear, concise statement of the task the FA unit is to accomplish. As a 

minimum, it should answer the questions, who, what, when, where, and why. It includes essential tasks, 

EFATs/EFSTs, determined by the commander as a result of his mission analysis.

3. EXECUTION. Paragraph 3 contains the how-to information needed for mission accomplishment. 

The FA battalion commander’s intent is expressed here. The intent should briefly address the purpose of 

the FA fires, the methods used by the force to reach the end state (e.g., EFSTs/EFATS that must be 

accomplished, guidance on movements, methods of survivability), and the end state (address criteria for 

success).

a. Concept of Operations. Subparagraph 3a is a detailed statement of the FA commander’s 

visualization of the conduct of FA support for the operation by phase to the desired end state. The 

concept clarifies the purpose of the operation (by phase), then how FA will support it. It is a 

detailed explanation of the commander’s intent. It is stated in enough detail to ensure appropriate 

action by subordinate units in the absence of more specific instructions. This paragraph may 

include a summary of the maneuver concept by phase for units that do not receive the maneuver 

OPORD.

b. Organization for Combat. Subparagraph 3b is a clear statement of the organization and 

tactical missions of the subordinate units of the FA HQ. Organization for combat normally will be 

done by various phases corresponding to the operation (if changes occur). Anticipated on-order 

changes to organization or tactical missions are included in this subparagraph.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (3 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

Note: Subsequent subparagraphs in paragraph 3 build on the concept of the operation and should 

provide the artillery organization for combat, priority of fires, priority of special munitions, positioning 

and movement instructions, and EFATs to be accomplished by subordinate units. This should address 

each step of the operation.

c. * * * * * * * * * *

d. * * * * * * * * * *

e. * * * * * * * * * *

f. Coordinating Instructions. The last subparagraph in paragraph 3 is coordinating instructions. 

It includes instructions and details of coordination applicable to two or more subordinate FA units. 

Instructions included in the subparagraph also may be addressed in tabs to the FASP. If a separate 

tab is developed, include in the coordinating instructions subparagraph only items of general 

interest, with details placed in the tab. If a tab is prepared, reference it in the body of the FASP. 

This subparagraph should include instructions concerning the following:

● TA (includes counterfire reference grid and instructions to or about specific observers).

● Survey (includes priorities for survey, accuracy’s required [if other than TSOP], timing, 

position requirements, future plans, spheroid, datum, ellipsoid, codes [for PADS, BUCS, 

AFATDS], datum codes used, time zone letter, and grid zone).

● Automated/manual fire control/fire direction instructions, especially coordination 

requirements with units with similar, but not identical, automated systems. MSU taskings 

and changes from CONOPS SOPs are identified here.

● HPTL (taken directly from maneuver OPORD/OPLAN).

● Attack guidance matrix. (This may appear as a matrix in a tab. It’s taken directly from the 

maneuver OPORD/OPLAN. (Specific automated commander’s criteria are found in the 

IFSAS, FDS, LTACFIRE, or AFATDS Tab).

● NBC defense (includes MOPP, operation exposure guidance [OEG], and decontamination 

instructions/locations).

● Met (includes source, type, and times of met messages).

● Liaison requirements.

● Fire plan (includes target list, schedules of fires and FSCMs).

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (4 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

● CCIR, PIR, EEFI, FFIR and other intelligence datum/information as appropriate.

● Intelligence acquisition tasks.

● Ammunition restrictions (includes expenditure restrictions, approval requirements, and risk 

limitations).

● Antifratricide measures (such as vehicle markings) that are not TSOP.

● Rehearsals.

4. SERVICE SUPPORT. Paragraph 4 includes specific service support instructions and arrangements 

supporting the operation. The commander’s guidance regarding CSS will be here. Supply, maintenance, 

medical, and personnel information are included in this paragraph. As a minimum, the CSR and the CSS 

locations (combat trains, field trains, casualty collection points, LRP, ATP, and/or ASP) should be given. 

Address only those CSS aspects that apply to the operation. Address the pertinent aspects of the six 

tactical logistic functions of manning, arming, fueling, fixing, moving and sustaining soldiers and their 

systems. These functions should be addressed in turns of before, during, and after the operation.

a. Manning - Current personnel strength (percentage), project replacements.

b. Arming - Ammunition resupply, CSR, ATP, ASP.

c. Fueling - Fuel points, priority of refuel.

d. Fixing - UMCP location, allocation of recovery assets, maintenance and recovery priorities, 

cannibalization authority.

e. Moving - Locations of MSR, SP, RP and checkpoints along the route, priorities of movement 

on MSRs.

f. Sustaining - Medical resupply, barrier materials, restricted issue or controlled exchange items, 

mortuary affairs, Chaplain information, water points, locations of battalion aid station, casualty 

collection point, chemical casualty collection points, civil-military cooperation.

(Paragraph 4 may be amplified in a tab.)

5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL

a. Command. The first paragraph should list the locations of the unit TOC and the locations of 

higher, supporting, and supported unit TOCs. The commander’s planned location during the 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (5 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

operation, and alternate CP can be in this paragraph. Plans should also address any alternate 

battalion FDC arrangements not covered in, or that are changed from, unit SOP. Other automated 

C2 systems used or interface requirements (such as MCS), and any particular aspects for their use 

also are included here. Address succession of command if other than TSOP.

b. Signal. This subparagraph contains the index of the effective SOI to include edition in effect 

and courier schedule. Special instructions on the use of radios, wire, MSE, EPLRS, retransmission 

elements (location and priority) and signals not covered in TSOP are included here.

Acknowledge:

ISSUING COMMANDER'S NAME

RANK

OFFICIAL:

/Signed/

S3 NAME

Approval: The original/file copy bears the signature of the FA battalion commander. The S3 

authenticates all other copies, which are disseminated to subordinate and reinforcing/reinforced FA units, 

any attached or supporting elements, and force FA HQ.

Tabs: A -

B -

C -

D -

E -

Note: Tabs should be prepared for portions of the FASP that are explained better in a different format 

(for example, overlay or matrix), that are too extensive to be in the FASP, that are expected to change or 

lengthen, or that are submitted too late to be included. Often subordinate units will not receive the basic 

maneuver OPORD/OPLAN or fire support annex. Therefore, reprints of portions of these documents may 

be required and included as tabs.

Tabs are ordered as they are referenced in the basic OPORD or OPLAN. The TSOP may specify that 

some tabs will always be produced. Common tabs used at battalion level include:

● FASM - FA TOC.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (6 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

● FA positioning and movement overlay - FA TOC.

● Fire plan (S3 may refer to plan names and subordinate elements, can print out target list, schedules 

of fires and FSCM instead of developing a separate tab) - FSE.

● Survey - FA RSO.

● TA - FA TOC.

● AFATDS, LTACFIRE, FDS, or IFSAS- FA TOC.

Other tabs used if time permits:

● Intelligence (INTSUM, overlay, annex, or PIR and IR lists) - maneuver/higher FA HQ TOC.

● Service support and CSS overlay - FA ALOC.

● Maneuver overlays - maneuver/higher FA HQ TOC.

● Met - Force FA HQ.

● Task organization (may be attached from OPORD).

● Obstacle overlay — maneuver/higher FA HQ TOC.

● Rules of engagement - maneuver/higher FA HQ TOC.

● ADA, engineer, and other supporting element plans as appropriate.

● Special distribution items (such as antifratricide prevention information).

______________

(Classification)

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (7 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

SURVEY TAB TO THE FASP

A-05. The survey plan (or order) normally is incorporated into the FASP as the survey 

tab. The survey plan contains detailed instructions not covered by local TSOP for each 

survey team. It gives general information needed for the efficient accomplishment of the 

survey mission. The survey plan is normally written, but may be issued orally, if necessary. 

It generally follows the same format as the OPORD/OPLAN. Often because of the tactical 

situation and wide dispersal of units, part of the survey plan may be issued by radio or other 

communication means. The format for a survey plan is in FM 6-2.

AUTOMATION TAB TO THE FASP

A-06. The written portion of the automation tab attached to the FASP should contain 

changes/additions to subscriber information, and commander’s criteria, geometry, units, and 

ammunition information that pertain to the operation (not contained in TSOP).

A-07. Since automation systems provide fire planners throughout the artillery system with 

instantaneous access to target files and FA schedules, the S3 no longer has to attach a fire 

plan tab (target list and schedules of fires) to the written portion of the plan. Instead, he can 

initiate, coordinate, and monitor the development of the FA schedules in accordance with 

the standard fire planning capabilities and procedures that apply to these systems. In the 

written portion of the plan, he can reference FA schedules, target lists, and FSCM by plan 

name and, if necessary, targets by target number. FA elements can extract detailed 

information as needed.

TARGET ACQUISITION TAB TO THE FASP

A-08. The TA tab is a managerial tool used by the TOC controlling FA TA assets. This tab 

is used to ensure that all TA assets are employed to support the overall maneuver operation. 

The purpose of the TA tab is as follows:

● Assigns missions to FA TA assets.

● Coordinates the FA TA efforts.

● Establishes a specific flow of target processing data.

● Assigns responsibilities not covered in unit TSOPs.

A-09. The FA Bn S2 and S3 jointly produce the TA tab with help from the targeting officer 

and radar section leader. For specific information on the TA order see FM 6-121.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (8 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

ARTILLERY INTELLIGENCE TAB TO THE FASP

A-10. The artillery intelligence tab is not a copy or repeat of the maneuver intelligence 

annex but contains intelligence data that is artillery-specific. This tab includes artillery PIRs 

and IRs as designated by the artillery commander. The artillery intelligence tab is prepared 

by the S2.

ADMINISTRATION-LOGISTICS TAB TO THE FASP

A-11. The admin-logistics tab contains specific information relevant to the issuing FA 

HQ. Information contained in the unit TSOP should not be covered in this tab. Changes to 

or deviations from admin-logistics information in the TSOP must be covered in the tab. The 

admin-logistics tab is prepared by the S4 with assistance from the S1.

FA SUPPORT MATRIX TAB TO THE FASP

A-12. The FASM is a concise planning and execution tool that graphically depicts the FA 

unit’s essential tasks. Like paragraph 3 of the written FASP, the matrix should answer the 

questions who, what, when, and where. It identifies key tasks for each element and ties 

accomplishment of those tasks to the requirements of the maneuver plan and the FSP.

FORMAT

A-13. The matrix is set up with the operational elements (such as firing batteries, survey 

sections, radar sections, and CPs) along the left side and with significant maneuver phases 

and/or artillery tasks along the top (for example, phase lines, events, times, groups, or 

programs). Maneuver phases should correspond to phases established on the maneuver 

execution matrix.

A-14. An example of a FASM is at Figure A-1. It also shows a way to label the FASM 

for easy reference. Letters identify columns, and numbers identify lines. For example, block 

D-4 in the following example reads "PA 12." This matrix reference system allows the S3 to 

easily disseminate or update matrix data by radio, MSE, or wire to all appropriate agencies.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (9 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

Figure A-1. Example FA Support Matrix

FA SUPPORT MATRIX CONTENT

A-15. Information that may be found in the matrix include the following:

● EFATs, EFSTs, and other tasks associated with a specific time frame.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (10 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

● PAs, movements, prepare to march-order (PTMO).

● Azimuth of Lay (AOL) and left/right azimuth limits.

● Priority of fires (POF) and priority of survey (POS) by phase.

● Preparations (PREP) and counterpreparations (CPREP).

● FSCMs by phase.

● Priority targets (PRI TGT) assigned to units.

● Trigger points.

● Critical targets by phase (schedules).

● Munition requirements (e.g., Copperhead (CPHD)).

● MSU information.

● Reconnaissance.

● O/o missions.

● Rearming and/or refueling.

A-16. Suggested enclosures to the support matrix tab include the FA movement overlay. 

The movement overlay may include the following:

● Positions and routes.

● Passage points.

● Rearm, refuel points.

● Start points, release points, and CPs.

SECTION II — EXAMPLE FIELD ARTILLERY SUPPORT PLAN

A-17. An example of a battalion FASP (an appendix to the fire support annex) is shown 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (11 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

below. Figure A-2 is an acronym and abbreviation list used in the FASP.

AAG Army artillery group (threat) HVT high-value target

ACP air control point IAW in accordance with

ADA air defense artillery ICE individual chemical equipment

AIRCOR air corridor ID (M) infantry division (mechanized)

alt altitude LOC lines of communication

app appendix maint maintenance

atch attached man maneuver (attack guidance matrix)

avn aviation max maximum

az azimuth mod modification

C3 command, control and 

communications

MRL multiple rocket launcher

CAA combined arms Army (threat) msn mission

cat category N/CH nuclear/chemical

CCCP chemical casualty collection point NLTPA not later than position area

CCP casualty collection point PA position area 

cGy centigray PL phase line 

coord coordinate RAP rocket-assisted projectile 

COP command observation post REC radio-electronic combat 

Cphd Copperhead RSTA reconnaissance, surveillance, and 

target acquisition 

CRP combat reconnaissance patrol SIMO simultaneous observation

CSB common sensor boundary SITREP situation report

DF direction finding spt support

DNE do not engage survl surveillance 

EA engagement area TBP to be published 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (12 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

ENG engineer TD tank division (threat) 

GTD guards tank division (threat) TLE target location error 

HA hide area TVA target value analysis

HEMTT heavy expanded-mobility tactical truck w with

Figure A-2. Acronyms and Abbreviations Used in the Example FASP

FASP — BODY (EXAMPLE)

______________

(Classification)

Copy __ of 20 copies

1st Bn, 51st FA

Opposing Force District

061200 Nov 96

APPENDIX 3 (FA SUPPORT PLAN) TO ANNEX E (FIRE SUPPORT) TO OPORD 96-2--2d Bde, 52d 

Inf Div (Mech).

Reference: Map, series 1501; OPFOR; sheets LJ 11-1, 11-2,

11-3, 11-5, and 11-6; edition 1982, 1:250,000.

Time Zone Used Throughout Order: LOCAL

1. SITUATION.

a. Enemy Forces.

(1) 16th CAA continues to defend. The bulk of the 19th CAA remains in assembly areas 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (13 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

vicinity Deep Water Lake. Recon elements of the 19th CAA are reported moving east into 

the 10th (US) Corps covering force area. 19th CAA is capable of attacking with all 

supporting artillery and frontal air along three divisional avenues of approach. Expect the 

19th CAA to attack through the 16th CAA in 12 to 36 hours. The main attack in the 52d ID 

(M) sector is expected in the SHALLOW Valley (19th TD and 2d GTD) approach. 

Initially, the primary threat to FA units is fixed-wing air, with up to 12 FROGFOOT sorties 

per day in the division sector. Before the main enemy ground effort, units behind the FLOT 

must be alert for dismounted forces and light armor air-dropped or helicopter-inserted in 

company or battalion strength. The enemy second-echelon division will push its artillery 

forward to support the main effort. Expect 12 to 15 122mm and 152mm SP battalions and 2 

to 3 122mm MRL battalions to be employed in the division sector as 3 or 4 RAGs and a 

DAG. In addition, elements of the 19th CAA AAG may be positioned and employed in the 

division sector.

(2) Intelligence estimate: See Intelligence Annex to OPORD 96-2, 2d Bde, 52d ID (M).

b. Friendly Forces.

(1) 2d Bde, 52d ID (M) moves to and occupies defensive positions from LJ234282 to 

LJ145185 NLT 061200 Nov 96 and defends in sector with two task forces abreast to 

destroy attacking enemy forces forward of PL VEGAS. TF 1-17 Armor and TF 1-81 Mech 

will defend in the north and south, respectively. TF 2-81 Mech will be the brigade reserve 

initially, then will counterattack along Axis LEE if enemy forces reach PL VEGAS.

(2) Brigade commander’s intent: The brigade will conduct a mobile defense in sector. Fires 

and obstacles will be used to canalize the enemy into the southern part of the brigade sector 

(TF 1-81). TF 1-81 will conduct a fighting withdrawal to prepared positions east of PL 

VEGAS, while TF 1-17 in the north holds its position in BP 3 and prepares to meet the 

second-echelon regiment. TF 2-81, the brigade reserve, counterattacks from positions in 

the north of the brigade sector into the flank of the first-echelon regiment. Artillery fires 

will be used to slow and confuse the enemy and attack his C2 as he comes into range at PL 

LANCE by concentrating Copperhead and DPICM fires in TAIs 1 and 2. COLTs will 

control Copperhead fires and OH-58Ds. Three OH-58Ds will be DS to the brigade. One 

OH-58D will be operational and in position to observe the TAIs continuously. I am 

concerned about the capabilities of the enemy’s fire support systems ability to limit our 

maneuver. I want a proactive counterfire effort, using the Firefinder radar and any other 

available assets to locate the enemy’s indirect fire systems. Plan a counterprep based on the 

best available intelligence to be executed on my order. Once the enemy first echelon exists 

TAIs 1 and 2, priority of the fire support effort shifts to EA FISH, where I want to stop the 

enemy and destroy his first-echelon battalions with direct and indirect fire. As TF 1-81 

breaks contact and begins to move to its alternate positions, a smoke program will be fired 

to assist in disengagement and screen their movement. When I order the counterattack, 

priority of fire will shift to TF 2-81. Artillery fires will be employed ahead of the 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (14 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

counterattack to fix the enemy and hinder his ability to shift his force to meet the attack 

into his flank.

(3) 1-78 FA MLRS (GS) is positioned in the brigade sector. 52d DIVARTY will coordinate 

with 2d Bde FSE to clear position areas and movement routes.

c. Attachments. Sec 2 (AN/TPQ-36), Btry A (TA), 23d FA remains attached to 1-51 FA for 

positioning, employment, and support.

2. MISSION. 1-51 FA provides conventional artillery fires in direct support of 2d Bde, 52d ID (M) 

mobile defense in sector NLT 061200Z Nov 96.

3. EXECUTION. FA Commander’s Intent: We will provide, interdiction, close fires, and counterfires 

in support of 2d Brigade’s defense in sector. To do this, we will initially position observers and firing 

units forward to provide Copperhead and DPICM fires on lead elements (first echelon), fire SCATMINE 

and smoke to delay and disrupt the second echelon, provide SEAD in support of CAS, mass fires on lead 

elements HPTs, plan a counterprep to be executed on order; and provide counterfire to protect force 

movements. We will be successful at the end of this operation if the enemy is unable to mass his direct 

and indirect fires against the brigade and we are in position to support the brigade’s counterattack.

a. Concept of Operations. FA fires will engage the enemy deep as he enters the brigade sector. 

COLT 2 will be located vicinity LJ1723; it will be able to observe both TAIs 1 and 2 and will be 

able to initiate Copperhead fires in TAI 2. An OH-58D will be operating forward vicinity LJ1526 

and will be able to initiate Copperhead and other fires in both TAI 1 and TAI 2 with priority of 

effort in TAI 1. COLT 2 will use 1-51 FA FD 3 as a quickfire channel to C/2-636, which will 

provide Copperhead support. The OH-58D will call all missions directly to 1-51 FA FDC on the 

battalion ops/F net. Artillery will engage the first echelon of the lead division in both TAI 1 and 

TAI 2 to attrit the enemy and disrupt their C2 with Copperhead and DPICM fires.

A counterprep will be fired on order of the brigade commander. As the lead echelon exits TAI 2, 

the two planned SCATMINE targets (AB0031, AB0032) will be fired in that TAI to slow an 

disrupt the second echelon. CAS, supported by SEAD, will then attack the second echelon in TAI 

2 under control of the OH-58D (brigade backup control). Artillery fires continue to attrit the first 

echelon. The main enemy attack is expected to be in TF 1-81 sector. Once Group A30B has been 

executed on the first echelon, the SCATMINE (AB0017) in TF 1-81 sector will be emplaced. 

Artillery fires will then concentrate on the first echelon as it attempts to breach the TF obstacles. 

When the first echelon enters EA CAT, artillery fires will concentrate on the second echelon and 

provide smoke or illumination to silhouette the first echelon for the maneuver forces. Three 

batteries will be capable of firing throughout the battle, and three batteries must be capable of 

ranging beyond PL LANCE to support the deep battle initially. Priority targets will initially be the 

targets in Group A2B, then will shift to Group A30B, and then to Target AB0015 and Group 

A31B. Priority of fires will then shift to the FPFs of both task forces. Priority for Copperhead fires 

will be C2 vehicles throughout the battle and then to engineer vehicles during breaching 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (15 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

operations. Artillery must be prepared to support the counterattack by TF 2-81 along Axis LEE to 

hit the flank of the lead echelon with both DPICM and Copperhead fires as well as smoke. Be 

prepared to move batteries forward by echelon on order of the FSCOORD.

b. Organization for Combat.

1-51 FA (155, SP): DS 2d Bde

Sec 2 (AN/TPQ-36, Btry A (TA), 23 FA: Attached 1- 51 FA

Sec 1, 2, 3 (OH-58D), DIVARTY Spt Plt, Cmd Avn Co, 52d Cbt Avn Bde: DS 1-51 

FA

2-636 FA (155, SP): R 1-51 FA

c. Priority of Fires. Priority of fires to TF 1-81, on order to TF 2-81 when committed.

d. Positioning and Movement. Initial firing battery positions are shown below. Subsequent 

movement and positions will be IAW Tab A. See the movement overlay for PA locations.

(1) A/1-51 FA: PA 1 (az 5000)

(2) B/1-51 FA: PA 15 (az 5000)

(3) C/1-51 FA: PA 9 (az 4900)

(4) A/2-636 FA: PA 5 (az 5100)

(5) B/2-636 FA: PA 5 (az 5100)

(6) C/2-636 FA: PA 2 (az 4900)

e. Coordinating Instructions.

(1) Target Acquisition.

(a) Counterfire Reference Grid. Lower left corner is AA at grid LJ000900.

(b) See Tab C.

(2) Survey.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (16 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

(a) Priority of survey is, in order, to firing batteries (A, C, B, 1-51 FA; A, B, C, 2-

636 FA), AN/TPQ-36 radar, COLTs, OH-58D control points, and mortars.

(b) Survey sections will establish starting control at the following survey control 

points:

SCP NAME EASTING NORTHING ALTITUDE

MARY 525422.97 3919175.39 935.2

HELEN 531642.91 3922964.29 1054.5

(c) Control points will be marked per TSOP. OH-58D control points will be 

established on prominent terrain and marked with a target cloth panel 6 feet by 6 

feet with a 4-foot-diameter circle spray-painted in black and an identifying number 

painted in numerals 2 1/2 feet tall in the center of the circle.

(d) See Tab D (Survey).

(3) High-Payoff Target List.

PRIORITY CATEGORY DESCRIPTION OF TARGETS

1 6 (RSTA) Recon patrol, division recon company

2 3 (MAN) Armor heavy (company size or larger)

3 7 (REC) Radar intercept and DF site (POLE DISH)

4 7 (REC) Radio intercept and DF site

5 2 (FS) RAG COP

6 2 (FS) Battalion COP

7 2 (FS) Sound ranging site

(4) Attack Guidance Matrix.

CAT HPTs WHEN HOW/EFFECTS REMARKS

(C3) 1 A N/EW Coord w EW

(FS) 2 A N DNE MRL > 10 min

(MAN) 3 A N

(ADA) 4 P S/ALO

(ENG) 5 P N

(RSTA) 6 I N

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (17 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

(REC) 7 A D/EW

(N/CH) 8 A D TLE < 200 m/TDA

(POL) 9 A N

(AMMO) 10 A N

(MAINT) 11 P N Not HVT/HPT

(LIFT) 12 P N Not HVT/HPT

(LOC) 13 P N Not HVT/HPT

Legend:

CAT = Target category from TVA.

HPT = Designated high-payoff target. Target numbers from TVA sheets or target 

description.

WHEN = When the target should be attacked.

I: Immediately, Interrupt other non-immediate attacks.

A: As acquired. Attack as assets are available.

P: Plan. Schedule to file for later attack.

HOW = How target is to be attacked.

S: Suppress

N: Neutralize. (10% effects)

D: Destroy (30% effects)

EW: Offensive EW.

DNE: Do not engage.

ALO: Coordinate attack with ALO.

TLE: Target locations error.

(5) NBC Defense.

(a) MOPP when 2S1s (122mm, SP) reported at PL LANCE.

(b) Troop safety criteria: Negligible risk to warned, exposed personnel.

(c) Operational exposure guidance: Do not exceed 50 cGy. Begin continuous 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (18 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

monitoring after first use of nuclear weapons.

(d) Decontamination. Service battery decontamination team will prepare 

unsupported decon site at grid LJ445094. Two battery sets of ICE packs will be 

prepositioned at this point to facilitate MOPP gear exchange. Firing battery decon 

teams will report to this site on order. Contaminated vehicles will travel Route 

GREEN (LJ294164 to LJ327144 to LJ373125 to LJ408114 to LJ429094 to 

LJ445094). Contaminated casualties will be evacuated to collection point at grid 

LJ438091.

(6) Meteorology. Computer met sent by 52d Inf DIVARTY every 2 hours on battalion cmd 

net (voice) and ops/F net (digital).

(7) Fire Plan. Target List, schedules of fires and FSCMs are in plan current.

(8) CCIR, PIR, EEFI, FFIR, and other intelligence or information as appropriate.

(a) When will the enemy attack?

- What avenues will be used?

- What is the 19th TD’s state of readiness?

- What are the 19th TD’s objectives?

(b) Will the 2d GTD reinforce the 19th TD? If so, will reinforcements be committed 

to the Shallow Valley approach? When will reinforcements be committed?

(c) Will the enemy lead his attack with forward detachments?

(d) What are the strength, disposition, and composition of the enemy’s supporting 

artillery? Where are the DAG and RAGs? Where are the enemy’s MRLs?

(e) When will enemy artillery reach PL LANCE?

(f) Where are enemy OPs located?

(g) What TA assets are available to the enemy, and where are they located?

(9) Information Requirements.

(a) Will the enemy use NBC weapons? If so, where and to what extent? Where is 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (19 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

persistent agent placed?

(b) What are possible LZs and drop zones? Will the enemy conduct airmobile 

operations?

(10) Intelligence Acquisition Tasks. Batteries will report as obtained.

(a) All chemical activity and locations of enemy chemical-capable units, especially 

smoke operations vicinity LJ2324, LJ1820, and LJ1915.

(b) All indirect fires. Include shelling reports and friendly battle damage assessment.

(c) Lanes cleared through enemy controlled or emplaced obstacles.

(d) Enemy patrols. Number, size, composition, and time observed.

(e) All direct fire engagements, including enemy battle damage assessment when 

available.

(f) Enemy rotary-wing activity.

(11) Ammo Restrictions. Batteries will expend no more than 70% of DPICM and 50% of 

HC and/or WP CSR supporting the defense. Short-duration SCATMINE must be approved 

by the brigade commander. Illumination and HC smoke will be approved by the TF 

commanders.

(12) Plan rehearsal will be conducted at the 1-51 FA CP at 061000 Nov 96. 1-51 FA XO, 

S3, S2, FDO, CESO, survey chief, firing battery commanders, HHB and svc battery 

commanders, OH-58D representative, 2-636 S3 and LO, and 2d Bde FSO and ALO will 

participate in person. TF FSOs, COLTs, and battery FDOs will participate via wire or FM 

radio.

4. SERVICE SUPPORT.

a. Personnel. The battalion is currently at 82% strength. 83d Medical Group reports that nine 

soldiers will be returned to 1-51 FA within the next 36 hours.

b. Medical. 1-51 FA BAS is located in the combat trains (LJ363158). 1-51 will establish a 

CCCP for 1-51 FA and 2-636 FA. Casualty collection points are as follows:

1-51 FA CCP LJ304162

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (20 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

1-51 FA CCCP LJ438090

2-636 FA CCP LJ321155

c. Locations.

1-51 FA:

Combat trains LJ363158

Field trains LJ473097

LRP LJ306159

2-636 FA: TBP

d. CSR Information. CSR effective upon implementation of OPORD 96-2.

HE APICM DPICM WP HC ILLUM RAP CPHD ADAM RAAMS

155mm 37 3 90 6 6 3 5 5 2 7

e. Resupply Criteria. Batteries will request resupply when CSR drops to these levels.

HE 50% RAAMS 10%

DPICM 25% ADAM 10%

APICM 50% M3A1 50%

RAP 25% M4A1 30%

Illum 50% M119A1 20%

WP 25% Viper 50%

Smk (HC) 25% .50 cal 30%

5.56mm 50% 7.62mm 50%

f. ASP Information. ASP is located at grid LJ562235. ATP will remain operational at grid 

LJ398128 until 062000 Nov 96, at which time it will begin to displace.

g. Recovery. One M578 each will be attached to Batteries A and C NLT 061000 Nov 96. One 

HEMTT wrecker will be available on call in the combat trains.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (21 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

5. COMMAND AND CONTROL.

a. Command.

(1) 2d Bde TOC located grid LJ336147.

(2) DIVARTY TOC located grid LJ588012.

(3) 1-51 FA TOC located grid LJ366163.

(4) 2-636 FA TOC located grid LJ412174.

(5) 2-636 FA TOC will assume DS TOC responsibilities on order.

b. Signal.

(1) SOI KTV 1062, Edition BB in effect.

(2) Retrans located at grid LJ363177. Priority of retrans will be to BDE fire support net.

(3) Wire. Priority of work, in order, to the following external circuits.

1-51 FA:

(a) 1-51 FA TOC to 2d Bde TOC (MSE junction box only)

(b) 1-51 FA TOC to Btry B, 1-51 FA.

(c) 1-51 FA TOC to Btry A, 1-51 FA.

(d) 1-51 FA TOC to Btry C, 1-51 FA.

2-636 FA:

(a) 2-636 FA TOC to 1-51 FA TOC.

(b) Per unit TSOP.

Wire teams will start to recover wire when the enemy’s regimental CRP reaches PL LANCE.

Acknowledge:

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (22 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

EDWARDS

LTC

OFFICIAL:

/Signed/

COOPER

S3

Tabs: A - FA Support Matrix

B - Positioning Overlay

C - Target Acquisition

D - Survey Plan

________________________

(Classification)

EXAMPLE FIELD ARTILLERY SUPPORT MATRIX (TAB)

________________________

(Classification)

TAB A (FA SUPPORT MATRIX) TO APPENDIX 3 (FA SUPPORT PLAN) TO ANNEX E (FIRE 

SUPPORT) TO OPORD 96-2--2d Bde, 52d Inf Div (Mech).

Reference: Map, Series 1501; OPFOR, sheets LJ 11-1, 11-2,11-3,11-5, and 11-6; edition 1982, 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (23 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

1:250,000.

Time Zone Used Throughout Order: LOCAL

ACA = airspace coordination area, AOF = azimuth of fire, RECON = reconnaissance

________________________

(Classification)

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (24 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

EXAMPLE POSITIONING OVERLAY (TAB)

________________________

(Classification)

TAB B (POSITIONING OVERLAY) TO APPENDIX 3 (FA SUPPORT PLAN) TO ANNEX E (FIRE 

SUPPORT) TO OPORD 96-2--2d Bde, 52d Inf Div.

Reference: Map, Series, 1501; OPFOR, sheets lJ 11-1, 11-2, 11-3, 11-5, and 11-6; edition 1982, 

1:250,000.

Time Zone Used Throughout Order: LOCAL

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (25 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

________________________

(Classification)

EXAMPLE TARGET ACQUISITION TAB

________________________

(Classification)

TAB C (TGT ACQUISITION) TO APPENDIX 3 (FA SUPPORT PLAN) TO ANNEX E (FIRE 

SUPPORT) TO OPORD 96-2--2d Bde, 52d Inf Div.

Reference: Map, series 1501; OPFOR; sheets LJ 11-1, 11-2, 11-3, 11-5, and 11-6; edition 1982; 

1:250,000.

Time Zone Used Throughout Order: LOCAL

1. SITUATION.

a. Enemy Forces. See App 3, paragraph 1a, and Intel Annex to OPORD 96-2--2d Bde, 52d Inf 

Div (Mech).

b. Friendly Forces. 1-51 FA (155, SP) is DS to 2d Bde. 2-636 FA (155, SP) is R 1-51 FA. Sec 2 

(AN/TPQ-36), Btry A (TA), 23d FA is attached to 1-51 FA. Sec 4 (AN/TPQ-37), Btry A (TA), 

23d FA is operating in 2d Bde sector. 2d Bde has three COLTs. Three OH-58Ds are DS 2d Bde.

2. MISSION.

Tgt acquisition assets (Sec 2 [AN-TPQ-36], Btry A [TA], 23d FA; Sec 1, 2, and 3 [OH-58D], 

DIVARTY Spt Plt, Cmd Avn Co, 52d Cbt Avn Bde; COLTs 1, 2, and 3) acquire targets, initiate 

fire missions, and report combat and/or targeting information commencing NLT 061200 Nov 96 

in support of 2d Bde defense in sector.

3. EXECUTION.

a. Concept of Operations. The AN/TPQ-36 will provide coverage of the 2d sector at the FLOT 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (26 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

out to PL SPEAR. The AN/TPQ-36 will also ensure coverage of CFFZs 1 and 2 and CFZs 1, 2, 

and 3 (see RDO, enclosure 1). Cueing agents will be the Bde FSO, TF 1-17 FSO, TF 1-81 FSO, 

and 1-51 FA S2.

b. Processing. All enemy artillery locations will be sent to the 1-51 FA TOC and the DIVARTY 

TOC. OH-58Ds report targets and targeting information to 1-51 FA TOC and 2d Bde FSE.

c. Visual Observation.

(1) Ground Observation. COLTs will report location and zone of observation through the 

Bde FSO to 1-51 FA TOC.

(2) Air Observation.

(a) Sec 1, 2, and 3 (OH-58D) maintain continuous observation (at least one section 

on station at all times) of EA FISH. Report PIR and IR in TAIs 1 and 2.

(b) Initiate Copperhead fires to C/2-636 FA on 1-51 FA FD 3 net when HPTs enter 

EA FISH.

(c) Report lead elements of second-echelon regiments in TAI 2 (trigger point for 

CAS mission).

(d) Initial position will be vicinity AIRCOR TANGO ACP 4 (LJ1626) NLT 060001 

Nov 96.

(e) Coordinate with 1-51 FA RSO for location and marking of survey update points. 

Contact RSO on DIVARTY survey (VHF-FM) (V) net.

d. Radar. Sec 2 (AN/TPQ-36), Btry A (TA), 23d FA mission: Attached 1-51 FA (see RDO, 

enclosure 1).

e. Coordinating Instructions.

(1) Zones.

(a) Critical Friendly Zones. Bde TOC, TF 1-81 (BP 6), TF 1-17 (BP 3). (See RDO, 

enclosure 1.)

(b) Call-for-Fire-Zones. See RDO, enclosure 1.

(c) Artillery Target Intelligence Zones. See RDO, enclosure 1. 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (27 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

(2) Common Sensor Boundary. Grid LJ1137 to LJ1938 to LJ2736 to LJ3735.

(3) Cueing Instructions. AN/TPQ-36 radiates on order of 1-51 FA S2 and designated 

cueing agents. Other friendly elements request radar coverage through the 1-51 FA TOC on 

the FA battalion command net. Radar section chief reports to 1-51 FA S2 30 minutes prior 

to making survivability moves due to excessive radiation time from current location. 

Cueing agents will request cueing only if their elements are receiving continuous or 

massive incoming artillery. (See RDO, enclosure 1).

(4) Survivability Moves. Radar will report to 1-51 FA S2 before initiating routine 

survivability moves.

(5) Survey. 1-51 FA will provide survey for Sec 2 (AN/TPQ-36), Btry A (TA), 23d FA. 

Radar section chief will coordinate with 1-51 FA RSO for survey as required.

(6) Visibility Diagrams. All observers will submit visibility diagrams through FSO 

channels to the DS FA battalion S2 NLT 061100 Nov 96.

4. SERVICE SUPPORT.

AN/TPQ-36 will coordinate Class I and III support from Btry C, 1-51 FA. All other logistic 

support will be provided through 1-51 FA combat trains.

5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL.

a. Command. Btry A (TA), 23d FA TOC located LJ588012.

b. Signal. SOI KTV 1062, Edition BB in effect.

Enclosure 1. Radar Deployment Order

Enclosure 2. Capabilities Overlay.

________________________

(Classification)

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (28 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

EXAMPLE RADAR DEPLOYMENT ORDER (ENCLOSURE TO TAB)

________________________

(Classification)

ENCLOSURE 1 (RADAR DEPLOYMENT ORDER) TO TAB C (TGT ACQUISITION) TO 

APPENDIX 3 (FA SUPPORT PLAN) TO ANNEX E (FIRE SUPPORT) TO OPORD 96-2--2d Bde, 52d 

Inf Div (Mech).

_____________________________

CLASSIFICATION WHEN FILLED IN

DAG = division artillery group, PRI = priority

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (29 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

_____________________________

CLASSIFICATION WHEN FILLED IN

________________________

(Classification)

EXAMPLE CAPABILITIES OVERLAY (ENCLOSURE TO TAB)

________________________

(Classification)

ENCLOSURE 2 (CAPABILITIES OVERLAY) TO TAB C (TGT ACQUISITION) TO APPENDIX 3 

(FA SUPPORT PLAN) TO ANNEX E (FIRE SUPPORT) TO OPORD 96-2--2d Bde, 52d Inf Div 

(Mech).

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (30 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

________________________

(Classification)

EXAMPLE SURVEY PLAN (TAB)

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (31 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

________________________

(Classification)

TAB D (SURVEY PLAN) TO APPENDIX 3 (FA SUPPORT PLAN) TO ANNEX E (FIRE SUPPORT) 

TO OPORD 96-2--2d Bde, 52d Inf Div (Mech).

Reference: Map, series 1501; OPFOR; sheets LJ 11-1, 11-2, 11-3, 11-5, and 11-6; edition 1982; 

1:250,000.

Time Used Throughout Order: LOCAL

1. SITUATION.

a. Enemy Forces. See App 3, paragraph 1a and Intel Annex to OPORD 96-2--2d Bde, 52d Inf 

Div (Mech).

b. Friendly Forces. 1-51 FA (155, SP) is DS to 2d Bde. 2-636 FA (155, SP) is R 1-51 FA. Sec 2 

(AN/TPQ-36), Btry A (TA), 23d FA is attached to 1-51 FA. 2d Bde has three COLTs. Three OH58Ds are DS to 1-51 FA.

2. MISSION.

The survey sections of 1-51 FA and 2-636 FA provide conventional and PADS survey support to 

1-51 FA, 2-636 FA, AN/TPQ-36 radar, COLTs, OH-58Ds, and mortars supporting the 2d Bde in 

sector.

3. EXECUTION.

a. Concept of Operations. Survey support will be a team effort by survey sections from both 1-

51 FA and 2-636 FA. PADS teams will accompany firing battery recons to provide survey data for 

all battery primary and alternate positions. PADS teams will provide survey data for the attached 

AN/TPQ-36. The AN/TPQ-37 will receive PADS support upon coordinating for that support 

with 1-51 FA TOC when needed. Survey will be available for COLTs, OH-58Ds, and mortars.

(1) PADS #1, 1-51 FA will provide survey to Btry C, 1-51 FA and ensure their primary and 

alternate positions in PA 9 have survey NLT 070001 Nov 96. PADS #1 will then 

accompany Btry C, 1-51 FA recon to prepare PA 6. Upon completion of PA 6, PADS #1 

will survey the AN/TPQ-36 primary and alternate positions in PA 20. Then, they will 

provide survey to Btry B, 1-51 in PA 4. Be prepared to provide survey to Btry B, 2-636 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (32 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

FA and Btry C, 2-636 FA in PAs 17 and 18, respectively, and to survey PA 12 for Btry C, 

1-51 FA.

(2) PADS #1, 2-636 FA will provide survey for primary and alternate positions in PA 2 

NLT 070001 Nov 96 for Btry C, 2-636 FA. PADS #1, 2-636 will then move forward to 

link up with the FSE, TF 1-17 to survey COLTs and mortars in the northern position of the 

brigade sector. Be prepared to provide survey in PA 21 for the AN/TPQ-36 and in PA 14 

for Btry C, 1-51 FA. Be prepared to assist PADS #1, 1-51 FA in completing its survey 

requirements.

(3) PADS #2, 1-51 FA will provide survey in PA 1 for Btry A, 1-51 FA and in PA 5 for 

Btry A, 2-636 FA for both primary and alternate positions in both PAs NLT 070001 Nov 

96. Then PADS #2 will survey PA 7 for Btry A, 1-51 FA and PA 19 for Btry A, 2-636 

FA. Be prepared to provide survey in PAs 11 and 16 Batteries A and B, 1-51 FA, 

respectively.

(4) PADS #2, 2-636 FA will provide survey in PA 3 for Btry B, 2-636 FA and in PA 15 for 

Btry B, 1-51 FA for both primary and alternate positions in both PAs NLT 070001 Nov 96. 

 PADS #2, 2-636 FA will then move forward to link up with the FSE, TF 1-81 to survey 

COLT positions and mortars in the southern portion of the brigade sector. Be prepared to 

assist PADS #2, 1-51 FA in completing its requirements. Be prepared to provide survey in 

PA 10 for Btry B, 1-51 FA.

(5) Conventional survey team, 1-51 FA will provide PADS updates points in the TF 1-17 

sector and the northern portion of the brigade sector. It will also provide OH-58D 

initialization points vicinity grids LJ3817 and LJ3121. Initialization points will be marked 

with a 6- X 6-foot target cloth panel with a 4-foot diameter circle spray-painted in black. 

An identifying number with numerals 2 1/2 feet tall will be painted in the center of the 

circle. The team will also assist PADS #1, 1-51 FA and PADS #1, 2-636 FA in 

accomplishing their assigned survey tasks if necessary.

(6) Conventional survey team, 2-636 FA will provide PADS update points in the TF 1-81 

sector and the southern portion of the brigade sector. It will assist PADS #2, 1-51 FA and 

PADS #2, 2-636 FA in accomplishing their assigned survey tasks if necessary.

(7) Survey Sec HQ, 2-636 FA will establish a SIMO station vicinity LJ366163 (1-51 FA 

CP). Station will be established NLT 061600 Nov 96 and will remain operational as long 

as weather conditions permit SIMO operations. Contact SIMO station with 2-636 RSO call 

sign in 2-636 FA survey net.

b. Coordinating Instructions.

(1) Priority of survey is, in order, to firing battery positions (A, C, B, 1-51 FA; C, A, and B, 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (33 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix A Field Artillery Support Plan

2-636 FA), radars, COLTs, OH-58D control points, and mortars.

(2) Survey sections will establish starting control at the following survey control points.

SCP NAME EASTING NORTHING ALTITUDE

MARY 525422.97 3919175.39 935.2

HELEN 531642.91 3922964.29 1054.5

(3) All surveys will be closed. Parties will report completion of surveys to 1-51 FA TOC 

over ops/F (D).

4. SERVICE SUPPORT.

Service support for 1-51 FA survey section will be provided at 1-51 FA combat trains. Service 

support for 2-636 FA survey section will be provided at 2-636 FA combat trains. Inoperable 

PADS equipment will be brought immediately to the field trains.

5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL.

a. Command. 1-51 FA RSO will direct all survey operations. He will operate from the 1-51 FA 

CP.

b. Signal. SOI KTV 1062, Edition BB in effect.

________________________

(Classification)

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appa.htm (34 of 34) [1/7/2002 1:39:40 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

RDL

Homepage

Table of

Contents

Document

Information

Download

Instructions

Appendix B

MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

One of the FA battalion CP’s most critical functions is to convert raw and processed 

intelligence information into targets. This process may be as simple as processing a call for 

fire from an observer who sees a halted tank company or as complex as correlating reports 

from divisions, corps, and national assets, fitting the pieces of the puzzle together until an 

identifiable target emerges. The end product, a target that cannons, rockets, and missiles can 

attack with measurable results, must be the focus for artillery to provide essential support 

required by the force commander. In this appendix, Section I addresses manual target data 

processing, while Section II discusses manual fire planning.

SECTION I — MANUAL TARGET DATA PROCESSING

B-01. The amount of processing needed to develop a target varies extensively. In 

AFATDS/IFSAS/FDS/LTACFIRE-equipped units, target data is transmitted and processed 

automatically on the basis of the commander's guidance and target selection standards stored 

in the computer database.

B-02. Although AFATDS/IFSAS/FDS/LTACFIRE provide automated target data 

processing, the ability to manually process target data quickly and accurately is still a valid 

requirement for the FA battalion. If automated systems fail, units must still have the 

capability to process incoming information. This appendix explains how target data are 

manually managed and processed.

RECORDING TARGET INFORMATION

B-03. Targeting information (e.g., bombing and rocketing reports) reported to the CP for 

developing targets will be forwarded and recorded first on DA Form 2185-R (Artillery 

Counterfire Information) (Figure B-1). It is divided into four portions to report information 

by block letter to avoid confusion. It should be used as a work sheet to record information 

sent by voice communications and as a prompt to ensure that a complete report is received. 

For details on DA Form 2185-R, see FM 6-121.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (1 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

Figure B-1. DA Form 2185-R

B-04. As soon as possible, transfer the information recorded on the artillery counterfire 

information form to a DA Form 4695 (Target Card) (Figure B-2). An original and one copy 

of each target card are prepared. The target card is used to chronologically store detailed 

information for quick reference in manual targeting operations. The target 

production/intelligence section in the TOC prepares the target cards. To disseminate targets, 

the original cards are circulated through all elements in the TOC before filing. Information 

in the header allows the cards to be referenced by target number and category.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (2 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

Figure B-2. Target Card

B-05. Targeting information that comes into the TOC should be passed immediately to the 

intelligence section. It will be compared to target selection standards and transcribed onto a 

target card, if necessary. Directional information that is not associated with a grid cannot be 

placed on a target card and should be placed on a ray overlay. DA Form 2185-R should be 

retained until the ray is associated with a target.

B-06. After target cards are filled out, the original should be sent to the FDC, where it is 

compared to the attack guidance. If attack guidance or other target attack criteria is met, a 

fire mission will be processed. The target should be recorded on the master target list and, if 

not initiated by the force FSE, distributed as an addition to the target list. FSCM should be 

checked and necessary coordination made before attacking the target.

B-07. The original is then sent to the operations element to keep them informed and to aid in 

FS coordination. The target is then added to appropriate schedules. Ammunition status is 

updated, if necessary and requests for additional FS are evaluated and sent to the appropriate 

agency.

B-08. After all information has been added/updated by the applicable TOC sections, the 

cards are returned to the intelligence section and filed--one by target number and the other 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (3 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

by target type, after data from one has been transcribed to the other.

B-09. Each TOC element (time permitting) should keep a duty journal to record major 

events that have occurred during their shift. Information to be recorded will be specified by 

the TSOP or the duty officer and will ease shift transition. Examples of types of information 

to be recorded should include:

● Changes in target selection standards or attack guidance.

● Changes in enemy posture, disposition or activity.

● Changes in FA missions, capabilities, or task organization.

● Changes in FSCM.

● Changes in HPTs.

RECORDING TARGETING INFORMATION (GRAPHICS)

B-10. While a detailed record of information is desirable, peak activity periods may 

preclude such meticulous procedures. Traditionally, in manual operations, plotting 

information on maps is a method of rapidly recording and displaying data. Each TOC 

element usually has at least one map.

TARGETS

B-11. Target information is recorded on the map by using target symbols and crater ray 

symbols. Do not confuse target symbols with gunnery "tick" marks. They are different in 

construction and information recorded on them.

B-12. A target symbol is a small cross with information pertaining to the target type and 

source (see Figure B-3). The upper right portion (Quadrant I) contains the target number (for 

example, AY2001). The lower right portion (Quadrant II) contains the source of the target 

and the assessed geographical accuracy (e.g., weapon-locating radar (WLR) and a 0- to 50-

meter target location error). The lower left portion (Quadrant III) contains the target 

description. The upper left part of the symbol (Quadrant IV) is used to record the last time a 

transmission was picked up from that station, the last time fires were noted from the position 

or when the target was initially located.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (4 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

Figure B-3. Target Symbol

B-13. Not all agencies that plot targets need to record all information in the target symbol. 

The FDC only needs the target number and type and occasionally target location errors 

when such errors force a modified attack response. However, the intelligence section should 

plot all information to help develop and purge targets. Supervisors should establish TSOPs 

for required elements of targeting information plotted on maps.

SUSPECT TARGETS

B-14. Plot suspect targets using dashed lines, with everything known about the target 

included. Suspect targets should only be plotted by elements that are engaged in the process 

of developing or predicting targets. Suspect targets should not be plotted on maps used to 

control allocated attack means. 

DIRECTIONAL INFORMATION

B-15. Directional information is a target indicator and is recorded by plotting rays on a ray 

overlay on the target production map. The majority of rays will be from priority target 

reports or target reports from Firefinder radars. While not a high-technology source of 

information, crater analysis is also valuable. It is the only way of confirming the caliber and, 

possibly, the type of weapon systems firing into the zone, short of physically seeing the 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (5 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

weapon fire.

CRATER RAYS

B-16. Crater rays are drawn starting at the point where the rounds impacted. They are 

oriented in the direction reported in the shell report. The impact point is represented by a 

dot, around which a small circle is drawn. The ray is drawn to the scale length of the range 

of the weapon that was associated with the shell report. If that is not known, it should be 

drawn to the range of the longest shooter in the zone (Figure B-4).

Figure B-4. Sample Crater Ray

B-17. Label the ray with all information available to aid the intelligence section in 

developing targets. Place the description of the weapon(s) that fired on top of the ray. The 

description should conform to the format specified for Quadrant III of the target symbol 

(number, caliber, and type). Take care to ensure that a rough count of rounds, the duration of 

the shelling and the nature of the volley or individual gun are included in the shell report. 

Targeting personnel should prompt or query reporting agencies to provide such information, 

as it can be used to determine the number of weapons firing. In case of a large number of 

rounds, craters should be examined to determine the number of batteries that massed on the 

target.

B-18. Label the bottom right portion of the ray with the date-time groups associated with the 

shelling. If that is not available, record the time the shelling was reported. The number on 

the right is the local file number of the target information form associated with the ray. This 

number allows an analyst to refer back to who sent the message and to view detailed 

information not presented on the ray.

B-19. Color-code all rays to avoid false correlation of data and to accelerate the correlation 

process (Table B-1). It does not eliminate the need to review the description of the rays 

before converting the intersections into a target.

Table B-1. Crater Ray Color-Coding Scheme

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (6 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

WEAPON TYPE CALIBER RANGE RAY COLOR

Heavy (cannon) 161 to 210mm Red

Medium (cannon) 121 to 160mm Green

Light (cannon) 76 to 120mm Blue

Multiple rocket launcher All calibers Orange

Mortar All calibers Yellow

Unknown -------- Black

B-20. A chance for error exists if targeting personnel fail to look at the weapon description. 

However, the number of calibers in each type of threat weapon system precludes assigning 

each caliber or type a specific color.

B-21. When three intersecting crater rays are associated with a specific caliber and noted as 

occurring within a limited period of time, normally the result is a target. Annotate this target 

by placing a point in the center of the triangle formed by the intersecting rays. It is possible 

that the triangle could be quite large. In that case, one of the rays is probably in error and the 

targeteer should wait until another ray or other information pertaining to the location is 

received. Once a target is developed or a ray is associated with a grid coordinate, transfer 

the information to a target card. The ray(s) should be removed from the map and DA Form 

2185-R placed in an inactive file.

B-22. Post the ray overlay on the intelligence section map. The overlay and order of battle 

information aid in target prediction and situation development.

FLASH RAYS

B-23. It also is possible to record an independent flash ray (observation of a flash associated 

with a measured azimuth). Flash rays are difficult to relate to a weapon system (except 

MLRS) and usually cannot be ascribed to a caliber. They can be used in association with 

other crater rays and suspect targets. All information available should be placed on the rays 

(Figure B-5).

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (7 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

Figure B-5. Flash Ray

BATTLE DAMAGE ASSESSMENT

B-24. BDA is necessary to determine the effectiveness of attacks. In the case of critical 

targets, the success of the operation may hinge on determining if an attack was successful. 

Certain BDA will be available from organic FA TA assets. The best source of BDA is direct 

observation of the target, either from the air or from the ground. While it may not be 

possible to divert a UAV or aircraft to observe a target, critical targets may require the 

tasking of an acquisition asset to accomplish BDA. This requires the identification of targets 

requiring BDA during the planning process so that the S2 can request the necessary BDA 

acquisition asset. For additional details on BDA, see FM 6-20-10. Other methods of 

assessing BDA include the following:

● Weapons-locating radars.

● EPW interrogation.

● Refugee and agent reports.

● Stay-behind teams.

● Captured documents, reports and surveys of captured terrain.

● Signal intelligence.

● Activity analysis by intelligence personnel.

PURGING TARGETS

B-25. Purging targets is one of the most difficult aspects of targeting. It is heavily dependent 

on understanding opposing force tactics and having a clear picture of the tactical situation. 

There is no standard solution for purging targets as factors that drive purging change with 

the situation and terrain.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (8 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

B-26. The increasing mobility of potential opponents has led to a reevaluation of movement 

as a survival technique for those forces. In the offense, self-propelled artillery may move as 

often as once every two missions for short distances (500 to 800 meters) to avoid 

counterfire. Command and observation posts in armored command and reconnaissance 

vehicles can function completely from within their vehicles. Similar vehicles are available 

for battery and battalion FDCs. These mobile, self-contained targets require that targeting 

personnel apply short dwell times to their locations.

B-27. Towed artillery and major unit HQ can be expected to remain in position for longer 

periods. The engineer capability to harden these targets may make them valid for longer 

periods than originally thought.

B-28. Always consider the rate of advance of opposing forces. Quickly purge forward CPs, 

command OPs, accompanying FA, and maneuver units if the rate of advance is high. Should 

the rate be low, purge these targets at the same rate as GS artillery, main HQ and other 

targets found in the division.

B-29. The dramatic increase in mobility of threat AD assets has made the concept of a 

SEAD program for close-in AD systems much more time sensitive than in the past. Onboard 

land navigation and TA systems have given short-to-medium range AD weapons the ability 

to set up and engage quickly.

B-30. Detailed tactics and terrain-dependent factors that determine purging criteria are 

provided by intelligence elements that support corps, division, and brigade. Purging 

guidance should be in writing and posted in the TOC. As targets are purged, the change in 

status must be reported to every element that maintains a target list or file.

B-31. Purging guidance should be target specific and reflect the time from acquisition to 

when the target is no longer valid. Delete targets from active files if the BDA indicates the 

target is no longer operating at that location.

SECTION II — MANUAL SCHEDULING OF FIRES

PLANNING FIRES

B-32. Fire planning is a continuous process conducted by FSCOORDs and FA TOCs at all 

levels to ensure that fires support the maneuver commander's OPLAN/OPORD. As part of 

the fire planning process, the FSCOORD, and/or FSO, nominates targets that support the 

commander's plan. Prearranged fires are planned to ensure responsive engagement when 

requested. Although some of the planned fires may apply to offensive or defensive actions 

only, others are appropriate to all types of operations and levels of combat. To facilitate 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (9 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

operations as a part of a multinational force, the US has implemented STANAG 2934

(Chapter 8)/Quadripartite Standardization Agreement (QSTAG) 515. The applicable 

provisions have been incorporated throughout the fire planning discussions. The manual fire 

planning techniques for schedules of fires are described in the following paragraphs.

PREPARATION OF THE SCHEDULING WORK SHEET

B-33. The procedure for preparing a DA Form 4656-R is outlined below. A reproducible 

copy of DA Form 4656-R (scheduling work sheet) is at the end of this appendix.

Heading

B-34. Enter the type of schedule, the supported unit, and the OPORD for which it is being 

prepared.

Line Number

B-35. This is an administrative control number. Number each line sequentially. This gives 

all holders of the schedule a means of quick reference for finding which units have been 

scheduled and specific information that relates to those targets.

Organization and Caliber

B-36. Enter the organizational information, to include caliber and weapon type, for each unit 

for which you have planning authority.

Firing Units

B-37. Enter the site and designation of the firing unit.

Scheduling Targets

B-38. To the upper right of the Firing Units column is an untitled portion of the work sheet, 

referred to as the timing block. The upper portion of the block is used by the firing units to 

establish time to fire or lanyard pull time, so that the fires impact at the scheduled times.

B-39. Information on the lower portion of the block is based on time of impact of rounds 

fired. The purpose of the block is to establish the duration of a particular schedule relative to 

time. Schedules may start at a specific time (H-hour) or may be scheduled on call (start 

plotting at time 0).

B-40. Below the timing block is a block of intersecting horizontal and vertical lines, called 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (10 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

the time matrix. It is used to assign targets to firing units. This assignment is based on the 

ability of the unit to adequately engage the target as shown by the target overlay. The time 

matrix graphically portrays time of impact and duration of fires and may refer to a specific 

shell-fuze combination to be used. This is done by representing the target to be engaged by 

either a dot (one volley) or a horizontal line (more than one volley). The interval between 

the vertical lines is based on the weapon system rate of fire and the number of different 

systems being scheduled on the same work sheet. For example, for a 155-mm howitzer, the 

normal interval is 60 seconds. Thus, a target being engaged by three 155-mm volleys would 

have a duration line three vertical lines long with impacts on each of the vertical lines. 

Another consideration in scheduling is the shift time of the weapon system being scheduled. 

Shift time is the length of time needed for the firing unit to cease firing on one target and 

commence firing on the next scheduled target.

Remarks

B-41. The REMARKS column is used to amplify information in the time matrix portion of 

the work sheet and to include information for the engagement of on-call targets. A 

parenthetical letter refers to the amplifying information in the REMARKS column. On-call 

targets are listed on the line of the firing unit assigned to engage them. Any other amplifying 

information is listed starting under the last firing unit line. No duration lines or dots are used 

for on-call targets because the duration of fire is not specified. If a unit is ordered to fire its 

on-call target while it is firing the schedule, it will:

● Leave the schedule.

● Fire its on-call target at the maximum rate of fire.

● Rejoin the schedule at real time.

● Report to its controlling headquarters scheduled targets that were not engaged and 

targets on which commander’s effects were not achieved.

B-42. It is up to the controlling headquarters to notify the commander and recommend 

appropriate action to engage these targets.

PREPARATION

B-43. The preparation is an intense volume of fire delivered in accordance with a time 

schedule to support an attack. It may include a single FS means (FA only) or multiple means 

(mortars, FA, NSFS). Normally, fires begin before H-hour and may extend beyond it. 

Usually, a DS FA battalion or higher echelon plans a FA preparation. Fires may start at a 

prescribed time or may be held on call until needed. The duration of the preparation is 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (11 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

influenced by the following factors:

● FS requirements of the force.

● Number of targets for attack.

● FS assets and ammunition on hand.

B-44. A preparation may be phased to allow successive attacks of certain types of targets, if 

time and intelligence is available to do so (Table B-2). Phase I should provide for the early 

attack of enemy FS means and observation capabilities including FA HQ and CPs. Such an 

attack degrades the enemy's ability to react with long-range indirect fires and to gain 

intelligence about the operation. Phase II should attack other CPs, communications 

facilities, assembly areas and reserves. The goal is to degrade the enemy’s ability to 

reinforce and shift forces to counter the main effort of friendly forces. The final phase 

should include defensive areas in the forward portions of enemy position areas and targets 

that pose an immediate threat to attacking troops. The purpose of this phase is to suppress 

enemy direct fire systems until friendly maneuver forces have closed with them. Provisions 

must be made to keep hostile FS means and other critical targets neutralized throughout the 

preparation, time, and ammunition permitting.

Table B-2. Potential Targets in a Preparation

PHASE I PHASE II PHASE III

Indirect fire systems

 FA/mortar positions

Operations and/or FA HQ

Command, control and 

communications facilities

Reserve and logistic sites

Assembly areas

Forward elements

B-45. When assigning FA systems to targets in the preparation, planners should, if possible, 

ensure that some fire units remain available to attack targets of opportunity. During the 

firing of a preparation, a target of opportunity may pose such a threat to the supported force 

that some FA units may have to leave the preparation to attack it. If the FA is directed to do 

so, the S3 assigns the units to fire on the target of opportunity.

B-46. If FA units are diverted from the preparation, they rejoin the preparation at the current 

point in time--not at the time they left it. For example, if a unit firing a preparation is 

diverted to a target of opportunity at H-5 and takes 4 minutes to attack that target, the unit 

would reenter the preparation at H-1. This means that some targets may not be attacked at 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (12 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

all or may be attacked by FS assets not originally planned for the preparation. The firing unit 

diverted from the preparation must report to the appropriate FSE those targets that were not 

fired or were not fired with the scheduled amount of ammunition. This information lets the 

FSCOORD and the supported maneuver commander make sound decisions for the attack of 

those targets while ensuring the safety of the attacking force.

B-47. Units must continually update preparations to purge old targets and add new ones. 

The scheduler must set a time after which no other changes can be made. This cutoff time 

varies among units and is based on training, communications, and scheduling capabilities. 

The scheduler must ensure that there is enough time for changes to be sent to firing units, 

for technical fire direction to be performed, and for ammunition to be prepared and fired. 

The maneuver commander, advised by his FSCOORD, makes the final decision as to 

whether or not to fire a preparation. His decision is based on the following:

● Will the loss of surprise from the preparation be offset by the damage done to the 

enemy?

● Are there enough targets and means to warrant a preparation?

● Can the enemy recover before the preparation fires can be exploited?

B-48. The preparation must begin and end with all fire units that are used in the preparation. 

Gaps (for example, two or more consecutive shift times) should be avoided, if possible. 

Shift time is the interval between the time a FA unit can have fires impacting on one target 

and the time it can have rounds impacting on a new target. Shift time is affected by many 

variables, for example, state of training, amount of shift and type of munitions to be fired. 

For planning and scheduling purposes, a shift time of 1 minute is established for light and 

medium (105mm and 155mm) artillery. The MLRS shift time depends on launcher 

availability. Launchers moving to new firing points may not be ready to fire for up to 20 

minutes or longer. Careful fire planning and management by MLRS battery and battalion 

personnel can ensure continuous launcher availability. As a rule, launchers do not engage 

more than one target from a single firing point. Launchers fire a second mission only in 

exceptional cases. Any gaps that do occur should be filled by refiring. Phase I targets or 

targets the maneuver commander has designated as priority targets. Units participating in the 

preparation should not begin firing on targets in a subsequent phase unless they have begun 

firing on the last target of the current phase or they have completed firing the current phase. 

This may not always be possible because some weapons may not have adequate range to fire 

at targets in all phases (Table B-3). In that case, the weapons are scheduled into the phase 

that is within their capabilities rather than being excluded altogether from the preparation. 

Fires are planned on the basis of the sustained rate of fire for each weapon system and shift 

time between targets (Table B-3).

Table B-3. Artillery Cannon and Rocket Characteristics

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (13 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

ASSET

MAXIMUM 

RANGE 

(METERS)

a. WITH RAP

b. WITHOUT 

RAP

SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE SHIFT 

TIME

SP 155mm howitzer

M109A5/A6

a. 30,000

b. 22,000

1 round per minute 1 minute

SP 227mm MLRS M270 a. NA

b. 30,000

1 round per 4.5 seconds N/A

Towed 105mm howitzer

M119A1

a. 19,500 (IRAP)

15,400 (RAP)

b. 14,300

3 rounds per minute for first 30 

minutes

1 round per minute thereafter

1 minute

Towed 105mm howitzer 

M102

a. 15,100

b. 11,500

3 rounds per minute 1 minute

Towed 155mm howitzer 

M198

a. 30,000

b. 22,400

2 rounds per minute for first 30 

minutes

1 round per minute thereafter

1 minute

LEGEND:

IRAP - improved rocket-assisted projectile

COUNTERPREPARATION

B-49. Usually, a DS FA battalion or higher echelon plans a counter-preparation each time 

the supported force makes an extended halt. These intensive fires are delivered just before 

the start of an enemy attack. They are designed to:

● Disrupt or delay the enemy's attack formations.

● Disorganize his command, control, and communications.

● Impair his TA efforts.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (14 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

● Decrease the effectiveness of his fire and maneuver.

● Destroy his personnel and equipment.

● Reduce his offensive spirit.

B-50. Counterpreparations normally have two phases. Initial fires (Phase I) should provide 

for early and simultaneous attack of enemy forward elements, indirect fire systems, and 

observation posts. Phase II fires should attack the enemy's command posts, communications, 

and reserves while neutralization of his indirect fire systems continues. Fires from 

participating units should begin and end together when possible, and gaps should be 

avoided. When targets are scheduled in a counterpreparation, it is important that the firing 

begin on the last targets of one phase at the same time or before firing begins on the first 

targets of the succeeding phase. Shift times and sustained rates of fire discussed above for a 

preparation also apply for a counterpreparation.

Table B-4. Sample of Targets Phased in a Counterpreparation

PHASE I PHASE II

Indirect fire systems Command and control facilities

Forward elements Logistic sites

Reserves and assembly areas

Communications facilities

B-51. The maneuver commander, on advice from his FSCOORD, decides when to fire the 

counterpreparation. Premature firing should be avoided to prevent disclosing targets for 

enemy counterfires. Counterpreparations are scheduled as on-call, since the firing normally 

depends on enemy initiative.

B-52. Fires from participating units begin and end together and as in the preparation, gaps 

should be avoided. When targets are scheduled in a counterpreparation, it is important that 

firing begin on the last targets of one phase at the same time or before firing begins on the 

first targets of the succeeding phase. Shift times and sustained rates of fire discussed earlier 

for a preparation also apply for the counterpreparations.

GROUPS, PROGRAMS and SERIES

B-53. Several fire planning techniques are useful when fire is desired on multiple targets. 

Groups, programs, or series of targets can be established in these situations. The manner in 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (15 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

which each of these is graphically shown, the level at which it is established and its purpose 

are discussed below.

Groups

B-54. A group of targets consists of two or more targets on which simultaneous fires are 

desired. The fact that targets are included in a group does not preclude the attack of 

individual targets within the group. For FA fires, the DS battalion FDC is the lowest echelon 

that can form and implement a group of targets. The FSCOORD or FSO, determining the 

need for a group of targets, directs that the DS battalion FDC schedule the group. The 

planning and scheduling of groups of targets can be a time-consuming process. The groups 

can require considerable firing assets and limit the ability of the unit to mass fires on any 

single target. If the FDC does not have the assets available to fire the groups, it may pass the 

request to the force artillery or next higher artillery CP for planning.

B-55. Graphically display a group (Figure B-6) by circling the targets and identifying the 

group with a group designator. The designator consists of the two letters assigned to the 

block of target numbers allocated to a unit (for example, maneuver brigade, or DIVARTY 

TOC) with a number inserted between the two letters. For example, if a brigade is assigned 

the letters BC, its first group of targets is designated B1C, the second is B2C and so on.

Figure B-6. Group of Targets

B-56. List groups of targets on the scheduling work sheet (See Figure B-7). Groups of 

targets normally are fired on call of the supported unit. Schedule groups so that initial fires 

strike the targets simultaneously. On the top line of the scheduling work sheet, enter the 

group number. Below the group number, list the targets of the group opposite the firing unit 

assigned the targets. Below each target number, show the number of rounds to be fired. No 

line or dot is drawn between the target number and the ammunition. More than one group 

can be scheduled on the same scheduling work sheet.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (16 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

Figure B-7. Example Scheduling Work Sheet - Groups of Target

B-57. A firing unit can be scheduled for only one target in each group. More than one firing 

unit can be scheduled against a single target if needed.

Programs

B-58. A program of targets is a predetermined sequential attack of targets of a similar nature 

(Figure B-8). Targets in a particular program are normally of the same type (for example, all 

AD targets, all C2, or all mortar targets) and are selected and planned based on the 

commander's guidance. A program may be initiated on call or at a specific time or event.

Figure B-8. Scheduling Work Sheet - Counter-Op Program

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (17 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

B-59. Each type of program is scheduled starting at 0 and extending as long as needed. A 

line indicates duration of fires. A dot indicates a single volley impacting simultaneously at a 

given time (e.g., the single volley may be a battery, battalion, or DIVARTY). Once a 

program is initiated, targets within the program are fired in a predetermined sequence as 

shown in the schedule. Normally, the lowest echelon that designates and plans programs of 

targets is the DS FA battalion. There are no special graphics associated with a program of 

targets. Programs appear on scheduling work sheets and schedules of fires.

Series

B-60. A series of targets consists of a number of targets and/or groups of targets planned for 

firing in a specific sequence to support a maneuver operation. The DS battalion FDC is the 

lowest echelon authorized to form and implement a series of targets. Series are planned by 

FSCOORDs or FSOs to support the maneuver commander’s scheme of maneuver. It may be 

executed on call or at a specific time or event. It is scheduled to start at 0.

B-61. Once a series is begun, targets and groups within the series are fired in a 

predetermined time sequence. Simultaneous attack of targets in a group within a series is as 

requested by the initiator or as determined by the FA fire planner. Attack is based on the 

nature of the targets and the requirements of the force commander. Groups need not be fired 

as groups when fired as part of a series unless requested.

B-62. Graphically, a series is shown as individual and/or groups of targets within a 

prescribed area (Figure B-9). The series is assigned a code name or a nickname.

Figure B-9. Series of Targets (with a Group as part of the Series)

B-63. The fact that a series of targets has been formed does not preclude the attack of 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (18 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

individual targets and/or groups of targets within the series. As with groups, manual 

planning and scheduling of series of targets can be a time-consuming process and may 

require fires from supporting FA units. A scheduling work sheet is prepared for each series 

of targets requested (Figure B-10).

Figure B-10. Example Scheduling Work Sheet - Series of Targets

ILLUMINATION AND SMOKE

B-64. Some targets have a specified duration of fire, but the ammunition requirements are 

unknown, for example, smoke and illumination targets on which expenditures are affected 

by wind speed and direction. Fire planners complete the illumination and/or smoke schedule 

as follows:

● Indicate, by a horizontal line, the time on target and duration of fire.

● Place the target above this line.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (19 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

● Below the line, center a subscript keyed to a remark in the REMARKS column that 

shows the method of engagement (for example, two-gun illumination, lateral or 

range spread, first rounds WP and HC, succeeding rounds HC).

● When scheduling smoke, back off 1 minute to allow for buildup time (if using HC 

only and not WP for initial rounds). Buildup time is not to be used when firing on the 

same target. The maneuver commander must realize that because of weather, smoke 

fires cannot have guaranteed effects. When asking for smoke, the commander must 

be explicit in his intention. The FSCOORD must specifically look at alternative 

methods of achieving the intention if the smoke is not effective. This can be done by 

planning on-call HE targets to suppress selected areas (Figure B-11).

Figure B-11. Example Scheduling Work Sheet - Smoke and Illumination

FINAL PROTECTIVE FIRES

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (20 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

B-65. Final protective fires are immediately available fires designed to create a barrier to 

impede enemy movements across defensive lines or areas. They are integrated with the 

commander's defensive plans and are intended for use primarily against dismounted 

infantry. Maneuver brigade commanders allocate FPFs to maneuver battalions, which in 

turn allocate them to their companies. The FPFs are allocated one per FA firing unit and one 

per mortar section or platoon. When they are not engaged in another fire mission, weapons 

are laid on firing data for FPFs. This ensures immediate responses to calls for FPFs. The 

shape and pattern of these fires may be varied to suit the tactical situation on the basis of the 

supported company commander’s desires. Authority to call for the FPFs is vested in the 

supported company commander or platoon leader in whose area they are located. On the 

target list work sheet, a target is designated as a FPF target by placing the letters "FPF" in 

the REMARKS column space for that particular target. Show FPF targets by their 

designated target numbers.

SCATTERABLE MINES

B-66. SCATMINE is scheduled similar to other munitions, however, it may be more 

difficult to properly schedule due to the lengthy times required to emplace some 

SCATMINE minefields. Because SCATMINE planning can complicate the scheduling 

process, the S3 and FDO should ensure that accurate information on the location and size of 

the minefield is received early in the planning process. See FM 6-40, FM 6-20-40, and FM 6-

20-50 for additional details on manual SCATMINE planning procedures.

MLRS FIRE PLANNING

B-67. Since MLRS fire planning procedures deviate in some ways from the traditional fire 

planning methods, MLRS fire planning is discussed separately. Different procedures are 

required because of MLRS characteristics (its munitions, range capability, and volume of 

fire), and the MLRS employment doctrine (shoot-and-scoot tactics, and use of hide 

positions).

PLANNING AND COORDINATION 

B-68. In support of force operations, MLRS uses two basic types of fire missions - 

scheduled (rocket fire plans) and unscheduled (all others). With DPICM, the MLRS has a 

high volume of fire to a range of 30 km. This makes it particularly effective against the 

following:

● Large or inaccurately located targets.

● Enemy artillery and ADA systems.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (21 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

● C3 systems.

● Assembly areas (vehicles and/or personnel) and logistics sites.

● HPT beyond the range of cannon artillery.

B-69. Ammunition resupply is a problem for all weapon systems, but is a particularly 

important consideration for MLRS. FA planners must work closely with logistics planners 

to ensure adequate resupply of MLRS units.

B-70. MLRS ammunition consumption rates, ammunition resupply, and fire control system 

configuration concerns dictate that MLRS be limited mainly to the attack of HPTs. HPTs 

characteristics will differ from operation to operation depending on enemy and friendly 

force postures. Targeting priorities for the MLRS normally are:

● HPTs 15 to 30 km from the FLOT.

● HPTs 0 to 15 km from the FLOT that cannon artillery cannot effectively engage.

● Other targets 15 to 30 km from the FLOT.

● Other targets 0 to 15 km from the FLOT that cannon artillery cannot effectively 

engage.

CAUTION

To prevent the possibility of fratricide, MLRS should not engage targets closer than 2 

km from friendly forces.

B-71. To plan MLRS fires, the fire planner must understand the response posture system 

used for reporting the status of the self-propelled launcher-loaders (SPLLs) of the MLRS 

unit. They are designated as being in a hot, cool or cold status by the MLRS battery FDC. 

Definitions and response times for the various response postures are shown below. This 

system helps the FDO select the MLRS launcher (or launchers) to fire a mission and helps 

the fire planner know the availability of MLRS fires.

B-72. The HQ performing fire planning for an MLRS unit must know how many launchers 

are currently in a hot status, how many launchers can be brought to a hot status, and how 

long it will take to bring them to a hot status.

B-73. When the fires of an MLRS unit are scheduled, each MLRS launcher is considered a 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (22 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

fire unit. If all six launchers in a battery were hot, then the scheduling work sheet would 

have six lines for MLRS - one for each launcher. The Firing Units column of the target list 

work sheet is left blank for MLRS units. The MLRS battery FDC selects the launcher to 

fire.

B-74. When scheduling the fires of MLRS units, fire planners should never plan more 

targets than the total number of launchers that can be brought to a hot status by the time the 

targets must be fired, even if those targets use less than a full launcher load of rockets. Since 

a launcher can fire no more than 12 rockets per mission, targets requiring more than 12 

rockets must be scheduled for two or more launchers. (See Table B-5.)

Table B-5. MLRS Response Postures

RESPONSE 

POSTURE DEFINITION TIME FROM RECEIPT OF MISSION TO FIRING

Hot Fully operational, ready for a fire mission 3 minutes plus travel time from hide area 

to firing position1

Cool Fully operational except that the 

stabilization reference package is turned 

off; requires time for the gyro to stabilize 

before it can fire

Hot response time plus 7 1/2 minutes1

Cold Out of action 30 minutes if the launcher is mission 

capable

1This assumes a zero response time by the crew.

B-75. Because of the difficulty in accurately determining the time required for an MLRS 

launcher to move from one firing position to another, each launcher normally is scheduled 

only once in a schedule of fires. If the schedule is long (more than 30 minutes) and the 

MLRS commander can give the fire planner an accurate estimate of the time it will take the 

launcher to move to a new firing position and be ready to fire (including time for 

ammunition resupply), a launcher may be scheduled to fire on more than one target. It also 

is possible that a launcher can fire one mission, move to another firing point, and fire again. 

However, this situation is not expected to occur often.

B-76. When preparing a scheduling work sheet for MLRS, do not use lines to show the 

duration of firing. Instead of lines, a dot is used between the target number and the number 

of rockets to be fired, regardless of how many rockets are fired or the duration of firing. The 

only exception to this rule is in the scheduling of groups, when neither dots nor lines are 

used. Examples of remarks that might appear on a scheduling work sheet for MLRS are 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (23 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

shown in Figure B-12.

Figure B-12. Example Scheduling Work Sheet - MLRS Counterpreparation

B-77. The preferred manner to fire MLRS in a fire plan is through the designation of a NLT 

TOT. This gives the MLRS unit greater flexibility and facilitates its firing of the targets on 

the schedule.

B-78. The time interval between rocket firings can be specified. This interval can be 

between 4.5 and 99.9 seconds. Even though the internal between rockets can be as long as 

99.9 seconds, for reasons of survivability, the interval should be short enough that all 

rockets are fired within 2 minutes. If no interval is stated, the rockets will be fired at 

maximum rate of fire, approximately 5 seconds between rockets.

B-79. If all available launchers fire on schedule, temporary loss of this FS asset can be 

expected for 20 to 45 minutes as launchers move to update points, reload, and return to hide 

or firing points.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (24 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

COUNTERPREPARATIONS, PROGRAMS, and SERIES

B-80. These schedules are not normally fired at specific times. Instead, they are fired on call 

and are usually keyed to a specific event or maneuver phase. (See the counterpreparation 

scheduling worksheet, Figure B-12.)

B-81. When MLRS fires are planned on these schedules, a significant buffer time of 3 

minutes (plus move time) is necessary for hot launchers. The buffer time for a hot launcher 

is needed because before a launcher can fire, it must move from its hide position to a launch 

position, orient itself for location, and direction and compute firing data. A 10 1/2 - minute 

buffer time (plus move time) is needed for cool launchers. The longer buffer time is required 

to bring the launcher from a cool to a hot status.

B-82. Whenever possible, the MLRS unit should be given a not-before time and not-after 

time to fire a target. This allows the MLRS FDC more flexibility in selecting a launcher to 

fire and a TOT for each target.

B-83. Because MLRS units normally fire only one target per launcher in a 

counterpreparation, the scheduling rules concerning gaps in the schedule and starting and 

ending the schedule with all units firing do not apply to MLRS. However, the rules for 

phasing and refiring are applied as required.

B-84. MLRS fires are usually directed at HPTs. Therefore, the MLRS may be assigned 

targets that must be fired at a specific point in the counterpreparation rather than in the 

appropriate phase. Critical targets fired by MLRS may be refired by cannon units (or in rare 

instances by another MLRS launcher). Normally, MLRS will not refire targets originally 

fired by a cannon unit.

GROUPS

B-85. Groups may at times be scheduled for fire by MLRS units (see Figure B-13). Groups 

must be planned with one or more launchers firing on each target. Also, MLRS and cannon 

units may be scheduled on targets in the same group; however, close coordination must be 

made between cannon and MLRS unit FDCs to ensure that the targets in the group are fired 

simultaneously. When given the order to fire the group, the MLRS FDC will fire the mission 

as a TOT or AMC mission, causing fires to fall simultaneously on all targets in the group.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (25 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

Figure B-13. Example Scheduling Work Sheet - MLRS Groups of Targets

PREPARATIONS

B-86. Because preparations are keyed to a specific H-hour, MLRS units can fire at any 

predesignated time during the preparation. This also applies to programs and series (See the 

preparation scheduling work sheet Figure B-14). Close coordination with the MLRS unit is 

necessary to ensure that enough launchers are in position to meet the preparation schedule.

B-87. As with counterpreparations, all scheduling rules apply except those concerning gaps 

and starting and ending with all units firing.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (26 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

Figure B-14. Example Scheduling Work Sheet - MLRS Preparation

OTHER SCHEDULES

B-88. Programs of interdiction fires will normally be a series of TOT missions given to the 

MLRS battery. The not-before and not-after times discussed earlier also can be used.

B-89. MLRS normally will not be assigned a mission that would cause its involvement in a 

quickfire plan. The reason is its inability to operate on more than one voice net and one 

digital external radio net. If MLRS is included in a quickfire plan, the same techniques used 

to schedule a series should be used.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (27 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix B MANUAL TARGETING AND FIRE PLANNING

Figure B-15. Scheduling Work Sheet (Example/Reduced)

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appb.htm (28 of 28) [1/7/2002 1:39:55 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix C Environmental Awareness

RDL

Homepage

Table of

Contents

Document

Information

Download

Instructions

Appendix C

Environmental Awareness

All leaders and soldiers have specific duties and responsibilities concerning protection of the 

environment. Not all leaders are required to be environmental experts; however, they must 

be aware of and responsive to environmental compliance and prevention issues. 

Environmental stewardship is an inherent responsibility of national service for all Army 

personnel. This appendix provides an overview of responsibilities and duties necessary to 

build a foundation of basic environmental awareness. Throughout are references to material 

for further reading. Research these other documents to obtain a complete explanation of 

legal and ethical responsibilities. All training and operations must be closely coordinated 

with the installation's environmental office and environmental attorney to ensure compliance 

with all federal, state, and local requirements.

SECTION I — ARMY ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS

GENERAL POLICY STATEMENTS

C-01. The Army's environmental vision states: "The Army will be a national leader in 

environmental and natural resource stewardship for present and future generations as an 

integral part of our mission". To achieve this vision, the Army's environmental strategy 

places a high priority on sustained compliance with all environmental laws; takes into 

account the restoration of previously contaminated sites; focuses on pollution prevention; 

and accounts for the conservation and preservation of natural resources. 

C-02. The Army environmental ethic calls for the chain of command to establish and 

support a stewardship climate which supports compliance, obeying the law; prevention, the 

concept of reduce, reuse, recycle; conservation, control and protection of natural resources; 

and restoration, the cleanup of contaminated areas. This ethic requires realistic, effective 

training — based on identification of the environmental realities and implementation of 

adequate protective measures. This ethic views our training areas as valuable multi-use 

resources that will lose their intrinsic training and health and welfare value unless they are 

properly managed and protected from excessive wear and tear.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appc.htm (1 of 16) [1/7/2002 1:40:00 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix C Environmental Awareness

C-03. All Army personnel should become familiar with these policy statements; they are 

established so that our natural environment will be available for present and future 

generations. Complete information regarding these polices can be obtained in Section II of 

The Field Artillery Guide to Environmental Considerations.

SECTION II — FA BATTALION ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS

FIELD ACTIVITIES

C-04. A FA battalion is a highly effective, lethal combat force that requires large areas of 

land for training. The vehicles, weapons, ammunition, materials, and types of operations 

required for effective training can present a threat to our environment unless they are 

employed prudently and in consideration of environmental preservation. This section will 

identify and address the various preventive measures that can be utilized in order to decrease 

possible environmental damage while allowing realistic training. 

C-05. Key field environmental considerations include, but are not limited to, the following:

● Wheeled and tracked combat vehicles should stay on established roads, trails, firing 

points, and firebreaks, unless conducting specific cross-country maneuver exercises. 

Additionally, confine pivot turns and neutral steers to the middle of the roadway.

● Follow land contours rather than driving up and down hills or along creeks.

● In order to minimize siltation of streams; use bridges or low water crossings when 

crossing permanent streams. If crossing through a stream becomes necessary, then do 

so by the most direct route (90-degree angle).

● Establish refueling and maintenance areas away from wetlands, drainage areas, and 

near or over water sources.

● Federal law prohibits the removal of artifacts from federal property. Do not excavate, 

remove, damage, or otherwise alter or deface any archaeological resource located on 

a military reservation.

● Avoid and mark off-limit areas for known archaeological sites during military 

training exercises. Penalties can be up to $250,000 for knowingly disturbing a site.

● Be aware of and avoid nesting, bedding, and habitats of all species of birds and 

animals. Mark as off-limits, designated threatened or endangered species areas.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appc.htm (2 of 16) [1/7/2002 1:40:00 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix C Environmental Awareness

● Use camouflage netting instead of live vegetation.

● When planning training activities, conform to installation and community noiseabatement regulations. Identify and mark the off-limit boundaries.

● Open fires, such as burning of garbage, refuse, and rubbish are not allowed on range 

areas. For burning excess powder increments (cannon units), use only designated 

powder burn sites.

● Conform to field sanitation and medical standards when using soakage pits for wash 

water, liquid kitchen wastes, and grease traps per FM 21-10, Field Hygiene and 

Sanitation.

● Establish field satellite-accumulation site and procedures.

● Police field locations and establish field trash-collection point and procedures. 

Remove materials packed into training areas on departure from the training areas.

● When the training exercise is complete, repair any field damage such as ruts from 

vehicles, foxholes, and other emplacements.

● Conduct all training with a concern for conservation and future use of range training 

areas.

MUNITIONS

C-06. The point at which munitions are considered wastes is a matter of law and regulation 

for the area where the installation is located. The summary below is a generic review of 

requirements of the Resource Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA) Munitions Rule that has 

been adopted in many states. Since rules and guidelines vary based on location, units should 

consult with the local installation's environmental program and legal staff concerning 

possible munitions waste. 

● Munitions and ordnance are not considered wastes when used for their intended 

purpose. Intended use includes:

■ Use in training activities, including training in the proper destruction of 

unused propellant bags/increments or other munitions (this includes the 

burning of excess propellant bags/increments that occurs during live-fire FA 

cannon training);

■ Use in research, development, testing, and evaluation of munitions, weapons, 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appc.htm (3 of 16) [1/7/2002 1:40:00 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix C Environmental Awareness

or weapons systems;

■ Recovery, collection, and on-range destruction of unexploded ordnance and 

munitions fragments during range clearance activities;

■ Unused munitions or components are being repaired, reused, recycled, 

reclaimed, disassembled, reconfigured, or otherwise subject to materials 

recovery activities.

● Unused munitions are considered waste when:

■ Abandoned by being disposed of, burned, detonated (except during intended 

use), incinerated, or treated prior to disposal; or

■ Removed from storage for the purpose of being disposed of, burned, or 

incinerated, or treated prior to disposal; or 

■ Deteriorated or damage to the point it cannot be put into serviceable condition 

and cannot be recycled or used for other purposes; or

■ Declared a waste by authorized military personnel.

● Used or fired munitions are considered waste when:

■ Transported off range for purposes of storage, reclamation, treatment, 

disposal, or treatment prior to disposal; or

■ Recovered, collected, and then disposed of by burial or landfilling either on or 

off range; or

■ Fired off-range and not promptly rendered safe and/or retrieved.

HAZARDOUS MATERIAL AND HAZARDOUS WASTE

C-07. The RCRA is the framework for managing hazardous waste and has established 

standards for identifying, classifying, and storing of these wastes. RCRA regulations require 

those involved in managing hazardous substances to be properly trained, and the training to 

be properly documented. Units needing to transport hazardous substances should contact 

their installation environmental officer and/or DRMO to ensure compliance with the 

Hazardous Materials Transportation Act.

C-08. Key hazardous material and hazardous waste environmental considerations include, 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appc.htm (4 of 16) [1/7/2002 1:40:00 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix C Environmental Awareness

but are not limited to, the following items: 

● Personnel dealing with hazardous materials must be trained in proper handling, 

containment, cleanup, and reporting procedures.

● A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) must be on file, and made available to all 

personnel regarding hazardous material.

● Hazardous waste containers must be kept closed when not in use, free of rust and 

leaks, and stored separately from incompatible wastes.

● Incompatible wastes must never be transported on the same vehicle.

● Never allow the accumulation of more than 55 gallons of a hazardous waste, or 1 

quart of acutely hazardous waste, at the satellite accumulation point. (A satellite 

accumulation area is generally the designated area or point of generation of a 

hazardous waste, which will store the waste until it is sent out for processing.) 

Process all hazardous waste in a timely manner (label the accumulation point with 

the date of the accumulation to ensure the time limit is not exceeded).

● Calcium hydroxide, a by-product formed from using the hydrogen generator set 

(AN/TMQ-3), is an environmental hazard. Conform to installation policy when 

storing, handling, and disposing of this waste.

● Methanol and methanol in water is used with the hydrogen generator (AN/TMQ-42); 

both are hazardous materials due to flammability and toxicity. Conform to 

installation policy when storing, handling, and disposing of this waste.

● Bore cleaner waste (cannon units). Is a chlorinated hydrocarbon product used? If so, 

how is the waste disposed?

● Battery electrolyte (acid) from damaged batteries should be drained and disposed of 

through turn-in via installation policy and maintenance TSOP. Refer to TB 43-0134, 

Battery Disposition and Disposal, for complete procedures regarding battery 

handling and disposal.

● Ensure all Department of Transportation (DOT) and hazardous waste transportation 

requirements are met prior to transporting hazardous material or hazardous waste on 

public highways.

● Check with local environmental office for transportation procedures within the 

installation boundary.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appc.htm (5 of 16) [1/7/2002 1:40:00 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix C Environmental Awareness

● For more information on storing and handling of hazardous materials refer to TM 38-

410, Storage and Handling of Hazardous Materials.

MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET

C-09. A MSDS is a summary of information on a given chemical identifying material, 

health and physical hazards, exposure limits, and precautions. A MSDS describes the 

hazards of a material and provides information on how the material can be safely handled, 

used, and stored. Insist on receiving a copy of a MSDS when receiving a hazardous 

chemical from supply, and retain it for when or if you turn in the material. Periodically 

review each MSDS pertaining to your unit. This will assure a quick response when 

identifying symptoms and handling emergencies.

C-10. Unfortunately, there is no specified format for a MSDS, and it doesn't contain all 

known data of a chemical, but there are typical components. These are outlined in 29 Code 

of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1910.1200. Use the following information as a guide toward 

what to expect on most MSDS forms.

Table C-1. Material Safety Data Sheet

SECTION/TOPIC CONTENTS

Section 1 - General Information Manufacturers' name and address.

Trade or common name of product.

Section 2 - Hazardous Components National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health and/or 

Chemical Abstract System Number.

Chemical name and percentage.

Section 3 - Physical Properties Boiling point, freezing point, water solubility.

Appearance and odor under normal conditions.

Section 4 - Fire & Explosion Hazard Fire-fighting equipment.

Any unusual fire and explosion hazards.

Section 5 - Health Hazard Routes of entry into the body.

Emergency and first aid procedures.

Section 6 - Reactivity Data Conditions to avoid. Incompatibility with other materials.

Section 8 - Control Measures Recommended respiratory and ventilation.

Personal protective equipment, if needed.

Section 9 - Special Precautions Handling and storing precautions.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appc.htm (6 of 16) [1/7/2002 1:40:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix C Environmental Awareness

Section 10 - Transportation Applicable regulations. Hazards class and required labeling.

MAINTENANCE

C-11. The BMO acts as the hazardous material/ hazardous waste (HM/HW) spill 

coordinator. He/she ensures the accountability, proper storage, and disposal of all HM/HW, 

and ensures that HM/HW spills are immediately contained and reported. Additionally, the 

BMO reports nonfunctional/inoperative treatment/collection facilities (such as oil/grease 

interceptors, floor drains, or catch basins) to the installation environmental office through 

the unit environmental compliance officer (ECO).

C-12. Key maintenance environmental considerations include, but are not limited to, the 

following:

● Motor maintenance areas require TSOPs and close monitoring. Maintenance 

operations are continuous sources of minor pollution to storm drainage systems due 

to the constant threat of a spill of fuel or oil. TSOPs for prevention or cleanup of 

spills should be posted in motor maintenance areas, and should be understood by all 

personnel involved in maintenance activities.

● Refueling operation TSOPs should address practices to minimize spills.

● Implement preventive maintenance on all heavy equipment to ensure petroleum 

products will not be released from the belly pan.

● Ensure pollutants are not discharged into storm or washrack drains or poured on the 

ground or along fence lines. Some common pollutants are oil, solvents, soap, diesel, 

gasoline, battery acid, chemicals, waste antifreeze, paint, and grease.

● Parts containing asbestos, such as brake shoes, clutch plates, and equipment 

insulation, should be removed, collected, and disposed according to installation 

policy.

● The least hazardous or preferably, non-hazardous material to perform a function 

should be used, unless previous research of options clearly indicates otherwise. The 

Defense Logistics Agency (DLA) produces a manual, Environmental Products, to 

assist in this process.

● Do not mix fuel, oil, or antifreeze together. This is considered a mixed waste.

SUPPLY

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appc.htm (7 of 16) [1/7/2002 1:40:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix C Environmental Awareness

C-13. The supply sergeant is required to have a complete inventory of HM/HW generated 

by the unit. He/she must also know what chemicals the unit requires, where and how they 

are stored, how much hazardous waste is generated, and necessary spill response 

procedures. The supply sergeant should coordinate with the unit S3 or ECO to ensure this 

information is incorporated into the unit TSOP. 

C-14. Key supply environmental considerations include, but are not limited to, the following 

items:

● Requisition only supplies needed and authorized, avoid excessive stockpiling of 

materials.

● Maintain an accurate inventory in unit TSOP of hazardous waste used by the 

generating unit. This listing should include waste by volume, type, generating 

process, and location.

● Use of used oil tanks for disposal of solvents, antifreeze, or other HM/HW is against 

regulation. Storage of hazardous material must be in clearly marked DOT-approved 

containers.

● Actively support a unit-recycling program.

● Ensure tires and batteries are properly turned in for recycling.

● Ensure used batteries are turned in on a one-for-one basis.

SPILL RESPONSE

C-15. Generally, only persons specifically trained to respond to a spill should handle unit 

spills. However, all personnel must, at a minimum, report the spill, and be aware of the 

following four basic steps to spill response: 

● Protect yourself. Use personal protective equipment specified in the MSDS.

● Stop the flow. This may be as simple as placing the container upright or closing a 

valve.

● Contain the spill. Place absorbent material around the spill, and protect drains and 

ditches.

● Report the spill. Notify supervisor, and other key personnel. Also, notify applicable 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appc.htm (8 of 16) [1/7/2002 1:40:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix C Environmental Awareness

federal, state, and local environmental regulatory agencies if the amount of spilled 

material exceeds reportable quantities specified by the regulators.

C-16. Each unit is responsible for the cleanup of their own spills, as long as no personnel are 

put in danger. After the above four steps are completed, take the necessary steps to cleanup 

the spill. Information on cleanup procedures can be found on the MSDS, and unit TSOP. 

Also, the unit must contact installation environmental staff for guidance. Turn in the spilled 

material and absorbent to the Defense Reutilization Marketing Office (DRMO), or another 

designated point if a DRMO is not available. Also, ensure there are adequate spill supplies 

on-hand for future use.

C-17. Key spill prevention, response, and cleanup considerations include, but are not limited 

to, the following items: 

● A spill prevention and response section must be included in the unit TSOP outlining 

installation spill plan requirements. Unit spill contingency procedures for spills of 

oil, fuel, or other hazardous materials or wastes must comply with response and 

reporting requirements of local, state, and federal environmental regulatory agencies.

● Each unit must maintain a spill cleanup kit near any satellite-accumulation area, or 

where a potential for spill exists. The kit must contain, at a minimum, absorbent 

material, shovel, brooms, gloves, and appropriate containers. Units that have a 

potential for release or spill that may impact streams must also maintain booms for 

containment.

● Drip pans must be used under vehicles and equipment where spills are likely to 

occur.

● All topsoil contaminated with oil must be removed, properly disposed, and replaced 

by the unit. While awaiting disposal, keep the excavated soil covered to prevent 

runoff in case of rain.

SECTION III — REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

LAWS AND REGULATIONS

C-18. Military facilities are subject to federal, state, local, and host nation environmental 

laws. When the requirements differ, the most stringent law applies. Ignorance of 

environmental laws is not an excuse for non-compliance, and it will not protect 

commanders, soldiers, or the military services from civil and criminal liability. Figure C-1

lists the federal and military laws and regulations that are frequently encountered by Army 

personnel; however, it is not inclusive of all requirements.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appc.htm (9 of 16) [1/7/2002 1:40:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix C Environmental Awareness

Figure C-1. Environmental Laws and Regulations

C-19. Additionally, environmental law varies with differing countries, states, and cities. 

What is legal in one area may be illegal in another. Commanders and trainers should consult 

with their installation environmental office to ensure they are knowledgeable of local 

regulations and policies.

C-20. Army units outside the United States that are not subject to federal environmental 

regulations decreed by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) should comply with the 

final governing standards of the host nation. In areas where a host nation has minimal or no 

environmental laws and regulations, comply with the Overseas Environmental Baseline 

Guidance Document provided by the Department of Defense, AR 200-1, Environmental 

Protection and Enhancement, and AR 200-2, Environmental Effects of Army Actions.

REGULATORY TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

C-21. Commanders must be aware of, and comply with requirements for environmental 

training. This training may be at the awareness level for all personnel or at a more 

specialized level designed for specific personnel. The installation environmental and safety 

offices can best assist in determining your training requirements and who to contact for 

additional information. Table C-2 is provided as a reference of possible training 

requirements for the FA battalion.

Table C-2. Regulatory Training Requirements

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appc.htm (10 of 16) [1/7/2002 1:40:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix C Environmental Awareness

NOTE: The depth or level of training will vary between target audiences. For example, K and E will 

need in-depth training, while A will only require broad overviews. The letters K, E, N, or A denotes 

target audience, and are listed below:

Knowledge Personnel who administer, implement, or comply with contents of regulations such as 

program manager and technicians in the environmental field. Also includes organizations 

that need in-depth knowledge of the environmental laws/regulations/programs, such as 

staff judge advocates.

Executors All personnel who supervise or actually handle responsibilities dealing with 

environmental programs, to include ECOs, technicians, and workers. Also includes unit 

personnel required to execute responsibilities with environmental ramifications as part of 

their mission.

Need to 

Know

Personnel who may encounter environmental issues as part of their mission. This may 

include personnel within the following activities: engineers; designers; emergency 

personnel; safety; reserve components; first-line supervisors; crew chiefs; NCO's; and 

various unit personnel as identified by the installation environmental office and their 

supervisors

Awareness Public affairs offices, reserve components, other unit personnel.

Training Topic Regulatory Reference K E N A

Hazardous Materials/Waste Compliance 

Training

29 CFR 1200; 40 CFR 262.34, 264.16, 

265.16; 49 CFR 172

* * * *

Hazardous Waste Operations 

(HAZWOPER) for Installation 

Restoration (IR)

29 CFR 1910.120 * *

HAZWOPER for Treatment Storage 

and Disposal Facilities

29 CFR 1910.120 * *

Emergency Response to Hazardous 

Materials Incidents/Hazardous Material 

Technician

29 CFR 1910.120 * * *

National Environmental Policy Act 

(NEPA)

NEPA of 1969 * *

National Historic Preservation Act 

(NHPA)

36 CFR part 800, 36 CFR part 63, 

NHPA of 1966

* *

Archaeological Resources Protection 

Act (ARPA)

43 CFR 7.7 (4) ARPA of 1979 *

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appc.htm (11 of 16) [1/7/2002 1:40:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix C Environmental Awareness

Native American Graves Protection and 

Repatriation Act (NAGPRA)

NAGPRA of 1990 *

EPCRA/Superfund Amendment 

Reauthorization Act (SARA)

EPCRA/SARA 1986 Title 3, Executive 

Order 12856

* * * *

Lead Based Paint Lead Based Paint Exposure Reduction 

Act of 1992, 24 CFR 35

* * * *

Asbestos 40 CFR part 763, 40 CFR 61 part M * * * *

Endangered Species Act (ESA) ESA 1973 as amended, 50 CFR par 402 * *

Clean Water Act (CWA) CWA S 311 * * *

Storm Water Pollution Prevention 

Planning

CWA S 319 * * *

Chloroflourocarbon (CFC)/Halon 

Refrigerants

EO 11051, 40 CFR 82.40, 40 CFR 282, 

58 FR 92 (p. 28660)

* * *

Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and 

Rodenticide Act (FIFRA)

FIFRA of 1972, 40 CFR 265.16, SARA 

of 1986

*

Solid Waste Management 40 CFR 240-257/RCRA Subtitle D * *

Underground Storage Tanks 40 CFR part 280, RCRA Subtitle I *

National Pollutant Discharge 

Elimination System (NPDES)

CWA of 1990, 40 CFR 122-129 * * *

Confined Space Entry 29 CFR 1910.146 * * * *

Occupational Respiratory Protection 29 CFR 1926.58, 29 CFR 1910.134 * *

Occupational Exposures to Bloodborne 

Pathogens

29 CFR 1910.1030 * * * *

Storm Water Compliance 40 CFR 122-129, WPCA S 319 * *

Hazard Communication Standard 29 CFR 1910.1200 * * * *

Department of Transportation 49 CFR172.704 * * * *

ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES

C-22. It is the unit commander's duty to appoint an ECO and a Hazardous Waste 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appc.htm (12 of 16) [1/7/2002 1:40:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix C Environmental Awareness

Coordinator; the same person can serve in both positions, per AR 200-1. These 

appointments are made to ensure that environmental compliance occurs at the unit level. 

Appointed personnel:

● Should receive formal training and act as an advisor on environmental regulatory 

compliance during training, operations, and logistics functions.

● Will be the commander's eyes and ears for environmental matters, as the Safety 

Officer/NCO is for safety matters.

● Should function as the liaison between the unit and higher headquarters regarding 

environmental matters such as training requirements, equipment, or supplies that unit 

personnel need.

● Should inspect HM/HW accumulation sites, and ensures that soldiers handling these 

materials are properly trained.

● Ensure the unit's TSOP covers environmental considerations, conservation, natural 

resources, pollution prevention, HM/HW, and spill procedures.

● Support the Army's pollution prevention/recycling program.

● Report hazardous material and waste spills immediately.

● Conduct environmental self-assessments or internal environmental compliance 

assessments. 

● Meet with installation environmental points of contact periodically to remain updated 

on any regulatory changes.

SECTION IV — ENVIRONMENTAL RISK MANAGEMENT

ENVIRONMENTAL RISK MANAGEMENT

C-23. Leaders at all levels are required to make timely and appropriate decisions regarding 

the environment. Failure to do so may negatively impact the training environment, which 

could then lead to personal liability of individuals directly involved, the chain of command, 

and the US Army. All leaders must properly manage, assess, and reduce environmental 

risks. 

THE FIVE-STEP PROCESS

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appc.htm (13 of 16) [1/7/2002 1:40:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix C Environmental Awareness

C-24. Risk management is a five-step process designed to provide leaders a methodology 

for the identification, assessment, control, and evaluation of environmental risks. The 

following is a summary of these steps from FM 20-400, Military Environmental Protection,

and FM 100-14, Risk Management. Refer to these manuals for detailed information.

STEP 1. IDENTIFY HAZARDS

C-25. Environmental hazards include all activities that may pollute, create negative noiserelated effects, degrade archeological/cultural resources, or negatively affect threatened or 

endangered species habitats. A listing of common environmental hazards is located in Table 

C-3.

Table C-3. Common Environmental Hazards

MEDIA AREA COMMON ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS

Air Equipment exhaust, convoy dust, range fires, open-air burning, pyrotechnics, 

smoke pots/grenades, part-washer emissions, paint emissions, air-conditioner or 

refrigeration CFCs, HM/HW release, pesticides, other toxic industrial chemicals or 

material.

Archeological and 

cultural

Maneuvering and digging in sensitive areas, disturbing or removing artifacts, 

demolition/munitions effects, HM/HW spills.

Noise Low-flying aircraft (helicopters), demolition/munitions effects, nighttime 

operations, operations near post/camp boundaries and civilian populations, vehicle 

convoys/maneuvers, large-scale exercises.

Threatened and/or 

endangered 

species

Maneuvering in sensitive areas, demolition/munitions effects, especially during 

breeding seasons, disturbing habitat or individual species, HM/HW spills or 

releases, poor field sanitation, improper cutting of vegetation, damage to coral 

reefs, 

Soil (terrain) Over use of maneuver areas, demolition/munitions effects, range fires, poor field 

sanitation, poor maneuver-damage control, erosion, troop construction effect, 

refueling operations, HM/HW spills, maneuver in ecologically sensitive areas such 

as wetlands and tundra, industrial waste runoff, pesticide accumulation in soil, 

vegetation, and terrestrial organisms.

Water Refueling operations near water sources, HM/HW spills, erosion and unchecked 

drainage, amphibious/water-crossing operations, troop construction effects, poor 

field sanitation, washing vehicles at unapproved sites.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appc.htm (14 of 16) [1/7/2002 1:40:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix C Environmental Awareness

STEP 2. ASSESS ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS TO DETERMINE RISK

C-26. A risk assessment is a tool used for evaluating the most pressing or most hazardous 

potential environmental damage. It considers two factors; probability, how often a hazard is 

likely to occur; and severity, the effect in degrees a hazard will have on personnel, 

equipment, environment, and mission. Unit leaders should conduct risk assessments before 

conducting any training, operations, or logistical activities that are not addressed in the 

TSOP, or when conditions differ significantly from the TSOP. Complete information on 

environmental risk assessments can be obtained from FM 20-400.

STEP 3. DEVELOP CONTROLS AND MAKE A DECISION

C-27. This step is designed to reduce the probability or severity of each hazard, which in 

turn lowers the overall risk. Control types fall in the categories of educational, physical, or 

avoidance. Table C-4 outlines examples of environmental controls.

Table C-4. Environmental-related Controls

CONTROL 

TYPE

ENVIRONMENTAL-RELATED EXAMPLES

Educational ● Conduct unit environmental-awareness training.

● Conduct an environmental briefing before deployment.

● Perform tasks to environmental standards.

● Review environmental considerations in AARs.

● Read unit's environmental TSOPs and policies. 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appc.htm (15 of 16) [1/7/2002 1:40:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Appendix C Environmental Awareness

Physical ● Provide spill-prevention equipment.

● Establish field satellite-accumulation site and procedures.

● Police field locations.

● Practice good field sanitation.

● Post signs and warnings for off-limit areas. 

Avoidance ● Maneuver around historical/cultural sites.

● Establish refueling and maintenance areas away from wetlands and 

drainage areas.

● Cross streams at approved sites.

● Prevent pollution.

● Limit noise in endangered and threatened species habitats. 

STEP 4. IMPLEMENT CONTROLS

C-28. Leaders must inform subordinates of risk-control measures, state how each control 

must be implemented, and assign responsibilities. They must also ensure these controls are 

in place prior to the operation. This is accomplished by using the before, during, and after

checklists and the environmental risk-assessment process. Examples of checklists can be 

obtained from TC 5-400, Unit Leaders' Handbook for Environmental Stewardship, or from 

the Field Artillery environmental handbook referenced in Section I, in order to determine 

the environmental considerations that may effect battalion training and operations.

STEP 5. SUPERVISE AND EVALUATE

C-29. Leaders should monitor controls to ensure effectiveness and whether controls require 

modification. They should ensure the after action review process includes an evaluation of 

environmental-related hazards, controls, soldier performance, and leader supervision.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/appc.htm (16 of 16) [1/7/2002 1:40:01 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

RDL

Homepage

Table of

Contents

Document

Information

Download

Instructions

Glossary

ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

1SG first sergeant

A

AAG army artillery group

AATF air assault task force

ABCA Australia, Britain, Canada, America

ABCS Army Battle Command System

ABF attack by fire

ACA airspace coordination area

ACE analysis and control element

ACP air control point/assault command post

ACR armored cavalry regiment

ACUS Area Common-User System

AD air defense

AD/LOG Administration / Logistics

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (1 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

ADA air defense artillery

ADAM area denial artillery munition

ADAPT adapter

ADDS Army Data Distribution System

admin/log administrative/logistics (net)

AFATDS Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System

AG adjutant general

AGM attack guidance matrix

AH attack helicopter

AIRCOR air corridor

ALO air liaison officer

ALOC administration and logistic operations center

alt altitude

AM amplitude modulated

AMC at my command

ammo ammunition

AMDPCS Air-Missile Defense Planning and Control System

ANCD automated net control device

AO area of operations

AOA avenue of approach

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (2 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

AOF azimuth of fire

AOI area of interest

AOL azimuth of lay

AP antipersonnel

APAM antipersonnel , antimaterial

APICM antipersonnel improved conventional munitions

App Appendix

AR army regulation

ARPA Archeological Resources Protection Act

ARTEP Army Training and Evaluation Program

arty artillery

ASAS All-Source Analysis System

ASL authorized stockage list

ASP ammunition supply point

ASR available supply rate

ATCCS Army Tactical Command and Control System

atch attached

ATHS Airborne Target Hand-Over System

ATI artillery target intelligence

ATIZ artillery target intelligence zone

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (3 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

ATP ammunition transfer point

AUTL army universal task list

avn aviation 

AXO assistant executive officer

AZ azimuth 

B

BAO battalion ammunition officer

BAS battalion aid station

BAT "brilliant" anti-armor technology

BC battery commander

BCS battery computer system

BDA battle damage assessment

BDAR battlefield damage assessment and repair

Bde brigade

BDO battle dress overgarment

BER bit error rate

BFACS battlefield functional area control system

BM battle management

BMA battery minefield angle

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (4 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

BMO battalion maintenance officer

BMT battalion maintenance technician

BN battalion

BOS battlefield operating system

BP battle position

BRAG brigade artillery group

BSA brigade support area

BSOC battalion support operations center

btry battery

C 

C-E communications-electronics

C2 command and control

C2V command and control vehicle

C3 command, control and communications

C4I command, control, communications, computers, and intelligence

CAA combined arms army (threat)

CAR combined arms rehearsal

CAS close air support

cat category 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (5 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

CATF commander amphibious task force

Cav cavalry

CBT combat 

CCIR commander’s critical information requirements

CCCP chemical casualty collection point

CCL combat-configured load

CCP casualty collection point

CDR commander

CDS container delivery system

CEP circular error probability

CERCLA Comprehensive Environmental Response and Liability Act

CESO communications-electronics staff officer

CF command/fire direction (net)

CFC chlorofluorocarbon

CFFZ call-for-fire zone

CFL coordinated fire line

CFR Code of Federal Regulations

CFZ critical friendly zone

cGy centigray

Ch chief

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (6 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

CHEMO chemical officer

cmd command (net)

CNR combat net radio

CO company 

COA course of action

COCOM combatant command

COE common operating environment

COLT combat observation/lasing team

Commo communications

COMSEC communications security

CONOPS continuity of operations

coord coordinate 

COP common operational picture; command observation post

Corps Arty corps artillery

COSCOM corps support command

CP command post

Cphd Copperhead

CPREP counter preparations

CPU central processing unit

CROP container roll-in/roll-out platform

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (7 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

CRP combat reconnaissance patrol

CSA corps storage area

CSB common sensor boundary; corps support battalion

CSG corps support group

CSM command sergeant major

CSR controlled supply rate

CSS combat service support

CSSCS Combat Service Support Control System

CWA Clean Water Act

CZ censor zones

D

D data 

DA Department of Army

DAG division artillery group

D3A decide, detect, deliver, and assess

DAO division ammunition officer

DF direction finding

DISCOM division support command

Div division

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (8 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

DIVARTY division artillery

DLA Defense Logistics Agency

DMMC division materiel management center

DNE do not engage

DNL do not load

DNVT digital nonsecure voice telephone

DOD Department of Defense

DODIC Department of Defense Identification Code

DofS days of supply

DOT Department of Transportation

DP dual purpose/decision point

DPICM dual-purpose improved conventional munition

DRMO defense reutilization marketing office

DS direct support

DSA division support area

DSB division support battalion

DST decision support template

DSVT digital secure voice terminal

DTG date-time group

DZ drop zone

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (9 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

E

EA engagement area

EAC echelons above corps

EAD enemy air defense

ECCM electronic counter-countermeasures

ECO environmental compliance officer

ECOA enemy course of action

ED emergency destruction

EEFI essential elements of friendly information

EFAT essential field artillery task

EFC equivalent full charge

EFST essential fire support task

ELINT electronic intelligence

ENG engineer 

EOD explosive ordnance disposal

EOL end of the orienting line

EOM end of mission

EPA Environmental Protection Act

EPCRA Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-know Act

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (10 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

EPE estimated position error

EPLRS Enhanced Position Location Reporting System

EPW enemy prisoners of war

ESA Endangered Species Act

EVENTEMP event template

EW electronic warfare

EXTAL extra time allowance

F

F full-time subscriber

FA field artillery

FADAC field artillery digital automatic computer

FAIO field artillery intelligence officer

FASCAM family of scatterable mines

FASM field artillery support matrix

FASP field artillery support plan

FATDS field artillery tactical data systems

fax facsimile

FBCB2 Force XXI Battle Command, Brigade and Below

FCE fire control element

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (11 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

FCL final coordination line

FCS fire control system

FD fire direction

FDC fire direction center

FDO fire direction officer

FDS fire direction system

FEBA forward edge of the battle area

FED forward entry device

FFA free-fire area

FFE fire for effect

FFIR friendly force information requirements

FIFRA Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, And Rodenticide Act

FIST fire support team

FIST-V fire support team-vehicle

FLD field 

FLE forward logistical element

FLOT forward line of own troops

FM field manual; frequency modulation

FO forward observer

FOM figure of merit

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (12 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

FOS forward observer software

FPF final protective fires

FRAGO fragmentary order

FS fire support

FSB forward support battalion

FSCC fire support coordination center

FSCL fire support coordination line

FSCM fire support coordinating measure

FSCOORD fire support coordinator

FSE fire support element

FSEM fire support execution matrix

FSO fire support officer

FSP fire support plan

FST fire support terminal

FU fire unit

G

GCCS-A Global Command and Control System-Army

G-VLLD ground/vehicle laser locator designator

GDU gun display unit

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (13 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

GMET graphical munitions effectiveness tables

GPS Global Positioning System

GS general support

GSM ground station module

GSR general support reinforcing

GTA graphical training aid

GTD guards tank division (threat)

H

HA hide area

HARMM Halt all movement. 

Avoid disturbing the mine(s). 

Report the location of the mine(s). 

Mark the location. 

Move out of the area. 

HAZWOPER hazardous waste operation

HC smoke, hexachloroethane

HE high explosive

HEMTT heavy-expanded mobility tactical truck

HET heavy equipment transporter

HF high frequency

HHB headquarters and headquarters battery

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (14 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

HHSB headquarters, headquarters, and service battery

HI high

HIMARS High Mobility Artillery Rocket System

HM/HW hazardous material / hazardous waste

HMMWV high-mobility, multipurpose wheeled vehicle

HN host nation

HOB height of burst

HPT high-payoff target

HPTL high-payoff target list

HQ headquarters

HTU hand-held terminal unit

HUMINT human intelligence

HVT high-value target

I

IAW in accordance with

ICE individual chemical equipment

ICM improved conventional munition

ICP intelligence collection plan

ID infantry division

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (15 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

ID (m) infantry division (mechanized)

IEW intelligence and electronic warfare

IFSAS Initial Fire Support Automation System

ILLUM illumination

Inf infantry

Intel intelligence 

INTSUM intelligence summary

IPB intelligence preparation of the battlefield

IR information requirements; infrared

IRAP improved rocket-assisted projectile

ITV intransit visibility 

J

JAAT joint air attack team

JMEM joint munition effects manual

JP joint publication

JSEAD joint suppression of enemy air defense

JSTARS Joint Surveillance and Target Attack Radar System

JTF joint task force

JTIDS Joint Tactical Information Distribution System

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (16 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

JTOC jump tactical operations center

K 

km kilometer

kph km per hour

L

LAN local area network

LBE load bearing equipment

LCU lightweight computer unit

LD line of departure

LDF lightweight digital facsimile

LFC landing force commander

LID light infantry division

LNO liaison officer

Lo low

LOC lines of communication

LOGPAC logistics package

LP listening post

LPB logistics preparation of the battlefield

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (17 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

LRP logistics release point

LRSU long-range surveillance unit

LTACFIRE Lightweight Tactical Fire Direction System

LTD laser target designation

LZ landing zone

M

M medium

MAGTF marine air ground task force

maint maintenance 

man maneuver 

max maximum 

MBA main battle area

MCO movement control officer

MCOO modified combined obstacle overlay

MCS Maneuver Control System

MDMP military decision-making process

MDS Meteorological Data System

met meteorology

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (18 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

METT-TC mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops, time available, and civil 

considerations

MFR mission fired report

MHE material handling equipment

MI military intelligence

MIBN motorized infantry battalion

MIBR motorized infantry brigade

MLRS Multiple-Launch Rocket System 

mm millimeter

MMS metrological measuring set

Mod modification 

MOPP mission-oriented protective posture

MOS military occupational specialty

MOUT military operations in urban terrain

MP military police

MRB motorized rifle battalion

MRE meal, ready to eat

MRL multiple rocket launcher

MRR motorized rifle regiment

MSB main support battalion

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (19 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

MSD minimum safe distance; medium screen display

MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet

MSE mobile subscriber equipment

msn mission 

MSR main supply route

MSRT mobile subscriber radio telephone

MST maintenance support team

MSU mutual support units

MTLR moving-target-locating-radar

MTO message to observer

MTOE modified table of organization and equipment

MTP mission training plan

MULE modular universal laser equipment

mvr maneuver

N

NA not applicable

NAGPRA Native American Graves Protection and Repatriation Act

NAI named area of interest

NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (20 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

NBC nuclear, biological, and chemical

N/CH nuclear/chemical

NCO noncommissioned officer

NCOIC noncommissioned officer in charge

NCS net control station

NEPA National Environmental Policy Act

NET new equipment training

NFA no fire area

NFL no fire line

NG National Guard

NGF naval gunfire

NGLO naval gunfire liaison officer

NHPA national historic preservation act

NLT not-later-than

NPDES National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System

NSFS naval surface fire support

O

O&I operations and intelligence

o/o on order

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (21 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

OB/OD open burning / open detonation

OB order of battle

OEBGO Overseas Environmental Baseline Guidance Document

OEG operation exposure guidance

OH observation helicopter

OIC officer in charge

OP observation post

OPAREA operations area

OPCOM operational command

OPCON operational control

OPFAC operational facility

OPFOR opposing forces

OPLAN operation plan

OPORD operation order

Ops operations

OPSEC operations security

ops/F operations/fire (net)

ops/intel operations/intelligence (net)

Org organization

OS orienting station

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (22 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

OT observer target

OTG observer-target-gun

P

P&A personnel and administration

PA physician’s assistant; position areas

PAC personnel and administration center

PADS Position And Azimuth Determining System

PCC pre-combat checks

PCI pre-combat inspections

PD point detonating

PEO peace enforcement operations 

PERINTREP periodic intelligence reports

PI probability of incapacitation

PIR priority intelligence requirements

PKO peacekeeping operations

PL phase line

PLGR precision lightweight GPS receiver

PLL prescribed load list

PLS Palletized Load System

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (23 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

PLT platoon 

PMCS preventive maintenance checks and services

POC platoon operations center

POD port of debarkation

POF priority of fires

POL petroleum, oils, and lubricants

POR preparation of replacements

POS priority of survey

PREP preparations 

PRF pulse repetition frequency

PRI priority

PRI TGT priority targets

PSNCO personnel staff noncommissioned officer

PST pass time

PTMO prepare to march order

PX post exchange

PZ pickup zones

Q

QSTAG Quadripartite Standardization Agreement

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (24 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:09 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

R

R reinforcing

R&S reconnaissance and surveillance

R3P rearm, refuel, resupply point

R3SP rearm, refuel, resupply, survey point

RAAMS Remote Antiarmor Mine System

RAG regimental artillery group

RAP rocket-assisted projectile

RAU radio access unit

RCRA Resource Conservation Recovery Act

RCT road clearance time

RDF radio direction finding

RDO radar deployment order

REC radio-electronic combat

Recon reconnaissance

ref reference

Regt regiment

retrans retransmission

RF radio frequency

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (25 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:10 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

RFA restrictive fire area

RFAF request for additional fires

RFI request for information

RFL restrictive fire line

ROE rules of engagement

ROM rate of march; refuel on the move

ROZ restricted operating zones

RP release point

RPV remotely piloted vehicles

RRP replacement receiving point

RSOP reconnaissance, selection, and occupation of position

RSR required supply rate

RSTA reconnaissance, surveillance, and target acquisition

RT receiver transmitter

S

S&S stability and support

S&T supply and transportation

SACC supporting arms coordination center

SARA Superfund Amendment Reauthorization Act

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (26 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:10 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

SB service battery

SCATMINE scatterable mines

SCP survey control point

SD self-destruct

SEAD suppression of enemy air defenses

SEN small extension node

SFC sergeant first class

SGT sergeant

SHELREP shelling report

SIGINT signal intelligence

SIGSEC signals security

SIMO simultaneous observation

SINCGARS single-channel ground and airborne radio system

SITEMP situation template

SITREP situation report

SMK smoke

SOI signal operating instructions

SOP standard operating procedure

SOSR suppress, obscure, secure, reduce

SP self-propelled; start point; strong points

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (27 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:10 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

SPC specialist (rank)

SPCE survey, planning, and control elements

SPL support platoon leader

SPLL self-propelled launcher-loader

spt support 

Sqn squadron

SR self-registering

SSB single sideband

SSG staff sergeant

STANAG Standardization Agreement

STON short-ton

survl surveillance 

SVC service

Sys system

T

T towed

TA target acquisition

TAB target acquisition battery

TAC tactical action center

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (28 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:10 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

TACAIR tactical air

TACFIRE Tactical Fire Direction System

TACON tactical control

TACSAT tactical satellite

TAI targeted area of interest

TAIS Tactical Airspace Information System

TAMMS The Army Maintenance Management System

TAV total asset visibility

TBD to-be-determined

TBM theater ballistic missiles

TBP to be published

TC traffic control; training circular

TCIM tactical communications interface module

TCF tactical combat force

TD tank division

TDA target damage assessment; table of distribution and allowances

TDIS time distance

TDMA time division multiple access

TF task force

TFC tactical fire control

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (29 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:10 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

Tgt target

TLE target location error

TM technical manual

TMD theater missile defense

TMT total march time

TOC tactical operations center

TOE table of organization and equipment

TOT time-on-target

TOW tube-launched, optically tracked wire-guided missile

TPL time phase line

TRADOC Training and Doctrine Command

TRI-TAC Tri-Services Tactical

TSA theater storage area

TSDF treatment storage and disposal facilities

TSM target selection matrix

TSOP tactical standing operating procedures

TSS target selection standards

TTP tactics, techniques and procedures

TVA target value analysis

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (30 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:10 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

U

UAV unmanned aerial vehicle

UBL unit basic load

UHF ultrahigh frequency

UK United Kingdom

UMCP unit maintenance collection point

UMT unit ministry team

UNAAF Unified Action Armed Forces

US United States

USAF United States Air Force

USAFAS US Army Field Artillery School

USMC United States Marine Corps

UTM universal transverse mercator

V

V voice (net)

VE velocity error

VEH vehicle

VFMED variable format message entry device

VHF very high frequency

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (31 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:10 PM]
FM3-09.21 Glossary

VT variable time

W

W wire connection

WAN wide area network

WARNO warning order

WGS-84 World Geodetic System 84 (a map datum)

WLR weapons locating radar

WP white phosphorous

WSM weapon system manager

WSRO weapon system replacement operations

X

X subscriber 

XO executive officer

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/gloss.htm (32 of 32) [1/7/2002 1:40:10 PM]
FM3-09.21 Bibliography

RDL

Homepage

Table of

Contents

Document

Information

Download

Instructions

Bibliography

AR 200-1. Environmental Protection and Enhancement. 21 February 1997.

AR 200-2. Environmental Effects of Army Actions. 23 December 1988.

AR 200-3. Natural Resources-Land, Forest and Wildlife Management. 28 February 1995 

AR 200-4. Cultural Resources Management. 1 October 1998. 

AR 310-25. Dictionary of United States Army Terms. 15 October 1983.

AR 310-50. Authorized Abbreviations, Brevity Codes, and Acronyms. 15 November 1985.

ARTEP 6-115-MTP. Mission Training Plan for Field Artillery Cannon Battalion Command and Staff 

Section, Headquarters and Headquarters Battery, and Service Battery. 1 April 2000.

ARTEP 6-037-30-MTP. Mission Training Plan for the Consolidated Cannon Battery, M102, M119, 

M198, M109A5, M109A6. 1 April 2000.

ARTEP 6-303-30-MTP. Mission Training Plan for the Target Acquisition Battery and the Corps Target 

Acquisition Detachment. 1 April 2000.

ARTEP 6-395-MTP. Mission Training Plan for the Field Artillery Multiple Launch Rocket System 

Battalion. Command and Staff Section and Headquarters and Service Battery. 1 April 2000.

ARTEP 6-397-30-MTP. Mission Training Plan for the Multiple Launch Rocket System Battery. 15 

September 1997.

DA Form 581. Request for Issue and Turn-in of Ammunition. July 1999.

DA Form 1594. Daily Staff Journal or Duty Officer’s Log. November 1962.

DA Form 2028. Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms. 1 February 1974.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/bib.htm (1 of 8) [1/7/2002 1:40:13 PM]
FM3-09.21 Bibliography

DA Form 2185R. Artillery Counterfire Information.*

DA Form 2406. Materiel Condition Status Report. April 1993.

DA Form 4655-R. Target List Work Sheet. January 1983.

DA Form 4656-R. Scheduling Work Sheet. January 1983.

DA Form 4695. Target Card.*

DA Form 5032-R. Field Artillery Delivered Minefield Planning Sheet. January 1982.

DA Form 5368-R. Quick Fire Plan. December 1984.

FM 3-09.70 (6-70). Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for M109A6 Howitzer (Paladin) Operations. 1 

August 2000.

FM 3-3. Chemical and Biological Contamination Avoidance. 16 November 1992.

FM 3-3-1. Nuclear Contamination Avoidance. 9 September 1994.

FM 3-50. Smoke Operations. 4 December 1990.

FM 3-100. Chemical Operations Principles and Fundamentals. 8 May 1996. 

FM 5-103. Survivability. 10 June 1985.

FM 6-2. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Survey. 23 September 1993. Change 1. 

16 October 1996. 

FM 6-15. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Meteorology. August 1997.

FM 6-20. Fire Support in the Airland Battle. 17 May 1988.

FM 6-20-2. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Corps Artillery, Division Artillery, and Field 

Artillery Brigade Operations. 7 January 1993.

FM 6-20-2. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Corps Artillery, Division Artillery, and Field 

Artillery Brigade Operations (Approved Final Draft). 7 September 2000.*

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/bib.htm (2 of 8) [1/7/2002 1:40:13 PM]
FM3-09.21 Bibliography

FM 6-20-10. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for The Targeting Process. 8 May 1996.

FM 6-20-30. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Corps and Division Operations. 

18 October 1989.

FM 6-20-30. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Division Operations (DRAG 

Draft). 5 November 1999.*

FM 6-20-40. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Brigade Operations (Heavy). 5 

January 1990.

FM 6-20-40. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Brigade Operations (Initial 

Draft). 15 June 1999.

FM 6-20-50. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Brigade Operations (Light). 5 

January 1990.

FM 6-30. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Observed Fire. 16 July 1991.

FM 6-40. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Manual Gunnery. 23 April 1996.

FM 6-50. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Field Artillery Cannon Battery. 23 December 

1996.

FM 6-60. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) Operations. 

23 April 1996.

FM 6-71. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for the Combined Arms Commander. 29 

September 1994.

FM 6-121. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Target Acquisition. 25 September 

1990.

FM 6-121. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Target Acquisition (Final Draft).*

FM 7-20. The Infantry Battalion. 6 April 1992.

FM 7-30. The Infantry Brigade. 3 October 1995. 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/bib.htm (3 of 8) [1/7/2002 1:40:13 PM]
FM3-09.21 Bibliography

FM 9-6. Munitions Support in Theater of Operations. 20 March 1998.

FM 9-38. Conventional Ammunition Unit Operations. 2 July 1993.

FM 11-30. MSE Communications in the Corps/Division. 27 February 1991. 

FM 11-50. Combat Communications within the Division (Heavy and Light). 4 April 1991.

FM 19-25. Military Police Traffic Operations. 30 September 1977.

FM 19-40. Enemy Prisoners of War, Civilian Internees, and Detained Persons. 27 February 1976.

FM 20-3. Camouflage, Concealment, and Decoys. 30 August 1999.

FM 21-10. Field Hygiene and Sanitation. 21 June 2000.

FM 21-10-1. Unit Field Sanitation Team. 11 October 1989.

FM 21-26. Map Reading and Land Navigation. 7 May 1993.

FM 21-60. Visual Signals. 30 September 1987.

FM 24-7. Tactical Local Area Network (LAN) Management. 8 October 1999.

FM 24-18. Tactical Single-Channel Radio Communications Techniques. 30 September 1987. 

FM 25-5. Training for Mobilization and War. 25 January 1985.

FM 27-10. The Law of Land Warfare. 18 July 1956.

FM 31-70. Basic Cold Weather Manual. 12 April 1968.

FM 31-71. Northern Operations. 21 June 1971.

FM 34-8. Combat Commander’s Handbook on Intelligence. 28 September 1992.

FM 34-8-2. Intelligence Officer’s Handbook. 1 May 1998.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/bib.htm (4 of 8) [1/7/2002 1:40:13 PM]
FM3-09.21 Bibliography

FM 34-80. Brigade and Battalion Intelligence and Electronic Warfare Operations. 15 April 1986.

FM 34-130. Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield. 8 July 1994.

FM 55-9. Unit Air Movement Planning. 5 April 1993.

FM 55-10. Movement Control. 9 February 1999.

FM 55-15. Transportation Reference Data. 27 October 1997.

FM 55-30. Army Motor Transport Units and Operations. 27 June 1997. Change 1. 15 September 1999.

FM 63-2. Division Support Command, Armored, Infantry, and Mechanized Infantry Division. 20 May 

1991.

FM 63-2-1. Division Support Command, Light Infantry, Airborne, and Air Assault Division. 16 

November 1992.

FM 63-2-2. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Division Support Command (Digitized), (Final 

Draft). 30 November 1999.

FM 63-21. Main Support Battalion. 7 August 1990. 

FM 71-2. The Tank and Mechanized Infantry Battalion Task Force. 27 September 1988. 

FM 71-3. The Armored and Mechanized Infantry Brigade. 8 January 1996.

FM 71-100. Division Operations. 28 August 1996.

FM 71-123. Tactics and Techniques For Combined Arms Heavy Forces: Armored Brigade, Battalion 

Task Force, and Company Team. 30 September 1992. 

FM 90-3. Desert Operations. 24 August 1993.

FM 90-4. Air Assault Operations. 16 March 1987.

FM 90-5. Jungle Operations. 16 August 1982.

FM 90-8. Counterguerrilla Operations. 29 August 1986.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/bib.htm (5 of 8) [1/7/2002 1:40:13 PM]
FM3-09.21 Bibliography

FM 90-10. Military Operations on Urbanized Terrain (MOUT). 15 August 1979.

FM 90-13. River Crossing Operations. 26 January 1998.

FM 90-13-1. Combined Arms Breaching Operations. 28 February 1991. 

FM 90-26. Airborne Operations. 18 December 1990.

FM 100-5. Operations. 14 June 1993.

FM 100-9. Reconstitution. 13 January 1992.

FM 100-10. Combat Service Support. 3 October 1995.

FM 100-15. Corps Operations. 29 October 1996.

FM 100-17. Mobilization, Deployment, Redeployment, Demobilization. 28 October 1992.

FM 100-17-1. Army Pre-Positioned Afloat Operations. 27 July 1996.

FM 100-17-2. Army Pre-Positioned Land. 16 February 1999.

FM 100-17-3. Reception, Staging, Onward Movement, and Integration. 17 March 1999.

FM 100-20. Military Operations in Low Intensity Conflict. 5 December 1990.

FM 100-63. Infantry-Based Opposing Force Organization Guide. 18 April 1996.

FM 101-5. Staff Organizations and Operations. 31 May 1997.

FM 101-5-1. Operational Terms and Symbols. 31 September 1997.

FM 101-5-2. U.S. Army Report and Message Formats. 29 June 1999.

FM 700-80. Logistics. 15 August 1985.

FM 701-58. Planning Logistics Support for Military Operations. 27 May 1987.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/bib.htm (6 of 8) [1/7/2002 1:40:13 PM]
FM3-09.21 Bibliography

JP 0-2. Unified Action Armed Forces (UNAAF). 24 November 1995.

JP 1-02. DOD Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms. 10 January 2000.

JP 3-0. Doctrine for Joint Operations. 1 February 1995.

JP 3-02. Joint Doctrine for Amphibious Operations. 8 October 1992.

ST 6-1-2. Lightweight Computer Unit (LCU) for Light Tactical Fire Direction System (LTACFIRE) and 

Initial Fire Support Automation System (IFSAS). 28 June 1996.*

ST 6-3++. Tactics, Techniques, Procedures for the Advanced Field Artillery Data System (AFATDS) in 

Division XXI. 15 July 1997.*

ST 6-60-30. Tactics, Techniques, Procedures for The Army Tactical Missile System (Army TACMS) 

Family of Munitions (AFOM). 5 January 1998.*

ST 9-38-3. Combat-Configured Loads. 1 December 1992.

STANAG 2014/QSTAG 243/QSTAG 506. Operation Orders, Warning Orders, and 

Administrative/Logistics Orders. 26 May 1998/27 June 1978/7 August 1984.

STANAG 2031/QSTAG 515. Proforma for Artillery Fire Plan. 26 June 1985/ 5 October 1984.

STANAG 2041/QSTAG 520. Operation Orders, Tables and Graphs for Road Movement. 

STANAG 2082. Relief of Combat Troops. 24 July 1991. 

STANAG 2083. Commanders’ Guide on Nuclear Radiation Exposure of Groups. 24 June 1994.

STANAG 2099/QSTAG 531. Fire Coordination in Support of Land Forces. 4 November 1987/ 

September 1989.

STANAG 2103/QSTAG 187. Reporting Nuclear Detonations, Biological, and Chemical Attacks, and 

Predicting and Warning of Associated Hazards and Hazard Areas. 7 September 1995/21 May 1998.

STANAG 2104/QSTAG 189. Friendly Nuclear Strike Warning. 28 June 1995/August 1991.

STANAG 2128/QSTAG 435. Medical and Dental Supply Procedures. 21 November 1991/20 June 1984.

STANAG 2129/QSTAG 538. Identification of Land Forces on the Battlefield. 16 May 1989/15 January 

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/bib.htm (7 of 8) [1/7/2002 1:40:13 PM]
FM3-09.21 Bibliography

1981.

STANAG 2147/QSTAG 221. Target Numbering System. 3 March 1987/15 June 1987.

STANAG 2154/QSTAG 539. Regulations for Military Motor Vehicle Movement by Road.

STANAG 2887/QSTAG 217. Tactical Tasks and Responsibilities for Control of Artillery. 15 October 

1985/8 December 1981.

STANAG 2934. Artillery Procedures. 3 July 1996.

TB 44-46-1. Standard Characteristics for Transportation of Military Vehicles and Other 

Oversize/Overweight Equipment.

TB 55-46-1. Standard Characteristics (Dimensions, Weight, and Cube) for Transportability of Military 

Vehicles and Other Outsize/Overweight Equipment. 1 January 1998.

TM 43-0001-28. Army Ammunition Data Sheet for Artillery Munitions: Guns, Howitzers, Mortars, 

Recoilless Rifles, Grenade Launchers and Artillery Fuzes. 28 April 1994.

TRADOC PAM 350-12. Heavy Opposing Forces (OPFOR) Organization Guide. 15 September 1994.

TRADOC PAM 350-13. Light Opposing Forces (OPFOR) Organization Guide. 15 September 1994.

TRADOC PAM 350-14. Heavy Opposing Forces (OPFOR) Operational Art Handbook. 15 September 

1994.

TRADOC PAM 350-15. Light Opposing Forces (OPFOR) Operational Art Handbook. 15 September 

1994. 

TRADOC PAM 350-16. Heavy Opposing Forces (OPFOR) Tactical Handbook. 15 September 1994.

XST 6-20-30. Tactics, Techniques, Procedures for Fire Support for Digitized Division Operations. 31 

March 1999.*

XST 6-60. Experimental Forces (EXFOR) Special Text Division Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) 

Battalion Operations. 29 March 1999.*

*The special texts and draft publications are not available through the US Army Adjutant General 

Publication Center. They can be accessed via the Internet on the Field Artillery Training Command home 

page: (http://155.219.39.98/doctrine/wddfrm.htm)

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/bib.htm (8 of 8) [1/7/2002 1:40:13 PM]
FM 3-09.21 Authentication

RDL

Homepage

Table of

Contents

Document

Information

Download

Instructions

FM 3-09.21 (FM 6-20-1)

22 MARCH 2001

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

ERIC K. SHINSEKI

General, United States Army

Chief of Staff

Official:

Administrative Assistant to the

Secretary of the Army

 0116202

DISTRIBUTION:

Active Army, US Army Reserve, and Army National Guard: To be distributed in accordance with Initial 

Distribution Number 114392, requirements for FM 3-09.21.

http://www.adtdl.army.mil/cgi-bin/atdl.dll/fm/3-09.21/auth.htm [1/7/2002 1:40:17 PM]